<<

REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

The a Powerful Force for Climate Mitigation

Transformative innovation for a prosperous and low-carbon industry REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

TABLE OF CONTENT

PREFACE EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

Chapter 1. HOW THE CIRCULAR ECONOMY CAN STRENGTHEN INDUSTRY AND PROTECT THE CLIMATE

Chapter 2. – TOWARDS A CIRCULAR STEEL SYSTEM

Chapter 3. – FINDING A PLACE WITHIN A LOW-CARBON ECONOMY

Chapter 4. ALUMINIUM – REALISING THE POTENTIAL FOR

Chapter 5. MOBILITY – THE PROMISE OF A SHARED CAR SYSTEM

Chapter 6. BUILDINGS AND CEMENT – MORE VALUE FROM LESS MATERIALS

2 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE preface

There is intense debate about how to close the gap To our knowledge, this is the first attempt to quanti- between current climate policy and the long-term goal tatively address this issue across materials and value of the Paris Agreement: an economy with net zero emis- chains, and for the entire EU economy. As with any first sions. Within Europe, policy discussions and proposed effort, there are many uncertainties, and further ana- ‘roadmaps’ to date have focused mainly on increasing lysis will be needed. Still, our analysis shows that the energy efficiency and deploying low-carbon energy potential for emissions abatement is substantial, and sources. Both are crucial, but when it comes to industry, in many cases can be economically attractive. Indeed, a major source of emissions, they offer only a partial so- we believe that ‘materials efficiency’ deserves to be a lution. Additional strategies are needed to address the priority in discussions of industrial decarbonisation, just substantial process emissions from the production of as energy efficiency is a priority in discussions of trans- materials such as steel, cement, plastics and aluminium. forming the energy system. A more circular economy can reduce CO2 emissions, reduce the scale of the Most discussion has focussed on the supply side: the challenge of decarbonising materials production, and need to develop and deploy new industrial production contain the cost of achieving an industrial base compa- processes, turn to non-fossil feedstock and fuels, and tible with a low-carbon economy. use carbon capture and storage to offset any remaining emissions. What is mostly missing from climate and This project has been carried out by Material Eco- industrial debates is a discussion of the demand side: nomics, with the support of Climate-KIC, ClimateWorks, Can we make better use of the materials already produ- Ellen McArthur Foundation, Energy Transitions Commis- ced, and so reduce our need for new production? sion, European Climate Foundation, MAVA Foundation, and SITRA. The Steering Group has comprised Mari The concept of the ‘circular economy’ offers preci- Pantsar (SITRA), Janez Potočnik (International Resource sely this opportunity, through strategies such as re- Panel), Martin Porter (European Climate Foundation), circulating a larger share of materials, reducing Adair Turner (Energy Transitions Commission), and An- in production, lightweighting products and structures, ders Wijkman (Climate-KIC). Research guidance have extending the lifetimes of products, and deploying new been provided by Dr Jonathan Cullen and Prof. Frank business models based around sharing of cars, buil- Geels. The project team has included Anna Teiwik, dings, and more. Cornelia Jönsson, Stina Klingvall, and Unn Hellberg. Ma- terial Economics is extremely grateful for all the contri- This report takes a first step towards quantifying the butions of these organisations and individuals, as well potential for circular economy opportunities to reduce as many other researchers, policymakers, and business greenhouse gas emissions. It examines the key mate- representatives who have contributed their knowledge rials flows and value chains, identifies relevant circular and insight to this project. Partner organisations and economy approaches, and explores their cost-effective- their constituencies do not necessarily endorse all fin- ness. It also considers barriers that might stand in the dings or conclusions in this report. All remaining errors way of achieving a more circular economy, and policies and omissions are of course the responsibility of the and initiatives that could overcome them. authors.

Per-Anders Enkvist Per Klevnäs

3 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

executive summary

Industrial CO2 emissions are a major concern as Euro- The key conclusion is that a more circular economy pe tries to achieve the deep emission reductions required can make deep cuts to emissions from heavy industry: for its climate commitments. In the European Commis- in an ambitious scenario, as much as 296 million tonnes

sion’s ‘Roadmap 2050’, one-quarter of the CO2 emis- CO2 per year in the EU by 2050, out of 530 in total – and sions remaining mid-century were from industry, especi- some 3.6 billion tonnes per year globally. Demand-side ally from heavy industry producing basic materials. With measures thus can take us more than halfway to net-zero more ambitious targets after the Paris Agreement, the EU emissions from EU industry, and hold as much promise must now articulate how to combine net-zero emissions as those on the supply side. Moreover, they are often with a prosperous industrial base. economically attractive.

So far, discussions of industry emissions have focused Opportunities for more productive use of materials on the supply side: reducing the emissions from the produc- therefore deserve a central place in EU climate policy. tion of steel, cement, chemicals, etc. Far less attention has Much like improving energy efficiency is central to the been given to the demand side: how a more circular eco- EU’s efforts to achieve a low-carbon energy system, a nomy could reduce emissions through better use and more circular economy will be key to developing Europe-

of the materials that already exist in the economy. This study an industry while cutting its CO2 emissions. As industry aims to bridge that gap. It explores a broad range of opportu- associations and the European Commission consider nities for the four largest materials in terms of emissions (steel, new mid-century ‘roadmaps’ for industry, they should in- plastics, aluminium and cement) and two large use segments clude circular economy measures for cost-effective ways for these materials (passenger cars and buildings). to achieve deep emissions cuts.

4 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Demand-side measures thus can take us more than halfway to net-zero emissions from EU industry, and hold as much promise as those on the supply side. Moreover, they are often economically attractive.

5 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Demand-side opportunities could reduce EU industri- are wasted in construction. Another opportunity is to use al emissions by almost 300 Mt per year by 2050, or 56 more advanced materials and construction techniques, %, with attractive economics. These abatement oppor- such as high-strength steel that can cut materials use by tunities fall into three major categories: 30%. There also are opportunities to reduce over-speci- fication, such as the near 100% overuse of steel in buil- A. Materials recirculation opportunities (178 Mt per dings relative to what is strictly required to meet design year by 2050). The EU economy is accumulating large specifications. Further gains can be achieved by tailo- stocks of and plastics, and by 2050 could meet ring products better to specific uses; for example, to the a large share of its need for these materials by recircu- extent that fleets of shared cars can replace individual lating what has already been produced: 75% of steel, ownership (see below), many of the cars needed will be 50% of aluminium, and 56% of plastics (cement is less smaller, just big enough for a one- or two-passenger trip amenable to recycling, although it is possible to reuse in the city. Companies already have incentives to use the- some unreacted cement). Recirculating materials cuts se strategies to some extent, but some opportunities are

CO2 emissions and requires much less energy than new missed through split incentives in complex supply cha- production does. However, current practice is not set up ins. Many measures will become much more economic to facilitate these high recycling rates. An influx of new with greater digitalisation in the mobility and buildings materials is required both to replace metals and plas- value chains and other technological development now tics that are lost, and to compensate for downgrading underway. of quality. In some cases, metals are mixed or downg- raded because materials specialisation requires it, but C. New circular business models in mobility and there also are many cases where this could be avoided buildings, notably through sharing (62 Mt per year by or much reduced. For steel, the key is to ensure much 2050). This opportunity pivots on making much greater cleaner flows that allow for high-quality secon- use of vehicles and buildings, which together represent a dary steel, and less pollution of steel with ; for majority of European demand for steel, cement and alu- aluminium, smaller losses and less mixing of different minium. Currently, the utilisation of many of these assets alloys will be crucial. Mixing and downgrading effects is very low: about 2% for the average European car, and are particularly serious problems for plastics, making about 40% for European offices, even during office hours. a large share of used plastics literally worthless. This Sharing enables much more intensive use. For vehicles, study shows how 56% of plastics could be mechanically this in turn means that higher upfront costs of electric dri- recycled, with a focus on the five main types of vetrains, more advanced automation technology, or hig- that account for 70% of volumes. The aim must be to her-performance materials can be paid back over many move these to a tipping point where recycling is econo- more miles. In addition, professionally managed fleets of mically viable, driven by the inherent material value. For such higher-value cars are more economical to maintain, this, as with steel and aluminium, product design and reuse, remanufacture and recycle. Vehicle lifetimes, on end-of-life disassembly need to change to enable high- a per-kilometre basis, can thus increase drastically. The value recovery. result is a self-reinforcing loop of incentives for higher utilisation, lower-carbon energy, and less materials use. B. Product materials efficiency(56 Mt per year by In a circular scenario, the materials input to mobility falls 2050). These opportunities have in common that they by 75%. It also brings many other benefits, including a reduce the total materials input to key products. One much lower total cost of travel. Sharing models are taking strategy is to reduce the amount of materials that are root by themselves, but much more could be done to lost in production: for example, half the aluminium pro- accelerate their growth, and to find ways to resolve the duced each year does not reach the final product, but concerns that have arisen with some early iterations of becomes scrap, while some 15% of building materials such business models.

6 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Many of these abatement opportunities are economi- bon economy must be much more circular than today’s. cally attractive on their own terms, provided that we are While this study has focussed on Europe, an extrapola- willing to organise the mobility and real estate sectors tion to other world regions suggests that the measures somewhat differently in the future. Many others cost less identified could contribute 3.6 Gt CO2 per year to global than 50 EUR per tonne CO2 avoided, less than most other efforts to cut greenhouse gas emissions by 2050. The ways to reduce these emissions, including supply-side claim on the carbon budget could be reduced by 333 Gt measures for industry. Circularity is strongly aligned with by 2100. In this setting, the additional supply-side me- the digitalisation trend that is sweeping across industry; asures required start to look manageable, and a well- for example, digitalisation means it is ever cheaper to below 2 °C objective within reach. keep track of complex supply chains and material flows, optimise sharing business models, and automate mate- Achieving these opportunities is doable and requires rials handling in construction. A more circular economy ‘energy efficiency-type’ interventions. Many of the abate- would have many other benefits as well, such as reduced ment opportunities identified are low-cost or even profita- geopolitical risks, local job creation, lower , ble, but are held back by multiple barriers. For example, and reduced water use. They therefore can contribute to product manufacturers lack incentives to enable high- several of the Sustainable Development Goals. value recycling several steps later in the value chain, and many externality advantages of sharing business models A more circular economy is indispensable for meeting are not accounted for. A higher carbon price would help global material needs without exceeding the available on the margin, but capturing a large share of the oppor- carbon budget. The Intergovernmental Panel on Climate tunities will require addressing those barriers directly. We Change has estimated a remaining ‘carbon budget’ for estimate that up to 70–80% of the abatement opportuni- this century of around 800 billion tonnes (Gt) CO2. This is ties are additional to ones already addressed by existing the amount of emissions that can be emitted until 2100 climate policy approaches. The situation resembles that for a good chance of keeping warming below 2°C – with for energy efficiency, where careful analysis of cost-effec- still less for the ‘well below 2°C’ target set by the Paris Ag- tive potentials and barriers has motivated a range of in- reement. This study estimates that, on current trends, ma- terventions, from aggregate efficiency targets to product terials production alone would result in more than 900 Gt standards and labelling schemes. Many of the circularity of emissions. Energy efficiency and low carbon energy will measures are similarly cost-effective, or could be once help, but do not resolve this dilemma: emissions add up to scaled-up, but require that barriers are overcome. The 650 Gt even with rapid adoption. This is because so much next task is to explore which policy instruments would be carbon is either built into the products themselves and most effective in pursuing different opportunities. then released at their end of life (plastics), or is inherent to the process chemistry of production (steel, cement). For The priority now should be to firmly embed circular context, note that 2°C scenarios typically ‘allocate’ about economy measures in the low-carbon agenda. This study

300 Gt CO2 to these sectors for the total world economy. is an early quantitative investigation into the low-carbon be- nefits of the circular economy. Much more work is required, Options to get to 300 Gt include a) aggressive sca- but we hope this report nonetheless shows the potential av- le-up of carbon capture and storage; b) the rapid intro- ailable for European industry. The most urgent priority now duction of radical process changes that are currently in is to build a solid knowledge base – and then to incorporate early development stages; and c) reducing demand for circular economy opportunities alongside low-carbon ener- primary materials through the range of circularity measu- gy supply, of transport and heat, and energy res discussed above. This report argues that it is almost efficiency as a core part of the transition to a low-carbon impossible to achieve the cut to 300 Gt without a major economy. A more circular economy could play a key role in use of category c) – hence our assertion that a low-car- helping Europe and the world to meet our climate targets.

7 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

How the circular economy can strengthen industry and protect the climate

Industrial CO2 emissions are a major total – and some 3.6 billion tonnes per year concern as Europe tries to achieve the deep globally. Demand-side measures thus hold emission reductions required for its climate as much promise as ones on the supply commitments. In the European Commissi- side. They are all but indispensable for the on’s ‘Roadmap 2050’, one quarter of CO2 joint objectives of economic development emissions remaining mid-century were from and action on climate change. Moreover, industry, and especially from heavy industry they are often economically attractive. producing basic materials. With more am- bitious targets after the Paris Agreement, Opportunities for more productive use of the EU must now articulate how to combine materials therefore deserve a central place net-zero emissions with a prosperous in- in EU climate policy. Much like improving dustrial base. Without strong action, emis- energy efficiency is central to the EU’s ef- sions from the global production of basic forts to achieve a low-carbon energy sys- materials alone risk exceeding the available tem, a more circular economy will be key to ‘carbon budget’. developing European industry while cutting its CO2 emissions. As industry associations This study shows how a more circular and the European Commission consider economy can make deep cuts to emissions new ‘roadmaps’ for industry mid-century, from heavy industry: in an ambitious sce- they should include circular economy me- nario, as much as 296 million tonnes CO2 asures for cost-effective ways to achieve per year in the EU by 2050, out of 530 Mt in deep emissions cuts.

8 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE ETT VÄRDEBESTÄNDIGT SVENSKT MATERIALSYSTEM / SAMMANFATTNING

9 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE MATERIALS & GHG EMISSIONS - why a 2°C economy must be circular Industry is a vital part of any modern economy. As to sharply reduce industrial emissions. The challenge for countries develop and their economies grow, they need policy-makers – and for industry – is how to curb emissions an ever-larger supply of basic industrial commodities and while continuing to meet our economies’ material needs. materials such as steel, cement, aluminium and plastics to build infrastructure, transport systems, buildings and Zero-carbon energy is a crucial part of the answer, but factories, and to produce and package consumer goods. it is not enough. This report focuses on another key step: Continued production of those materials helps fully deve- shifting to a more circular economy. Our analysis shows loped regions such as the EU to maintain their standard that circular approaches can reduce CO2 emissions from of living. A healthy industrial sector is also widely seen as materials production in the EU by almost 56% by 2050. crucial for economic competitiveness. For the EU, this represents a major opportunity to both narrow the emissions gap, and reassert itself as a trail- Yet industry is also a major source of greenhouse gas blazer and global leader in industry. A more circular eco- emissions: 40% of total emissions in 2014, and growing . If nomy also has large global potential: we estimate that it we are to achieve the Paris Agreement’s long-term goal of can close more than half the gap to industrial emissions a global economy with zero net GHG emissions, we need consistent with climate objectives.

World materials demand is set to increase 2- to 4-fold in this century Global heavy industry is growing fast. Steel production emissions from industry: steel, cement, aluminium and grew by 40% over last 10 years, with nearly 95% of this plastics. In each case, we developed a detailed sce- growth in China alone. Cement tripled in just a decade nario, based on long-term population and economic de- and global plastics demand is doubling about every 20 velopment, and using the state-of-the art approaches in years. Given the importance of these materials in modern published literature to examine how much of these four economies, it is no surprise that economic development materials would be needed in different world regions if around the world has kept increasing demand for these they develop similarly to today’s OECD economies. commodities. That growth is set to continue. Large parts of the world are still at the initial stages of urbanisation and The results of this analysis are striking: As shown in industrialisation. For example, the stock of steel in industri- Exhibit 1, steel and cement consumption could roughly alised countries is typically 10-14 tonnes per capita, but in double, aluminium triple, and plastics quadruple by the non-OECD countries, the average per capita stock is just 2 end of the century. Precisely how far and how fast de- tonnes. Similar gaps exist with other materials. mand would increase is uncertain, of course, but our fin- dings are in line with other existing research . The core To investigate how future materials demand could in- message is clear: in a business-as-usual development, fluence CO2 emissions, this study focusses on four primary materials demand would rise rapidly and conti- materials that, together, account for 75% of direct CO2 nue to do so for many decades.

10 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Exhibit 1 With current patterns of materials use, global demand for key materials will need to increase by a factor of 2 to 4 this century

STEEL PLASTICS BILLION TONNES STEEL PER YEAR BILLION TONNES PLASTICS PER YEAR

4,0 1,4

1,2 3,0 1,0 x 2.3 0,8 x 4.2 2,0 0,6

0,4 EXHIBIT 1 1,0 0,2

0,0 0,0 2015 2050 2100 2015 2050 2100

Steel is used in construction and infrastructure, transportation, industrial Plastics production has grown by 50% in the past decade, to just under 350 million machinery, and consumer products. Global steel production now stands at 1.6 tonnes per year. In advanced economies, packaging is a major use, followed by billion tonnes per year, having grown by 40% in the decade to 2015. China alone construction and automotive. In Europe, current annual use of plastics is about accounted for nearly 95% of this growth. Historically, steel stocks have tended to 100 kg/person, while North America is at about 140 kg/person. Our scenario FÄRGPALETT grow fast once countries reached incomes of around 5000 USD/person, then tapered assumes illustrates the outcome if all world regions converge to 120 kg/person. o at higher income levels, at 12–15 tonnes per person. Our scenario derives the demand resulting if all world regions were to follow this pattern, with convergence to OECD levels of steel stocks of 13 t per capita.

ALUMINIUM CEMENT MILLION TONNES ALUMINIUM PER YEAR BILLION TONNES CEMENT PER YEAR

300 8,0 7,0 250 6,0 200 x 1.7 x 3.4 5,0 150 4,0 3,0 100 2,0 50 1,0 0 0,0 2015 2050 2100 2015 2050 2100

Aluminium is used in packaging, buildings, automobiles and other sectors Global Global cement production has tripled in just a decade and currently stands at just production of primary aluminium now stands at around 60 million tonnes per over 4 billion tonnes per year. Cement production is closely related to construction year, with an additional 30 million tonnes of remelted aluminium. Stocks have activity and the build-out of infrastructure. Historically, it has peaked and then been growing strongly in all advanced economies, though they vary greatly: from declined as GDP per capita grows, but with big variations: China used more 600 kg per person in the United States, to 200–500 kg per person in European cement in three years than the United States did in an entire century. Existing countries. Our scenario assumes global convergence to 400 kg. scenarios reect these uncertainties, with some suggesting minimal further growth, and others predicting an explosion. Our scenario is in the middle, anticipating cement demand of just over 7 billion tonnes per year by 2100.

EXHIBIT 1.2 11

CUMULATIVE INDUSTRY CO2 EMISSIONS IN 2ºC SCENARIOS, 2015 – 2100 GT CO2

500 417

400 ~400 100

300 ~300

200

100

0 INDUSTRY SCENARIOS1 INDUSTRY TOTAL NON-MATERIALS MATERIALS 350 –500 Gt emissions from industry ~400 Gt is the median for ~100 Gt is required for other ~300 Gt remains available across ~20 scenarios available 2ºC scenarios industry (including manufact- for materials production CCS volumes are (extremely) high in uring, pulp & paper, chemicals, (cement, steel, plastics, 600 these scenarios, reaching 20-40 Gt etc.) assuming these reach net- aluminium) per year zero emissions by 2060

1 Scenarios that meet 2C target with >2/3 probability and which report industrial emissions Source: Material Economics analysis of AR5 database

5 STEEL PLASTICS BILLION TONNES STEEL PER YEAR BILLION TONNES PLASTICS PER YEAR

4,0 1,4

1,2 3,0 1,0 x 2.3 0,8 x 4.2 2,0 0,6

0,4 EXHIBIT 1 1,0 0,2

0,0 0,0 2015 2050 2100 2015 2050 2100

Steel is used in construction and infrastructure, transportation, industrial Plastics production has grown by 50% in the past decade, to just under 350 million machinery, and consumer products. Global steel production now stands at 1.6 tonnes per year. In advanced economies, packaging is a major use, followed by billion tonnes per year, having grown by 40% in the decade to 2015. China alone construction and automotive. In Europe, current annual use of plastics is about accounted for nearly 95% of this growth. Historically, steel stocks have tended to 100 kg/person, while North America is at about 140 kg/person. Our scenario FÄRGPALETT grow fast once countries reached incomes of around 5000 USD/person, then tapered assumes illustrates the outcome if all world regions converge to 120 kg/person. o at higher income levels, at 12–15 tonnes per person. Our scenario derives the demand resulting if all world regions were to followREVIEW this pattern, DRAFT with convergence – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE to OECD levels of steel stocks of 13 t per capita.

ALUMINIUM CEMENT MILLION TONNES ALUMINIUM PER YEAR BILLION TONNES CEMENT PER YEAR

300 8,0 7,0 250 Growth in materials use risks6,0 exhausting 200 x 1.7 x 3.4 5,0 the150 CO2 budget for climate objectives4,0 3,0 100 Given the large emissions from heavy industry, the rise until2,0 2100, and still less for a ‘well-below’ 2°C or 1.5°C target in materials use has major implications for CO2 emissions. as envisaged in the Paris Agreement. This budget must cover 50 1,0 Looking ahead, rapidly increasing materials production there- all major emissions from energy and industry: not just materi- 0 0,0 fore risk laying significant claim to the available ‘CO2 budget’ als production, but also power generation, transportation, hea- 2015 2050 2100 2015 2050 2100 – i.e., the total amount of CO2 that can be emitted until 2100, ting, appliances, manufacturing and more. In fact, the amount whileAluminium limiting isthe used increase in packaging, in buildings,global automobilestemperatures and other to sectorsa given Global ‘allocated’Global cement for productionproduction has tripledof the in four just a materialsdecade and currentlyis no more stands atthan just targetproduction (see box of primary below). aluminium For anow 2°C stands scenario, at around 60 the million remaining tonnes per aboutover 4300 billion Gt tonnes CO2, per as year. shown Cement inproduction Exhibit is 2. closely related to construction budgetyear, for with emissions an additional is 30 around million tonnes800 ofbillion remelted tonnes aluminium. (Gt) Stocksof CO2 have activity and the build-out of infrastructure. Historically, it has peaked and then been growing strongly in all advanced economies, though they vary greatly: from declined as GDP per capita grows, but with big variations: China used more 600 kg per person in the United States, to 200–500 kg per person in European cement in three years than the United States did in an entire century. Existing countries. Our scenario assumes global convergence to 400 kg. scenarios reect these uncertainties, with some suggesting minimal further growth, and others predicting an explosion. Our scenario is in the middle, anticipating cement demand of just over 7 billion tonnes per year by 2100.

Exhibit 2 Existing scenarios imply that at most 300 Gt of the remaining EXHIBIT 1.2 carbon budget could be devoted to the production of materials

CUMULATIVE INDUSTRY CO EMISSIONS IN 2ºC SCENARIOS, 2015 – 2100 2 GT CO2

500 417

400 ~400 100

300 ~300

200

100

0 INDUSTRY SCENARIOS1 INDUSTRY TOTAL NON-MATERIALS MATERIALS 350 –500 Gt emissions from industry ~400 Gt is the median for ~100 Gt is required for other ~300 Gt remains available across ~20 scenarios available 2ºC scenarios industry (including manufact- for materials production CCS volumes are (extremely) high in uring, pulp & paper, chemicals, (cement, steel, plastics, 600 these scenarios, reaching 20-40 Gt etc.) assuming these reach net- aluminium) per year zero emissions by 2060

1 Scenarios that meet 2C target with >2/3 probability and which report industrial emissions Source: Material Economics analysis of AR5 database

12

5 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

CLIMATE TARGETS AND CARBON BUDGETS

Greenhouse gases accumulate in the atmosphere, and as concentrations increase, they cause war- ming and disrupt the climate. Scientists have estimated roughly what temperature increase is asso- ciated with different CO2 concentrations, as well as the amount of CO2 emissions that would result in those concentrations, after accounting for natural carbon sinks and, in some scenarios, future ‘negative emissions’ due to carbon capture and storage (CCS) or other measures.

Subtract emissions to date, and the result is a ‘carbon budget’ for any given climate target – that is, how much can be emitted between now and the year 2100 if we are to keep warming below 2°C, for instance.

Several variables can affect the budget, including the target itself, the probability of achieving it (66% vs. 50%), the use of ‘negative emissions’, and the period covered by emissions to date. Sector-speci- fic budgets also reflect judgements about the share of remaining emissions that should be allocated to each sector.

In our analysis, we use scenarios with at least 66% change of meeting a 2 °C objective, which are those closest to the Paris Agreement’s objective of limiting global warming to ‘well below’ 2 °C.

13 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Our projections of materials demand, however, imply far To take this one step further, we also investigate how far larger emissions, as much as 918 Gt CO¬2. This is true it would help to switch the energy inputs to production to even though we assume in our calculations that the ‘best low-carbon sources. Even if this was completed by 2050, available technique’ is rapidly adopted to improve energy some 649 Gt of CO2 emissions would result by 2100, more and process efficiencies, and that current practices for -ma than twice the amount that would put materials production terials recycling continues (for example, even in the baseli- on a path consistent with climate objectives (Exhibit 3). As ne scenario, the emissions per tonne of steel falls by 40%, shown in Exhibit 4, the reason for the continued high emis- mostly because there is much more scrap-based steel pro- sions is that a large share result not from fuel combustion, duction). Still, current processes are intrinsically very car- but from chemical processes in the production of materials. bon-intensive, resulting in large emissions. Decarbonising energy is therefore not enough.

Exhibit 3 Materials production alone risks exceeding the total remaining carbon budget for a 2°C scenario

CO2 EMISSIONS AND CARBON BUDGET

EXHIBIT 1.3 BILLION TONNES CO2

CARBON BUDGET TO 2100 CO2 EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS PRODUCTION

918

800

649

300 14 % 14 %

2°C CARBON BUDGET CARBON BUDGET MATERIALS MATERIALS FOR INDUSTRY AVAILABLE FOR EMISSIONS EMISSIONS WITH ENERGY AND ENERGY MATERIALS WITH ENERGY EFFICIENCY AND EFFICIENCY ZERO-CARBON ENERGY

14

EXHIBIT 1.4 CUMULATIVE EMISSIONS, 2015 – 2100

GT CO2

BASELINE Best available energy e ciency fully implemented, 254 79 287 298 918 leading to 15-25% reduction in CO emissions SCENARIO 2

Emissions intensity reduced by half through full implementation of direct reduction, bio-based STEEL 100 feedstock, and carbon capture by 2050 Zero-carbon electricity for EAF production achieved by 2050

Half of production emissions eliminated. (e.g., PLASTICS 60 by using external, zero-carbon heat) by 2050 Emissions from embedded carbon remain (continued use of fossil feedstock)

38 Zero-carbon electricity used for electrolysis and ALUMINUM low-carbon energy used for alumina rening, both by 2050

All energy-related emissions (fuel, electricity, CEMENT 70 transport) eliminated by 2050

LOW-CARBON PRODUCTION 184 40 226 198 649 BY 2050

1Plastic emissions include emissions from production as well as embedded emissions CO2 EMISSIONS AND CARBON BUDGET

EXHIBIT 1.3 BILLION TONNES CO2

CARBON BUDGET TO 2100 CO2 EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS PRODUCTION

918

800

649

300 14 % 14 %

REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

2°C CARBON BUDGET CARBON BUDGET MATERIALS MATERIALS FOR INDUSTRY AVAILABLE FOR EMISSIONS EMISSIONS WITH ENERGY AND ENERGY MATERIALS Exhibit 4 WITH ENERGY EFFICIENCY AND EFFICIENCY ZERO-CARBON ENERGY Even with 100% low-carbon production by 2050, emissions from materials production exceed the available carbon budget

EXHIBIT 1.4 CUMULATIVE EMISSIONS, 2015 – 2100

GT CO2

BASELINE Best available energy e ciency fully implemented, 254 79 287 298 918 leading to 15-25% reduction in CO emissions SCENARIO 2

Emissions intensity reduced by half through full implementation of direct reduction, bio-based STEEL 100 feedstock, and carbon capture by 2050 Zero-carbon electricity for EAF production achieved by 2050

Half of production emissions eliminated. (e.g., PLASTICS 60 by using external, zero-carbon heat) by 2050 Emissions from embedded carbon remain (continued use of fossil feedstock)

38 Zero-carbon electricity used for electrolysis and ALUMINUM low-carbon energy used for alumina rening, both by 2050

All energy-related emissions (fuel, electricity, CEMENT 70 transport) eliminated by 2050

LOW-CARBON PRODUCTION 184 40 226 198 649 BY 2050

1Plastic emissions include emissions from production as well as embedded emissions

15 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

A MORE CIRCULAR ECONOM IS INDISPENSABLE FOR CLIMATE TARGETS Given that low-carbon energy will not solve the pro- to deploy the most expensive technologies. Circular app- blem of CO2 emissions from materials, other measures roaches already require some energy input, but less than are needed. On the supply side, a broad range of options new materials production, and they shift emissions away have been proposed, from hydrogen-based to from hard-to-abate, costly industrial processes, towards new routes for plastics synthesis, but all are at early stages activities that are much easier to decarbonise. Notably, of development. Another option that is often discussed is unlike today’s primary materials production, much of the to deploy carbon capture and storage (CCS) – which also circular economy can be powered by low-carbon electricity. lags far behind the levels of deployment required for a 2°C scenario . Both will likely be needed to bring industry in Circular economy strategies also have multiple ‘co-be- line with the goal of net-zero emissions, but they will not nefits’ beside CO2 reductions. By reducing the need for suffice. industrial processes associated with substantial air pollu- tion, for example (e.g. steel production using ), they Given the scale of the challenge of low-carbon produc- can reduce disease and mortality . By reducing the need tion, it is high time that climate policy looks not just at how for mining, they reduce soil and as well as materials are produced, but at ways to reduce demand for the destruction of ecosystems. By reducing the amount new materials. In the sections that follow, we show how a of plastic left to decay in and in waterways, they more circular economy could mean we get much more avoid poisoning wildlife and, through the food chain, hu- out of the materials we already have, making it possible mans. Many strategies would also create new jobs close to meet the needs of a modern economy with significantly to where materials are used, and some would make key lower levels of new primary materials production. services, such as transportation, more accessible and af- fordable. Thus, along with climate targets, a more circular Demand- and supply-side strategies can also be mu- economy would also make several Sustainable Develop- tually reinforcing, as is widely recognised in discussions ment Goals more achievable. of energy transitions. All low-carbon scenarios foresee a step-change in efficiency, so that essential services such Put together, these arguments make a compelling as mobility, thermal comfort, or mechanical power can be case for the circular economy not just as one option to achieved with much lower levels of energy input. Across consider in the quest to meet climate targets, but as an 2°C scenarios, energy efficiency improvements account invaluable part of the transformation we need for a pro- for some 40% of the emissions reductions. Reducing total sperous and sustainable future. energy demand also makes it easier to grow low-carbon energy sources to fully meet global needs, and to keep In the section that follows, we explore the potential for costs manageable. CO2 emission reductions. Then, in Section 3, we examine the economics of a more circular economy. We focus both The same happens with industry in a more circular analyses on the EU, an advanced economy with ambitious economy. The strategies we explore in this report effec- climate targets and a strong record in pioneering low-car- tively increase the ‘materials efficiency’ of the economy, bon technologies. The EU could spearhead many of these reducing the amount of new materials required. This nar- strategies and reap the benefits while showing the rest of rows the emissions gap that needs to be closed through the world how they, too, can reduce industrial emissions supply-side measures, buying time and reducing the need without compromising on economic development.

16 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Many strategies would also create new jobs close to where materials are used, and some would make key services, such as transportation, more accessible and affordable.

17 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

A MORE CIRCULAR ECONOMY CAN REDUCE EU INDUSTRIAL EMISSIONS BY 56% BY 2050

To quantify the potential of a more circular economy ar-zero net emissions in the EU around mid-century or to reduce industrial GHG emissions, we conducted an before – leaving no or little room for residual emissions in-depth study of steel, plastics, aluminium and cement from industry. Yet existing analyses do not articulate in the European Union, as well as two key supply chains how this would be achieved for heavy industry. For ex- – passenger cars and buildings. As we describe in de- ample, the European Commission’s 2011 ‘Roadmap tail below, we found that a more circular economy could 2050’ foresaw emissions reductions from all of indu- reduce emissions from the production of these four ma- stry of 259 Mt CO¬2, while leaving 170 Mt CO¬¬2 in terials by more than half: set against emissions of 530 place, even with assumptions of very large volumes of Mt CO¬¬2 per year, the circular economy abatement po- CCS . Sector roadmaps from steel, cement and chemi- tential we identify is almost 296 Mt CO¬¬2 per year by cal industry associations left 300 Mt CO¬¬2 in place, 2050 (Exhibit 5). even after abatement of 150 Mt CO2 through CCS . The European Commission is expected to produce a new Mobilising this potential would make an indispensa- mid-century roadmap in 2019. Our analysis suggests ble contribution to the EU’s climate commitment. Me- that demand-side strategies should have a central place eting targets under the Paris Agreement requires ne- in net-zero scenarios for European industry.

18 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Exhibit 5 Overall abatement potential

EU EMISSIONS REDUCTIONS POTENTIAL FROM A MORE CIRCULAR ECONOMY, 2050 MILLION TONNES OF CARBON DIOXIDE PER YEAR EXHIBIT 1.5

STEEL PLASTICS ALUMINIUM CEMENT

530 178

-56 %

56

62

234

2050 BASELINE MATERIALS PRODUCT MATERIALS CIRCULAR 2050 CIRCULAR RECIRCULATION EFFICENCY BUSINESS MODELS SCENARIO

EXHIBIT 1.7

MATERIALS PRODUCTION EMISSIONS, 2015 AND 2050 19 MILLION TONNES OF CARBON DIOXIDE PER YEAR, EU

564 STEEL 530 • Steel use remains at close to 160 Mt / year as EU stock saturates, • Scrap-based production increases from 40% to 65%

• e CO2 intensity of production falls by more than 50% as a result 104 234 PLASTICS • Consumption increases from 49 Mt today to 62 Mt 2050 • Emissions increase chiey because of embedded emissions: the carbon in the plastic itself. In a low-carbon energy system, burning plastics has high net emissions 233

ALUMINIUM 132 • Aluminium use grows from 12 to 16 Mt per year, but stabilises at this level

• Clean electricity means lower CO2 intensity for both EU production and imported • e net result is almost stationary emissions attributable 83 to EU consumption 80

CEMENT • Consumption stays similar today, reaching 184 Mt per year 114 113 • Emissions falls by 10 percent through production process improvements

TODAY 2050

EXHIBIT 1.9

STEEL: PRIMARY VS. RECYCLED PRIMARY PLASTICS: PRIMARY VS. RECYCLED PRIMARY TCO2 / T STEEL TCO2 / T PLASTICS RECYCLED RECYCLED 2.4 2.3 2.2

1.9

14 %

0.4 0.4 0.3

0.1

TODAY 2050 TODAY 2050

ALUMINIUM: PRIMARY VS. RECYCLED CEMENT: PRIMARY VS. RECYCLED PRIMARY PRIMARY TCO2 / T ALUMINIUM TCO2 / T CEMENT RECYCLED RECYCLED

13.5 0.7 0.6

9.7 14 %

0.3

0.1

0.3 0.2

TODAY 2050 TODAY 2050 HIGHER UTILISATION PER CAR EXHIBIT 5.12v2 SHARING BUSINESS MODELS VEHICLES RE-DESIGNED AND New business models to suit new MANAGED TO MAXIMISE RUN TIME customer groups Integration with public transport system LONGER VEHICLE LIFETIMES MAJOR SHIFT OF INNOVATION FOCUS High returns to durability DIGITISATION AND AUTOMATION Longer-lived electric vehicles pro table Self-driving cars enables new service Professionally maintained eet FROM: TO: models MAXIMIZING UPFRONT MAKING THE CAR A Data-intensive optimisation of trac SALES VOLUME AND WELLFUNCTIONING MODULARITY AND REUSE PRICE EFFECTIVE PART OF URBAN MOBILITY Design for quick repair and upgrade- ability Reuse built into vehicle design

LOWER VEHICLE WEIGHT

REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE More varied car sizes with shared eet Advanced materials more pro table HIGHER PROFITABILITY OF Without deep transformation,CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS

emissions would END-OF-LIFEamount VALUE to 530 Mt CO2 in 2050

Higher EOL value (modularity, In order to gauge the potential impactvaluable of a morematerials circular etc.) 60-70% of steel, cement and aluminium use, and some 30 economy on industrial emissions, we lookedEOL ows more more predictableclosely in eetpercent of plastics. Conversely, steel, cement, aluminium at each of the four materials and the twoowned value system chains. Ex- and plastics account for 85% of the materials CO2 foot- hibit 6 provides an overview. Cars and buildings account print of buildings and passenger cars. LOWER COST OF TRANSPORT

New design and high utilisation reduce total cost Competitiveness withExhibit other modes of 6 transport increases Four materials and two value chains that account for 70% of industrial CO2 emissions

FOUR KEY MATERIALS CATEGORIES

EXHIBIT 1.6

STEEL PLASTICS ALUMINIUM CEMENT

Used across economy in In advanced economies, Key uses include Used for construction construction, packaging is a major use, buildings, automotive, of buildings and infra- transportation, followed by construction electrical machinery structure industrial machinery, and automotive and packaging Production is primarily and consumer products 100 kg/capita is consum- e EU imports 40% local due to high avail- 75% 40% of demand is ed annually in Europe, of its aluminum, some- ability of raw materials served by secondary of which secondary times from locations and high cost of transport- OF INDUSTRIAL CO2 EMISSIONS production in the EU, plastics only represent with very high CO2 ation but the industry still 10% of demand intensity of production CO2 emissions are more releases some 230 CO2 130 Mt CO2 are re- In total, the CO2 foot- than 110 Mt per year, Mt per year leased annually from print of EU demand is of which 55% are due to European production around 80 Mt annually the process chemistry rather than energy

TWO KEY VALUE CHAINS AND PRODUCT CATEGORIES

CARS/MOBILITY

Automotive sector uses 20% of steel, 10% of plastics and 20% of aluminium CO2 emissions from materials in passenger cars sold in the EU are around 50 Mt per year Embodied emissions in materials are becoming a larger share of total CO2 footprint ~50% PASSENGER CARS AND BUILDINGS JOINTLY ACCOUNT FOR ALMOST HALF OF EMISSIONS FROM STEEL, BUILDINGS/SHELTER PLASTICS, ALUMINIUM AND CEMENT Buildings account for 33% of steel, 20% of plastics, 25% of aluminium and 65% of cement e CO2 footprint of building materials in the EU is 250 Mt per year Embodied carbon is 10-20% of EU buildings’ CO2 footprint today, but already 50% in countries with low-carbon energy

20 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Conversely, steel, cement, aluminium and plastics account for 85% of the materials

CO2 footprint of buildings and passenger cars.

. REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Total emissions from the production of the four mate- tional emissions in 2050. Accounting for those emissions rials for EU consumption amounts to 564 Mt CO2. The as well as modest consumption growth, annual emis- baseline scenario sees a varied development of demand: sions from plastics are as high as 233 Mt CO2. Clearly, steel demand falls slightly, as the total steel stock sa- the of fossil-based plastics cannot continue turates, whereas cement use stays constant, and plastics in a low-carbon economy. and aluminium use grows somewhat. The current pro- duction processes and practices continue to be used, In the steel sector, on the other hand, emissions decli- so that plastics production is fossil-fuel based, cement is ne even in the baseline scenario. This is due to several based on clinker production from , and prima- factors: reduction in demand for steel as the EU steel ry steel continues to use basic oxygen furnaces based stock stabilises, a gradual and substantial shift toward on coal. However, trends towards lower emissions also more secondary and less primary production, and the continue: the efficiency of the processes improves by 10- decarbonisation of electricity inputs to secondary steel 20% through the rapid adoption of best available produc- production. The EU steel sector thus is already on a path tion techniques; materials use becomes more circular to a more circular economy that would significantly re- even in the baseline scenario; and the energy system is duce emissions reductions – but as we discuss below, assumed to be decarbonising, so that emissions from EU there is potential to go much further than is possible with electricity fall to near-zero levels, in line with the 2011 Eu- current practice. ropean Commission Roadmap 2050. Nonetheless, there is only a small net decrease in industrial emissions by For aluminium, the combination of a higher share 2050, to 530 Mt CO2 (Exhibit 7). scrap-based production and the decarbonisation of electri- city production more than offset the growth in emissions The largest net growth in emissions in our baseline that would otherwise occur as the volume of aluminium scenario occurs in plastics. This is only partly because increases. For cement, the baseline scenario shows a very consumption increases, but more because plastics con- small decline in emissions, as improvements in process tains substantial embedded carbon in the material itself, efficiency slightly outstrip growth in demand. which is released as CO2 when plastics are incinerated. The bottom line is that despite increased recycling, espe- Today, when plastics are burned instead of other fossil cially of steel, and the transformation of EU energy supply, fuels, the net increase in emissions is relatively small. emissions from materials production in 2050 would be lar- That would change dramatically in a decarbonised en- gely similar to today. Achieving the much-larger reductions ergy system, where the alternative would be zero-carbon needed for a low-carbon economy will thus require stra- energy sources. Thus, a continuation of the current shift tegies to reduce demand, even as new technologies are towards burning plastics would result in substantial addi- deployed to reduce industrial process emissions as well.

22 EU EMISSIONS REDUCTIONS POTENTIAL FROM A MORE CIRCULAR ECONOMY, 2050 MILLION TONNES OF CARBON DIOXIDE PER YEAR EXHIBIT 1.5

STEEL PLASTICS ALUMINIUM CEMENT

530 178

-56 %

56

62

234

REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Exhibit 7 2050 BASELINE MATERIALS PRODUCT MATERIALS CIRCULAR 2050 CIRCULAR Without demand-sideRECIRCULATION measures,EFFICENCY EU emissionsBUSINESS MODELS from SCENARIO materials production barely decline by 2050

EXHIBIT 1.7

MATERIALS PRODUCTION EMISSIONS, 2015 AND 2050 MILLION TONNES OF CARBON DIOXIDE PER YEAR, EU

564 STEEL 530 • Steel use remains at close to 160 Mt / year as EU stock saturates, • Scrap-based production increases from 40% to 65%

• e CO2 intensity of production falls by more than 50% as a result 104 234 PLASTICS • Consumption increases from 49 Mt today to 62 Mt 2050 • Emissions increase chiey because of embedded emissions: the carbon in the plastic itself. In a low-carbon energy system, burning plastics has high net emissions 233

ALUMINIUM 132 • Aluminium use grows from 12 to 16 Mt per year, but stabilises at this level

• Clean electricity means lower CO2 intensity for both EU production and imported metal • e net result is almost stationary emissions attributable 83 to EU consumption 80

CEMENT • Consumption stays similar today, reaching 184 Mt per year 114 113 • Emissions falls by 10 percent through production process improvements

TODAY 2050

EXHIBIT 1.9

23 STEEL: PRIMARY VS. RECYCLED PRIMARY PLASTICS: PRIMARY VS. RECYCLED PRIMARY TCO2 / T STEEL TCO2 / T PLASTICS RECYCLED RECYCLED 2.4 2.3 2.2

1.9

14 %

0.4 0.4 0.3

0.1

TODAY 2050 TODAY 2050

ALUMINIUM: PRIMARY VS. RECYCLED CEMENT: PRIMARY VS. RECYCLED PRIMARY PRIMARY TCO2 / T ALUMINIUM TCO2 / T CEMENT RECYCLED RECYCLED

13.5 0.7 0.6

9.7 14 %

0.3

0.1

0.3 0.2

TODAY 2050 TODAY 2050 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Three types of circular strategies work together to cut EU industrial emissions The demand-side potential includes a range of strate- • More material-efficient products jointly make up gies. We include under the umbrella of ‘circular economy’ opportunities with 56 Mt CO2 of abatement potential. any opportunity to provide the same economic service These opportunities have in common that they reduce with less primary material. In this section, we explore the the total materials input required to produce a given pro- potential associated with each of three categories of me- duct or structure, through lightweighting, reduced waste, asures, which are further summarised in Exhibit 8: high-strength materials, and other strategies. • New circular business models could reduce emis- • Materials recirculation opportunities provide more than sions by 62 Mt CO2. The main lever here is a large in- half of the abatement potential, at 178 Mt CO2 per year, by crease in the materials productivity of both mobility and increasing the share of materials needs that are met by using buildings: increasing the benefits derived from each buil- recycled rather than primary materials. This means increasing ding or vehicle through shared use and measures to pro- both the volume and the quality of secondary materials. long their lifetime.

Exhibit 8 How different types of circular economy strategies reduce GHG emissions

1 2 3 MATERIAL RECIRCULATION PRODUCT MATERIAL EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS

GHG MATERIALS PRODUCT GHG EXHIBIT 1.8 SERVICE EMISSIONS = X X X LEVEL MATERIALS PRODUCT SERVICE LEVEL

Underlaying bene t, More high-value recycling  Less material input Fewer products required to such as passenger less primary material required for each car, achieve the same bene ts or or freight kilometers production lower emissions building, etc (e.g. service (e.g number cars of transportation, or per tonne of material tonnes of material per produced for a given amount eective available Tycker streckat funkar car) of transportation) bra kring de rutor som building area “tar ut” varandra High value recycling, Reuse of components Higherutilisation and through: intensive use of products Increased collection Improved production Sharing of products ralles process Product as service Design for disassembly Less production waste and improved Avoid over-speci cation Longer lifetime of materials separation products Less contamination Designing products with Design for durability and downgrading of less materials and disassembly materials High-strenght materials Long lasting materials New design principles Improved maintenance Variation in size Remanufacturing

SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS

24 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Materials recirculation opportunities provide more than half of the abatement potential.

25 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

1. MATERIALS RECIRCULATION STRATEGIES COULD CURB EMISSIONS BY 178 MT CO2 PER YEAR

From a circular economy perspective, Europe is a recycled steel can cut emissions by 90% if using largely treasure trove of recyclable materials – those that have decarbonised electricity. already been discarded, as well as millions of tonnes • Plastics: The largest potential to improve circularity more that will become available as buildings, vehic- is in plastics, where recycling rates today are low (recyc- les and products are taken out of service in the future. led volumes are just 10% of plastics in the market), and As shown in Exhibit 9, producing secondary materials CO2 gains would be substantial. A detailed assessment through recycling results in far lower emissions per tonne of plastics categories and uses identifies opportunities than producing primary materials. Thus, every piece of to greatly increase recycling levels, especially for the scrap holds the promise of CO2 savings. Across mate- biggest five plastic types that make up 70% of demand. rials, realising the potential requires creating robust sys- More than half of plastics volumes could be recycled tems for collection, avoid contamination by additives or mechanically, and a further 11% through chemical re- mixing of different qualities of materials, and producing cycling approaches. materials of sufficient quality to serve as genuine substi- tutes for the corresponding primary material. However, • Aluminium: It is less certain to what extent the stock the scope for increasing the reuse of different materials of aluminium will stabilise, but the amount of post-consu- varies significantly: mer scrap available will nonetheless increase. By 2050 potentially, post-consumer scrap generated in Europe • Steel: Current EU steel production is more than 60% could amount to as much as 75% of the production re- based on primary production, i.e. produced from ore. quired to meet European demand. The opportunity is to However, a detailed analysis of steel stock evolution and enable the continued use of this scrap in a wide range scrap flows suggests that, in decades to come, the EU of applications, so that it can replace a greater share of will approach the point where the need to maintain a primary metals production. near-constant stock of steel can be served to a large extent by recirculating steel that has already been pro- • Cement: Cement cannot be recycled in the conven- duced. Doing so will require reducing losses of steel, tional sense, though structural elements can be reused. changing how steel scrap is handled and traded, and In addition, as we explain below, approaches are under avoiding contamination of the steel stock with copper, development to recover unreacted cement from concrete, as we discuss below. The CO¬¬2 prize is substantial, as which can then be recycled into new concrete production.

26 EU EMISSIONS REDUCTIONS POTENTIAL FROM A MORE CIRCULAR ECONOMY, 2050 MILLION TONNES OF CARBON DIOXIDE PER YEAR EXHIBIT 1.5

STEEL PLASTICS ALUMINIUM CEMENT

530 178

-56 %

56

62

234

2050 BASELINE MATERIALS PRODUCT MATERIALS CIRCULAR 2050 CIRCULAR RECIRCULATION EFFICENCY BUSINESS MODELS SCENARIO

EXHIBIT 1.7

MATERIALS PRODUCTION EMISSIONS, 2015 AND 2050 MILLION TONNES OF CARBON DIOXIDE PER YEAR, EU

564 STEEL 530 • Steel use remains at close to 160 Mt / year as EU stock saturates, • Scrap-based production increases from 40% to 65%

• e CO2 intensity of production falls by more than 50% as a result 104 234 PLASTICS • Consumption increases from 49 Mt today to 62 Mt 2050 • Emissions increase chiey because of embedded emissions: the carbon in the plastic itself. In a low-carbon energy system, burning plastics has high net emissions 233

ALUMINIUM 132 • Aluminium use grows from 12 to 16 Mt per year, but stabilises at this level

• Clean electricity means lower CO2 intensity for both EU production and imported metal • e net result is almost stationary emissions attributable 83 to EU consumption 80

CEMENT • Consumption stays similar today, reaching 184 Mt per year 114 113 • Emissions falls by 10 percent through production process REVIEW improvements DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

TODAY 2050 Exhibit 9 Materials recycling leads to significant reductions in CO2 emissions from materials production EXHIBIT 1.9

STEEL: PRIMARY VS. RECYCLED PRIMARY PLASTICS: PRIMARY VS. RECYCLED PRIMARY TCO2 / T STEEL TCO2 / T PLASTICS RECYCLED RECYCLED 2.4 2.3 2.2

1.9

14 %

0.4 0.4 0.3

0.1

TODAY 2050 TODAY 2050

ALUMINIUM: PRIMARY VS. RECYCLED CEMENT: PRIMARY VS. RECYCLED PRIMARY PRIMARY TCO2 / T ALUMINIUM TCO2 / T CEMENT RECYCLED RECYCLED

13.5 0.7 0.6

9.7 14 %

0.3

0.1

0.3 0.2

TODAY 2050 TODAY 2050

27 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

2. MORE MATERIAL-EFFICIENT PRODUCTS CAN Fully achieving the potential gains in this category would require deep changes in how we deliver services CUT EMISSIONS BY 56 MT CO2 PER YEAR and goods, which in turn would drive major changes in how vehicles and buildings are initially built and ma- The amount of materials required also can be reduced sub- intained. But the rewards would be substantial. As we stantially through a range of approaches. One is to reduce elaborate below, there are major opportunities to boost the amount of materials that are discarded as scrap or waste productivity and achieve significant co-benefits for the -en in the manufacturing or construction process. For example, vironment, public health, and quality of life. some 15% of buildings materials are wasted in construction, a share that can be reduced substantially through best prac- In practice, these broad strategies translate into a tice. Another strategy is to use more advanced materials and wide range of measures: from changes to product design construction techniques. High-strength steel, for instance, has and materials choice, to improved technology, larger sca- the potential to cut materials use by 30–40% in a range of le in secondary materials industries, and even extensive applications, from heavy machinery to buildings and furniture. changes in the value chains and organisation of mobility It also is possible to save materials by reducing over-specifica- and buildings. tion; by one estimate, as much as 50% of steel used in buil- dings is in excess to what is strictly required to meet structural needs. Finally, lightweighting of products can also be achieved * * * by tailoring individual products better to specific uses; for ex- ample, while cars built for individual ownership typically need The benefits of circular approaches are strengthe- to be able to carry at least four passengers and some bagga- ned by the fact that many of these measures work well ge, cars built for a shared fleet could vary in size, with many together. For example, reducing the materials intensity just big enough for a one- or two-passenger trip in the city. of buildings and vehicles reduces the total steel stock needed, which secondary steel production needs to grow less to meet the demand. Likewise, new business 3. NEW CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS IN MO- models that boost the value realised from each product can drastically improve the economics of measures to BILITY AND BUILDINGS CAN REDUCE EMIS- make products more materials-efficient. Cumulatively, SIONS BY 62 MT CO2 PER YEAR these opportunities can result in a step change in re- source efficiency. Fully achieving the potential gains in this category would require new business models that amount to deep changes Tracing one material in one value chain makes clear in how we deliver services and goods. These in turn would the extent the opportunity. For example, circular strate- drive major changes in how vehicles and buildings are initi- gies could jointly cut the amount of primary steel requi- ally built and maintained. But the rewards would be substan- red to serve mobility needs by 70% (Exhibit 10). Put dif- tial. As we elaborate below, there are major opportunities to ferently, the productivity of materials use has increased boost productivity and achieve significant co-benefits for the so that each tonne of steel supports more than three environment, public health, and quality of life. times as much transportation.

28 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Exhibit 10 Circular measures can reduce the primary steel required to support mobility by 70 percent

PRIMARY STEEL USED FOR MOBILITY SERVICES TON PRIMARY STEEL PER MILLION PASSENGER KILOMETRE

MATERIALS RECIRCULATION PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS

I 1.84

0.29 II

EXHIBIT 1.10 0.35 III -70 %

0.65

0.56

BASELINE CIRCULAR SCENARIO

A CIRCULAR SCENARIO RESULT IN MOBILITY SERVICES BEING PROVIDED WITH MUCH LESS PRIMARY STEEL USED PER UNIT, THROUGH:

III I MATERIALS RECIRCULATION II MORE MATERIAL IMPROVED PRODUCTIVITY OF USE already is a major part of steelmaking, with -EFFICIENT PRODUCTS has particularly large potential for vehicles. Today’s passenger cars use secondary (recycled) steel making up around can reduce steel requirements by only 2% of their capacity, because they are parked most of the time and one-third of current global production. Still, some 30%. e rst step is to often carry only one or two people when used. Replacing a large share of there is much potential to increase recycling by reduce process losses; up to half of personal vehicles with a system of eet-managed, shared vehicles would improving collection rates, avoiding steel now ends up as process scrap mean that cars could not only be used more intensively, but such use contamination with copper, reducing losses rather than in the nal product. would make a range of strategies feasible that extend their lifetimes. ese during remelting, and avoiding downgrading. A second step is to make cars in a include more durable design and higher-value materials, a greater share Together, these measures could reduce the much wider range of sizes, and to of intrinsically more durable electric vehicles, predictive and eet-man- need for global primary steel production by use more advanced materials that aged maintenance, and modular design for reuse and remanufacturing. another 14% by 2050, and as much as 80% may cost more, but pay o when e combination of sharing and longer lifetimes could almost halve the in a more mature economy such as the EU. vehicles are used more intensively. amount of materials needed per passenger-kilometre travelled.

NOTE: ANALYSIS IS BASED ON GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS

29

EMISSIONS INTENSITY

t CO2 / t MATERIAL EXHIBIT 1.11

2,0 REMAINING EMISSIONS AFTER TOTAL EMISSIONS DEMAND-SIDE ABATEMENT IN THE EU 2050

234 MT 530 MT CO 2 CO2 1,5 ILLUSTRATIVE SUPPLY-SIDE

REDUCTION OF 209 MT CO2 THROUGH: CIRCULARITY REDUCES PRIMARY • EFFICIENCY AND MATERIALS DEMAND, RESULTING RENEWABLE ENERGY IN 296 MT CO2 ABATEMENT 1,0 • ELECTRIFICATION AND PROCESS BREAKTHROUGHS • CARBON CAPTURE AND STORAGE

0,5 25 MT

CO2 REMAINING EMISSIONS AFTER DEMAND – AND SUPPLY-SIDE ABATEMENT PRIMARY 0,0 MATERIALS MILLION TONNES 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 320 MATERIAL

EXHIBIT 1.12

CUMULATIVE EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS PRODUCTION, 2015 – 2100

BILLION TONNES OF CO2

STEEL ALUMINIUM

1000 PLASTICS (PRODUCTION) CEMENT 918 333 PLASTICS (EMBEDDED) 900

800

700

178 600 To meet climate targets: Additional circularity Production process breakthroughs 500 Material substitution 408

400

300

200

100

0 BASELINE DEMAND-SIDE CURRENT REMAINING FURTHER EMISSIONS EMISSIONS MEASURES LOW-CARBON EMISSIONS REDUCTIONS REQUIRED FOR (CIRCULARITY) PROCESSES CLIMATE TARGETS

TOTAL COST REDUCTION POTENTIAL CO-BENEFITS FROM A SHIFT TOWARDS SHARED CARS EXHIBIT 1.15 EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES

264

155

-74 %

-77 %

14 % 14 % 68 35

CURRENT CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO SCENARIO

COST FOR MATERIALS, COST OF SOCIETY, INCLUDING INFRASTRUCTURE, MANUFACTURING AND DISTRIBUTION PARKING AND LAND

COST OF DRIVING, INCLUDING FUEL, COST FOR CONGESTION INSURANCE, PARKING ETC.

COST FOR MAINTENANCE OTHER EXTERNALITIES, INCLUDING ACCIDENTS, NOISE AND AIR POLLUTION

Shared car eets and higher utilisation per car lower cost per kilometre Fewer cars due to higher occupancy per car result in improved Larger share of secondary materials and components reduces cost air quality and reduce noise level and congestion for materials Autonomous cars are safer, reduce need for signs, lanes Shared cars that are to a larger extent electric, autonomous and of and other infrastructure and can optimise tra c ows smaller average size reduce cost of materials and cost of driving More electric vehicles reduce noise level and have positive impact Longer car lifetime reduces costs per kilometre, while more durable on air quality, especially when shit ng towards renewable energy materials, autonomous cars etc. also have negative impact on cost savings sources REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Demand- and supply-side measures together make deep decarbonisation of industry more feasible

The emissions reductions described above are net year, and associated emissions by 296 Mt CO2. If emis- reductions, accounting for the inputs required to imple- sions are to be reduced by an illustrative 90%, that would ment relevant measures, including transportation and still leave about 209 Mt CO2 of emissions to abate. electricity. The numbers highlight another advantage of Supply-side measures are crucial to closing that gap. these approaches: they can benefit from synergies with the decarbonisation of transport and electricity systems. Sharply reducing emissions from materials production The overall resource requirements also are modest when would require fundamental changes to industrial proces- compared with the requirements for supply-side abate- ses. Examples include replacing coal with hydrogen as ment – for example, the energy requirements are much an input to primary steel production, the synthesis of lower per tonne material produced. The intrinsic higher plastics from non-fossil feedstock (e.g. bioplastics), and resource efficiency of a more circular economy therefore novel cements. While there are promising options un- pays off not only in reduced demand for primary raw ma- der exploration, they are at low technological readiness, terials, but also in terms of inputs for low-carbon energy, and far from commercial use. Developing and deploying putting less strain on other aspects of the overall transi- them is a major undertaking, with uncertainty both about tion to a low-carbon economy. which options will prove successful, and how long they will take to scale up. Additional CO2 reductions may Yet nothing in this report should be taken to mean that be possible through further energy efficiency improve- circular economy approaches should replace supply-side ments, wider use of renewable energy and electrification measures. Both are needed if Europe is to decarbonise as well. its industry. Exhibit 11 shows the potential for demand-si- de emissions reductions combined with the potential on The other main option is to capture CO2 from exis- the supply side. Total 2050 baseline demand across steel, ting processes. This is being trialled at some industrial plastics, aluminium and cement is over 400 Mt per year, of sites, but is still at demonstration phase. After more than which almost 300 Mt are primary materials. As noted ear- a decade of active development, CCS still faces large lier, even assuming the use of the best available technologi- challenges, including a lack of viable storage sites for es, energy efficiency improvements, the use of low-carbon CO2, and the cost and logistics of fitting a large number energy, and circularity consistent with current trends, total of dispersed industrial sites with CCS technology. emissions from the production of these materials would be 530 Mt CO2 per year, barely changed from today. Overall, circular economy opportunities thus substanti- ally reduce the scale of supply-side abatement required, The demand-side measures explored in this report potentially providing the majority of the emissions reduc- would reduce primary materials needs by 173 Mt per tions required for EU 2050 targets.

30 PRIMARY STEEL USED FOR MOBILITY SERVICES TON PRIMARY STEEL PER MILLION PASSENGER KILOMETRE

MATERIALS RECIRCULATION PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS

I 1.84

0.29 II

EXHIBIT 1.10 0.35 III -70 %

0.65

0.56

BASELINE CIRCULAR SCENARIO

A CIRCULAR SCENARIO RESULT IN MOBILITY SERVICES BEING PROVIDED WITH MUCH LESS PRIMARY STEEL USED PER UNIT, THROUGH:

III I MATERIALS RECIRCULATION II MORE MATERIAL IMPROVED PRODUCTIVITY OF USE already is a major part of steelmaking, with -EFFICIENT PRODUCTS has particularly large potential for vehicles. Today’s passenger cars use secondary (recycled) steel making up around can reduce steel requirements by only 2% of their capacity, because they are parked most of the time and one-third of current global production. Still, some 30%. e rst step is to often carry only one or two people when used. Replacing a large share of there is much potential to increase recycling byREVIEW reduce process DRAFT losses; up to– half DO of NOTpersonal DISTRIBUTE vehicles with a system of eet-managed, shared vehicles would improving collection rates, avoiding steel now ends up as process scrap mean that cars could not only be used more intensively, but such use contamination with copper, reducing losses rather than in the nal product. would make a range of strategies feasible that extend their lifetimes. ese during remelting, and avoiding downgrading. A second step is to make cars in a include more durable design and higher-value materials, a greater share Together, these measures could reduce the much wider range of sizes, and to of intrinsically more durable electric vehicles, predictive and eet-man- need for global primary steel production by use more advanced materials that aged maintenance, and modular design for reuse and remanufacturing. another 14% by 2050, and as much as 80% may cost more, but pay o when e combination of sharing and longer lifetimes could almost halve the in a more mature economy such as the EU. vehicles are used more intensively. amount of materials needed per passenger-kilometre travelled.

Exhibit 11 The role of demand- and supply-side measures in decarbonising emissions from materials production

EMISSIONS INTENSITY

t CO2 / t MATERIAL EXHIBIT 1.11

2,0 REMAINING EMISSIONS AFTER TOTAL EMISSIONS DEMAND-SIDE ABATEMENT IN THE EU 2050

234 MT 530 MT CO 2 CO2 1,5 ILLUSTRATIVE SUPPLY-SIDE

REDUCTION OF 209 MT CO2 THROUGH: CIRCULARITY REDUCES PRIMARY • EFFICIENCY AND MATERIALS DEMAND, RESULTING RENEWABLE ENERGY IN 296 MT CO2 ABATEMENT 1,0 • ELECTRIFICATION AND PROCESS BREAKTHROUGHS • CARBON CAPTURE AND STORAGE

0,5 25 MT

CO2 REMAINING EMISSIONS AFTER DEMAND – AND SUPPLY-SIDE ABATEMENT PRIMARY 0,0 MATERIALS MILLION TONNES 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 320 MATERIAL

31

EXHIBIT 1.12

CUMULATIVE EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS PRODUCTION, 2015 – 2100

BILLION TONNES OF CO2

STEEL ALUMINIUM

1000 PLASTICS (PRODUCTION) CEMENT 918 333 PLASTICS (EMBEDDED) 900

800

700

178 600 To meet climate targets: Additional circularity Production process breakthroughs 500 Material substitution 408

400

300

200

100

0 BASELINE DEMAND-SIDE CURRENT REMAINING FURTHER EMISSIONS EMISSIONS MEASURES LOW-CARBON EMISSIONS REDUCTIONS REQUIRED FOR (CIRCULARITY) PROCESSES CLIMATE TARGETS

TOTAL COST REDUCTION POTENTIAL CO-BENEFITS FROM A SHIFT TOWARDS SHARED CARS EXHIBIT 1.15 EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES

264

155

-74 %

-77 %

14 % 14 % 68 35

CURRENT CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO SCENARIO

COST FOR MATERIALS, COST OF SOCIETY, INCLUDING INFRASTRUCTURE, MANUFACTURING AND DISTRIBUTION PARKING AND LAND

COST OF DRIVING, INCLUDING FUEL, COST FOR CONGESTION INSURANCE, PARKING ETC.

COST FOR MAINTENANCE OTHER EXTERNALITIES, INCLUDING ACCIDENTS, NOISE AND AIR POLLUTION

Shared car eets and higher utilisation per car lower cost per kilometre Fewer cars due to higher occupancy per car result in improved Larger share of secondary materials and components reduces cost air quality and reduce noise level and congestion for materials Autonomous cars are safer, reduce need for signs, lanes Shared cars that are to a larger extent electric, autonomous and of and other infrastructure and can optimise tra c ows smaller average size reduce cost of materials and cost of driving More electric vehicles reduce noise level and have positive impact Longer car lifetime reduces costs per kilometre, while more durable on air quality, especially when shit ng towards renewable energy materials, autonomous cars etc. also have negative impact on cost savings sources REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Globally, a more circular economy could avoid 3.6 Gt CO2 per year by 2050

The EU is well positioned to pioneer many circular eco- Altogether, we estimate the global abatement potential nomy principles, especially those focused on materials from circular measures at 3.6 billion tonnes of CO2 per year recirculation. It helps to have large stocks of materials by 2050, or nearly 45 % of baseline emissions (increasing already available for recycling. Although there is potential to 60 % later in the century). This development course is for recycling also in developing countries, it is smaller when one much more consistent with climate objectives; in terms much of production goes towards building up the total stock. of cumulative emissions to 2100, a more circular economy could cut 333 out of the 918 billion tonnes of CO2 in the Strategies focused on materials efficiency and produc- baseline scenario (Exhibit 12). Rapidly adopting current tivity of use, on the other hand, could benefit developing low-carbon technologies could cut another 178 billion ton- countries at least as much as the EU. Instead of replicating nes, so that just over 400 billion tonnes remain. To meet the inefficiencies of the mobility and buildings systems of climate objectives, emissions would need to fall still further today’s OECD economies, these countries can ‘leapfrog’ – through additional circular economy measures beyond to more efficient technologies and business models. Ma- those investigated in this study, materials substitution, and king construction more materials-efficient, for example, is cru- the development and gradual adoption of even lower-car- cial for countries that are rapidly expanding their built area. bon production processes than those available today.

32 PRIMARY STEEL USED FOR MOBILITY SERVICES TON PRIMARY STEEL PER MILLION PASSENGER KILOMETRE

MATERIALS RECIRCULATION PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS

I 1.84

0.29 II

EXHIBIT 1.10 0.35 III -70 %

0.65

0.56

BASELINE CIRCULAR SCENARIO

A CIRCULAR SCENARIO RESULT IN MOBILITY SERVICES BEING PROVIDED WITH MUCH LESS PRIMARY STEEL USED PER UNIT, THROUGH:

III I MATERIALS RECIRCULATION II MORE MATERIAL IMPROVED PRODUCTIVITY OF USE already is a major part of steelmaking, with -EFFICIENT PRODUCTS has particularly large potential for vehicles. Today’s passenger cars use secondary (recycled) steel making up around can reduce steel requirements by only 2% of their capacity, because they are parked most of the time and one-third of current global production. Still, some 30%. e rst step is to often carry only one or two people when used. Replacing a large share of there is much potential to increase recycling by reduce process losses; up to half of personal vehicles with a system of eet-managed, shared vehicles would improving collection rates, avoiding steel now ends up as process scrap mean that cars could not only be used more intensively, but such use contamination with copper, reducing losses rather than in the nal product. would make a range of strategies feasible that extend their lifetimes. ese during remelting, and avoiding downgrading. A second step is to make cars in a include more durable design and higher-value materials, a greater share Together, these measures could reduce the much wider range of sizes, and to of intrinsically more durable electric vehicles, predictive and eet-man- need for global primary steel production by use more advanced materials that aged maintenance, and modular design for reuse and remanufacturing. another 14% by 2050, and as much as 80% may cost more, but pay o when e combination of sharing and longer lifetimes could almost halve the in a more mature economy such as the EU. vehicles are used more intensively. amount of materials needed per passenger-kilometre travelled.

EMISSIONS INTENSITY

t CO2 / t MATERIAL EXHIBIT 1.11

2,0 REMAINING EMISSIONS AFTER TOTAL EMISSIONS DEMAND-SIDE ABATEMENT IN THE EU 2050

234 MT 530 MT CO 2 CO2 1,5 ILLUSTRATIVE SUPPLY-SIDE

REDUCTION OF 209 MT CO2 THROUGH: CIRCULARITY REDUCES PRIMARY • EFFICIENCY AND MATERIALS DEMAND, RESULTING RENEWABLE ENERGY IN 296 MT CO2 ABATEMENT 1,0 • ELECTRIFICATION AND PROCESS BREAKTHROUGHS • CARBON CAPTURE AND STORAGE

0,5 25 MT

CO2 REMAINING EMISSIONS AFTER DEMAND – AND SUPPLY-SIDE ABATEMENT PRIMARY 0,0 MATERIALS MILLION TONNES 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 320 MATERIAL

REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Exhibit 12 A more circular economy could cut emissions globally by more than 300 billion tonnes to 2100 EXHIBIT 1.12

CUMULATIVE EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS PRODUCTION, 2015 – 2100

BILLION TONNES OF CO2

STEEL ALUMINIUM

1000 PLASTICS (PRODUCTION) CEMENT 918 333 PLASTICS (EMBEDDED) 900

800

700

178 600 To meet climate targets: Additional circularity Production process breakthroughs 500 Material substitution 408

400

300

200

100

0 BASELINE DEMAND-SIDE CURRENT REMAINING FURTHER EMISSIONS EMISSIONS MEASURES LOW-CARBON EMISSIONS REDUCTIONS REQUIRED FOR (CIRCULARITY) PROCESSES CLIMATE TARGETS

TOTAL COST REDUCTION POTENTIAL CO-BENEFITS FROM A SHIFT TOWARDS SHARED CARS EXHIBIT 1.15 33 EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES

264

155

-74 %

-77 %

14 % 14 % 68 35

CURRENT CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO SCENARIO

COST FOR MATERIALS, COST OF SOCIETY, INCLUDING INFRASTRUCTURE, MANUFACTURING AND DISTRIBUTION PARKING AND LAND

COST OF DRIVING, INCLUDING FUEL, COST FOR CONGESTION INSURANCE, PARKING ETC.

COST FOR MAINTENANCE OTHER EXTERNALITIES, INCLUDING ACCIDENTS, NOISE AND AIR POLLUTION

Shared car eets and higher utilisation per car lower cost per kilometre Fewer cars due to higher occupancy per car result in improved Larger share of secondary materials and components reduces cost air quality and reduce noise level and congestion for materials Autonomous cars are safer, reduce need for signs, lanes Shared cars that are to a larger extent electric, autonomous and of and other infrastructure and can optimise tra c ows smaller average size reduce cost of materials and cost of driving More electric vehicles reduce noise level and have positive impact Longer car lifetime reduces costs per kilometre, while more durable on air quality, especially when shit ng towards renewable energy materials, autonomous cars etc. also have negative impact on cost savings sources REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

MANY CIRCULAR ECONOMY STRATEGIES ARE ECONOMICALLY ATTRACTIVE

In Section 2, we showed the substantial potential for Some care is required in interpreting a cost curve of circular economy strategies to reduce industrial emis- this type. While a negative cost shows that a measure sions. The obvious next question is, are they cost-effecti- can ‘pay for itself’ when viewed from a societal perspecti- ve? In this section, we quantify the cost of different circu- ve, that does not mean that it will be implemented without lar economy options; Exhibit 13 summarises our findings policy action. If measures that have net benefits remain, it in a cost curve. One axis shows the abatement potential is because there are barriers or market failures that pre- available, divided into groups of measures that add up to vent their implementation. In such situations, the market 296 Mt CO¬2. The other axis shows the estimated cost will not act by itself, even if prices are favourable; policy of each measure, expressed in EUR per tonne of CO¬2 interventions will be needed to overcome the barriers. avoided. Some negative-cost measures may also require sys- It is striking how economically attractive many measu- temic shifts in a value chain or sector. Car-sharing is a res appear to be, with low and even costs. Many measu- case in point; shared fleets of cars could lower costs sig- res are economically attractive, if barriers to their imple- nificantly relative to individual ownership, but this would mentation can be overcome; many others have a cost require a large-scale shift towards a different innovation of no more than 50 EUR/t CO2, less than many other focus and overall system for how to serve mobility. Rea- ways to reduce emissions (including many supply-side lising the potential CO2 and economic benefits therefore opportunities for industrial emissions). We caution that requires large-scale and systemic shifts, not just incre- this cost curve is indicative, with many uncertainties, mental change. A similar argument applies to high-value and must be followed up with deeper analysis to impro- plastics recycling: negative costs are not available today, ve the estimates. Nonetheless, the results show a clear but depend on a combination of technical progress, potential for circular economy strategies to make very change in the way that plastic is used in products and cost-effective contributions to a low-carbon economy. handled at end-of-life, and large scale in recycling acti- Moreover, ex-ante analyses of this kind often fail to cap- vities. ture many of the technological developments that will become available. In subsequent chapters of the report, To further understand the economic significance of we provide more details about the numbers underlying different measures, it helps to distinguish the costs and our analysis. benefits that arise in each category:

34 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Exhibit 13 A cost curve for circular economy measures

to reduce EU CO2 emissions

ABATEMENT POTENTIAL AND COST FOR CIRCULAR ECONOMY LEVERS, 2050 Mt CO2 PER YEAR; EUR PER TONNE CO2 ABATED

ABATEMENT COST EXHIBIT 1.13 EUR / t CO2

Cars - Sharing Cars - Prolong lifetime Cars - Remanufacturing Buildings - Floor space sharing Other - Sharing and lifetime 100 Plastics - Higher quality recycling New cost curve Buildings - Reduced waste in construction 2018-05-29 Plastics - Reuse Steel - Reduce copper 50 Aluminium - increase collection

50 100 0 EMISSIONS 150 200 250 300 SAVINGS Mt CO2 / YEAR

Cars - Lightweighting -50 Buildings - Materials efficiency Cement - Cement recycling Steel - Reduce fabrication losses -100 Plastics - Chemical recycling Buildings - Reuse Other - Materials efficiency Plastics - Increased recycling at current quality Aluminium - avoid downgrading Steel - Increase collection

HOW TO READ THE CO2 ABATEMENT COST CURVE PLASTIC COST CURVE 2050 POTENTIAL The CO2 abatement cost curve summarises the opportunities to reduce CO2 emissions through circular EUR PER ABATED TONNE CO , EUROPE, 2050 economy opportunities. The width2 of each bar represents the CO2 potential of that opportunity to reduce CO2 emissions in 2050, relative to a baseline scenario. It accounts for overlaps and interactions that arise EXHIBIT 3.12 ABATEMENTwhen all COST the opportunities are pursued simultaneously. EUR / t CO2 The height of each bar represents the average cost of avoiding 1 tonne of CO2 emissions by 2050 through that opportunity.Agriculture Reuse In several cases, the cost is a weighted average across several sub-opportunities. All costs are in 2015B&C real Reuse Euros. The cost of abatement is calculated from a societal perspective (excluding taxes and sub- sidies), but doesOther not plastics account High for quality reduced increased externalities recycling or other benefits associated with the opportunities. The opportunities are orderedB&C left High to qualityright increasedwith the recycling lowest-cost abatement opportunities to the right and highest to the left. Both volume and costB&C estimates Low quality are increased of course recycling uncertain in such a long timeframe New cost curve Automotive High quality increased recycling 2018-05-29 EEE High quality increased recycling Other plastics Reuse 100 100 Agriculture High quality increased recycling Packaging High quality 35increased recycling Automotive Reuse 55 57 50 43 35 23

10 20 30 40 0 50 EMISSIONS -3 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 SAVINGS Mt CO2 / YEAR -26 EEE Low quality -50 increased recycling -53 -49 -59 Automotive Low -62 -70 quality increased recycling -100 -93 -100 -100 Agriculture Low quality increased recycling Packaging Resuse Chemical recycling Packaging Low quality increased recycling EEE Reuse Other plastics Low quality increased recycling REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

1. Materials recirculation can build on high-value production of recycled materials

The economic attractiveness of materials recircula- nor modifications could capture large additional values. tion depends in large measure on the capacity to retain Second, technology continues to improve, making circu- the material value over the use cycle. Substantial values lar economy measures more viable – through everything are created when materials are initially produced. If the- from advanced sensors, to automation, to information se can be retained and recovered, the CO2 benefits of technology and mobile apps. The costs of technology avoided primary production can be coupled to the indu- also continue to decline, to the point that the value of the strial opportunity of preserving the intrinsic value of the materials to be recovered would more than offset the cost secondary materials. This is why already, 83% of steel of implementing the necessary tools. and 77% of aluminium is recycled. The CO2 and other resource benefits in turn depends on the ability to produ- Plastics recycling offers a particularly instructive ex- ce high-quality secondary materials that are capable of ample of the dynamic. Aging, additives, contamination, substituting for primary materials. mixing of different plastic types and other factors conspi- re to hold back this market. As a result, recycling of- For further recycling to be economically attractive, it ten results in low-value secondary materials produced is necessary to either reduce the cost of collection and at relatively high cost. In CO2 terms, abatement costs secondary materials production, or to increase the value are around 50–100 EUR per tonne CO2. Even though of the material produced. A key finding of our analysis is plastics recycling rates as high as 30% are reported in that the scope for high-quality secondary materials pro- the EU, the actual volume of secondary materials in the duction is far from exhausted, for two main reasons: market is only 10%. As illustrated in Exhibit 14, a range First, there are numerous barriers and market failures that of measures to improve the collection and processing now hinder what would otherwise be cost-effective mate- of plastics for recycling could transform the economics. rials recovery and secondary materials production. One Once we have a system that retains substantial value, major problem is that current processes for product de- recycling plastics can become profitable, and take off on sign and dismantling, from cars to buildings and packa- a larger scale. Our analysis suggests that this is feasible ging, lead to significant materials degradation. Even mi- for the top five plastic types.

36 EMISSIONS FROM PLASTICS WITHIN THE EU Mt CO2 PER YEAR 24

90

76% EHIBIT 33 34

233

132

2017 DEMAND GROWTH INCREASED EMISSIONS IMPROVED PRODUCTION 2050 AT END OF LIFE

WITH CURRENT DEVELOPMENT, CO2 EMISSIONS FROM RECYCLING OFFERS ONE OF THE FEW WAYS TO EHIBIT 32 PLASTICS WOULD BE 40% OF 2050 TARGET REDUCE EMISSIONS

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM PLASTIC, 2017 AND 2050, AS CO2 INTENSITY OF VIRGIN AND RECYCLED MATERIAL TONNE or ton SHARE OF EMISSION TARGET TONNE CO2 PER TONNE PLASTIC Mt CO2 PER YEAR

2017 2050 BORTTAGEN4 000 51 ENERGY RECOVERY 27 500

98% 92% 60%

200 25 PRODUCTION 77 04

CURRENT EMISSIONS EMISSION EMISSIONS PRODUCTION RECYCLING TOTAL FROM TARGET FROM OF NEW PLASTIC EMISSIONS PLASTICS PLASTICS ENERGY RECOVERY

CUMULATIVE EMISSIONS TO 2100 EHIBIT 33 Gt CO2, GLOBAL, 2015-2100

PROECTED CO2 EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS CARBON BUDGET TO 2100

914 ALUMINIUM 66 800 BORTTAGENCEMENT 254

STEEL 307 300

PLASTICS 288

BAT ASSUMING CURRENT 2 CARBON BUDGET FOR CARBON BUDGET EU LEVEL CONSUMPTION INDUSTRY AND ENERGY AVAILABLE FOR GLOBALLY MATERIALS

Share of European plastics demand (49Mt) EHIBIT 35 %, 2015

60% OF PLASTICS DEMAND

PACKAGING BUILDING AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS OTHERS CONSTRUCTION

PE POLYETHEN

PP POLYPROPHEN

PS POLYSTYRENE INCL EPS FOAM

PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE

PET POLYETHYLENE TEREPHTHALATE

OTHER PLASTICS

40% 20% 9% 6% 26%

PLASTIC VOLUMES IN EUROPE, 2015 Mt PER YEAR EHIBIT 36 Export in products Stock build-up Misclassi ed waste Etc 9

19

58 4 90% 49 10 30 26 7 4 9 5 PLASTICS NET DEMAND USE BALANCE END OF LIFE UNSORTED COLLECTED ENERGY COLLECTED PROCESS RECYCLING PRODUCTION EPORT AND STOCK PLASTICS PLASTICS IN PLASTIC RECOVERY FOR LOSSES IN BUILDUP HOUSHOLD WASTE RECYCLING RECYCLING WASTE

FROM TO EHIBIT 37 Policy-driven system based on waste Self-sustaining system, driven by value of secondary 1 management; revenues do not cover costs materials (with regulation of externalities)

Focus on increasing collection volumes – Focus on secondary material production and ability to 2 similar to other ‘waste’ flows replace virgin material one-to-one Ludde gör denna 3 Onus on recycling industries to handle deeply Transformation through policy-driven coordination to enable direkt i InDesign? suboptimal flows in largely unchanged system simultaneous change across value chain 4 Product design does not bear costs for Materials and design choices account for recyclability, downstream externalities and costs recycled content and disassembly 5 Incentives focused on supply into recycling Demand-side incentives create market certainty and process stimulate investment in capacity 6 Recycling rooted in local, small-scale waste Large-scale and regional raw materials industry, with handling, with patchy coverage harmonized systems, specialisation, and product standards

7 Design and end-of-life treatment without focus Products designed and dismantled to retain secondary on retaining material value material value

Virgin plastics carry cost for embodied carbon (other Virgin plastics do not carry cost of externalities 8 externalities likely via regulation)

PLASTIC PRODUCTION EMISSIONS Mt CO2, EUROPE, 2050 EHIBIT 38 233

116

Rdditional recycling Substitution with other materials Renewable energy in production Biobased or CO2 feedstock 117 Process innovation

2050 WITH 100% CIRCULAR ABATEMENT REMAINING RENEWABLE RENEWABLE ENERGY RECOVERY POTENTIAL 2050 EMISSIONS ENERGY REDUCTION 2050 EMISSIONS

TOTAL

28% WHAT TAKES TO GET THERE NOT COLLECTED STOCK 47% 85% of 5 most common plastics collected for 1% recycling with signi cant yield increases (90% yield) Shift from land ll to energy recovery for non-recycled 17% Reduced stock build-up and increased collection for EHIBIT 39 recycling Reuse of: 12% 8% of packaging, especially industrial 20% Ludde xar LANDFILL 3% of B&C plastics, esp. PVC carpets, pipes etc. Minimum text 7 pt. 4% of large automotive parts

15% ENERGY RECOVERY 37%

YIELD LOSSES 8% RECYCLED 10% REUSE 0% 4% 2017 2050

PACKAGING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION AUTOMOTIVE

5% 11% NOT COLLECTED 21% 2% STOCK 18% 16% 2% 2% 47% 15% 17% 32% LANDFILL 25% 76% 12%

ENERGY RECOVERY 22% 18% 53% 30% 47% YIELD LOSSES 13% 8% 5% 32% 9% RECYCLED 19% 11% 3% REUSE 0% 10% 0% 5% 4% 0% 6% 4% 2017 2050 2017 2050 2017 2050

REMAINING EMISSIONS 2050 Mt CO EHIBIT 313 2

REBOUND 117 Recycled plastics of lower quality do not replace the same volume of virgin plastics and may lead PRODUCTION FOR STOCK BUILD to an increased demand of total plastics 11 Around 10% of demand results in net stock build-up, requiring additional primary production 22 REUSE AND RECYCLING EMISSIONS 80% from yield losses in chemical recycling, the YIELD LOSSES remainder from mechanical recycling Yield losses in pre-treatment, recycling and 14 reuse process sent to energy recovery Process improvements as well as product design and choice of material important to maximize yields

42 AGED, DEGRADED, CONTAMINATED AND NOT COLLECTED COMMON PLASTICS Relatively small given option of chemical recycling THERMOSETS AND SMALL VOLUME Remaining share is aged, contaminated, or not captured by collection systems SPECIALTY PLASTICS 16 Challenging to achieve scale in small specialty plastics streams 12

VALUE EUR/ton

EHIBIT 310 1700 EUR ORIGINAL MATERIAL VALUE, 50B EUR

ton, ore TONNE 1000 EUR

VOLUME REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE tonnes TODAY 55% COLLECTION CIRCULAR SYSTEM 90% value loss >80% of value still lost, 50% of value retained “30% collection” Large process losses in recycling Higher recycling yields increase but just 16% Uphill struggle to increase of volume recycling volume further – at a net cost High value retention provides Rebound eects as downgraded revenue for investment in self- plastics cannot replace virgin sustaining systems and scaling plastics in many uses Recycling can replace virgin production Exhibit 14 Plastics recycling can be made economically EHIBIT 310 viable through a range of measures REDUCED RECYCLING COSTS HIGHER REVENUES EUR / TON TREATED PLASTICS EUR / TON TREATED PLASTICS

924 926

16% COLLECTION 186 774 71% 119 SORTING 191 147 PACKAGING EXAMPLE 540 LOGISTICS 15 10

337 RECYCLING 439

162 INVESTMENT 93 REVENUES

2017 2050 2017 2050

Cleaner ows from materials choices and Increased yields give larger revenues per tonne product design optimised for recycling treated plastic (better technology, cleaner inows) Increased scale reduces unit cost Higher quality enables pricing closer to virgin Specialisation and regional integration of markets materials (additional sorting, improved technology, Technological improvement boosts eciency but cleaner ows and optimised products) requires higher investment Raised cost of virgin materials improves Reduced risk from regulations and market willingness to pay for secondary products uncertainty Better functioning markets reduce current commercial risk to buyers

DEEP TRANSFORMATION THAT REUIRES COORDINATED AND SUSTAINED ACTION ACROSS VALUE CHAIN

EMISSIONS SAVINGS Mt CO2 / YEAR 37 EHIBIT 312 80

EEE Low quality increased recycling 303 Automotive Low quality increased recycling 144 Agriculture Low quality increased recycling 97 70

NEED UPDATE Packaging Low quality increased recycling 40

60 Har lite svårt att förstå den här grafen. Handlar det om att tydliggöra inom vilka Other plastics Low quality increased recycling 21 områden man kan minska CO2 utsläppen med minsta 50 kostnaden. dvs dom 4 områden som ligger mellan B&C Low quality increased recycling 66 ~29 - 72 Mt CO2 ? Hur kan Abatement (reducerings- ?) cost vara negativ. vad innebär det. 40 Packaging High quality increased recycling 96

Agriculture High quality increased recycling 115 30 EEE High quality increased recycling 138

B&C High quality increased recycling 138

20 Automotive High quality increased recycling 149

Other plastics High quality increased recycling 170

10

Packaging Reuse 179

EEE Reuse 192 B&C Reuse 202 Automotive Reuse 203 200 150 100 50 0 50 100 150 200 250 300

ABATEMENT COST EUR/t CO2

EHIBIT 311

ABATEMENT COST PACKAGING EAMPLE EUR PER TON ABATED CO2

257

43 68 101

2017 COST INCREASED ABATEMENT PER REDUCED COST OF RECYCLING, INCREASED REVENUES FROM TONNE OF PLASTIC RECYCLED ESPECIALLY THROUGH HIGHERUALITY SECONDARY INCREASED YIELDS MATERIALS

EHIBIT 314 CURRENT POLICIES COVER ONLY PARTS OF THE RANGE OF BARRIERS TO HIGH-VALUE PLASTICS RECYCLING

CURRENT POLICY FOCUS NO LITTLE POLICY FOCUS TODAY PARTIAL POLICY COVER TODAY

FEES Correct for externalities for primary production of plastics PRODUCT DESIGN Regulation and fees to correct PRODUCER RESPONSIBILITY for externalities on secondary Dierentiation to reect downstream materials FRGPALETT impacts on recyclability PRODUCT COLLECTION TARGETS Are the main denominator of LANDFILL ENERGY current policies RECOVERY TA FEE To boost value of recycling COLLECTION

PRODUCT DISPOSAL Reward practices conducive to ENDOFLIFE high value recycling TREATMENT

STANDARDISATION Quality standards for recyclates and guarantees for recycled content SECONDARY MATERIAL PUBLIC PROCUREMENT PRODUCTION To create demand pull in nascent markets

REGULATION OF ADDITIVES MARKET FOR DEMAND PULL Limiting toxic substances (current) and use RECYCLED Quotas to create demand of additives inimical to recycling (future) MATERIAL pull for nascent markets

EAMPLES OF POLICIES ALL WOULD NEED CAREFUL EVALUATION

REMAINING EMISSIONS 2050 Mt CO 2 REBOUND 117 Recycled plastics of lower quality do not replace the same volume of virgin plastics and may lead to an increased demand of total plastics 11 PRODUCTION FOR STOCK BUILD Around 10% of demand results in net stock EHIBIT 313 build-up, requiring additional primary production 22 REUSE AND RECYCLING EMISSIONS 117 80% from yield losses in chemical recycling, the remainder from mechanical recycling 14

YIELD LOSSES Yield losses in pre-treatment, recycling and reuse process sent to energy recovery Process improvements as well as product design and choice of material important to maximize yields 42 AGED, DEGRADED, CONTAMINATED AND NOT COLLECTED COMMON PLASTICS Relatively small given option of chemical recycling Remaining share is aged, contaminated, or not captured by collection systems THERMOSETS AND SMALL VOLUME SPECIALTY PLASTICS 16 Challenging to achieve scale in small specialty plastics streams 12 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

2. Major value chains could reduce the amount of materials required for products

Measures aimed at using materials more efficiently • Increased automation can reduce the trade-off cover a wide gamut and can vary significantly in the tra- between materials efficiency and labour cost. This often de-offs between reduced materials use and other costs. is the limiting factor today; for example, a major reason What all these have in common is that they reduce ma- for over-specification of steel in buildings is the additio- terials use by changing production processes or product nal labour cost of using more custom-made components. design – encompassing measures such as reduced pro- With automation of more of the construction process, this cess scrap in manufacturing, reduced materials waste trade-off could be reduced. in construction, more materials-efficient production tech- • Increased utilisation and lifetime – as part of sha- niques such as customised structural elements in buil- ring models of mobility and buildings use – can justified dings, and the use of high-strength materials. the use of lighter but more costly materials, by spreading their cost over a much more extensive period of use. The financial benefit is primarily the avoided cost of materials. The costs of the measures, on the other hand, • Reducing the need for spare capacity – a real can include factors such as larger inventories, smaller possibility with new business models – would address scale of operation, higher labour cost, or slower produc- a major driver of materials use today. Personal vehicles tion. Interviews with market actors suggest that the ba- are a good example. Although most people rarely use lance between these two depends strongly on specific every seat in their car, few would want to own a car that circumstances, and we therefore have been cautious with can only carry one or two people. However, in a system cost estimates in the above abatement cost curve. On of shared fleets of cars, such vehicles would be more the other hand, several companies indicated in interviews economically viable. A fleet could have some larger cars, that they have found low-hanging fruit that enabled sub- and others designed for one- or two-person trips. In that stantial materials savings without large costs. context, ‘lightweighting’ could be achieved at scale at low or even negative costs simply by making smaller cars. For all the caveats, there are four broad trends that support a move to greater cost-effectiveness in improving None of this means that increased materials efficiency materials efficiency: will necessarily happen by itself. The materials footprint of products and structures often is low on the agenda • Technical advances can drastically lower the cost today. But it shows that important CO2 gains could be of reducing waste in production. A prominent example available without incurring very high costs. is ‘additive’ manufacturing methods such as 3D-printing, which can almost eliminate production scrap. Another is advances in building information management systems, which mark and track construction materials much more closely, and have shown significant potential for reducing waste of materials in the construction phase.

38 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

A major reason for over-specification of steel in buildings is the additional labour cost of using more custom-made components.

39 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

3. New business models could yield major productivity gains and other co-benefits

Some of the most economically attractive options are kilometres – with much lower costs as a result. Similar to be found in circularity strategies that focus on using approaches could be taken to use buildings (and indi- products more efficiently. Several of these measures vidual spaces within them) more efficiently, and to -ex would reduce CO2 emissions at a significant net profit. tend lifetimes (of whole buildings or parts) so that future This is because they involve making large systemic im- construction activity could be reduced. provements to boost productivity in the value chains for mobility and for buildings. As we discuss below, the real issue with such system shifts is not whether they would be more productive and Today, large transaction costs undermine the econo- lower-cost – they undoubtedly would, as shown in Exhi- mic efficiency with which we use key assets. The average bit 15. Moreover, they could have substantial co-bene- European car is used at 2% of its capacity, and even fits, from lower pollution to reduced traffic congestion. during business hours, the average European office spa- However, they would constitute a major shift in how mobi- ce is only used at about 40% of capacity. In contrast, lity and buildings use are organised. What the abatement a system of shared vehicles, designed to be optimised cost analysis shows is that these shifts would make a for intensive use and with much longer lifetimes, would major contribution towards a low-carbon transition, while spread the cost of cars over a much greater number of also offering economic advantages.

40 PRIMARY STEEL USED FOR MOBILITY SERVICES TON PRIMARY STEEL PER MILLION PASSENGER KILOMETRE

MATERIALS RECIRCULATION PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS

I 1.84

0.29 II

EXHIBIT 1.10 0.35 III -70 %

0.65

0.56

BASELINE CIRCULAR SCENARIO

A CIRCULAR SCENARIO RESULT IN MOBILITY SERVICES BEING PROVIDED WITH MUCH LESS PRIMARY STEEL USED PER UNIT, THROUGH:

III I MATERIALS RECIRCULATION II MORE MATERIAL IMPROVED PRODUCTIVITY OF USE already is a major part of steelmaking, with -EFFICIENT PRODUCTS has particularly large potential for vehicles. Today’s passenger cars use secondary (recycled) steel making up around can reduce steel requirements by only 2% of their capacity, because they are parked most of the time and one-third of current global production. Still, some 30%. e rst step is to often carry only one or two people when used. Replacing a large share of there is much potential to increase recycling by reduce process losses; up to half of personal vehicles with a system of eet-managed, shared vehicles would improving collection rates, avoiding steel now ends up as process scrap mean that cars could not only be used more intensively, but such use contamination with copper, reducing losses rather than in the nal product. would make a range of strategies feasible that extend their lifetimes. ese during remelting, and avoiding downgrading. A second step is to make cars in a include more durable design and higher-value materials, a greater share Together, these measures could reduce the much wider range of sizes, and to of intrinsically more durable electric vehicles, predictive and eet-man- need for global primary steel production by use more advanced materials that aged maintenance, and modular design for reuse and remanufacturing. another 14% by 2050, and as much as 80% may cost more, but pay o when e combination of sharing and longer lifetimes could almost halve the in a more mature economy such as the EU. vehicles are used more intensively. amount of materials needed per passenger-kilometre travelled.

EMISSIONS INTENSITY

t CO2 / t MATERIAL EXHIBIT 1.11

2,0 REMAINING EMISSIONS AFTER TOTAL EMISSIONS DEMAND-SIDE ABATEMENT IN THE EU 2050

234 MT 530 MT CO 2 CO2 1,5 ILLUSTRATIVE SUPPLY-SIDE

REDUCTION OF 209 MT CO2 THROUGH: CIRCULARITY REDUCES PRIMARY • EFFICIENCY AND MATERIALS DEMAND, RESULTING RENEWABLE ENERGY IN 296 MT CO2 ABATEMENT 1,0 • ELECTRIFICATION AND PROCESS BREAKTHROUGHS • CARBON CAPTURE AND STORAGE

0,5 25 MT

CO2 REMAINING EMISSIONS AFTER DEMAND – AND SUPPLY-SIDE ABATEMENT PRIMARY 0,0 MATERIALS MILLION TONNES 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 320 MATERIAL

EXHIBIT 1.12

CUMULATIVE EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS PRODUCTION, 2015 – 2100

BILLION TONNES OF CO2

STEEL ALUMINIUM

1000 PLASTICS (PRODUCTION) CEMENT 918 333 PLASTICS (EMBEDDED) 900

800

700

178 600 To meet climate targets: Additional circularity Production process breakthroughs 500 Material substitution 408

400

300

200 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

100

0 BASELINE DEMAND-SIDE CURRENT REMAINING FURTHER EMISSIONS EMISSIONS MEASURES LOW-CARBON EMISSIONS REDUCTIONS REQUIRED FOR (CIRCULARITY) PROCESSESExhibit 15 CLIMATE TARGETS A systemic shift towards circularity is a major productivity opportunity – both for individual users and society

TOTAL COST REDUCTION POTENTIAL CO-BENEFITS FROM A SHIFT TOWARDS SHARED CARS EXHIBIT 1.15 EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES

264

155

-74 %

-77 %

14 % 14 % 68 35

CURRENT CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO SCENARIO

COST FOR MATERIALS, COST OF SOCIETY, INCLUDING INFRASTRUCTURE, MANUFACTURING AND DISTRIBUTION PARKING AND LAND

COST OF DRIVING, INCLUDING FUEL, COST FOR CONGESTION INSURANCE, PARKING ETC.

COST FOR MAINTENANCE OTHER EXTERNALITIES, INCLUDING ACCIDENTS, NOISE AND AIR POLLUTION

Shared car eets and higher utilisation per car lower cost per kilometre Fewer cars due to higher occupancy per car result in improved Larger share of secondary materials and components reduces cost air quality and reduce noise level and congestion for materials Autonomous cars are safer, reduce need for signs, lanes Shared cars that are to a larger extent electric, autonomous and of and other infrastructure and can optimise tra c ows smaller average size reduce cost of materials and cost of driving More electric vehicles reduce noise level and have positive impact Longer car lifetime reduces costs per kilometre, while more durable on air quality, especially when shit ng towards renewable energy materials, autonomous cars etc. also have negative impact on cost savings sources

41 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

SEIZING THE OPPORTUNITY WILL REQUIRE LEADERSHIP AND CONCERTED ACTION

A key take-away from our analysis is that the potenti- the concrete mitigation and industrial opportunity is in al of circular economy measures can only be realised if each materials category and value chain, summarised in policy-makers and businesses actively pursue these op- Exhibit 16. We then turn to a discussion of the feasibility portunities. In this section, we lay out a broad implemen- of different measures, barriers that need to be overcome, tation agenda. We start by describing in more detail what and key policy interventions needed.

42 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Exhibit 16 Abatement opportunities across materials and key measures

DESCRIPTION KEY MEASURES AND ENABLERS CO2 ABATEMENT

As the EU steel stock saturates, there Enable high-quality secondary production is potential to meet demand to a large ex- through more advanced scrap markets tent through secondary steel production. In Avoiding contamination of steel by copper combination with low-carbon electricity, this Increase collection of post 41 MT STEEL makes possible deep cuts to emissions consumer scrap Reduce fabrication scrap

Plastics recycling is very low, despite Product design that facilitates recycling high technical potential. Secondary plas- Large-scale and specialised recycling tics production driven by intrinsic materials operations and regional integration of markets 117 MT value could see more than half of total plas- Technology development for sorting, PLASTICS tics recycled automation, and chemical recycling

Aluminium recycling can be increased Reduce collection losses further by reducing losses of aluminium, Increase alloy separation in scrap process scrap, and by avoiding the downg- recycling to avoid downgrading and 26 MT rading of aluminium through the mixing of thereby increase the usefulness of ALUMINIUM different qualities of metal secondary aluminium Reduce scrap forming during production

Cement recycling is at an early stage, Increased development of smart but both re-grinding and re-use of building and increased use of recovered structural segments are now being trialled concrete in construction 25 MT CEMENT Development of local markets for re-use of structural segments

Materials in cars have the potential to be Increased lifetime and more durable more efficiently used when cars are shared materials will be keys to the economic and more intensely used logic of the sharing model 19 MT PASSENGER CARS Vehicle size customized for the number of people riding saves materials as cars can be smaller

Material use for buildings can decrease Material savings during construction by 30% as they are used more efficiently by reduction of waste Through engineering for light weighting can less material be used Development of local markets for 55 MT BUILDINGS re-use of building components Increased sharing of space to reduce total floor space

Similar CO2 abatement opportunities for Light weighting to reduce materials other product groups, such as rest of trans- per product OTHERS portation, machinery etc. Development of local markets for re-use of building components 13 MT Prolonged lifetime Leasing models to increase utilisation

43 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE Understanding the opportunities and barriers across materials and value chains

STEEL

The CO2 abatement potential for steel use arises from Building such a circular system would require three the possibility that future EU steel needs could be met to main actions. First, current losses of steel need to be a large extent by recycling existing steel. Current practice reduced by higher collection of process scrap and scrap is not set up for this possibility, but instead requires a from end-of-life products. Second, secondary steel pro- substantial share of primary production – both to replace duction needs to improve to match the quality of primary steel that is lost at various points in the use cycle, and to steel. Today, secondary steel is disproportionately used compensate for downgrading of steel quality. By addres- for relatively basic construction , while for more de- sing these issues, the EU could transition to a much manding uses, primary metal is typically used. If secon- more circular steel system by 2050, replacing 30 Mt of dary production is to serve also more demanding product today’s 92 Mt of primary steel production by secondary groups, a more developed market is required, matching production, and reducing emissions by 57 Mt CO2 per scrap inputs to secondary steelmaking with the needs year by mid-century. and tolerances of high-quality steel production. This is doable, as demonstrated by several producers who rely Achieving this would require a major reconfiguration of on a combination of good control of scrap supplies and EU steel production. The current industry reflects a long advanced metallurgy to make some of the highest-quality legacy of building up a substantial steel stock – i.e., the steels in the world – entirely from scrap. It also would total amount of steel in use in the economy at any one create new sources of value and business opportunity in time. This has required constant additions of new, pri- a more advanced scrap market. mary metal. Primary production now accounts for nearly 60% of production, and the large majority of the sector’s Third, it is crucial to address the problem of copper CO2 emissions of around 230 Mt per year. pollution. Copper often enters steel scrap at the point of recycling, as products containing both steel and copper These parameters may change in decades ahead. The are dismantled. When cars are scrapped, for example, growth in the total stock is slowing and may well saturate it is common for the steel to have more than 0.4% of in the next decades. At this point, demand is concentra- copper content even after basic processing. This redu- ted on producing steel to replace annual stock turnover ces the quality and potential uses of the secondary steel. of 2–3%. A detailed analysis of available steel stocks and Even levels of 0.2–0.3%, which are seen in several EU flows suggests that the volume of scrap available will countries, lower the value of the steel. Moreover, once approach total steel requirements, likely by the 2030s. mixed in, copper cannot be separated from the steel with This is a major shift, with the prospect that, for the first any commercially viable technique. To keep the quality of time, an industrial economy could meet its steel requi- the steel stock, processes must be improved to dismant- rements largely by recirculating the stock it has already le products more carefully at end of life, to sort better, built up. Given the much lower CO2 emissions from se- and to separate high-copper scrap from purer varieties. condary steel production, this also could drastically redu- Design improvements can also make it easier to avoid ce CO2 emissions from steel production. cross-contamination of materials during recycling.

44 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

PLASTICS

Most plastics can be recycled and used multiple times, product groups. Better design can make it easier to se- but as noted above, actual volumes of secondary plas- parate different types of plastic, for example, and make tics production amount to just 10% of total demand in used plastics easier to clean. This represents a major the EU. A detailed assessment of plastic types and use change from today’s practice, where plastics recycling categories suggests that 56% of plastic volumes could has sprung mostly from a waste handling logic, with little be mechanically recycled or reused, with the recovered or no adaptation ‘upstream’. In tandem, secondary plas- material value paying for much of the cost. Another 11% tics production must transition from today’s fragmented could be recouped through chemical recycling techni- and small-scale activity to large-scale operations that can ques (such as pyrolysis and depolymerisation). Together, reap substantial benefits of scale and enable specialisa- these measures would reduce emissions from 233 to tion. Finally, major investments are needed to accelerate 144 Mt CO2 per year, compared with producing new the development of technologies to mark different plas- plastics and incinerating them at end-of-life. tic types, automate sorting and processing, and recycle plastics chemically. Indeed, plastics offerthe greatest untapped potential identified in our analysis. It arises both because of the Although these changes can seem daunting given low starting point for recycling, and because the contri- today’s low starting point, much can be gained by first bution of plastics to CO2 emissions will grow drastically focusing on three key product categories – packaging, over time. Right now, the main alternative to recycling is automotive and buildings – and on the five plastic ty- incineration of plastics for energy recovery – essentially, pes that jointly represent more than 70% of plastics use. using them as a fossil fuel, and in the process releasing Over time, successful approaches can be rolled out more as much CO2 as was created when the plastics were broadly to fully realise the potential for cost savings and first produced. Today the net emissions from incinerating CO2 reductions. plastics are rarely noted and arguably modest, as another fossil fuel would likely be used instead. By mid-century, Moreover, achieving this would have significant econo- however, heat and electricity production in a low-carbon mic value: our analysis suggests that concurrent impro- EU would need to be largely emissions free. At this point, vements in product design and materials choice; increa- using plastics for energy production becomes a major sed scale in collection and recycling, and improvement source of fossil CO2 emissions. Recycling helps avoid in underlying technologies jointly can substantially im- that problem. prove the economics of recycling. Much of it could be driven by underlying value of the material, or else have To achieve recycling of 56% of plastics volumes (rather a low cost of abatement compared to many other me- than the 10% we see today) will require change throug- asures to reduce CO¬¬2. In tandem, a secondary plas- hout the value chain. Above all, the potential for high-qu- tics industry of this scale would have revenues of some ality recycling must be built into the design of the main 30 billion per year.

45 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

ALUMINIUM

The resource gains from recycling are particularly large Specifically, today’s is an ‘open in the case of aluminium, as remelting existing metal re- loop’: after first use, a variety of specialised aluminium quires just 5% of the energy of new production. Moreover, alloys are often mixed together and used to produce cast the EU imports about one third of its aluminium, much aluminium. However, the recycled material has limited of it produced with coal-fired electricity and carrying a uses; most aluminium products need to be made from CO¬2 footprint as high as 18 tonnes CO2 per tonne of metal with much more tightly controlled alloy content. aluminium – almost nine times more than one tonne of Over the next decades, a continuation of downgrading primary steel . Recycling aluminium can reduce CO2 of aluminium therefore threatens to undermine recycling. emissions by as much as 98% relative to this. This is even more so as cast aluminium is used primarily in components of internal combustion engine drivetrains Reducing the need for primary aluminium, particular- of cars. As global markets shift more and more to electric ly imports, could thus yield significant energy savings vehicles, demand for cast aluminium could fall, even as and CO2 reductions. We estimate that improvement on more and more aluminium is alloyed to the point where it current practice could avoid 3-5 Mt per year of primary has no other uses than to make cast products. aluminium production that otherwise would be required to serve European demand by 2050, or 40-60% of the In decades to come, continued aluminium recycling total. The CO2 avoided could amount to 30-50 Mt CO2 will thus require that additional flows of aluminium are per year. kept in ‘closed loops’, so that metal can be recycled and used for the same purpose repeatedly, similar to current Two changes to current practice will be necessary for practice for beverage cans. As with steel, a continued this. A first step is to reduce losses, which now amount circular system for aluminium would require product de- to almost 30%. This requires higher collection and better sign that enables separation of individual qualities, more end-of-life treatment for a range of products, alongside developed dismantling of products at end-of-life, advan- design of those products so that aluminium can be re- ced sorting technology, and additional deposit schemes. covered. Overall, aluminium therefore is yet another example It also will be necessary to improve recycling practi- of how a future circular system will require change of ce, as current methods result in irreversible downgrading current practice, with large CO¬¬2 benefits as a result. that in time will become an obstacle to recycling. This also creates new opportunities for value creation, in preserving and monetising the inherent value in secon- dary materials.

46 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

PASSENGER CARS

As noted above, passenger cars offer a major opportu- ring of vehicles also makes possible a much closer match nity provide the same service with much lower materials of vehicle size to the needs of individual trips, thus redu- requirements. We find that in a system where professio- cing the average size of vehicles substantially. nally managed, shared vehicle fleets meet two thirds of travel demand, materials requirements could fall by as These factors combined can reduce materials require- much as 75%, reducing annual CO2 emissions associa- ments dramatically. The average car would be smaller, far ted with materials production by 43 Mt by 2050. more durable, and better maintained. The initial design and materials choices would be optimised for much more inten- Today’s cars are optimised for the use pattern associ- sive use. Combined with an electric drivetrain, the effective ated with ownership by individual households. The result lifetime therefore could more than double. Lightweighting is overcapacity of individual vehicles (five-seat cars used techniques that use advanced materials would be far more mostly for one-passenger trips), and vehicles that are economic than when applied to a personal car. The same is stationary 95% of the time. Vehicle design therefore also true of using automation to reduce accident risk, and apply- is optimised for this structure of use and ownership. ing more advanced manufacturing methods such as 3D-prin- ting to reduce materials losses at the production stage. A car system built around professionally managed fle- ets of shared cars would change many of the underlying Although we describe this primarily in terms of materi- incentives. Sharing enables much more intensive use of als requirements, the main motivation for such a system each vehicle. Once the use of these fleets achieves suffi- is the much wider productivity opportunity that it repre- cient scale, there will be enormous incentives for changes sents. As noted above, we calculate that the cost per pas- to the design of vehicles and for innovation. Higher uti- senger-kilometre could be as much as 77% lower. Major lisation justifies much more investment in upfront costs, externalities also could be reduced by three-quarters, from the higher cost of electric-vehicle drivetrains, to more including major costs from factors such as traffic cong- advanced automation technology, or higher-performance estion, air pollution and collisions. Although the pace of materials. Professionally managed fleets in turn also ena- change will depend on many factors, not least travellers’ ble much greater control over vehicle maintenance, parts expectations and norms about car ownerships, the analy- inventory, reuse of components, and remanufacture. Sha- sis makes plain that the incentives are very strong.

47 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

BUILDINGS AND CEMENT

The EU buildings sectors uses as much as 1.6 billion ton- Key opportunities to reduce emissions include: nes (Gt) of materials per year, a number that is likely to grow • Design for longevity and disassembly: Much of the as the total stock is slowly expanding, and a wave of post- abatement potential lies beyond 2050 but requires action war buildings will require substantial renovation or replace- today to avoid saddling future generations with unneces- ment in decades ahead. The CO¬¬2 footprint is significant, sary construction needs. and in the EU countries that have gone furthest in improving energy efficiency and decarbonising heat, the construction • Floor space sharing: Sharing principles include com- phase now accounts for as much as half of the lifetime munal space-sharing in residential settings, co-working CO¬¬2 footprint of a building (with the use-phase the remai- offices, etc. ning half) [Ref 2014 IVA report] . By 2050, we estimate that • Reuse of existing buildings: adaptive reuse (i.e. just cement, steel, aluminium and plastic used for construc- reuse of the building structure for a new purpose, e.g. tion would result in emissions of 230 Mt CO¬¬2 if they were office building becoming residential building), relocation made with today’s production processes. Demand-side me- of buildings (reuse of structure on a new site) and reuse asures could reduce this by 80 Mt CO¬¬2 per year, or 30%. of building components can save up to 70% of materials that otherwise would go to waste. The abatement potential springs from addressing sig- • Materials efficiency: reducing materials needed nificant underlying inefficiencies in the construction value per building through new materials choices, new de- chain. The building sector is characterised by multiple sign of building components, less over-design, and new stakeholders with diverse interests and contract structu- construction techniques. res from design, through to construction and use. These result in deeply split incentives; for example, a common • Reduced waste in construction: waste during situation is that the client pays for materials, whereas the construction can be reduced by 5–10% of total materi- builder can only improve profit by reducing labour costs als through increased standardization, improved planning – skewing incentives strongly against strategies to redu- and appropriate storage and transportation. ce materials use. The rate of innovation and knowledge • Cement recycling and reuse: there is some potential diffusion also is slow, as a result of high industry fragmen- both to reprocess concrete to recover some unreacted tation, high workforce turnover, a project-based business, cement, and to directly reuse structural elements. Scaling and low investment and R&D in a cyclical and volatile bu- these would depend on highly developed, local markets. siness. One marker of the inefficiencies is stagnant labour productivity, with no growth over the past 15 years (even In many cases, these strategies are underused today as manufacturing productivity increased by a third). not because they are inherently expensive, but because a range of barriers and split incentives prevent their deploy- Unsurprisingly, these features also translate to signi- ment. This resembles the situation for energy efficiency in ficant structural overuse and waste of materials. For ex- buildings, where the solution often has been to mandate ample, an estimated 50% of steel used in buildings is in minimum energy efficiency standards to capture potential excess of what is needed to achieve the desired structu- that is cost-effective. In other cases, the business case ral properties . In some segments, utilisation of building does not stack up today, but could improve with new space is very low; for example, some 60% of European technology. The clearest examples are improved materi- office space is unoccupied even during working hours. als efficiency and reduced waste in construction, both of Between 10–15% of delivered materials are not employ- which are limited today by the concern to reduce labour ed in actual construction process but wasted. Buildings cost. Digitalisation of materials management and auto- often are demolished wholesale, even when structural mation of construction could significantly reduce the cost elements (accounting for 85% of the GHG footprint of of techniques to reduce materials use. materials) have long remaining technical lifetime.

48 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE Other value chains Passenger cars and buildings jointly account for just under half of emissions from cement, steel, plastics and aluminium. However, many of the underlying principles also apply to other products, inclu- ding heavy-goods vehicles, machinery in agriculture and industry, packaging, some infrastructure, and several consumer goods categories. The potential in these sectors is likely to be lower than the 75% reduction in the case of passenger cars, but a conservative analysis suggests that some 13 Mt CO¬2 of additional abatement would be available in the EU through a range of circular economy strategies across additional transport, consumer goods, and infrastructure and construction value chains.

49 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

A new policy agenda is needed to realise the CO2 abatement potential The opportunities explored above, cumulatively, would As with other climate policy challenges, a concerted significantly reduce CO2 emissions from industry. Mor- effort is needed to understand potentials, identify and eover, as shown in Section 3, many of the options are test new approaches, recognise and avoid unintended economically attractive, powered by the inherently higher consequences and undue costs, and coordinate efforts. productivity of shared mobility systems and the savings The agenda may seem daunting at first, but in many ca- from reduced waste and avoided materials costs. Yet ses, policy-makers can build on frameworks already in it is also clear that multiple barriers stand in the way. place. Some, such as the problem of copper contamination of steel, will require sector-specific measures and speciali- Our analysis did not investigate the merits of specific sed technologies; others, such as high-value plastics re- policy instruments, so we do not offer specific recom- cycling, require much more alignment of incentives along mendations. However, we sketch below the elements of value chains, from the initial design of a product to its this policy agenda at a high level, recognising that much end-of-life treatment. more investigation is required to elaborate concrete poli- cy proposals. Four broad approaches are needed: Energy efficiency againoffers a helpful example. As the barriers that hinder progress have been recognised, 1. Set the direction and recognise the potential of the policy-makers have adopted a wide range of interventions circular economy as a major contributor to climate tar- to capture cost-effective potential – from aggregate tar- gets. gets, through to quota systems, financing mechanisms, subsidies, and detailed product-level standards and la- 2. Create enablers: from publicly funded research, to belling schemes. Similarly, multi-faceted approaches will infrastructure, to regulatory frameworks. be needed to promote circularity. 3. Level the playing field, to remove incentives to was- Circular economy policy will require action across waste, te and improve the financial case for investment in circu- transportation, and the built environment, as well as infra- lar economy measures. structure, industrial and innovation policy. Some will cover familiar ground – such as effective – 4. Take government action across a range of areas, but some will push policy-makers into unfamiliar realms and especially where government already is a major actor require learning and ingenuity. Along with EU-level policies, shaping outcomes. these measures will require national implementation as well as attention by cities and regional authorities.

50 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Exhibit 17 Policy approaches and examples of potential measures to achieve them for different circular economy areas

SET THE DIRECTION TILT THE PLAYING FIELD TAKE GOVERNMENT ACTION CREATE ENABLERS

Targets for high value Support for innovation Carbon pricing Public procurement recycling and technology deve- Extended producer lopment Waste regulation systems responsibility Improved transparency and statistics for waste Standards for Quotas or other support MATERIALS and recycling secondary materials for demand RECIRCULATION Waste regulations and Improved end-of-life landfill bans handling (e.g. shred- ding, demolition) Regulation of long-term destructive practices Product design (e.g. (e.g. copper, additives) Ecodesign directive)

Targets for efficient Information systems Waste charges Stimulate re-use and materials use and re-use and platforms (e.g. recycling markets in key sectors BIM) Support for design for disassembly Require high materials PRODUCT Materials passports and Labelling schemes for efficiency (re-use, design documentation materials efficiency in for disassembly, etc.) in MATERIALS construction etc. public procurement EFFICIENCY Fund innovation and technology development

Improved evidence base Create supportive city Pricing or regulation of City plans for longevity and conviction about regulations (e.g. par- congestion, air pollution and adaptability of benefits of shared mobi- king for shared cars) and other externalities buildings lity and buildings Revise barriers in exis- Include efficient mate- Integrate car sharing CIRCULAR Endorse shared mobility ting regulations (e.g., rials use or labelling in with public transport BUSINESS systems as target vision insurance) building standards systems MODELS Adapt data regulations to support in new business models

51 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

1. SET THE DIRECTION 2. CREATE ENABLERS

The potential of circular economy measures to contri- The circular economy will be built mainly by the private se- bute to climate targets is far from recognised in cur- ctor: the companies that produce major materials, the manu- rent climate or industrial policy. Climate action plans facturers, construction firms and consumer goods sellers who at international, national, or city level make no or little put the materials to use, and waste management and recycling reference to this agenda. Thus, as a first step, there is a firms. The crucial role of the public sector in this context is to need to focus the attention of policy-makers, civil socie- facilitate and encourage private action. One key way to do this ty, researchers and business leaders. Policy can help by is to stimulate innovation. Technological advances are making clarifying the intention to incorporate circularity among circularity measures more viable than ever before. Opportuni- other aspects of EU climate and industrial policy. ties to capture value abound: from platforms for car-sharing, to autonomous vehicles, to sensor and sorting technology for The EU’s ‘20-20-20’ 2020 targets for emissions reduc- scrap metals, tracking of materials inflows to buildings, chemi- tions, renewable energy and energy efficiency provide cal marking of plastics types for easy sorting, automation of inspiration in this regard. Although some criticise the construction processes, automated disassembly of complex mixing of many targets, the long-term commitment has products, chemical recycling technologies, methods to remo- also been a significant catalyst in changing expectations ve copper from steel, etc. EU companies that seize these op- about the direction of the energy system. At the time of portunities could position themselves as future global leaders. the targets’ introduction in 2009, there was considera- Private actors may not yet be ready to make major investments ble doubt and disagreement about whether renewable in these innovations, however. The public sector can step up energy would be a major factor in the energy system the pace by funding R&D and early deployment. over the next decade. The targets agreed by EU Mem- ber States coordinated efforts to ensure that it would Regulations may also need to be adapted or introdu- be, and made a major contribution towards channelling ced to enable circular economy opportunities. As ever, the investment, supply-chain industrialisation, and inn- regulatory approaches must be weighed carefully, to ba- ovation that, in turn, helped drive down costs. Today, lance different objectives. Areas of waste regulations to many assessments indicate that a largely renewable consider include how to handle current incentives for inci- energy-based electricity system is not just feasible, but neration of waste; the impact of additives and toxicity on potentially available at a cost similar to one run on fossil plastics recycling; ‘end-of-waste’ policy that can result in fuels. A strong political signal was part of what made obstacles to the trade of secondary materials; and how to that possible. ensure clarity about ownership of and access to end-of-life materials. Standards can offer another area of developme- The circular economy needs a similar articulation of nt, and especially to encourage European or international ambitions. From a CO2 perspective, the key aim is to standards for secondary materials. develop business models and industry structures that enable us to maintain our modern economy and living Other regulatory areas to investigate include measu- standards with much lower levels of primary materials res to increase transparency and reporting. For example, production. That, in turn, requires a) secondary materi- would it be warranted to introduce reporting and track- als production, b) improved materials efficiency in major ing of materials efficiency metrics or the materials con- product groups, and c) increased lifetime and sharing of tent of buildings, much like energy performance or safety materials-intensive capital assets in the economy. Set- standards are today? Or would the impact be limited, and ting targets for these would be a good starting point for costs large? Several reports on the circular economy have the EU. also proposed that the EU expand its Ecodesign directive to consider materials more systematically, whereas others In parallel, policy-makers can help ensure that they have considered this too intrusive an approach. are moving in the right direction by kick-starting a major knowledge effort on the circular economy. Hundreds of Policy also has strong influence on many of the enablers times more research has been done on energy efficien- for new business models based on sharing vehicles or buil- cy than on the efficiency of materials use. We need new dings. These often are data-intensive, and sound approaches knowledge to ensure that long-term policy is based on a to data protection and cybersecurity can be a major factor much fuller understanding of the potential, the barriers, in their long-term viability. Likewise, infrastructure and local and the economics of circular economy measures. policies (from parking rates, to congestion charges and city planning) strongly influence mobility choices, as can public regulations that influences insurance, liability laws, etc.

52 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE segments, recycled cement, recycled plastics), through 3. LEVEL THE PLAYING FIELD subsidy schemes or other mechanisms. Although the- se different options show the range of available possible To a great extent, market conditions today are skewed instruments, significant additional investigation would be in favour of waste and against materials efficiency and reu- required to evaluate first whether such stimulation of de- se. To improve the business case for more circular business mand is warranted, and if so which options are best suited models, the financial incentives will need to change. for different markets and specific situations.

The fact that so many negative-cost opportunities have Policy intervention may also be required to limit ‘re- yet to be seized suggests that carbon prices and related bound’ effects that can arise from increased efficiency. Re- tools will not be enough. Many of the relevant materials are bound arises when the savings from increased efficiency internationally traded commodities, making it difficult for the lead to increased consumption. This is well known in energy EU to unilaterally introduce carbon prices at the levels re- efficiency policy, but has been explored less for materials. quired for deep cuts to emissions – whether on the supply An example would be the possibility that much lower cost or the demand side. But even high carbon prices may not of transportation in a shared car system leads to increased suffice, because many of the barriers are non-financial. Exis- travel and reduced public transit use – already a challenge ting regulations also steer key sectors such as buildings and in some cities. Another risk is that the availability of inexpen- waste management in ways that may encourage or discoura- sive recycled materials (particularly if they are of low quality) ge circularity. Thus, while a carbon price can help, policy-ma- will lead to increased consumption. Policy interventions can kers will need to do much more to unleash the full potential. reduce rebound effects, even if they cannot be fully avoided.

A major issue is how best to provide incentives to manu- facturers to account for the impact of materials and design 4. TAKE GOVERNMENT ACTION choices on component and materials values at the product’s end of life. To date, the main approach has been ‘extended Finally, government can also be a principal actor to enable producer responsibility’, but in practice its implementation pro- the transition to more circular outcomes. The public sector is vides little incentive to modify product design. The externality both a major provider and user of mobility services, owner or therefore remains largely in place, and it should be a priority operator of much of the built environment, and buyer of a range to consider creative approaches for how it can be addressed. of materials-intensive products. That means governments are well positioned to push the market towards a more circular This report has not evaluated which way would be the most economy through their own investments and purchases. promising way forward, and therefore does not provide spe- cific recommendations. To give a flavour of the options that Government also already is a major shaper of outcomes have been proposed, one possibility is that new marking and for transport systems and the built environment, particularly sensor technology could enable systems that create more through decisions taken at the city level. One priority is to en- individual product responsibility incentives. If recycling com- sure public transport systems are integrated with shared car panies can distinguish products from different manufacturers, systems. City planning also influences the nature of buildings. they could then also in principle pay different amounts, depen- As the potential for reduced materials use shows, issues such ding on how adapted the products are for reuse or materials as materials efficiency and flexibility in the building stock are recovery. Another idea that has been floated is to introduce strong contenders to be considered alongside more traditional a system of charges or subsidies that mimics differentiated issues such as the density of occupation, social issues, etc. producer charges, depending on the costs that different de- sign choices impose at end of life. If workable, these solutions Public procurement is another area open for conside- could avoid some of the risks with more direct regulation of ration. Starting to incorporate recycled content and ma- products, but they also carry their own complexities. terials efficiency into purchasing decisions could help boost nascent markets. As with other proposals discus- A second approach is to create demand for recycled sed here, further evaluation is required. materials or materials-efficient products. The ‘pledging’ -in itiative in the Commission’s Plastics Strategy, where com- * * * panies commit to using recycled plastics, is one attempt A common concern about the transition to a more circular to create a basis for investment in additional recycling ca- economy is that it requires ‘systemic’ change, which is seen pacity to create high-quality secondary plastics. Resear- as difficult if not infeasible. It is true – realising the full potential ch has identified a quota system for recycled content as described in this report would require transformative change. a possible option, similar to quotas for renewable ener- But what is most exciting about this opportunity is that smaller, gy and energy efficiency. Another proposal is to support manageable policy packages, combined with an ambitious vi- nascent markets directly (e.g. reused structural building sion for the future and strong political will, could unleash a wave of innovation and new investment that pays off for generations.

53 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

2. steel towards a circular steel system

Steel offers particular promise for a major industrialised economy could meet circular economy. Already today, one-third its needs for a fundamental material almost of the steel we use comes from recycled entirely through recycling. CO2 emissions metal, and the analysis presented here from steelmaking would drop by 80% from shows that within five decades, seconda- current levels if low-carbon electricity is ry steel could meet nearly half the world’s used. Thus, the EU would approach a CO2- steel needs. In fact, even with rapid global free steel sector in Europe – a global first. economic growth, future growth in steel de- mand could be met largely by reusing steel, Realising this opportunity will require with primary steel production held steady. significant changes to minimise losses in The climate benefits would be significant: volume and quality from one use cycle to that level of recycling would cut the avera- the next. The contamination of steel with ge CO2 emissions per tonne of steel pro- copper could pose particular challenges. duced by 60%, reducing overall emissions EU secondary steel production would also from steelmaking by nearly 4 billion tonnes have to be restructured, while continued pri- of CO2 per year by the end of the century. mary production would be more focussed on exports. However, the industry already For the EU, the opportunity is even more faces major challenges: global over-capa- immediate. Europe already has a large city, flagging profitability, high CO2 emis- stock of steel, near the saturation point. Our sions, and the threat of tariffs. A circular ste- analysis shows that if downgrading of ste- el economy offers a promising path forward el is avoided, secondary steel production by boosting productivity and making the EU could meet as much as 85% of the EU’s a pioneer and leader in the technologies of steel needs by 2050. That would be a re- the future. markable achievement: for the first time, a

54 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Secondary steel production could meet as much as 85% of the EU’s steel needs by 2050

55 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

UNDERSTANDING FUTURE STEEL NEEDS Steel is used across all areas of a modern, industrial with stocks ranging from about 5 tonnes per capita in economy. About half the steel produced today is used in China, to barely 1 tonne in much of Africa and India. construction and infrastructure; another 16–17% each in transportation and machinery and electrical equipment, We estimated future demand for steel by quantify- and the remaining 15% in a variety of metal products and ing the production levels needed to enable the entire appliances. With few exceptions, the benefits from steel world to gradually transition to per-capita steel stocks derive from the total amount of steel available, and the similar to those in OECD countries, following similar services this steel stock enables: shelter/buildings, infra- patterns of use (see Exhibit 1 for an explanation of structure, mobility, urban development, industrial produc- our methodology). Steel production would have to tion, and more. Steel flows, such as annual production, rise steadily, to 2.5 times the current level. CO2 emis- have little benefit except by enabling societies to develop sions levels increase less, in part because produc- and maintain this stock. tion technology improves but mostly because there is a shift towards more recycled steel even in a baseli- The analysis presented in this chapter focuses on the ne scenario. These are not best understood as fore- EU, but to understand the developments in one region, casts, but as an illustration of what would be required one needs to also take a global view. There is significant if the current pattern of steel us in mature economies international trade in raw materials, steel products and were adopted globally. As we discuss elsewhere in scrap, and steel firms operate across borders. Global this report, this may not be necessary: steel needs growth in steelmaking today is driven mainly by deve- could fall sharply if we could make do with less steel loping and emerging economies, as they build up their to provide the same mobility, shelter, or other servi- stock of steel: the total amount of steel available in the ces. Also, as we elaborate below, it is possible to re- economy. In mature economies such as the U.S. and EU, duce losses and increase the share of recycled steel this stands at about 11–14 tonnes per person , and steel beyond such a ‘business as usual’ development. On demand is already driven largely by the need to repla- both counts, there is significant potential to reduce ce older products or structures. In much of the world, the need for primary steel production, and therefore however, there is still a large unmet demand for steel, also CO2 emissions.

56 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Exhibit 2.1 Global demand for steel projected if by 2100, steel stocks worldwide matched those in OECD countries today

3 500 PRODUCTS 3 000 MACHINERY 2 500 EHIBIT 21 DEMAND BY PRODUCT GROUP 2 000 TRANSPORTATION Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 1 500 CONSTRUCTION 2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 000

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

4 500

4 000

3 500 Kan behövas annan font på hänvisningarna? 3 000 CO2 EMISSIONS 2 500 Mt CO2 PER YEAR, 2 000

2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 500

1 000

500

FRGPALETT 0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

TOTAL STEEL DEMAND 4 000

3 500 MCKINSEY, MEDIUM SCENARIO

3 000 ALLWOOD CULLEN 2012 YLIA ET AL 2017 PRODUCTION PER ROUTE 2 500 MILFORD ET AL 2013 Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2 000 GLOBAL CALCULATOR, LOW ALLWOOD PAULIUK 2013 2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 500 VAN RUIVEN VAN UUREN 2016 1 000 IEAETP 2017

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

57

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050

220 EHIBIT 22 HISTORICAL DEMAND 200 PROECTED DEMAND 180

160

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050

CO2 INTENSITY OF STEEL PRODUCTION TON CO2/TON STEEL

BASIC OYGEN FURNACE BOF BASIC OYGEN 23 e large majority of current steel production uses coal to reduce FURNACE BOF and produce steel in integrated steelworks. EHIBIT 23

INCREASED PROCESS EFFICIENCY BOF, WITH BEST 19 An estimated 15% process eciency improvement is possible within AVAILABLE TECHNOLOGY the current BOF process.

TON, ore TONNE BIOBASED INPUTS BOF, WITH BIO FUELS 11 Bio-based fuels can substitute for some of the coal input, with emissions reductions of around 50%.

DIRECT REDUCED IRON 11 is route uses natural gas to reduce iron ore, which almost DRI halves emissions. DRI accounts for 5% of current world production.

CARBON CAPTURE AND STORAGE CCS BOF CARBON CAPTURE 09 capturing the CO2 from the blast furnace of an integrated steel plant AND STORAGE CCS can reduce overall emissions by 60%.

ELECTRIC ARC FURNACE EAF 04 the main route for secondary steel uses electricity to melt steel scrap and / EAF or direct reduced iron, with only small onsite emissions

ZEROCARBON ELECTRICITY EAF: EAF ZERO CARBON 01 By using zero-carbon electricity, nearly all the emissions from steelmaking can be eliminated.

CO2 EMISSIONS, STEEL PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE CO2 EMISSIONS, STEEL PRODUCTION Gt CO PER YEAR, 2015-2100, GLOBAL EHIBIT 24 2 Gt CO2 2015-2100, GLOBAL 70

60 298

50

40 198

30

20

10

00 2020 2040 2060 2080 2100 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE LOW CARBON CURRENT EMISSIONS INTENSITY PROCESS BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE LOWCARBON PROCESS

GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION AND AVAILABLE SCRAP THROUGH STOCK EIT Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2100 EHIBIT 25 4 000 STEEL PRODUCTION

3 000

2 000 AVAILABLE STEEL SCRAP

1 000

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION AND AVAILABLE SCRAP THROUGH STOCK EIT Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050 EHIBIT 26 180

160 STEEL PRODUCTION

140

120

100 AVAILABLE STEEL SCRAP 80

60

40

20

0 2020 2030 2040 2050

LOSSES IN STEEL PRODUCTION EHIBIT 27 Mt STEEL 2015

NOT COLLECTED POST CONSUMER SCRAP 146 On average, 4-5% of steel is lost in the re-melting process as when impurities and alloying elements are removed 22 NEW SCRAP LOST Large losses at fabrication and forming means up to 27% of steel does not reach products 70-90% of resulting scrap is collected 48

Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint

OLD SCRAP LOST 15% of end-of-life products are not collected for recycling – rising to 50% or more in some product categories 69

OBSOLETE STOCK 1-10% of end-of-life structures are inaccessible due to corrosion or permanent loss (e.g. underground structures) 6 MILLION TONNES OF STEEL LOST

MAIMUM COPPER CONTENT BY STEEL PRODUCT CATEGORY EHIBIT 28 Wt% COPPER IN STEEL

REBAR 040

STRUCTURAL 012

COMMERCIAL 010 Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint GLOBAL PRODUCT MI 008

FINE WIRE 007

DRAWING 006 CURRENT LEVEL OECD SCRAP 02025% DEEP DRAWING 004

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION Mt CO PER YEAR, 2015-2100 EHIBIT 29 2 BASELINE SCENARIO 5 000 MATERIALS CIRCULARITY 4 500 MATERIALS AND PRODUCT 4 000 CIRCULARITY 29% 3 500

3 000 20% 52% 2 500

500

1500

1 000

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EHIBIT 210 GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION BY ROUTE Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2100

4 000

3 500 SECONDARY PRODUCTION 3 000 Circular scenario

2 500 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 2000 Basline scenario 47% 1500 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 1 000 Circular scenario

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION BY ROUTE EHIBIT 210 Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050

180

160

140

120

100 SECONDARY PRODUCTION Circular scenario 80

60 PRIMARY PRODUCTION Circular scenario without 40 managed copper levels 20 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 0 Circular scenario 2020 2030 2040 2050

NEED UPDATE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE ETT VÄRDEBESTÄNDIGT SVENSKT MATERIALSYSTEM / PLAST

GLOBAL DEMAND FOR STEEL PROJECTED IF BY 2100, STEEL STOCKS WORLDWIDE MATCHED THOSE IN OECD COUNTRIES TODAY

The modelling approach used in this study follows that developed and described in Pauliuk et al. (2013). Steel demand is modelled in four end-use sectors and 11 world regions. Demand in each sector and region is modelled with a stock-based approach, with population forecasts based on UN Population Prospects 2017, and per-capita saturation is largely completed by 2100 . Historical steel stocks are based on Pauliuk, Wang and Müller (2013), while future stock turnover is modelled with different lifetimes of products in each end-use sector following a normal distribution. Production is calibrated to recent volume and production route data for key world regions. The steps of the steel supply chain and use cycle are directly modelled, including losses in production, new scrap forma- tion, the remelting process, and collection of post-consumer scrap. The model also tracks inmixing of copper in the steel stock, and the limitations this places on use. It further represents degrees of international trade in scrap, and the dilution of steel scrap with primary steel. Note the difference between demand, which denotes the requirements for steel in final products, and production, which is the amount of crude steel required to service this demand. CO2 emissions estimates include di- rect emissions as well as indirect emissions from electricity, and are based on the gradual adoption of best available techniques for current production processes by 2050. The high-level results of a baseline scenario are shown below, with further elaboration throughout this chapter.

58 3 500 PRODUCTS 3 000

2 500 MACHINERY EHIBIT 21 DEMAND BY PRODUCT GROUP 2 000 TRANSPORTATION Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 1 500 CONSTRUCTION 2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 000

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

4 500

4 000

3 500 Kan behövas annan font på hänvisningarna? 3 000 CO2 EMISSIONS 2 500 Mt CO2 PER YEAR, 2 000

2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 500

1 000

500

FRGPALETT REVIEW DRAFT – DO0 NOT DISTRIBUTE ETT VÄRDEBESTÄNDIGT SVENSKT MATERIALSYSTEM / PLAST 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

TOTAL STEEL DEMAND 4 000 A closer look at the EU highlights the importance EU demand would fall at first, then stabilise at repla- 3 500 MCKINSEY, MEDIUM SCENARIO of saturation (Exhibit 2). The EU steel stock already cement levels of around 150 million tonnes per year. 3 000 ALLWOOD CULLEN 2012 approaches 12 tonnes per person, and the population Production by the EU steel industry could ofYLIA course ET AL 2017 level is flattening and expectedPRODUCTION to decrease. PER ROUTE Once a2 500 still increase, but would have to be driven by increasingMILFORD ET AL 2013 saturation point is reached, EUM steelt STEEL demand PER YEAR, would be2 000 exports. As we discuss below, the stabilisationGLOBAL of de CALCULATOR,- LOW ALLWOOD PAULIUK 2013 2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 500 driven almost entirely by the need to replace products mand even as stocks accumulate would enableVAN Europe RUIVEN VAN UUREN 2016 and structures as they reach the end of their life, about1 000 to rely much more heavily on recycling to meetIEAETP its own 2017

2–3% of the total stock each year. In this scenario, 500 steel needs.

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

Exhibit 2.2 EU steel demand can fall and stabilise as the steel stock saturates

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050

220 EHIBIT 22 HISTORICAL DEMAND 200 PROECTED DEMAND 180

160

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050

CO2 INTENSITY OF STEEL PRODUCTION TON CO2/TON STEEL

BASIC OYGEN FURNACE BOF BASIC OYGEN 23 e large majority of current steel production uses coal to reduce FURNACE BOF NOTE: THE FIGURE DEPICTS THE PRODUCTION OF CRUDE STEEL REQUIREDiron TO SERVICEore and EUproduce DEMAND steel in integrated steelworks. EHIBIT 23 SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS MODELLING AS DESCRIBED IN TEXT

INCREASED PROCESS EFFICIENCY BOF, WITH BEST An estimated 15% process eciency improvement is possible within AVAILABLE TECHNOLOGY 19 59 the current BOF process.

TON, ore TONNE BIOBASED INPUTS BOF, WITH BIO FUELS 11 Bio-based fuels can substitute for some of the coal input, with emissions reductions of around 50%.

DIRECT REDUCED IRON DIRECT REDUCED IRON 11 is route uses natural gas to reduce iron ore, which almost DRI halves emissions. DRI accounts for 5% of current world production.

CARBON CAPTURE AND STORAGE CCS BOF CARBON CAPTURE 09 capturing the CO2 from the blast furnace of an integrated steel plant AND STORAGE CCS can reduce overall emissions by 60%.

ELECTRIC ARC FURNACE EAF ELECTRIC ARC FURNACE 04 the main route for secondary steel uses electricity to melt steel scrap and / EAF or direct reduced iron, with only small onsite emissions

ZEROCARBON ELECTRICITY EAF: EAF ZERO CARBON 01 By using zero-carbon electricity, nearly all the emissions from steelmaking can be eliminated.

CO2 EMISSIONS, STEEL PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE CO2 EMISSIONS, STEEL PRODUCTION Gt CO PER YEAR, 2015-2100, GLOBAL EHIBIT 24 2 Gt CO2 2015-2100, GLOBAL 70

60 298

50

40 198

30

20

10

00 2020 2040 2060 2080 2100 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE LOW CARBON CURRENT EMISSIONS INTENSITY PROCESS BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE LOWCARBON PROCESS

GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION AND AVAILABLE SCRAP THROUGH STOCK EIT Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2100 EHIBIT 25 4 000 STEEL PRODUCTION

3 000

2 000 AVAILABLE STEEL SCRAP

1 000

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION AND AVAILABLE SCRAP THROUGH STOCK EIT Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050 EHIBIT 26 180

160 STEEL PRODUCTION

140

120

100 AVAILABLE STEEL SCRAP 80

60

40

20

0 2020 2030 2040 2050

LOSSES IN STEEL PRODUCTION EHIBIT 27 Mt STEEL 2015

NOT COLLECTED POST CONSUMER SCRAP 146 On average, 4-5% of steel is lost in the re-melting process as slag when impurities and alloying elements are removed 22 NEW SCRAP LOST Large losses at fabrication and forming means up to 27% of steel does not reach products 70-90% of resulting scrap is collected 48

Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint

OLD SCRAP LOST 15% of end-of-life products are not collected for recycling – rising to 50% or more in some product categories 69

OBSOLETE STOCK 1-10% of end-of-life structures are inaccessible due to corrosion or permanent loss (e.g. underground structures) 6 MILLION TONNES OF STEEL LOST

MAIMUM COPPER CONTENT BY STEEL PRODUCT CATEGORY EHIBIT 28 Wt% COPPER IN STEEL

REBAR 040

STRUCTURAL 012

COMMERCIAL 010 Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint GLOBAL PRODUCT MI 008

FINE WIRE 007

DRAWING 006 CURRENT LEVEL OECD SCRAP 02025% DEEP DRAWING 004

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION Mt CO PER YEAR, 2015-2100 EHIBIT 29 2 BASELINE SCENARIO 5 000 MATERIALS CIRCULARITY 4 500 MATERIALS AND PRODUCT 4 000 CIRCULARITY 29% 3 500

3 000 20% 52% 2 500

500

1500

1 000

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EHIBIT 210 GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION BY ROUTE Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2100

4 000

3 500 SECONDARY PRODUCTION 3 000 Circular scenario

2 500 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 2000 Basline scenario 47% 1500 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 1 000 Circular scenario

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION BY ROUTE EHIBIT 210 Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050

180

160

140

120

100 SECONDARY PRODUCTION Circular scenario 80

60 PRIMARY PRODUCTION Circular scenario without 40 managed copper levels 20 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 0 Circular scenario 2020 2030 2040 2050

NEED UPDATE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM STEEL PRODUCTION AND USE

The need for much more steel in the future presents In contrast, clean power does not help much to reduce a dilemma for climate objectives, as the production of CO2 emissions from primary steelmaking. Most of the CO2 steel results in large emissions of CO2. Most steel pro- from primary steel production results from the chemical pro- duction in Europe and globally is primary production, cess in which iron ore is reduced, not from the energy used converting iron ore to steel through the basic oxygen for heat. Unlike in power production or heating, it therefore is furnace (BOF) route. This emits, on average, just over 2 not possible to use renewable energy directly. Established tonnes of CO2 per tonne of steel produced. Doubling options can reduce emissions by around half. For deeper primary steel production would thus double a major emissions cuts, it would be necessary to use methods of CO2 source. steel production that are still under development (Exhibit 3).

However, as the global steel stock grows, so does To quantify the climate impact of continued heavy reli- the opportunity to use remelted end-of-life steel as an ance on primary steelmaking and plausible scenarios for alternative to primary production. Secondary steel is technological improvements, we constructed two scena- made in electric arc furnaces (EAF), with one-fifth the rios for how to meet projected demand growth: CO2 emissions of primary steelmaking even when much • Baseline scenario: This sees continued reliance on of the electricity comes from fossil fuels. If power from the BOF route for primary steel production, but with best renewable sources is used in EAF, secondary steel can available technology rapidly adopted. Steel recycling be decarbonised almost entirely. A more circular steel continues with the same collection rates, loss levels and flow therefore both is inherently far less emissions-in- practices as today. tensive, and easier to decarbonise through the use of renewable energy; it is one of many examples in this re- • Low-carbon process: For illustration, we also show port of how greater circularity moves the emissions from what the gradual adoption of currently proven abatement ‘hard to abate’ sources and towards ones with much technologies in steel production would entail, so that the CO2 more established ways to cut emissions. intensity of primary steel production falls by half by 2050.

60 3 500 PRODUCTS 3 000

2 500 MACHINERY EHIBIT 21 DEMAND BY PRODUCT GROUP 2 000 TRANSPORTATION Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 1 500 CONSTRUCTION 2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 000

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

4 500

4 000

3 500 Kan behövas annan font på hänvisningarna? 3 000 CO2 EMISSIONS 2 500 Mt CO2 PER YEAR, 2 000

2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 500

1 000

500

FRGPALETT 0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

TOTAL STEEL DEMAND 4 000

3 500 MCKINSEY, MEDIUM SCENARIO

3 000 ALLWOOD CULLEN 2012 YLIA ET AL 2017 PRODUCTION PER ROUTE 2 500 MILFORD ET AL 2013 Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2 000 GLOBAL CALCULATOR, LOW ALLWOOD PAULIUK 2013 2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 500 VAN RUIVEN VAN UUREN 2016 1 000 IEAETP 2017

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050

220 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE EHIBIT 22 HISTORICAL DEMAND 200 PROECTED DEMAND 180

160

140

120 100 Exhibit 2.3 80 Steel60 recycling has significantly lower emissions than 40 20 other available options for steel production

0 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050

CO2 INTENSITY OF STEEL PRODUCTION TON CO2/TON STEEL

BASIC OYGEN FURNACE BOF BASIC OYGEN 23 e large majority of current steel production uses coal to reduce FURNACE BOF iron ore and produce steel in integrated steelworks. EHIBIT 23

INCREASED PROCESS EFFICIENCY BOF, WITH BEST 19 An estimated 15% process eciency improvement is possible within AVAILABLE TECHNOLOGY the current BOF process.

TON, ore TONNE BIOBASED INPUTS BOF, WITH BIO FUELS 11 Bio-based fuels can substitute for some of the coal input, with emissions reductions of around 50%.

DIRECT REDUCED IRON DIRECT REDUCED IRON 11 is route uses natural gas to reduce iron ore, which almost DRI halves emissions. DRI accounts for 5% of current world production.

CARBON CAPTURE AND STORAGE CCS BOF CARBON CAPTURE 09 capturing the CO2 from the blast furnace of an integrated steel plant AND STORAGE CCS can reduce overall emissions by 60%.

ELECTRIC ARC FURNACE EAF ELECTRIC ARC FURNACE 04 the main route for secondary steel uses electricity to melt steel scrap and / EAF or direct reduced iron, with only small onsite emissions

ZEROCARBON ELECTRICITY EAF: EAF ZERO CARBON 01 By using zero-carbon electricity, nearly all the emissions from steelmaking can be eliminated.

CO2 EMISSIONS, STEEL PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE CO2 EMISSIONS, STEEL PRODUCTION Gt CO PER YEAR, 2015-2100, GLOBAL EHIBIT 24 2 Gt CO2 2015-2100, GLOBAL 70 Historical production based on Global Steel Association, Steel statistical yearbook (2017) 60 298

50

IX 40 SOURCE: SEE ENDNOTES 198

30

20 61

10

00 2020 2040 2060 2080 2100 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE LOW CARBON CURRENT EMISSIONS INTENSITY PROCESS BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE LOWCARBON PROCESS

GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION AND AVAILABLE SCRAP THROUGH STOCK EIT Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2100 EHIBIT 25 4 000 STEEL PRODUCTION

3 000

2 000 AVAILABLE STEEL SCRAP

1 000

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION AND AVAILABLE SCRAP THROUGH STOCK EIT Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050 EHIBIT 26 180

160 STEEL PRODUCTION

140

120

100 AVAILABLE STEEL SCRAP 80

60

40

20

0 2020 2030 2040 2050

LOSSES IN STEEL PRODUCTION EHIBIT 27 Mt STEEL 2015

NOT COLLECTED POST CONSUMER SCRAP 146 On average, 4-5% of steel is lost in the re-melting process as slag when impurities and alloying elements are removed 22 NEW SCRAP LOST Large losses at fabrication and forming means up to 27% of steel does not reach products 70-90% of resulting scrap is collected 48

Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint

OLD SCRAP LOST 15% of end-of-life products are not collected for recycling – rising to 50% or more in some product categories 69

OBSOLETE STOCK 1-10% of end-of-life structures are inaccessible due to corrosion or permanent loss (e.g. underground structures) 6 MILLION TONNES OF STEEL LOST

MAIMUM COPPER CONTENT BY STEEL PRODUCT CATEGORY EHIBIT 28 Wt% COPPER IN STEEL

REBAR 040

STRUCTURAL 012

COMMERCIAL 010 Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint GLOBAL PRODUCT MI 008

FINE WIRE 007

DRAWING 006 CURRENT LEVEL OECD SCRAP 02025% DEEP DRAWING 004

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION Mt CO PER YEAR, 2015-2100 EHIBIT 29 2 BASELINE SCENARIO 5 000 MATERIALS CIRCULARITY 4 500 MATERIALS AND PRODUCT 4 000 CIRCULARITY 29% 3 500

3 000 20% 52% 2 500

500

1500

1 000

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EHIBIT 210 GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION BY ROUTE Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2100

4 000

3 500 SECONDARY PRODUCTION 3 000 Circular scenario

2 500 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 2000 Basline scenario 47% 1500 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 1 000 Circular scenario

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION BY ROUTE EHIBIT 210 Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050

180

160

140

120

100 SECONDARY PRODUCTION Circular scenario 80

60 PRIMARY PRODUCTION Circular scenario without 40 managed copper levels 20 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 0 Circular scenario 2020 2030 2040 2050

NEED UPDATE 3 500 PRODUCTS 3 000

2 500 MACHINERY EHIBIT 21 DEMAND BY PRODUCT GROUP 2 000 TRANSPORTATION Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 1 500 CONSTRUCTION 2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 000

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

4 500

4 000

3 500 Kan behövas annan font på hänvisningarna? 3 000 CO2 EMISSIONS 2 500 Mt CO2 PER YEAR, 2 000

2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 500

1 000

500

FRGPALETT 0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

TOTAL STEEL DEMAND 4 000

3 500 MCKINSEY, MEDIUM SCENARIO

3 000 ALLWOOD CULLEN 2012 YLIA ET AL 2017 PRODUCTION PER ROUTE 2 500 MILFORD ET AL 2013 Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2 000 GLOBAL CALCULATOR, LOW ALLWOOD PAULIUK 2013 2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 500 VAN RUIVEN VAN UUREN 2016 1 000 IEAETP 2017

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050

220 EHIBIT 22 HISTORICAL DEMAND 200 PROECTED DEMAND 180

160

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050

CO2 INTENSITY OF STEEL PRODUCTION TON CO2/TON STEEL REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE BASIC OYGEN FURNACE BOF BASIC OYGEN 23 e large majority of current steel production uses coal to reduce ThereFURNACE are good BOF and bad news in this scenario (Exhibit lion tonnes (Gt) CO2 by 2100. Yet as noted in Chapter 1, iron ore and produce steel in integrated steelworks. EHIBIT 23 4). The good news is that even current practices would to stay within a carbon budget consistent with the com- enable a much higher share of recycled steel in the futu- mitments of the Paris Agreement, emissions from all ma- re, as the amount of available scrap grows over time (see terialsINCREASED production PROCESS could notEFFICIENCY exceed 300 Gt CO2. Esta- next BOF,section). WITH BEST EAF production could thus grow from19 26% blishedAn supply-side estimated 15% processmeasures eciency in improvement the low-carbon is possible scenario within today,AVAILABLE to 36%TECHNOLOGY by 2050. This alone would reduce the CO2 help, butthe current even BOF if those process. technologies were fully rolled out intensity of steel by one third compared with the current by 2050, as in our ‘low-carbon production’ scenario, situation. We are thus already set to reap some of the cumulative emissions would still reach 198 Gt CO2. TON, ore TONNE climate benefits of increased circularity of steel use. BIOBASED INPUTS BOF, WITH BIO FUELS 11 The mainBio-based conclusion fuels can substitute from for some this of theanalysis coal input, is with that de- The bad news is that this leaves much of the potenti- mand-sideemissions measures reductions of arearound crucial 50%. to meeting climate ob- al for demand-side improvements on the table, through jectives. Achieving deep cuts on the supply side alone a combination of steel losses and downgrading. CO2 would require extraordinarily rapid, global implementa- emissions would therefore be higher than they need to tion ofDIRECT processes REDUCED for IRONsteelmaking that are still unproven DIRECT REDUCED IRON be. As we detail in subsequent sections, improving prac- at scale.is Thisroute usesis notnatural to gassay to thatreduce developing iron ore, which and almost deploying DRI 11 tices could raise the share of scrap-based steelmaking these halvestechnologies emissions. DRI should accounts not for 5%be of a current priority: world they production. are ne - to almost half by 2050, further reducing emissions by cessary to handle the primary production that will still be several hundred million tonnes of CO2 per year. necessary. But demand-side action is urgently needed as well,CARBON both CAPTUREbecause AND of the STORAGE emissions CCS reductions they TheBOF other CARBON CAPTUREpiece of bad news is that emissions re- provide,capturing and thebecause CO2 from they the blast reduce furnace theof an challengeintegrated steel on plant the AND STORAGE CCS 09 main far higher than required to meet climate objectives. supply-sidecan reduce significantly overall emissions byby 60%. reducing the volume of pri- Cumulative emissions from steelmaking reach 298 bil- mary steel required.

ELECTRIC ARC FURNACE EAF ELECTRIC ARC FURNACE 04 the main route for secondary steel uses electricity to melt steel scrap and / EAF or direct reduced iron, with only small onsite emissions Exhibit 2.4

ZEROCARBON ELECTRICITY EAF: A baseline scenario sees large reductions in the CO2 EAF ZERO CARBON 01 By using zero-carbon electricity, nearly all the emissions from intensity of production, but largesteelmaking emissions can be eliminated. remain

CO2 EMISSIONS, STEEL PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE CO2 EMISSIONS, STEEL PRODUCTION Gt CO PER YEAR, 2015-2100, GLOBAL EHIBIT 24 2 Gt CO2 2015-2100, GLOBAL 70

60 298

50

40 198

30

20

10

00 2020 2040 2060 2080 2100 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE LOW CARBON CURRENT EMISSIONS INTENSITY PROCESS BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE LOWCARBON PROCESS

GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION AND AVAILABLE SCRAP THROUGH62 STOCK EIT Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2100 EHIBIT 25 4 000 STEEL PRODUCTION

3 000

2 000 AVAILABLE STEEL SCRAP

1 000

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION AND AVAILABLE SCRAP THROUGH STOCK EIT Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050 EHIBIT 26 180

160 STEEL PRODUCTION

140

120

100 AVAILABLE STEEL SCRAP 80

60

40

20

0 2020 2030 2040 2050

LOSSES IN STEEL PRODUCTION EHIBIT 27 Mt STEEL 2015

NOT COLLECTED POST CONSUMER SCRAP 146 On average, 4-5% of steel is lost in the re-melting process as slag when impurities and alloying elements are removed 22 NEW SCRAP LOST Large losses at fabrication and forming means up to 27% of steel does not reach products 70-90% of resulting scrap is collected 48

Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint

OLD SCRAP LOST 15% of end-of-life products are not collected for recycling – rising to 50% or more in some product categories 69

OBSOLETE STOCK 1-10% of end-of-life structures are inaccessible due to corrosion or permanent loss (e.g. underground structures) 6 MILLION TONNES OF STEEL LOST

MAIMUM COPPER CONTENT BY STEEL PRODUCT CATEGORY EHIBIT 28 Wt% COPPER IN STEEL

REBAR 040

STRUCTURAL 012

COMMERCIAL 010 Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint GLOBAL PRODUCT MI 008

FINE WIRE 007

DRAWING 006 CURRENT LEVEL OECD SCRAP 02025% DEEP DRAWING 004

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION Mt CO PER YEAR, 2015-2100 EHIBIT 29 2 BASELINE SCENARIO 5 000 MATERIALS CIRCULARITY 4 500 MATERIALS AND PRODUCT 4 000 CIRCULARITY 29% 3 500

3 000 20% 52% 2 500

500

1500

1 000

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EHIBIT 210 GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION BY ROUTE Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2100

4 000

3 500 SECONDARY PRODUCTION 3 000 Circular scenario

2 500 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 2000 Basline scenario 47% 1500 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 1 000 Circular scenario

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION BY ROUTE EHIBIT 210 Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050

180

160

140

120

100 SECONDARY PRODUCTION Circular scenario 80

60 PRIMARY PRODUCTION Circular scenario without 40 managed copper levels 20 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 0 Circular scenario 2020 2030 2040 2050

NEED UPDATE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

The main conclusion from this analysis is that demand-side measures are crucial to meeting climate objectives.

63 3 500 PRODUCTS 3 000

2 500 MACHINERY EHIBIT 21 DEMAND BY PRODUCT GROUP 2 000 TRANSPORTATION Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 1 500 CONSTRUCTION 2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 000

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

4 500

4 000

3 500 Kan behövas annan font på hänvisningarna? 3 000 CO2 EMISSIONS 2 500 Mt CO2 PER YEAR, 2 000

2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 500

1 000

500

FRGPALETT 0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

TOTAL STEEL DEMAND 4 000

3 500 MCKINSEY, MEDIUM SCENARIO

3 000 ALLWOOD CULLEN 2012 YLIA ET AL 2017 PRODUCTION PER ROUTE 2 500 MILFORD ET AL 2013 Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2 000 GLOBAL CALCULATOR, LOW ALLWOOD PAULIUK 2013 2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 500 VAN RUIVEN VAN UUREN 2016 1 000 IEAETP 2017

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050

220 EHIBIT 22 HISTORICAL DEMAND 200 PROECTED DEMAND 180

160

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050

CO2 INTENSITY OF STEEL PRODUCTION TON CO2/TON STEEL

BASIC OYGEN FURNACE BOF BASIC OYGEN 23 e large majority of current steel production uses coal to reduce FURNACE BOF iron ore and produce steel in integrated steelworks. EHIBIT 23

INCREASED PROCESS EFFICIENCY BOF, WITH BEST 19 An estimated 15% process eciency improvement is possible within AVAILABLE TECHNOLOGY the current BOF process.

TON, ore TONNE BIOBASED INPUTS BOF, WITH BIO FUELS 11 Bio-based fuels can substitute for some of the coal input, with emissions reductions of around 50%.

DIRECT REDUCED IRON DIRECT REDUCED IRON 11 is route uses natural gas to reduce iron ore, which almost DRI halves emissions. DRI accounts for 5% of current world production.

CARBON CAPTURE AND STORAGE CCS BOF CARBON CAPTURE 09 capturing the CO2 from the blast furnace of an integrated steel plant AND STORAGE CCS can reduce overall emissions by 60%.

ELECTRIC ARC FURNACE EAF ELECTRIC ARC FURNACE 04 the main route for secondary steel uses electricity to melt steel scrap and / EAF REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTEor direct reduced iron, with only small onsite emissions

ZEROCARBON ELECTRICITY EAF: EAF ZERO CARBON 01 By using zero-carbon electricity, nearly all the emissions from steelmaking can be eliminated. REALISING THE POTENTIAL FOR

CIRCULARITYCO2 EMISSIONS, STEEL PRODUCTIONIN THE STEEL SECTOR CUMULATIVE CO2 EMISSIONS, STEEL PRODUCTION Gt CO PER YEAR, 2015-2100, GLOBAL EHIBIT 24 The steel sector2 has a head start in the circular eco- de, with strikingGt CO 2results: 2015-2100, In principle, GLOBAL the scrap availa- nomy, 70especially in mature markets such as Europe – but ble around the world would be sufficient to meet most as steel stocks saturate, there is significant potential to of future growth in steel demand with secondary steel scale 60up recycling and minimise demand for virgin steel. (Exhibit 5). Primary production298 is still required, but only Already, EU steel demand is driven mainly by the need to for net additions to the steel stock in rapidly growing 50 replace products and structures at the end of their useful countries. For economic and environmental reasons,

life. As40 the total steel stock saturates, the resulting scrap it makes sense to seize this opportunity198 – and that can be re-melted to provide an ever larger share of the means making it a priority to adopt the practices requi-

flow of30 steel required. red to enable future recycling: from collection at end- of-life, to keeping steel stocks pure from contaminants We modelled20 the amount of scrap available worldwi- that could otherwise limit the uses of recycled steel.

10

00 2020 2040 2060 2080 2100 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE LOW CARBON CURRENT EMISSIONS INTENSITY Exhibit 2.5 PROCESS BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINEEven inLOWCARBON a growing PROCESS world, recycling of steel could meet most of the growth in future demand

GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION AND AVAILABLE SCRAP THROUGH STOCK EIT Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2100 EHIBIT 25 4 000 STEEL PRODUCTION

3 000

2 000 AVAILABLE STEEL SCRAP

1 000

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS ANALYSIS AS DESCRIBED IN TEXT EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION AND AVAILABLE SCRAP THROUGH STOCK EIT Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050 EHIBIT 26 180 64

160 STEEL PRODUCTION

140

120

100 AVAILABLE STEEL SCRAP 80

60

40

20

0 2020 2030 2040 2050

LOSSES IN STEEL PRODUCTION EHIBIT 27 Mt STEEL 2015

NOT COLLECTED POST CONSUMER SCRAP 146 On average, 4-5% of steel is lost in the re-melting process as slag when impurities and alloying elements are removed 22 NEW SCRAP LOST Large losses at fabrication and forming means up to 27% of steel does not reach products 70-90% of resulting scrap is collected 48

Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint

OLD SCRAP LOST 15% of end-of-life products are not collected for recycling – rising to 50% or more in some product categories 69

OBSOLETE STOCK 1-10% of end-of-life structures are inaccessible due to corrosion or permanent loss (e.g. underground structures) 6 MILLION TONNES OF STEEL LOST

MAIMUM COPPER CONTENT BY STEEL PRODUCT CATEGORY EHIBIT 28 Wt% COPPER IN STEEL

REBAR 040

STRUCTURAL 012

COMMERCIAL 010 Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint GLOBAL PRODUCT MI 008

FINE WIRE 007

DRAWING 006 CURRENT LEVEL OECD SCRAP 02025% DEEP DRAWING 004

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION Mt CO PER YEAR, 2015-2100 EHIBIT 29 2 BASELINE SCENARIO 5 000 MATERIALS CIRCULARITY 4 500 MATERIALS AND PRODUCT 4 000 CIRCULARITY 29% 3 500

3 000 20% 52% 2 500

500

1500

1 000

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EHIBIT 210 GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION BY ROUTE Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2100

4 000

3 500 SECONDARY PRODUCTION 3 000 Circular scenario

2 500 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 2000 Basline scenario 47% 1500 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 1 000 Circular scenario

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION BY ROUTE EHIBIT 210 Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050

180

160

140

120

100 SECONDARY PRODUCTION Circular scenario 80

60 PRIMARY PRODUCTION Circular scenario without 40 managed copper levels 20 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 0 Circular scenario 2020 2030 2040 2050

NEED UPDATE 3 500 PRODUCTS 3 000

2 500 MACHINERY EHIBIT 21 DEMAND BY PRODUCT GROUP 2 000 TRANSPORTATION Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 1 500 CONSTRUCTION 2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 000

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

4 500

4 000

3 500 Kan behövas annan font på hänvisningarna? 3 000 CO2 EMISSIONS 2 500 Mt CO2 PER YEAR, 2 000

2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 500

1 000

500

FRGPALETT 0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

TOTAL STEEL DEMAND 4 000

3 500 MCKINSEY, MEDIUM SCENARIO

3 000 ALLWOOD CULLEN 2012 YLIA ET AL 2017 PRODUCTION PER ROUTE 2 500 MILFORD ET AL 2013 Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2 000 GLOBAL CALCULATOR, LOW ALLWOOD PAULIUK 2013 2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 500 VAN RUIVEN VAN UUREN 2016 1 000 IEAETP 2017

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050

220 EHIBIT 22 HISTORICAL DEMAND 200 PROECTED DEMAND 180

160

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050

CO2 INTENSITY OF STEEL PRODUCTION TON CO2/TON STEEL

BASIC OYGEN FURNACE BOF BASIC OYGEN 23 e large majority of current steel production uses coal to reduce FURNACE BOF iron ore and produce steel in integrated steelworks. EHIBIT 23

INCREASED PROCESS EFFICIENCY BOF, WITH BEST 19 An estimated 15% process eciency improvement is possible within AVAILABLE TECHNOLOGY the current BOF process.

TON, ore TONNE BIOBASED INPUTS BOF, WITH BIO FUELS 11 Bio-based fuels can substitute for some of the coal input, with emissions reductions of around 50%.

DIRECT REDUCED IRON DIRECT REDUCED IRON 11 is route uses natural gas to reduce iron ore, which almost DRI halves emissions. DRI accounts for 5% of current world production.

CARBON CAPTURE AND STORAGE CCS BOF CARBON CAPTURE 09 capturing the CO2 from the blast furnace of an integrated steel plant AND STORAGE CCS can reduce overall emissions by 60%.

ELECTRIC ARC FURNACE EAF ELECTRIC ARC FURNACE 04 the main route for secondary steel uses electricity to melt steel scrap and / EAF or direct reduced iron, with only small onsite emissions

ZEROCARBON ELECTRICITY EAF: EAF ZERO CARBON 01 By using zero-carbon electricity, nearly all the emissions from steelmaking can be eliminated.

CO2 EMISSIONS, STEEL PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE CO2 EMISSIONS, STEEL PRODUCTION Gt CO PER YEAR, 2015-2100, GLOBAL EHIBIT 24 2 Gt CO2 2015-2100, GLOBAL 70

60 298

50

40 198

30

20

10

00 2020 2040 2060 2080 2100 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE LOW CARBON CURRENT EMISSIONS INTENSITY PROCESS BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE LOWCARBON PROCESS

GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION AND AVAILABLE SCRAP THROUGH STOCK EIT TheMt resultsSTEEL PER are YEAR, still 2015-2100 more striking for the EU (Exhibit the full benefits will require significant changes in how 6). Europe already produces around 100 Mt of scrap steel flows are handled. There are three key issues, which EHIBIT 25 every year. In 2016, EAF plants in the EU produced we discuss next: 4 000 some 65 Mt of steel, while 18 Mt of scrap was exported, STEEL PRODUCTION and the remainder used in integrated steel plants. Look- • Reducing the losses of steel throughout the use cycle; ing ahead, the amount of available scrap will increase, • Preventing and enabling the and we estimated that by mid-century, the amount of 3 000 production of high-quality secondary steel; and available scrap covers 80% of EU steel requirements. • Reducing the contamination of steel – especially Both globally and in Europe, then, the future of steel by copper. could be much more circular than it is. However, reaping 2 000 AVAILABLE STEEL SCRAP

1 000

Exhibit 2.6

0 2020 2030 Scrap2040 availability2050 2060 2070 in Europe2080 2090 rapidly2100 approaches the level of demand

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION AND AVAILABLE SCRAP THROUGH STOCK EIT Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050 EHIBIT 26 180

160 STEEL PRODUCTION

140

120

100 AVAILABLE STEEL SCRAP 80

60

40

20

0 2020 2030 2040 2050

NOTE: EXCLUDING SCRAP EXPORTED OR USED IN INTEGRATED STEELMAKING. SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS ANALYSIS AS DESCRIBED IN TEXT

LOSSES IN STEEL PRODUCTION EHIBIT 27 Mt STEEL 2015 65 NOT COLLECTED POST CONSUMER SCRAP 146 On average, 4-5% of steel is lost in the re-melting process as slag when impurities and alloying elements are removed 22 NEW SCRAP LOST Large losses at fabrication and forming means up to 27% of steel does not reach products 70-90% of resulting scrap is collected 48

Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint

OLD SCRAP LOST 15% of end-of-life products are not collected for recycling – rising to 50% or more in some product categories 69

OBSOLETE STOCK 1-10% of end-of-life structures are inaccessible due to corrosion or permanent loss (e.g. underground structures) 6 MILLION TONNES OF STEEL LOST

MAIMUM COPPER CONTENT BY STEEL PRODUCT CATEGORY EHIBIT 28 Wt% COPPER IN STEEL

REBAR 040

STRUCTURAL 012

COMMERCIAL 010 Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint GLOBAL PRODUCT MI 008

FINE WIRE 007

DRAWING 006 CURRENT LEVEL OECD SCRAP 02025% DEEP DRAWING 004

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION Mt CO PER YEAR, 2015-2100 EHIBIT 29 2 BASELINE SCENARIO 5 000 MATERIALS CIRCULARITY 4 500 MATERIALS AND PRODUCT 4 000 CIRCULARITY 29% 3 500

3 000 20% 52% 2 500

500

1500

1 000

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EHIBIT 210 GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION BY ROUTE Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2100

4 000

3 500 SECONDARY PRODUCTION 3 000 Circular scenario

2 500 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 2000 Basline scenario 47% 1500 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 1 000 Circular scenario

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION BY ROUTE EHIBIT 210 Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050

180

160

140

120

100 SECONDARY PRODUCTION Circular scenario 80

60 PRIMARY PRODUCTION Circular scenario without 40 managed copper levels 20 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 0 Circular scenario 2020 2030 2040 2050

NEED UPDATE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

REDUCING LOSSES OF STEEL Steel has a high recycling rate: around 83% of end-of- • Low scrap collection rates: While overall collection life steel is collected for recycling, and in some countries, rates are relatively high, they are low for some product this reaches 90%. Still, overall losses are large (Exhibit groups and regions – as low as 50% for some consumer 7). We calculate that almost 150 Mt steel are lost each products, and for production scrap (new scrap), just 70%. year – an amount close to the EU’s annual production. • New scrap: For certain product groups, such as au- The cost of producing new steel to replace these losses tomobiles, only 50% of the steel used actually makes it is on the order of 70 billion EUR, while the CO2 emis- into products. The remainder becomes scrap at the for- sions resulting from replacing them are more than 320 ming or fabrication stage. Overall, some 25–30% of steel Mt CO2 per year. becomes new scrap. This means that more steel needs to be produced and circulating at any given point. It also Losses in the steel system occur in four main categories: leads to additional losses, as noted above. • Obsolete stock and inaccessible scrap: Some • Remelting losses: Remelting of steel is highly optimi- steel structures are simply abandoned and not scrap- sed to maximise yields, but losses nonetheless reach an ped. Examples are submarine or underground pipes, or estimated 4–5%. One factor that increases losses is the abandoned buildings or structures. In some categories, need to remove substances (mainly trace or alloying me- the share of end-of-life steel that is not collected can tals) that would otherwise affect steel purity and quality reach 10%. (slagging). Slagging losses could be reduced with input materials that better matched the desired output.

66 3 500 PRODUCTS 3 000

2 500 MACHINERY EHIBIT 21 DEMAND BY PRODUCT GROUP 2 000 TRANSPORTATION Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 1 500 CONSTRUCTION 2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 000

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

4 500

4 000

3 500 Kan behövas annan font på hänvisningarna? 3 000 CO2 EMISSIONS 2 500 Mt CO2 PER YEAR, 2 000

2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 500

1 000

500

FRGPALETT 0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

TOTAL STEEL DEMAND 4 000

3 500 MCKINSEY, MEDIUM SCENARIO

3 000 ALLWOOD CULLEN 2012 YLIA ET AL 2017 PRODUCTION PER ROUTE 2 500 MILFORD ET AL 2013 Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2 000 GLOBAL CALCULATOR, LOW ALLWOOD PAULIUK 2013 2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 500 VAN RUIVEN VAN UUREN 2016 1 000 IEAETP 2017

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050

220 EHIBIT 22 HISTORICAL DEMAND 200 PROECTED DEMAND 180

160

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050

CO2 INTENSITY OF STEEL PRODUCTION TON CO2/TON STEEL

BASIC OYGEN FURNACE BOF BASIC OYGEN 23 e large majority of current steel production uses coal to reduce FURNACE BOF iron ore and produce steel in integrated steelworks. EHIBIT 23

INCREASED PROCESS EFFICIENCY BOF, WITH BEST 19 An estimated 15% process eciency improvement is possible within AVAILABLE TECHNOLOGY the current BOF process.

TON, ore TONNE BIOBASED INPUTS BOF, WITH BIO FUELS 11 Bio-based fuels can substitute for some of the coal input, with emissions reductions of around 50%.

DIRECT REDUCED IRON DIRECT REDUCED IRON 11 is route uses natural gas to reduce iron ore, which almost DRI halves emissions. DRI accounts for 5% of current world production.

CARBON CAPTURE AND STORAGE CCS BOF CARBON CAPTURE 09 capturing the CO2 from the blast furnace of an integrated steel plant AND STORAGE CCS can reduce overall emissions by 60%.

ELECTRIC ARC FURNACE EAF ELECTRIC ARC FURNACE 04 the main route for secondary steel uses electricity to melt steel scrap and / EAF or direct reduced iron, with only small onsite emissions

ZEROCARBON ELECTRICITY EAF: EAF ZERO CARBON 01 By using zero-carbon electricity, nearly all the emissions from steelmaking can be eliminated.

CO2 EMISSIONS, STEEL PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE CO2 EMISSIONS, STEEL PRODUCTION Gt CO PER YEAR, 2015-2100, GLOBAL EHIBIT 24 2 Gt CO2 2015-2100, GLOBAL 70

60 298

50

40 198

30

20

10

00 2020 2040 2060 2080 2100 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE LOW CARBON CURRENT EMISSIONS INTENSITY PROCESS BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE LOWCARBON PROCESS

GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION AND AVAILABLE SCRAP THROUGH STOCK EIT Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2100 EHIBIT 25 4 000 STEEL PRODUCTION

3 000

2 000 AVAILABLE STEEL SCRAP

1 000

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION AND AVAILABLE SCRAP THROUGH STOCK EIT Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050 EHIBIT 26 180

160 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE STEEL PRODUCTION 140

120

100 AVAILABLE STEEL SCRAP 80

60

40 Exhibit 2.7 20 Almost 150 million tonnes of steel 0 are lost annually 2020 2030 2040 2050

LOSSES IN STEEL PRODUCTION EHIBIT 27 Mt STEEL 2015

NOT COLLECTED POST CONSUMER SCRAP 146 On average, 4-5% of steel is lost in the re-melting process as slag when impurities and alloying elements are removed 22 NEW SCRAP LOST Large losses at fabrication and forming means up to 27% of steel does not reach products 70-90% of resulting scrap is collected 48

Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint

OLD SCRAP LOST 15% of end-of-life products are not collected for recycling – rising to 50% or more in some product categories 69

OBSOLETE STOCK 1-10% of end-of-life structures are inaccessible due to corrosion or permanent loss (e.g. underground structures) 6 MILLION TONNES OF STEEL LOST

MAIMUM COPPER CONTENT BY STEEL PRODUCT CATEGORY EHIBIT 28 Wt% COPPER IN STEEL

67 REBAR 040

STRUCTURAL 012

COMMERCIAL 010 Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint GLOBAL PRODUCT MI 008

FINE WIRE 007

DRAWING 006 CURRENT LEVEL OECD SCRAP 02025% DEEP DRAWING 004

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION Mt CO PER YEAR, 2015-2100 EHIBIT 29 2 BASELINE SCENARIO 5 000 MATERIALS CIRCULARITY 4 500 MATERIALS AND PRODUCT 4 000 CIRCULARITY 29% 3 500

3 000 20% 52% 2 500

500

1500

1 000

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EHIBIT 210 GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION BY ROUTE Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2100

4 000

3 500 SECONDARY PRODUCTION 3 000 Circular scenario

2 500 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 2000 Basline scenario 47% 1500 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 1 000 Circular scenario

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION BY ROUTE EHIBIT 210 Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050

180

160

140

120

100 SECONDARY PRODUCTION Circular scenario 80

60 PRIMARY PRODUCTION Circular scenario without 40 managed copper levels 20 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 0 Circular scenario 2020 2030 2040 2050

NEED UPDATE 3 500 PRODUCTS 3 000

2 500 MACHINERY EHIBIT 21 DEMAND BY PRODUCT GROUP 2 000 TRANSPORTATION Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 1 500 CONSTRUCTION 2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 000

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

4 500

4 000

3 500 Kan behövas annan font på hänvisningarna? 3 000 CO2 EMISSIONS 2 500 Mt CO2 PER YEAR, 2 000

2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 500

1 000

500

FRGPALETT 0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

TOTAL STEEL DEMAND 4 000

3 500 MCKINSEY, MEDIUM SCENARIO

3 000 ALLWOOD CULLEN 2012 YLIA ET AL 2017 PRODUCTION PER ROUTE 2 500 MILFORD ET AL 2013 Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2 000 GLOBAL CALCULATOR, LOW ALLWOOD PAULIUK 2013 2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 500 VAN RUIVEN VAN UUREN 2016 1 000 IEAETP 2017

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050

220 EHIBIT 22 HISTORICAL DEMAND 200 PROECTED DEMAND 180

160

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050

CO2 INTENSITY OF STEEL PRODUCTION TON CO2/TON STEEL

BASIC OYGEN FURNACE BOF BASIC OYGEN 23 e large majority of current steel production uses coal to reduce FURNACE BOF iron ore and produce steel in integrated steelworks. EHIBIT 23

INCREASED PROCESS EFFICIENCY BOF, WITH BEST 19 An estimated 15% process eciency improvement is possible within AVAILABLE TECHNOLOGY the current BOF process.

TON, ore TONNE BIOBASED INPUTS BOF, WITH BIO FUELS 11 Bio-based fuels can substitute for some of the coal input, with emissions reductions of around 50%.

DIRECT REDUCED IRON DIRECT REDUCED IRON 11 is route uses natural gas to reduce iron ore, which almost DRI halves emissions. DRI accounts for 5% of current world production.

CARBON CAPTURE AND STORAGE CCS BOF CARBON CAPTURE 09 capturing the CO2 from the blast furnace of an integrated steel plant AND STORAGE CCS can reduce overall emissions by 60%.

ELECTRIC ARC FURNACE EAF ELECTRIC ARC FURNACE 04 the main route for secondary steel uses electricity to melt steel scrap and / EAF or direct reduced iron, with only small onsite emissions

ZEROCARBON ELECTRICITY EAF: EAF ZERO CARBON 01 By using zero-carbon electricity, nearly all the emissions from steelmaking can be eliminated.

CO2 EMISSIONS, STEEL PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE CO2 EMISSIONS, STEEL PRODUCTION Gt CO PER YEAR, 2015-2100, GLOBAL EHIBIT 24 2 Gt CO2 2015-2100, GLOBAL 70

60 298

50

40 198

30

20

10

00 2020 2040 2060 2080 2100 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE LOW CARBON CURRENT EMISSIONS INTENSITY PROCESS BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE LOWCARBON PROCESS

GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION AND AVAILABLE SCRAP THROUGH STOCK EIT Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2100 EHIBIT 25 4 000 STEEL PRODUCTION

3 000

2 000 AVAILABLE STEEL SCRAP

1 000

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION AND AVAILABLE SCRAP THROUGH STOCK EIT Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050 EHIBIT 26 180

160 STEEL PRODUCTION

140

120

100 AVAILABLE STEEL SCRAP 80

60

40

20

0 2020 2030 2040 2050

LOSSES IN STEEL PRODUCTION EHIBIT 27 Mt STEEL 2015

NOT COLLECTED POST CONSUMER SCRAP REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT146 DISTRIBUTE On average, 4-5% of steel is lost in the re-melting process as slag when impurities and alloying elements are removed 22 DOWNCYCLING TONEW CONSTRUCTION SCRAP LOST STEEL Steel comes in manyLarge different losses at fabrication grades and andforming qualities, show below, there are limits to downcycling as a strategy means up to 27% of steel does not reach and many products requireproducts precise control over the pu- in a world with higher shares of secondary steel. Eventu- rity of the inputs and70-90% other ofelements resulting scrap of is thecollected production ally, high shares can only be achieved if secondary steel process. This can be a challenge for secondary steel- production48 can also produce other, high-quality products, making. Scrap with very different content often is mixed meeting the needs of all sectors of the economy, inclu- Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint together in today’s supply chains, making it harder to ding more demanding applications. precisely control the inputs to production. This results in downcycling of steel. For example, by one estimate, only There is no fundamental reason that this could not be around 8% of the steel originally used in cars maintains achieved. There are several secondary steelmakers that sufficient quality to be used for the same purpose again. already manage to produce very high-quality and even speci- alty steels from scrap today.OLD SCRAP This requires LOST a tightly controlled Today, this is handled by using secondary steel prima- supply of scrap – keeping15% different of end-of-life qualities products are apart, not collected matching for recycling rily for relatively basic construction steels (rebar, but also input content to product– risingrequirements, to 50% or more and in someremoving product undecategories- structural elements). These can tolerate both a less pre- sired69 elements – as well as advanced metallurgy. Replica- cise composition and a higher share of ‘tramp elements’ ting this across the EU and global economy would require a – i.e., substances that are not desired. However, as we much more sophisticated handling of end-of-life steel. OBSOLETE STOCK 1-10% of end-of-life structures are inaccessible due to corrosion or permanent loss (e.g. underground structures) Exhibit 2.8 6 Global copper levels in steelMILLION TONNES scrap already exceed OF STEEL LOST tolerances for a number of important products

MAIMUM COPPER CONTENT BY STEEL PRODUCT CATEGORY EHIBIT 28 Wt% COPPER IN STEEL

REBAR 040

STRUCTURAL 012

COMMERCIAL 010 Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint GLOBAL PRODUCT MI 008

FINE WIRE 007

DRAWING 006 CURRENT LEVEL OECD SCRAP 02025% DEEP DRAWING 004

SOURCE: GLOBAL PRODUCT MIX: MATERIAL ECONOMICS MODELLING COPPER LIMITS: HOW WILL COPPER CONTAMINATION CONSTRAIN FUTURE STEEL RECYCLING? – SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION, ALLWOOD ET. AL. 2017

CO EMISSIONS FROM GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION 2 68 Mt CO PER YEAR, 2015-2100 EHIBIT 29 2 BASELINE SCENARIO 5 000 MATERIALS CIRCULARITY 4 500 MATERIALS AND PRODUCT 4 000 CIRCULARITY 29% 3 500

3 000 20% 52% 2 500

500

1500

1 000

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EHIBIT 210 GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION BY ROUTE Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2100

4 000

3 500 SECONDARY PRODUCTION 3 000 Circular scenario

2 500 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 2000 Basline scenario 47% 1500 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 1 000 Circular scenario

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION BY ROUTE EHIBIT 210 Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050

180

160

140

120

100 SECONDARY PRODUCTION Circular scenario 80

60 PRIMARY PRODUCTION Circular scenario without 40 managed copper levels 20 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 0 Circular scenario 2020 2030 2040 2050

NEED UPDATE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

COPPER CONTAMINATION – A POTENTIAL MAJOR CONSTRAINT ON FUTURE SECONDARY STEEL A particularly important aspect of downgrading is the Today, the copper problem is managed in part contamination of steel with copper. Even low levels of through dilution, either with scrap containing lower le- copper drastically affect the quality of steel. At a share vels of copper, or with fresh primary steel. Downcycling of 0.15% or less, steel becomes unusable for important also helps manage the problem: copper contamination product groups (Exhibit 8). The copper content of OECD is a major reason why secondary steel tends to be scrap is around 0.2–0.25 %, a level that exceeds the used for construction steels, which can tolerate higher requirements for many product categories except rebar. levels. Moreover, unlike many other elements, copper cannot be removed from the steel. In effect, the addition of copper Nonetheless, this creates major challenges as results in the permanent and long-term downgrading of copper continues to accumulate, and as the share of the steel stock. The addition of copper and other ele- scrap-based production increases. As we show below, ments also increases the energy required to produce se- continuing today’s practice would put a major obstacle condary steel, in some cases by as much as 40%. in the way of a more circular steel economy, with signifi- cant increases in CO2 emissions as a result. Copper is added to steel primarily at the point of re- cycling, as products containing both steel and copper are dismantled. Examples include components such as electrical motors or cables with magnetic parts, or entire products with high joint iron and copper content. End-of- life vehicles are a major source, as cars can have a cop- per content of 0.5% or more and often are shredded after at most basic dismantling. Even to make rebar, fresh primary steel or less contaminated scrap must therefore be added. With more advanced handling of cars, such as automated or manual dismantling, the copper mixing can be reduced.

69 3 500 PRODUCTS 3 000

2 500 MACHINERY EHIBIT 21 DEMAND BY PRODUCT GROUP 2 000 TRANSPORTATION Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 1 500 CONSTRUCTION 2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 000

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

4 500

4 000

3 500 Kan behövas annan font på hänvisningarna? 3 000 CO2 EMISSIONS 2 500 Mt CO2 PER YEAR, 2 000

2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 500

1 000

500

FRGPALETT 0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

TOTAL STEEL DEMAND 4 000

3 500 MCKINSEY, MEDIUM SCENARIO

3 500 3 000 ALLWOOD CULLEN 2012 PRODUCTS YLIA ET AL 2017 3 000 PRODUCTION PER ROUTE 2 500 MILFORD ET AL 2013 GLOBAL CALCULATOR, LOW 2 500 MACHINERY Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2 000 ALLWOOD PAULIUK 2013 EHIBIT 21 2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 500 DEMAND BY PRODUCT GROUP 2 000 TRANSPORTATION VAN RUIVEN VAN UUREN 2016 1 000 IEAETP 2017 Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 1 500 CONSTRUCTION 2015-2100, GLOBAL 500 1 000 0 500 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

4 500

4 000

3 500 Kan behövas annan font på hänvisningarna? 3 000 CO2 EMISSIONS 2 500 Mt CO2 PER YEAR, 2 000

2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 500

1 000

500

FRGPALETT 0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION

TOTAL STEEL DEMAND Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050 4 000 220 3 500 EHIBIT 22MCKINSEY, MEDIUM SCENARIO HISTORICAL DEMAND 200 3 000 ALLWOOD CULLEN 2012 PROECTED DEMAND YLIA ET AL 2017 180 PRODUCTION PER ROUTE 2 500 MILFORD ET AL 2013 Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2 000 GLOBAL CALCULATOR, LOW 160 ALLWOOD PAULIUK 2013 2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 500 VAN RUIVEN VAN UUREN 2016 140 1 000 IEAETP 2017 120 500 100 0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 80

60

40

20

0 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050

CO2 INTENSITY OF STEEL PRODUCTION TON CO2/TON STEEL

BASIC OYGEN FURNACE BOF BASIC OYGEN 23 e large majority of current steel production uses coal to reduce FURNACE BOF iron ore and produce steel in integrated steelworks. EHIBIT 23 EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050 INCREASED PROCESS EFFICIENCY BOF, WITH BEST An estimated 15% process eciency improvement is possible within 220 19 AVAILABLE TECHNOLOGY the current BOF process. EHIBIT 22 HISTORICAL DEMAND 200 PROECTED DEMAND 180 TON, ore TONNE BIOBASED INPUTS 160 BOF, WITH BIO FUELS 11 Bio-based fuels can substitute for some of the coal input, with 140 emissions reductions of around 50%.

120

100 DIRECT REDUCED IRON DIRECT REDUCED IRON 80 11 is route uses natural gas to reduce iron ore, which almost DRI halves emissions. DRI accounts for 5% of current world production. 60

40

20 CARBON CAPTURE AND STORAGE CCS BOF CARBON CAPTURE 09 capturing the CO2 from the blast furnace of an integrated steel plant 0 AND STORAGE CCS can reduce overall emissions by 60%. 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050

ELECTRIC ARC FURNACE EAF CO2 INTENSITY OF STEEL PRODUCTION ELECTRIC ARC FURNACE the main route for secondary steel uses electricity to melt steel scrap and / TON CO2/TON STEEL 04 EAF or direct reduced iron, with only small onsite emissions BASIC OYGEN FURNACE BOF BASIC OYGEN 23 e large majority of current steel production uses coal to reduce FURNACE BOF iron ore and produce steel in integrated steelworks. ZEROCARBON ELECTRICITY EAF: EHIBIT 23 EAF ZERO CARBON 01 By using zero-carbon electricity, nearly all the emissions from steelmaking can be eliminated. INCREASED PROCESS EFFICIENCY BOF, WITH BEST An estimated 15% process eciency improvement is possible within AVAILABLE TECHNOLOGY 19 the current BOF process. CO2 EMISSIONS, STEEL PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE CO2 EMISSIONS, STEEL PRODUCTION Gt CO PER YEAR, 2015-2100, GLOBAL EHIBIT 24 2 Gt CO2 2015-2100, GLOBAL 70 TON, ore TONNE BIOBASED INPUTS BOF, WITH BIO FUELS 11 Bio-based fuels can substitute for some of the coal input, with 60 298 emissions reductions of around 50%. 50

198 DIRECT REDUCED IRON 40 DIRECT REDUCED IRON 11 is route uses natural gas to reduce iron ore, which almost DRI halves emissions. DRI accounts for 5% of current world production. 30

20 CARBON CAPTURE AND STORAGE CCS 10 BOF CARBON CAPTURE 09 capturing the CO2 from the blast furnace of an integrated steel plant AND STORAGE CCS can reduce overall emissions by 60%. 00 2020 2040 2060 2080 2100 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE LOW CARBON ELECTRIC ARC FURNACE EAF CURRENT EMISSIONS INTENSITY PROCESS BASELINE SCENARIO ELECTRIC ARC FURNACE the main route for secondary steel uses electricity to melt steel scrap and / 04 BASELINE LOWCARBON PROCESS EAF or direct reduced iron, with only small onsite emissions

ZEROCARBON ELECTRICITY EAF: EAF ZERO CARBON 01 By using zero-carbon electricity, nearly all the emissions from steelmaking can be eliminated. GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION AND AVAILABLE SCRAP THROUGH STOCK EIT Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2100 EHIBIT 25 CO2 EMISSIONS, STEEL PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE CO EMISSIONS, STEEL PRODUCTION 2 4 000 Gt CO PER YEAR, 2015-2100, GLOBAL EHIBIT 24 2 Gt CO2 2015-2100, GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION 70

60 298 3 000

50

40 198 2 000 AVAILABLE STEEL SCRAP 30

20 1 000 10

00 2020 2040 2060 2080 2100 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE 0 LOW CARBON CURRENT EMISSIONS INTENSITY PROCESS 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE LOWCARBON PROCESS

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION AND AVAILABLE SCRAP THROUGH STOCK EIT Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050 EHIBIT 26 GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION AND AVAILABLE SCRAP THROUGH STOCK EIT 180 Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2100 EHIBIT 25 160 STEEL PRODUCTION 4 000 STEEL PRODUCTION 140

120

3 000 100 AVAILABLE STEEL SCRAP 80

60 2 000 AVAILABLE STEEL SCRAP 40

20 1 000 0 2020 2030 2040 2050

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

LOSSES IN STEEL PRODUCTION EHIBIT 27 Mt STEEL 2015 EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION AND AVAILABLE SCRAP THROUGH STOCK EIT Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050 EHIBIT 26 NOT COLLECTED POST CONSUMER SCRAP 180 146 On average, 4-5% of steel is lost in the re-melting process as slag when impurities and alloying elements are removed 160 STEEL PRODUCTION 22 140 NEW SCRAP LOST Large losses at fabrication and forming 120 means up to 27% of steel does not reach products 100 70-90% of resulting scrap is collected AVAILABLE STEEL SCRAP 48 80 Källa till diagrammet 60 nns i PowerPoint

40

20 OLD SCRAP LOST 0 15% of end-of-life products are not collected for recycling 2020 2030 2040 2050 – rising to 50% or more in some product categories 69

OBSOLETE STOCK LOSSES IN STEEL PRODUCTION 1-10% of end-of-life structures are Mt STEEL 2015 EHIBIT 27 inaccessible due to corrosion or permanent loss (e.g. underground structures) 6 NOT COLLECTED POST CONSUMER SCRAP MILLION TONNES 146 On average, 4-5% of steel is lost in the re-melting OF STEEL LOST process as slag when impurities and alloying elements are removed 22 MAIMUM COPPER CONTENT BY STEEL PRODUCT CATEGORY NEW SCRAP LOST EHIBIT 28 Wt% COPPER IN STEEL Large losses at fabrication and forming means up to 27% of steel does not reach products 70-90% of resulting scrap is collected REBAR 040 48

Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint STRUCTURAL 012

COMMERCIAL 010 Källa till diagrammet OLD SCRAP LOST nns i PowerPoint 15% of end-of-life products are not collected for recycling GLOBAL PRODUCT MI 008 – rising to 50% or more in some product categories 69 FINE WIRE 007 OBSOLETE STOCK 1-10% of end-of-life structures are DRAWING 006 inaccessible due to corrosion or permanent loss (e.g. underground structures) CURRENT LEVEL OECD SCRAP 6 02025% DEEP DRAWING 004 MILLION TONNES REVIEW DRAFT – DOOF STEEL NOT LOST DISTRIBUTE

AMAIMUM CIRCULAR COPPER SCENARIO CONTENT BY FORSTEEL STEEL PRODUCT IN CATEGORY 2050 EHIBIT 28 ToWt %explore COPPER the IN STEEL benefits of a more circular steel sys- As explored elsewhere in this report, it is also pos- CO EMISSIONS FROM GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION tem, we constructed a scenario for the steel sector in sible to implement circular economy principles at the 2 Mt CO PER YEAR, 2015-2100 which all three issues discussed above are addressed: product level – through longerEHIBIT lifetimes, 29 more intensive 2 use, light-weighting, and other strategies. In a ‘materials 1. ReduceREBAR the losses of steel; 040 BASELINE SCENARIO and product circularity’ scenario that captures some of 5 000 2. Enable the use of secondary steel across a wider the opportunities in transport and buildings, the emis- MATERIALS CIRCULARITY 4 500 range of product groups globally; and sions reductions are still larger: as much as 52% of the MATERIALS AND PRODUCT STRUCTURAL 012 3. Reduce and eventually eliminate the problem of cop- emissions in 2100 are eliminated, and emissions fall in 4 000 CIRCULARITY absolute terms compared with current levels. per contamination. 29% 3 500 COMMERCIAL 010 Globally, we find thatthis ‘materials circularity’ scena- The materials circularity scenario also sees a diffe- Källa till diagrammet 3 000 nns i PowerPoint rio cuts CO2 emissions significantly (Exhibit 9): by 590 rent profile of steel production vs. the baseline. Instead 20% 52% Mt CO2 per year (20%) by 2050, and as much as 1.1 of rising to 2.2 Gt per year, primary production is never 2 500 GLOBAL PRODUCT MI 008 Gt CO2 per year (29%) towards the end of the century. higher than 1.6 Gt tonnes. Secondary steel takes a ma- By any measure, demand-side measures for steel are a jority role by mid-century, and nearly all growth in steel 500 major contributor to the objective of making materials demand can thus be met through recycling. FINE WIRE 007 1500 use consistent with climate objectives. 1 000

DRAWING 006 500

CURRENT LEVEL OECD SCRAP 0 02025% 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 DEEP DRAWING 004 Exhibit 2.9 A circular scenario with reduced losses and technology improvements has large potential to reduce emissions

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION EHIBIT 210 Mt CO2 PER YEAR, 2015-2100 EHIBIT 29 GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION BY ROUTE BASELINE SCENARIO Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2100 5 000 MATERIALS CIRCULARITY 4 500 MATERIALS AND PRODUCT 4 000 4 000 CIRCULARITY 3 500 29% SECONDARY PRODUCTION 3 500 3 000 Circular scenario 3 000 20% 2 500 52% PRIMARY PRODUCTION 2 500 2000 Basline scenario 500 47% 1500 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 1500 1 000 Circular scenario

1 000 500

500 0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION BY ROUTE EHIBIT 210 Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050 70 EHIBIT 210 GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION BY ROUTE 180 Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2100 160

4 000 140 120 3 500 SECONDARY PRODUCTION 100 SECONDARY PRODUCTION 3 000 Circular scenario Circular scenario 80 2 500 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 60 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 2000 Basline scenario Circular scenario without 40 47% managed copper levels 1500 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 20 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 1 000 Circular scenario 0 Circular scenario 2020 2030 2040 2050 500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION BY ROUTE EHIBIT 210 Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050 NEED UPDATE

180

160

140

120

100 SECONDARY PRODUCTION Circular scenario 80

60 PRIMARY PRODUCTION Circular scenario without 40 managed copper levels 20 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 0 Circular scenario 2020 2030 2040 2050

NEED UPDATE 3 500 PRODUCTS 3 000

2 500 MACHINERY EHIBIT 21 DEMAND BY PRODUCT GROUP 2 000 TRANSPORTATION Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 1 500 CONSTRUCTION 2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 000

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

4 500

4 000

3 500 Kan behövas annan font på hänvisningarna? 3 000 CO2 EMISSIONS 2 500 Mt CO2 PER YEAR, 2 000

2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 500

1 000

500

FRGPALETT 0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

TOTAL STEEL DEMAND 4 000

3 500 MCKINSEY, MEDIUM SCENARIO

3 000 ALLWOOD CULLEN 2012 YLIA ET AL 2017 PRODUCTION PER ROUTE 2 500 MILFORD ET AL 2013 Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2 000 GLOBAL CALCULATOR, LOW ALLWOOD PAULIUK 2013 2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 500 VAN RUIVEN VAN UUREN 2016 1 000 IEAETP 2017

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050

220 EHIBIT 22 HISTORICAL DEMAND 200 PROECTED DEMAND 180

160

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050

CO2 INTENSITY OF STEEL PRODUCTION TON CO2/TON STEEL

BASIC OYGEN FURNACE BOF BASIC OYGEN 23 e large majority of current steel production uses coal to reduce FURNACE BOF iron ore and produce steel in integrated steelworks. EHIBIT 23

INCREASED PROCESS EFFICIENCY BOF, WITH BEST 19 An estimated 15% process eciency improvement is possible within AVAILABLE TECHNOLOGY the current BOF process.

TON, ore TONNE BIOBASED INPUTS BOF, WITH BIO FUELS 11 Bio-based fuels can substitute for some of the coal input, with emissions reductions of around 50%.

DIRECT REDUCED IRON DIRECT REDUCED IRON 11 is route uses natural gas to reduce iron ore, which almost DRI halves emissions. DRI accounts for 5% of current world production.

CARBON CAPTURE AND STORAGE CCS BOF CARBON CAPTURE 09 capturing the CO2 from the blast furnace of an integrated steel plant AND STORAGE CCS can reduce overall emissions by 60%.

ELECTRIC ARC FURNACE EAF ELECTRIC ARC FURNACE 04 the main route for secondary steel uses electricity to melt steel scrap and / EAF or direct reduced iron, with only small onsite emissions

ZEROCARBON ELECTRICITY EAF: EAF ZERO CARBON 01 By using zero-carbon electricity, nearly all the emissions from steelmaking can be eliminated.

CO2 EMISSIONS, STEEL PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE CO2 EMISSIONS, STEEL PRODUCTION Gt CO PER YEAR, 2015-2100, GLOBAL EHIBIT 24 2 Gt CO2 2015-2100, GLOBAL 70

60 298

50

40 198

30

20

10

00 2020 2040 2060 2080 2100 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE LOW CARBON CURRENT EMISSIONS INTENSITY PROCESS BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE LOWCARBON PROCESS

GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION AND AVAILABLE SCRAP THROUGH STOCK EIT Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2100 EHIBIT 25 4 000 STEEL PRODUCTION

3 000

2 000 AVAILABLE STEEL SCRAP

1 000

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION AND AVAILABLE SCRAP THROUGH STOCK EIT Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050 EHIBIT 26 180

160 STEEL PRODUCTION

140

120

100 AVAILABLE STEEL SCRAP 80

60

40

20

0 2020 2030 2040 2050

LOSSES IN STEEL PRODUCTION EHIBIT 27 Mt STEEL 2015

NOT COLLECTED POST CONSUMER SCRAP 146 On average, 4-5% of steel is lost in the re-melting process as slag when impurities and alloying elements are removed 22 NEW SCRAP LOST Large losses at fabrication and forming means up to 27% of steel does not reach products 70-90% of resulting scrap is collected 48

Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint

OLD SCRAP LOST 15% of end-of-life products are not collected for recycling – rising to 50% or more in some product categories 69

OBSOLETE STOCK 1-10% of end-of-life structures are inaccessible due to corrosion or permanent loss (e.g. underground structures) 6 MILLION TONNES OF STEEL LOST

MAIMUM COPPER CONTENT BY STEEL PRODUCT CATEGORY EHIBIT 28 Wt% COPPER IN STEEL

REBAR 040

STRUCTURAL 012

COMMERCIAL 010 Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint GLOBAL PRODUCT MI 008

FINE WIRE 007

DRAWING 006 CURRENT LEVEL OECD SCRAP 02025% DEEP DRAWING 004 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

This scenario implies a major reconfiguration of glo- Another major reconfiguration is in regional pat- CO EMISSIONS FROM GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION 2 bal steel production, from an overwhelming emphasis terns of steel production and trade. The above scenario Mt CO PER YEAR, 2015-2100 EHIBIT 29 2on primary production, and towards a circular steel sys- depends on reducing the contamination of steel with tem. In fact, if the potential for circularity is realised, the- copper. With current practice, this would require signifi- BASELINE SCENARIO 5 000 re might be no need to add further primary steelmaking cant scale-up of trade between regions. For dilution to capacity beyond the 2020s, except to replace obsolete be feasible, steel scrapMATERIALS with high CIRCULARITY copper content would 4 500 plants (there already is very large overcapacity in ste- need to be mixed withMATERIALS new primary AND PRODUCT steel produced in 4 000 elmaking ). This is a major break with the past. Even in countries with fast-growingCIRCULARITY demand. However, this is not the last decades, two-thirds of new global demand has a viable approach as the problem grows, as perfectly 29% 3 500 been met by building new capacity for primary steelma- mixing all available scrap and primary steel globally to king (notably, as demand has grown at unprecedented keep average copper content down is unrealistic. At a 3 000 pace in China). By contrast,20% in a circular scenario, the minimum, it is at odds with historical patterns for steel, 52% 2 500 analysis suggest that all the blast furnaces required where most industrialised regions have aimed to meet globally could be built by the 2020s. most of their steel needs via domestic production. 500

1500

1 000

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 Exhibit2080 2.102090 2100 A circular scenario has large impact on primary steel production globally

EHIBIT 210 GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION BY ROUTE Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2100

4 000

3 500 SECONDARY PRODUCTION 3 000 Circular scenario

2 500 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 2000 Basline scenario 47% 1500 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 1 000 Circular scenario

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

SOURCE: EXCESS CAPACITY IN THE GLOBAL STEEL INDUSTRY: THE CURRENT SITUATION AND WAYS FORWARD, OECD (2015) EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION BY ROUTE EHIBIT 210 Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050 71

180

160

140

120

100 SECONDARY PRODUCTION Circular scenario 80

60 PRIMARY PRODUCTION Circular scenario without 40 managed copper levels 20 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 0 Circular scenario 2020 2030 2040 2050

NEED UPDATE 3 500 PRODUCTS 3 000

2 500 MACHINERY EHIBIT 21 DEMAND BY PRODUCT GROUP 2 000 TRANSPORTATION Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 1 500 CONSTRUCTION 2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 000

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

4 500

4 000

3 500 Kan behövas annan font på hänvisningarna? 3 000 CO2 EMISSIONS 2 500 Mt CO2 PER YEAR, 2 000

2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 500

1 000

500

FRGPALETT 0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

TOTAL STEEL DEMAND 4 000

3 500 MCKINSEY, MEDIUM SCENARIO

3 000 ALLWOOD CULLEN 2012 YLIA ET AL 2017 PRODUCTION PER ROUTE 2 500 MILFORD ET AL 2013 Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2 000 GLOBAL CALCULATOR, LOW ALLWOOD PAULIUK 2013 2015-2100, GLOBAL 1 500 VAN RUIVEN VAN UUREN 2016 1 000 IEAETP 2017

500

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050

220 EHIBIT 22 HISTORICAL DEMAND 200 PROECTED DEMAND 180

160

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050

CO2 INTENSITY OF STEEL PRODUCTION TON CO2/TON STEEL

BASIC OYGEN FURNACE BOF BASIC OYGEN 23 e large majority of current steel production uses coal to reduce FURNACE BOF iron ore and produce steel in integrated steelworks. EHIBIT 23

INCREASED PROCESS EFFICIENCY BOF, WITH BEST 19 An estimated 15% process eciency improvement is possible within AVAILABLE TECHNOLOGY the current BOF process.

TON, ore TONNE BIOBASED INPUTS BOF, WITH BIO FUELS 11 Bio-based fuels can substitute for some of the coal input, with emissions reductions of around 50%.

DIRECT REDUCED IRON DIRECT REDUCED IRON 11 is route uses natural gas to reduce iron ore, which almost DRI halves emissions. DRI accounts for 5% of current world production.

CARBON CAPTURE AND STORAGE CCS BOF CARBON CAPTURE 09 capturing the CO2 from the blast furnace of an integrated steel plant AND STORAGE CCS can reduce overall emissions by 60%.

ELECTRIC ARC FURNACE EAF ELECTRIC ARC FURNACE 04 the main route for secondary steel uses electricity to melt steel scrap and / EAF or direct reduced iron, with only small onsite emissions

ZEROCARBON ELECTRICITY EAF: EAF ZERO CARBON 01 By using zero-carbon electricity, nearly all the emissions from steelmaking can be eliminated.

CO2 EMISSIONS, STEEL PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE CO2 EMISSIONS, STEEL PRODUCTION Gt CO PER YEAR, 2015-2100, GLOBAL EHIBIT 24 2 Gt CO2 2015-2100, GLOBAL 70

60 298

50

40 198

30

20

10

00 2020 2040 2060 2080 2100 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE LOW CARBON CURRENT EMISSIONS INTENSITY PROCESS BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE LOWCARBON PROCESS

GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION AND AVAILABLE SCRAP THROUGH STOCK EIT Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2100 EHIBIT 25 4 000 STEEL PRODUCTION

3 000

2 000 AVAILABLE STEEL SCRAP

1 000

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION AND AVAILABLE SCRAP THROUGH STOCK EIT Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050 EHIBIT 26 180

160 STEEL PRODUCTION

140

120

100 AVAILABLE STEEL SCRAP 80

60

40

20

0 2020 2030 2040 2050

LOSSES IN STEEL PRODUCTION EHIBIT 27 Mt STEEL 2015

NOT COLLECTED POST CONSUMER SCRAP 146 On average, 4-5% of steel is lost in the re-melting process as slag when impurities and alloying elements are removed 22 NEW SCRAP LOST Large losses at fabrication and forming means up to 27% of steel does not reach products 70-90% of resulting scrap is collected 48

Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint

OLD SCRAP LOST 15% of end-of-life products are not collected for recycling – rising to 50% or more in some product categories 69

OBSOLETE STOCK 1-10% of end-of-life structures are inaccessible due to corrosion or permanent loss (e.g. underground structures) 6 MILLION TONNES OF STEEL LOST

MAIMUM COPPER CONTENT BY STEEL PRODUCT CATEGORY EHIBIT 28 Wt% COPPER IN STEEL

REBAR 040

STRUCTURAL 012

COMMERCIAL 010 Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint GLOBAL PRODUCT MI 008

FINE WIRE 007

DRAWING 006 CURRENT LEVEL OECD SCRAP 02025% DEEP DRAWING 004

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM GLOBAL STEEL PRODUCTION Mt CO PER YEAR, 2015-2100 EHIBIT 29 2 BASELINE SCENARIO 5 000 MATERIALS CIRCULARITY 4 500 MATERIALS AND PRODUCT 4 000 CIRCULARITY 29% 3 500

3 000 20% 52% 2 500

500

1500

1 000

500 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE 0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 EU CO2 EMISSIONS AND PRODUCTION Turning to the EU, even more is at stake by improving groups. Instead, some of the high-copper scrap would circularity (Exhibit 11). As noted, the region is transition need to be exported, and ultimately diluted with pri- to a situation where available scrap could meet a much mary steel in other markets. Meanwhile, primary pro- higher share of demand. The scenario below shows the duction of around 50 Mt would be required to dilute EHIBIT 210 production profile resulting if the EU were to use all remaining scrap in the EU. domestically available scrap to meet its own demand. In principle, primaryGLOBAL steel STEELproduction PRODUCTION could BYthen ROUTE decli- This development would also have a major impact on ne steeply, falling toM t justSTEEL 15% PER of YEAR, current 2015-2100 levels by the emissions within the EU. In a reference case, emissions 2050s. However, this would require that the circularity remain at 104 Mt CO2 per year in 2050, as primary

levers be successfully4 000 implemented, so that nearly all steel production continues to serve 30% of EU demand. available scrap is utilised, high-quality steel production In a circular scenario, by contrast, emissions could fall from scrap is feasible,3 500 and copper contamination is re- by half, to 47 Mt per year. solved. If current practices were maintained instead, the SECONDARY PRODUCTION EU could not use its3 000own scrap to meet demand, as it This depicts the potential toCircular meet scenario demand using would not hold the 2quality 500 required for major product scrap-based steelmaking. The actual production profile PRIMARY PRODUCTION 2000 Basline scenario 47% 1500 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 1 000 Circular scenario

500 Exhibit 2.11

0 Improved circularity2020 2030 2040 could2050 significantly2060 2070 2080 2090 reduce2100 the need for primary steel production to serve EU demand

EUROPEAN STEEL PRODUCTION BY ROUTE EHIBIT 210 Mt STEEL PER YEAR, 2015-2050

180

160

140

120

100 SECONDARY PRODUCTION Circular scenario 80

60 PRIMARY PRODUCTION Circular scenario without 40 managed copper levels 20 PRIMARY PRODUCTION 0 Circular scenario 2020 2030 2040 2050

72

NEED UPDATE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

of the future EU steel industry is a much more complex question. For a start, it would of cour- se be possible to produce steel for export, in which case additional primary production would be required. As another option, it would be pos- sible to export ever larger amounts of scrap (al- ready, some 18% of scrap is exported, as noted above), and continue primary steel production to meet some share of domestic demand. Either way, however, stabilisation of the EU steel stock will likely bring significant structural change to the industry, and a much smaller future role for blast furnaces.

Nonetheless, the analysis shows that a nearly fully circular steel economy is possible within the EU, with large resulting reductions in CO2. This alone is a remarkable prospect. To achieve that, a number of enablers need to be put in place, as we discuss below.

A CIRCULAR SCENARIO CAN SUPPORT SUPPLY-SIDE ABATEMENT

For clarity, the above numbers compare emis- sions reductions when primary steel is still lar- gely produced through the BOF route. However, a more circular scenario can also support efforts to decarbonise primary steel production.

Reducing emissions from primary steel produc- tion faces significant challenges. First, as noted in section 2.2, though there are established tech- nologies that could halve emissions, they are a long way from being deployed at scale, while truly deep cuts in emissions would depend on rapid deployment of breakthrough process innovations that are still at the research and development sta- ge. This creates a significant and uncertain inn- ovation challenge – and it would also require ex- isting steelmaking facilities to be replaced before the end of their useful life, at a high capital cost.

In that context, demand-side measures are not only valuable on their own right, but also to buy time and take the pressure off – much like ener- gy efficiency does on low-carbon energy supply. Circularity is thus an integral part of any deep mitigation scenario. As noted, in the long run, en- suring effective recycling globally could avoid the need to produce – and decarbonise – nearly 600 Mt of primary steel production per year, rising to 1,000 Mt with products circularity.

73 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

HOW TO GET THERE – MEASURES TO PROMOTE CIRCULARITY IN STEEL

The different circularity strategies are closely interrela- First, systems to collect end-of-use products need to ted and would need to be pursued simultaneously. Cop- be set up more widely and expand their capacity and per contamination becomes a much bigger concern as accuracy as volumes of steel scrap grow. New initiatives secondary steel is used for a wider range of purposes, and incentives will be needed to encourage consumers including the most demanding uses that require very high to recycle their products and to ensure that iron and steel quality. Similarly, unless copper is addressed, measures products are separated when buildings are demolished. to reduce losses or prevent downcycling are limited in how much they can displace primary production. As no- The forming of new scrap could be reduced with clo- ted earlier, without solving the copper problem, the world ser-to-shape semi-finished products and with designs as a whole would need to produce additional, “excess” that consider the production process and aim to mini- primary steel just to dilute the contaminated steel stock. mise new scrap. New technologies that leave much less By 2050, primary steel demand for that purpose alone production scrap, such as 3-D printing and powder me- could amount to as much as 100–150 Mt per year. In tallurgy, could be adopted far more widely. In addition, fact, unless the copper problem is solved, other circula- the quality of the collected new scrap could be improved rity measures such as increased collection and reduced through increased sorting. The advantage of new scrap losses rapidly run into a limit. over post-consumer scrap is known alloy content and clean streams of carbon steel. Efforts should be made to MEASURES TO REDUCE LOSSES keep alloys separated to be able to utilise the properties of the scrap after remelting. To arrive at the circular scenario, as little steel as pos- sible can be lost in production and collection. To minimise Reducing remelting losses will be challenging as more losses, measures need to be taken in three main areas. scrap enters the system. One way of reducing losses is to limit the mixing of alloys prior to melting to minimise impurities, as the process for removing undesired ele- ments also leads to higher losses of iron. Better sorting can also reduce energy requirements of the EAF process by as much as 30%. With a better alloy sorting sys- tem, alloying elements would not have to be removed, and instead their properties could be valuable for a new batch of steel being produced.

74 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

AVOIDING DOWNGRADING THROUGH A MORE • Product design for reduced contamination: The design of products can also improve the sorting process. SOPHISTICATED MARKET FOR STEEL SCRAP Design principles for recycling and for disassembly could facilitate the removal of copper components by make Alloy-to-alloy sorting is another key component to av- them easier to see and to access and remove. Material oid downgrading. If the contents of steel used for secon- substitution is sometimes an option, such as replacing dary production are known, steel scrap can be mixed copper cables and wires with optic fibre or aluminium much more closely to correspond to end products. The equivalents. technologies required to achieve this are under rapid development. For example, laser-induced breakdown • Metallurgy to increase copper tolerance: Produc- spectroscopy technologies are improving and falling in tion processes can be designed to be more tolerant to cost fast, making it possible to quickly determine the con- copper by avoiding the temperature interval where cop- tent of alloys. When the content is known, a much more per causes problems. Although not in itself a long-term differentiated marketplace can be created so that steel solution, this mitigates the problem. manufacturers can specify and obtain the scrap required also for exacting products. • Separation of copper from steel: There currently is no commercially viable method for removing copper FOUR WAYS OUT OF COPPER CONTAMINATION from steel once it has been added. Some assessments Copper’s effect on steel has been known for a long time, have been pessimistic that this will ever be viable. No- but the problem has so far been relatively easy to handle, netheless, some research is ongoing into methods such because secondary steel demand was limited. Looking as sulphide slagging, vacuum distillation and the use of ahead, four key strategies need to be implemented: O2/CL2 gas.

•Improved separation at end of life: The first step What will it take for these measures to take root? Ar- is to avoid adding high-copper scrap to otherwise clean guably, current markets are poorly equipped to really ac- flows, as is often done today to dispose of flows such count for the long-term impact of current practices on the as copper-alloyed steel or some vehicle scrap. Beyond long-term quality of the global steel stock. It may there- this, it will be necessary to increase the separation of fore be necessary to consider regulation as the route to copper and steel in the recycling process. This already address copper pollution before it becomes a significant happens to some extent, but practices vary widely, and problem for future steel recycling. the extent of sorting fluctuates with the copper price, since removing copper can be costly, manual work. To avoid the cost of manual labour, more technologies for automated sorting are being developed. More clo- sed-loop recycling would also be necessary to keep some scrap flows very pure and enable the use of scrap in especially copper-sensitive applications.

75 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

3. plastics finding a place within a low-carbon economy

Plastics are light, versatile, and cheap tion of re-use and recycling could provide materials with a wide range of uses, and 60% of plastics demand by 2050, cutting in the EU we now use 100 kg of plastics CO2 emissions by half. To make this eco- per person and year. Yet the use of plastics nomically attractive, the key is to focus on also leads to emissions of carbon dioxide systems that enable high quality recycling (CO2): both in production and because and preserve the value of plastics upon fossil carbon is a major building block of recycling. This requires a large-scale and all plastics. On current course, emissions regionally integrated secondary plastics in- would nearly double by 2050 in a baseli- dustry, technology development, and above ne scenario with today’s recycling rates, to all changes to product design: our use of more than 200 million tonnes of CO2 per plastics must have recycling in mind from year – far exceeding levels compatible with first use. the EU’s commitments under the Paris Ag- reement. Given their ubiquitous role in our This amounts to an ambitious transfor- society, finding a way to make plastics com- mation. Achieving circular plastics use will patible with a low-carbon economy is an ur- require integration along value chains, and gent agenda. concerted effort to overcome a range of bar- riers. Yet much can be achieved by focus- Recycling can offer a large part of the sing on what matters most: the five largest answer to this. Most plastics are recycla- plastics types, and their uses in packaging, ble, and recycling saves 90% of the CO2 automotive, and construction applications. emissions arising from new production. In By starting now, we could supply more than a detailed assessment of plastics types, half our plastics needs through recycling by flows, and uses we find that a combina- 2050.

76 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

More than half of plastics needs could be supplied through recycling by 2050

77 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

UNDERSTANDING FUTURE PLASTICS USE

Plastics are versatile, durable and low-cost materials total global oil use in a 2 °C scenario.1 By the end of the that are used widely across modern economies. More century, plastics consumption would need to rise further, than 30 types of plastics are in common use, with dif- to 1345 million tonnes per year – more than four times ferent properties and applications in numerous sectors. today’s levels. By any measure, plastics therefore are a Since the 1950s, global plastics production has risen major determinant of future fossil fuel use – and hence

dramatically, reaching more than 320 million tonnes in also of carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions, as we discuss 2015 and now growing by about 10 million tonnes per below. year. In the EU, we now use 100 kg of plastics per person and year. In Europe, a mature market, plastics demand actually declined with the economic downturn, and although it Global growth is set to continue. Plastics consumption has since rebounded, with a growth of about 1% per year, increases as economies develop and begin using them production is no higher than in 2000. Still, the EU uses in a range of products and consumer goods. Our ana- 49 million tonnes of plastics per year – about 100 kg per lysis suggests that by 2050, global plastics production person. With a continued shift to lighter materials and would double to over 800 million tonnes per year (Exhibit packaging, increased use of plastics in automotive appli- 3.1). If made with today’s fossil feedstock, global plas- cations, and increased demand for insulation to improve tics production would then require 900 Mt of oil per year, buildings’ energy efficiency, we project that EU plastics more than the European Union uses today, and 23% of demand will grow to 62 million tonnes per year by 2050.

1Each tonne of plastics uses c. 1.1 tonnes of oil (Levi and Cullen 2018), which means 903 million tonnes of oil would be needed for plastics production in 2050. 2050 oil consumption in the IEA’s 2 °C scenario is just over 3900 million tonnes (International Energy Agency 2017). In addition, producing this volume of plastics would require large volumes of natural gas.

Exhibit 3.1 Plastics demand will increase significantly

PLASTICS DEMAND BY REGION Mt PER YEAR, 2015-2100

1400 MIDDLE EAST AFRICA 1200 OECD ASIA CHINA 1000 DEVELOPED ASIA EHIBIT 31 LATIN AMERICA 800 EUROPE NORTH AMERICA 600

400

200

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS MODELLING

78

EHIBIT 32

CO2 EMISSIONS, PLASTICS PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE CO2 EMISSIONS, PLASTICS PRODUCTION

Gt CO2 PER YEAR, 2015-2100, GLOBAL Gt CO2, 2015-2100, GLOBAL

TONNE or ton 287

6

226 5

4

3

2

1

0 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE LOW CARBON PROCESS CURRENT BASELINE BASELINE LOW SCENARIO CARBON PROCESS

EMISSIONS INTENSITY OF PLASTICS PRODUCTION

TONNES CO2 EMISSIONS PER TONNE PLASTICS PRODUCED

EHIBIT 34

PRODUCTION EMBEDDED

PRIMARY PLASTICS, 2017 51 Primary plastics production leads to large emissions as well as embedded carbon in the material

PRIMARY PLASTICS, 2050 48 Improving production eciency reduces production emissions, but does not address embedded emissions

PRIMARY PLASTICS WITH 37 Using renewable energy inputs can cut production RENEWABLE ENERGY emissions but does not address embedded emissions

MECHANICAL RECYCLING, e recycling process has emissions of ~0.4 tCO2 / t LOW UALITY 2017 14 plastics Low-quality recycling may not lead to full replacement of primary plastics

MECHANICAL RECYCLING, 01 High-quality recycling in a largely decarbonised HIGH UALITY 2050 energy system can remove most emissions

Chemical recycling results in some CO2 emissions, CHEMICAL RECYCLING 10 but eliminates embedded emissions from new fossil feedstock

EHIBIT 35

PLASTIC VOLUMES IN EUROPE, 2015 Mt PER YEAR EHIBIT 36 Export in products Stock build-up Misclassi ed waste Etc 9

19

58 4 90% 49 10 30 26 7 4 9 5 PLASTICS NET DEMAND USE BALANCE END OF LIFE UNSORTED COLLECTED LANDFILL ENERGY COLLECTED PROCESS RECYCLING PRODUCTION EPORT AND STOCK PLASTICS PLASTICS IN PLASTIC RECOVERY FOR LOSSES IN BUILDUP HOUSHOLD WASTE RECYCLING RECYCLING WASTE

FROM TO EHIBIT 37 Virgin plastics do not carry cost of externalities Virgin plastics carry cost for embodied carbon 1 (other externalities likely via regulation)

Product design does not bear costs for Materials and design choices to make reuse and 2 downstream externalities and costs recycling the intended destination at end of life Ludde gör denna 3 Policy and systems focus on collection Focus on enabling raw materials flows for secondary direkt i InDesign? volumes – similar to other ‘waste’ flows materials production

End-of-life treatment and dismantling without Products designed for disassembly and dismantled 4 focus on retaining material value to retain secondary material value

Low-quality inputs and investment uncertainty Large-scale industry with high-quality outputs with high 5 results in low yields and small-scale, fragmented retained value and the ability to replace primary materials industry one-to-one Incentives focused on supply into recycling Large-scale and regional raw materials industry, with 6 process harmonized systems, specialisation, and product standards

7 Virgin plastics do not carry cost of externalities Products designed and dismantled to retain secondary material value

Reliable products and demand-side incentives create market certainty and stimulate investment in capacity

PLASTIC PRODUCTION EMISSIONS Mt CO2, EUROPE, 2050

EHIBIT 38 233

116

Rdditional recycling Substitution with other materials Renewable energy in production Biobased or CO2 feedstock 117 Process innovation

2050 WITH 100% CIRCULAR ABATEMENT REMAINING RENEWABLE RENEWABLE ENERGY RECOVERY POTENTIAL 2050 EMISSIONS ENERGY REDUCTION 2050 EMISSIONS

TOTAL

28% WHAT TAKES TO GET THERE NOT COLLECTED STOCK 47% 85% of 5 most common plastics collected for 1% recycling with signicant yield increases (90% yield) Shift from landll to energy recovery for non-recycled 17% Reduced stock build-up and increased collection for EHIBIT 39 recycling Reuse of: 12% 8% of packaging, especially industrial 20% LANDFILL 3% of B&C plastics, esp. PVC carpets, pipes etc. 4% of large automotive parts

15% ENERGY RECOVERY 37%

YIELD LOSSES 8% RECYCLED 10% REUSE 0% 4% 2017 2050

PACKAGING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION AUTOMOTIVE

5% 11% NOT COLLECTED 21% 2% STOCK 18% 16% 2% 2% 47% 15% 17% 32% LANDFILL 25% 76% 12%

ENERGY RECOVERY 22% 18% 53% 30% 47% YIELD LOSSES 13% 8% 5% 32% 9% RECYCLED 19% 11% 3% REUSE 0% 10% 0% 5% 4% 0% 6% 4% 2017 2050 2017 2050 2017 2050

REDUCED RECYCLING COSTS HIGHER REVENUES EUR / TON TREATED PLASTICS EUR / TON TREATED PLASTICS EHIBIT 310 924 926 16% COLLECTION 186 774 Cleaner ows from materials 71% Increased yields give larger 119 choices and product design revenues per tonne treated optimised for recycling plastic (better technology, SORTING 191 Increased scale reduces unit cleaner inows) 147 cost Higher quality enables pricing Specialisation 540 LOGISTICS 15 and regional closer to virgin materials 10 integration of markets (additional sorting, improved Technological improvement technology, cleaner ows and boosts eciency but requires optimised products) higher investment Raised cost of virgin materials Reduced risk from regulations improves willingness to pay for RECYCLING 337 439 and market uncertainty secondary products Better functioning markets reduce current commercial risk to buyers

162 93 REVENUES INVESTMENT 2017 2050 2017 2050

DEEP TRANSFORMATION THAT REUIRES COORDINATED AND SUSTAINED ACTION ACROSS VALUE CHAIN

ABATEMENT COST PACKAGING EAMPLE EHIBIT 311 EUR PER TON ABATED CO2

257 USED IN COST CURVE

43

68 101

2017 COST INCREASED ABATEMENT PER REDUCED COST OF RECYCLING, INCREASED REVENUES FROM TONNE OF PLASTIC RECYCLED ESPECIALLY THROUGH HIGHERUALITY SECONDARY INCREASED YIELDS MATERIALS

EHIBIT 312 EMISSIONS SAVINGS Mt CO2 / YEAR

80

EEE Low quality increased recycling 303 Automotive Low quality increased recycling 144 Agriculture Low quality increased recycling 97 70

Packaging Low quality increased recycling 40

60

Other plastics Low quality increased recycling 21

50

B&C Low quality increased recycling 66

40

Packaging High quality increased recycling 96

Agriculture High quality increased recycling 115 30 EEE High quality increased recycling 138

B&C High quality increased recycling 138

20 Automotive High quality increased recycling 149

Other plastics High quality increased recycling 170

10

Packaging Reuse 179

EEE Reuse 192 B&C Reuse 202 Automotive Reuse 203 200 150 100 50 0 50 100 150 200 250 300

ABATEMENT COST EUR/t CO2

REMAINING EMISSIONS 2050

EHIBIT 313 Mt CO2

REBOUND 117 Recycled plastics of lower quality do not replace the same volume of virgin plastics and may lead PRODUCTION FOR STOCK BUILD to an increased demand of total plastics 11 Around 10% of demand results in net stock build-up, requiring additional primary production 22 REUSE AND RECYCLING EMISSIONS 80% from yield losses in chemical recycling, the YIELD LOSSES remainder from mechanical recycling Yield losses in pre-treatment, recycling and 14 reuse process sent to energy recovery Process improvements as well as product design and choice of material important to maximize yields

42 AGED, DEGRADED, CONTAMINATED AND NOT COLLECTED COMMON PLASTICS Relatively small given option of chemical recycling THERMOSETS AND SMALL VOLUME Remaining share is aged, contaminated, or not captured by collection systems SPECIALTY PLASTICS 16 Challenging to achieve scale in small specialty plastics streams 12

EHIBIT 314

FEES Correct for externalities for primary production of plastics CURRENT POLICY FOCUS RAW MATERIAL NO LITTLE POLICY FOCUS TODAY PRODUCT DESIGN Regulation and fees to correct PARTIAL POLICY COVER TODAY PRODUCER RESPONSIBILITY for externalities on secondary Di erentiation to reect downstream materials impacts on recyclability PRODUCT COLLECTION TARGETS Are the main denominator of LANDFILL ENERGY current policies RECOVERY TA FEE To boost value of recycling COLLECTION PRODUCT DISPOSAL Reward practices conducive to high value recycling SECONDARY MATERIAL STANDARDISATION PUBLIC PROCUREMENT PRODUCTION Quality standards for recyclates and To create demand pull in nascent guarantees for recycled content markets

REGULATION OF ADDITIVES MARKET FOR DEMAND PULL Limiting toxic substances (current) and use RECYCLED Quotas to create demand of additives inimical to recycling (future) MATERIAL pull for nascent markets

EHIBIT 315 VALUE EUR/ton

1700 EUR ORIGINAL MATERIAL VALUE, 50B EUR

1000 EUR

VOLUME tonnes TODAY 55% COLLECTION CIRCULAR SYSTEM 90% value loss >80% of value still lost, 50% of value retained “30% collection” Large process losses in recycling Higher recycling yields increase but just 16% Uphill struggle to increase of volume recycling volume further – at a net cost High value retention provides Rebound e ects as downgraded revenue for investment in self- plastics cannot replace virgin sustaining systems and scaling plastics in many uses Recycling can replace virgin production REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

PLASTICS DEMAND BY REGION CO2M tEMISSIONS PER YEAR, 2015-2100 FROM PLASTICS PRODUCTION AND USE Finding a way to sustainable use of plastics has many for energy generation, which leads to the immediate relea- 1400 dimensions. Plastics make up a large and growing share se of all embedded carbon as CO2. of solid waste around the world. Marine plastic pollution is a MIDDLE EAST AFRICA large and growing problem. Waste also decays into micro- At the global level, current scenarios and roadmaps for a 1200 OECD ASIA plastics that pollute the entire food chain. In addition, growing 2°C economy tend to overlook plastics. Their production ma- plastics use will be a major contributor to CO emissions. kes up just 2% of CO emissions from industryCHINA and energy, 1000 2 2 DEVELOPED ASIA EHIBIT 31 and embedded emissions often are not attributed to materi- On average, each tonne of plastics produced results in als in emissions inventories, but just classifiedLATIN as AMERICA emissions 800 EUROPE 2.5 tonnes of CO2 emissions from the production process from waste. However, if plastics demand continues to grow alone. In addition, carbon embedded in the material cor- as projected, and a larger share of landfillingNORTH is replaced AMERICA with 600 responds to another 2.7 tonnes of CO2. When this carbon incineration, cumulative CO2 emissions associated with plas- is released depends on how plastics are treated at end tics could grow very large. We calculate that the combined of life.400 In landfills (or if plastics are released into the en- emissions from plastics production and embedded carbon vironment), that process occurs slowly, as plastics take a would be as much as 287 billion tonnes by 2100 (Exhibit very long200 time to break down. However, in the EU, where 3.2). This corresponds to more than a third of the whole car- policy-makers aim to eliminate the landfilling of plastics, bon budget for a 2°C economy. Addressing CO2 emissions plastics that0 are not recycled are increasingly incinerated from plastics is crucial for a successful low-carbon transition. 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

Exhibit 3.2 Plastics alone risk exceeding the carbon budget

EHIBIT 32 quota available for industrial emissions

CO2 EMISSIONS, PLASTICS PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE CO2 EMISSIONS, PLASTICS PRODUCTION

Gt CO2 PER YEAR, 2015-2100, GLOBAL Gt CO2, 2015-2100, GLOBAL

TONNE or ton 287

6

226 5

4

3

2

1

0 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE LOW CARBON PROCESS CURRENT BASELINE BASELINE LOW SCENARIO CARBON PROCESS

SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS MODELLING

79 EMISSIONS INTENSITY OF PLASTICS PRODUCTION

TONNES CO2 EMISSIONS PER TONNE PLASTICS PRODUCED

EHIBIT 34

PRODUCTION EMBEDDED

PRIMARY PLASTICS, 2017 51 Primary plastics production leads to large emissions as well as embedded carbon in the material

PRIMARY PLASTICS, 2050 48 Improving production eciency reduces production emissions, but does not address embedded emissions

PRIMARY PLASTICS WITH 37 Using renewable energy inputs can cut production RENEWABLE ENERGY emissions but does not address embedded emissions

MECHANICAL RECYCLING, e recycling process has emissions of ~0.4 tCO2 / t LOW UALITY 2017 14 plastics Low-quality recycling may not lead to full replacement of primary plastics

MECHANICAL RECYCLING, 01 High-quality recycling in a largely decarbonised HIGH UALITY 2050 energy system can remove most emissions

Chemical recycling results in some CO2 emissions, CHEMICAL RECYCLING 10 but eliminates embedded emissions from new fossil feedstock

EHIBIT 35

PLASTIC VOLUMES IN EUROPE, 2015 Mt PER YEAR EHIBIT 36 Export in products Stock build-up Misclassi ed waste Etc 9

19

58 4 90% 49 10 30 26 7 4 9 5 PLASTICS NET DEMAND USE BALANCE END OF LIFE UNSORTED COLLECTED LANDFILL ENERGY COLLECTED PROCESS RECYCLING PRODUCTION EPORT AND STOCK PLASTICS PLASTICS IN PLASTIC RECOVERY FOR LOSSES IN BUILDUP HOUSHOLD WASTE RECYCLING RECYCLING WASTE

FROM TO EHIBIT 37 Virgin plastics do not carry cost of externalities Virgin plastics carry cost for embodied carbon 1 (other externalities likely via regulation)

Product design does not bear costs for Materials and design choices to make reuse and 2 downstream externalities and costs recycling the intended destination at end of life Ludde gör denna 3 Policy and systems focus on collection Focus on enabling raw materials flows for secondary direkt i InDesign? volumes – similar to other ‘waste’ flows materials production

End-of-life treatment and dismantling without Products designed for disassembly and dismantled 4 focus on retaining material value to retain secondary material value

Low-quality inputs and investment uncertainty Large-scale industry with high-quality outputs with high 5 results in low yields and small-scale, fragmented retained value and the ability to replace primary materials industry one-to-one Incentives focused on supply into recycling Large-scale and regional raw materials industry, with 6 process harmonized systems, specialisation, and product standards

7 Virgin plastics do not carry cost of externalities Products designed and dismantled to retain secondary material value

Reliable products and demand-side incentives create market certainty and stimulate investment in capacity

PLASTIC PRODUCTION EMISSIONS Mt CO2, EUROPE, 2050

EHIBIT 38 233

116

Rdditional recycling Substitution with other materials Renewable energy in production Biobased or CO2 feedstock 117 Process innovation

2050 WITH 100% CIRCULAR ABATEMENT REMAINING RENEWABLE RENEWABLE ENERGY RECOVERY POTENTIAL 2050 EMISSIONS ENERGY REDUCTION 2050 EMISSIONS

TOTAL

28% WHAT TAKES TO GET THERE NOT COLLECTED STOCK 47% 85% of 5 most common plastics collected for 1% recycling with signicant yield increases (90% yield) Shift from landll to energy recovery for non-recycled 17% Reduced stock build-up and increased collection for EHIBIT 39 recycling Reuse of: 12% 8% of packaging, especially industrial 20% LANDFILL 3% of B&C plastics, esp. PVC carpets, pipes etc. 4% of large automotive parts

15% ENERGY RECOVERY 37%

YIELD LOSSES 8% RECYCLED 10% REUSE 0% 4% 2017 2050

PACKAGING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION AUTOMOTIVE

5% 11% NOT COLLECTED 21% 2% STOCK 18% 16% 2% 2% 47% 15% 17% 32% LANDFILL 25% 76% 12%

ENERGY RECOVERY 22% 18% 53% 30% 47% YIELD LOSSES 13% 8% 5% 32% 9% RECYCLED 19% 11% 3% REUSE 0% 10% 0% 5% 4% 0% 6% 4% 2017 2050 2017 2050 2017 2050

REDUCED RECYCLING COSTS HIGHER REVENUES EUR / TON TREATED PLASTICS EUR / TON TREATED PLASTICS EHIBIT 310 924 926 16% COLLECTION 186 774 Cleaner ows from materials 71% Increased yields give larger 119 choices and product design revenues per tonne treated optimised for recycling plastic (better technology, SORTING 191 Increased scale reduces unit cleaner inows) 147 cost Higher quality enables pricing Specialisation 540 LOGISTICS 15 and regional closer to virgin materials 10 integration of markets (additional sorting, improved Technological improvement technology, cleaner ows and boosts eciency but requires optimised products) higher investment Raised cost of virgin materials Reduced risk from regulations improves willingness to pay for RECYCLING 337 439 and market uncertainty secondary products Better functioning markets reduce current commercial risk to buyers

162 93 REVENUES INVESTMENT 2017 2050 2017 2050

DEEP TRANSFORMATION THAT REUIRES COORDINATED AND SUSTAINED ACTION ACROSS VALUE CHAIN

ABATEMENT COST PACKAGING EAMPLE EHIBIT 311 EUR PER TON ABATED CO2

257 USED IN COST CURVE

43

68 101

2017 COST INCREASED ABATEMENT PER REDUCED COST OF RECYCLING, INCREASED REVENUES FROM TONNE OF PLASTIC RECYCLED ESPECIALLY THROUGH HIGHERUALITY SECONDARY INCREASED YIELDS MATERIALS

EHIBIT 312 EMISSIONS SAVINGS Mt CO2 / YEAR

80

EEE Low quality increased recycling 303 Automotive Low quality increased recycling 144 Agriculture Low quality increased recycling 97 70

Packaging Low quality increased recycling 40

60

Other plastics Low quality increased recycling 21

50

B&C Low quality increased recycling 66

40

Packaging High quality increased recycling 96

Agriculture High quality increased recycling 115 30 EEE High quality increased recycling 138

B&C High quality increased recycling 138

20 Automotive High quality increased recycling 149

Other plastics High quality increased recycling 170

10

Packaging Reuse 179

EEE Reuse 192 B&C Reuse 202 Automotive Reuse 203 200 150 100 50 0 50 100 150 200 250 300

ABATEMENT COST EUR/t CO2

REMAINING EMISSIONS 2050

EHIBIT 313 Mt CO2

REBOUND 117 Recycled plastics of lower quality do not replace the same volume of virgin plastics and may lead PRODUCTION FOR STOCK BUILD to an increased demand of total plastics 11 Around 10% of demand results in net stock build-up, requiring additional primary production 22 REUSE AND RECYCLING EMISSIONS 80% from yield losses in chemical recycling, the YIELD LOSSES remainder from mechanical recycling Yield losses in pre-treatment, recycling and 14 reuse process sent to energy recovery Process improvements as well as product design and choice of material important to maximize yields

42 AGED, DEGRADED, CONTAMINATED AND NOT COLLECTED COMMON PLASTICS Relatively small given option of chemical recycling THERMOSETS AND SMALL VOLUME Remaining share is aged, contaminated, or not captured by collection systems SPECIALTY PLASTICS 16 Challenging to achieve scale in small specialty plastics streams 12

EHIBIT 314

FEES Correct for externalities for primary production of plastics CURRENT POLICY FOCUS RAW MATERIAL NO LITTLE POLICY FOCUS TODAY PRODUCT DESIGN Regulation and fees to correct PARTIAL POLICY COVER TODAY PRODUCER RESPONSIBILITY for externalities on secondary Di erentiation to reect downstream materials impacts on recyclability PRODUCT COLLECTION TARGETS Are the main denominator of LANDFILL ENERGY current policies RECOVERY TA FEE To boost value of recycling COLLECTION PRODUCT DISPOSAL Reward practices conducive to high value recycling SECONDARY MATERIAL STANDARDISATION PUBLIC PROCUREMENT PRODUCTION Quality standards for recyclates and To create demand pull in nascent guarantees for recycled content markets

REGULATION OF ADDITIVES MARKET FOR DEMAND PULL Limiting toxic substances (current) and use RECYCLED Quotas to create demand of additives inimical to recycling (future) MATERIAL pull for nascent markets

EHIBIT 315 VALUE EUR/ton

1700 EUR ORIGINAL MATERIAL VALUE, 50B EUR

1000 EUR

VOLUME tonnes TODAY 55% COLLECTION CIRCULAR SYSTEM 90% value loss >80% of value still lost, 50% of value retained “30% collection” Large process losses in recycling Higher recycling yields increase but just 16% Uphill struggle to increase of volume recycling volume further – at a net cost High value retention provides Rebound e ects as downgraded revenue for investment in self- plastics cannot replace virgin sustaining systems and scaling plastics in many uses Recycling can replace virgin production REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

In the context of Europe’s climate targets, plastics must ergy efficiency, and by adding external, low-carbon energy. be addressed to reach commitments under the Paris However, this leaves embedded emissions in place, and even if 57% of production emissions were eliminated, the Agreement: today’s emissions of 132 Mt CO2 per year otherwise risk growing to 233 Mt, an increase of 76% (Ex- total emissions are 3.7 tCO2 per tonne plastics. Mechani- hibit 3.3). Today’s emissions are dominated by production cal recycling – the cleaning, re-melting, and upgrading of emissions, and end-of-life treatment adds little to this (ar- used plastics materials – produces less than 20% of the

guably, the net emissions from incinerating plastics are CO2 emissions associated with making new plastics – even low when the alternative would be to burn other fossil fuels if the transportation, heat and electricity used are not yet decarbonised. However, when recycling results in downg- with a similar CO2 intensity). However, this picture changes rading of plastics quality, the net emissions are higher, as by 2050. First, demand grows, adding 34 Mt CO2. More than that, the emissions from end-of-life treatment increase it may not replace new primary plastics on a one-to-one basis. Even so, total emissions of 1.4 tCO per tonne plastic by 90 Mt CO2, even if today’s recycling rates are maintai- 2 ned. This is both because the current trend of increased are far lower than those from new production. Moreover, the incineration would continue, and because, as the energy emissions from mechanical recycling can be all but elimi- sector is decarbonised, instead of replacing fossil fuels, nated – provided the transportation and energy inputs used plastics burnt to produce energy would replace cleaner are low-carbon, and high-quality plastics are produced, ca- alternatives, increasing emissions. Even with a 15% re- pable of displacing new plastics use on a one-to-one basis.

duction in the emissions from plastics production, CO2 For plastics that cannot be mechanically recycled, the- emissions from plastics increase to 233 Mt CO2 per year, an amount exceeding even the total emissions implied by re are a variety of chemical recycling approaches, whe- the Paris Agreement commitments. reby plastics are broken down into smaller constituents that can be reassembled to new materials, chemicals, or There are a variety of strategies that can reduce fuels. Chemical recycling involves some loss of carbon

CO2 emissions from plastics (Exhibit 3.4). Emissions as CO2, but the CO2 savings can be as much as 75% with from production can be reduced both by improving en- technologies now under development.

Exhibit 3.3 Net CO2 emissions from plastics in the EU could grow by 76% by 2050

EMISSIONS FROM PLASTICS WITHIN THE EU Mt CO2 PER YEAR 24

90 76% EHIBIT 33 34

233

132

2017 DEMAND GROWTH INCREASED EMISSIONS IMPROVED PRODUCTION 2050 AT END OF LIFE

SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS MODELLING AS DESCRIBED IN TEXT

80

WITH CURRENT DEVELOPMENT, CO2 EMISSIONS FROM RECYCLING OFFERS ONE OF THE FEW WAYS TO EHIBIT 32 PLASTICS WOULD BE 40% OF 2050 TARGET REDUCE EMISSIONS

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM PLASTIC, 2017 AND 2050, AS CO2 INTENSITY OF VIRGIN AND RECYCLED MATERIAL TONNE or ton SHARE OF EMISSION TARGET TONNE CO2 PER TONNE PLASTIC Mt CO2 PER YEAR

2017 2050 BORTTAGEN4 000 51 ENERGY RECOVERY 27 500

98% 92% 60%

200 25 PRODUCTION 77 04

CURRENT EMISSIONS EMISSION EMISSIONS PRODUCTION RECYCLING TOTAL FROM TARGET FROM OF NEW PLASTIC EMISSIONS PLASTICS PLASTICS ENERGY RECOVERY

CUMULATIVE EMISSIONS TO 2100 EHIBIT 33 Gt CO2, GLOBAL, 2015-2100

PROECTED CO2 EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS CARBON BUDGET TO 2100

914 ALUMINIUM 66 800 BORTTAGENCEMENT 254

STEEL 307 300

PLASTICS 288

BAT ASSUMING CURRENT 2 CARBON BUDGET FOR CARBON BUDGET EU LEVEL CONSUMPTION INDUSTRY AND ENERGY AVAILABLE FOR GLOBALLY MATERIALS

Share of European plastics demand (49Mt) EHIBIT 35 %, 2015

60% OF PLASTICS DEMAND

PACKAGING BUILDING AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS OTHERS CONSTRUCTION

PE POLYETHEN

PP POLYPROPHEN

PS POLYSTYRENE INCL EPS FOAM

PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE

PET POLYETHYLENE TEREPHTHALATE

OTHER PLASTICS

40% 20% 9% 6% 26%

PLASTIC VOLUMES IN EUROPE, 2015 Mt PER YEAR EHIBIT 36 Export in products Stock build-up Misclassi ed waste Etc 9

19

58 4 90% 49 10 30 26 7 4 9 5 PLASTICS NET DEMAND USE BALANCE END OF LIFE UNSORTED COLLECTED LANDFILL ENERGY COLLECTED PROCESS RECYCLING PRODUCTION EPORT AND STOCK PLASTICS PLASTICS IN PLASTIC RECOVERY FOR LOSSES IN BUILDUP HOUSHOLD WASTE RECYCLING RECYCLING WASTE

FROM TO EHIBIT 37 Policy-driven system based on waste Self-sustaining system, driven by value of secondary 1 management; revenues do not cover costs materials (with regulation of externalities)

Focus on increasing collection volumes – Focus on secondary material production and ability to 2 similar to other ‘waste’ flows replace virgin material one-to-one Ludde gör denna 3 Onus on recycling industries to handle deeply Transformation through policy-driven coordination to enable direkt i InDesign? suboptimal flows in largely unchanged system simultaneous change across value chain 4 Product design does not bear costs for Materials and design choices account for recyclability, downstream externalities and costs recycled content and disassembly 5 Incentives focused on supply into recycling Demand-side incentives create market certainty and process stimulate investment in capacity 6 Recycling rooted in local, small-scale waste Large-scale and regional raw materials industry, with handling, with patchy coverage harmonized systems, specialisation, and product standards

7 Design and end-of-life treatment without focus Products designed and dismantled to retain secondary on retaining material value material value

Virgin plastics carry cost for embodied carbon (other Virgin plastics do not carry cost of externalities 8 externalities likely via regulation)

PLASTIC PRODUCTION EMISSIONS Mt CO2, EUROPE, 2050 EHIBIT 38 233

116

Rdditional recycling Substitution with other materials Renewable energy in production Biobased or CO2 feedstock 117 Process innovation

2050 WITH 100% CIRCULAR ABATEMENT REMAINING RENEWABLE RENEWABLE ENERGY RECOVERY POTENTIAL 2050 EMISSIONS ENERGY REDUCTION 2050 EMISSIONS

TOTAL

28% WHAT TAKES TO GET THERE NOT COLLECTED STOCK 47% 85% of 5 most common plastics collected for 1% recycling with signi cant yield increases (90% yield) Shift from land ll to energy recovery for non-recycled 17% Reduced stock build-up and increased collection for EHIBIT 39 recycling Reuse of: 12% 8% of packaging, especially industrial 20% Ludde xar LANDFILL 3% of B&C plastics, esp. PVC carpets, pipes etc. Minimum text 7 pt. 4% of large automotive parts

15% ENERGY RECOVERY 37%

YIELD LOSSES 8% RECYCLED 10% REUSE 0% 4% 2017 2050

PACKAGING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION AUTOMOTIVE

5% 11% NOT COLLECTED 21% 2% STOCK 18% 16% 2% 2% 47% 15% 17% 32% LANDFILL 25% 76% 12%

ENERGY RECOVERY 22% 18% 53% 30% 47% YIELD LOSSES 13% 8% 5% 32% 9% RECYCLED 19% 11% 3% REUSE 0% 10% 0% 5% 4% 0% 6% 4% 2017 2050 2017 2050 2017 2050

REMAINING EMISSIONS 2050 Mt CO EHIBIT 313 2

REBOUND 117 Recycled plastics of lower quality do not replace the same volume of virgin plastics and may lead PRODUCTION FOR STOCK BUILD to an increased demand of total plastics 11 Around 10% of demand results in net stock build-up, requiring additional primary production 22 REUSE AND RECYCLING EMISSIONS 80% from yield losses in chemical recycling, the YIELD LOSSES remainder from mechanical recycling Yield losses in pre-treatment, recycling and 14 reuse process sent to energy recovery Process improvements as well as product design and choice of material important to maximize yields

42 AGED, DEGRADED, CONTAMINATED AND NOT COLLECTED COMMON PLASTICS Relatively small given option of chemical recycling THERMOSETS AND SMALL VOLUME Remaining share is aged, contaminated, or not captured by collection systems SPECIALTY PLASTICS 16 Challenging to achieve scale in small specialty plastics streams 12

VALUE EUR/ton

EHIBIT 310 1700 EUR ORIGINAL MATERIAL VALUE, 50B EUR

ton, ore TONNE 1000 EUR

VOLUME tonnes TODAY 55% COLLECTION CIRCULAR SYSTEM 90% value loss >80% of value still lost, 50% of value retained “30% collection” Large process losses in recycling Higher recycling yields increase but just 16% Uphill struggle to increase of volume recycling volume further – at a net cost High value retention provides Rebound eects as downgraded revenue for investment in self- plastics cannot replace virgin sustaining systems and scaling plastics in many uses Recycling can replace virgin production

EHIBIT 310

REDUCED RECYCLING COSTS HIGHER REVENUES EUR / TON TREATED PLASTICS EUR / TON TREATED PLASTICS

924 926

16% COLLECTION 186 774 71% 119 SORTING 191 147 PACKAGING EXAMPLE 540 LOGISTICS 15 10

337 RECYCLING 439

162 INVESTMENT 93 REVENUES

2017 2050 2017 2050

Cleaner ows from materials choices and Increased yields give larger revenues per tonne product design optimised for recycling treated plastic (better technology, cleaner inows) Increased scale reduces unit cost Higher quality enables pricing closer to virgin Specialisation and regional integration of markets materials (additional sorting, improved technology, Technological improvement boosts eciency but cleaner ows and optimised products) requires higher investment Raised cost of virgin materials improves Reduced risk from regulations and market willingness to pay for secondary products uncertainty Better functioning markets reduce current commercial risk to buyers

DEEP TRANSFORMATION THAT REUIRES COORDINATED AND SUSTAINED ACTION ACROSS VALUE CHAIN

EMISSIONS SAVINGS Mt CO2 / YEAR

EHIBIT 312 80

EEE Low quality increased recycling 303 Automotive Low quality increased recycling 144 Agriculture Low quality increased recycling 97 70

NEED UPDATE Packaging Low quality increased recycling 40

60 Har lite svårt att förstå den här grafen. Handlar det om att tydliggöra inom vilka Other plastics Low quality increased recycling 21 områden man kan minska CO2 utsläppen med minsta 50 kostnaden. dvs dom 4 områden som ligger mellan B&C Low quality increased recycling 66 ~29 - 72 Mt CO2 ? Hur kan Abatement (reducerings- ?) cost vara negativ. vad innebär det. 40 Packaging High quality increased recycling 96

Agriculture High quality increased recycling 115 30 EEE High quality increased recycling 138

B&C High quality increased recycling 138

20 Automotive High quality increased recycling 149

Other plastics High quality increased recycling 170

10

Packaging Reuse 179

EEE Reuse 192 B&C Reuse 202 Automotive Reuse 203 200 150 100 50 0 50 100 150 200 250 300

ABATEMENT COST EUR/t CO2

EHIBIT 311

ABATEMENT COST PACKAGING EAMPLE EUR PER TON ABATED CO2

257

43 68 101

2017 COST INCREASED ABATEMENT PER REDUCED COST OF RECYCLING, INCREASED REVENUES FROM TONNE OF PLASTIC RECYCLED ESPECIALLY THROUGH HIGHERUALITY SECONDARY INCREASED YIELDS MATERIALS

EHIBIT 314 CURRENT POLICIES COVER ONLY PARTS OF THE RANGE OF BARRIERS TO HIGH-VALUE PLASTICS RECYCLING

CURRENT POLICY FOCUS NO LITTLE POLICY FOCUS TODAY PARTIAL POLICY COVER TODAY

FEES Correct for externalities for primary production of plastics RAW MATERIAL PRODUCT DESIGN Regulation and fees to correct PRODUCER RESPONSIBILITY for externalities on secondary Dierentiation to reect downstream materials FRGPALETT impacts on recyclability PRODUCT COLLECTION TARGETS Are the main denominator of LANDFILL ENERGY current policies RECOVERY TA FEE To boost value of recycling COLLECTION

PRODUCT DISPOSAL Reward practices conducive to ENDOFLIFE high value recycling TREATMENT

STANDARDISATION Quality standards for recyclates and guarantees for recycled content SECONDARY MATERIAL PUBLIC PROCUREMENT PRODUCTION To create demand pull in nascent markets

REGULATION OF ADDITIVES MARKET FOR DEMAND PULL Limiting toxic substances (current) and use RECYCLED Quotas to create demand of additives inimical to recycling (future) MATERIAL pull for nascent markets

EAMPLES OF POLICIES ALL WOULD NEED CAREFUL EVALUATION

REMAINING EMISSIONS 2050 Mt CO 2 REBOUND 117 Recycled plastics of lower quality do not replace the same volume of virgin plastics and may lead to an increased demand of total plastics 11 PRODUCTION FOR STOCK BUILD Around 10% of demand results in net stock EHIBIT 313 build-up, requiring additional primary production 22 REUSE AND RECYCLING EMISSIONS 117 80% from yield losses in chemical recycling, the remainder from mechanical recycling 14

YIELD LOSSES Yield losses in pre-treatment, recycling and reuse process sent to energy recovery Process improvements as well as product design and choice of material important to maximize yields 42 AGED, DEGRADED, CONTAMINATED AND NOT COLLECTED COMMON PLASTICS Relatively small given option of chemical recycling Remaining share is aged, contaminated, or not captured by collection systems THERMOSETS AND SMALL VOLUME SPECIALTY PLASTICS 16 Challenging to achieve scale in small specialty plastics streams 12 PLASTICS DEMAND BY REGION Mt PER YEAR, 2015-2100

1400 MIDDLE EAST AFRICA 1200 OECD ASIA CHINA 1000 DEVELOPED ASIA EHIBIT 31 LATIN AMERICA 800 EUROPE NORTH AMERICA 600

400

200

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EHIBIT 32

CO2 EMISSIONS, PLASTICS PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE CO2 EMISSIONS, PLASTICS PRODUCTION

Gt CO2 PER YEAR, 2015-2100, GLOBAL Gt CO2, 2015-2100, GLOBAL

TONNE or ton 287

6

226 5

4

3 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE 2

1

0 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080Exhibit2090 2100 3.4 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE LOW CARBON PROCESS PlasticsCURRENT recyclingBASELINE hasBASELINE significantly LOW lower CO2 emissions than otherSCENARIO optionsCARBON forPROCESS plastics production

EMISSIONS INTENSITY OF PLASTICS PRODUCTION TONNES CO2 EMISSIONS PER TONNE PLASTICS PRODUCED

EHIBIT 34

PRODUCTION EMBEDDED

PRIMARY PLASTICS, 2017 51 Primary plastics production leads to large emissions as well as embedded carbon in the material

PRIMARY PLASTICS, 2050 48 Improving production eciency reduces production emissions, but does not address embedded emissions

PRIMARY PLASTICS WITH 37 Using renewable energy inputs can cut production RENEWABLE ENERGY emissions but does not address embedded emissions

MECHANICAL RECYCLING, e recycling process has emissions of ~0.4 tCO2 / t LOW UALITY 2017 14 plastics Low-quality recycling may not lead to full replacement of primary plastics

MECHANICAL RECYCLING, 01 High-quality recycling in a largely decarbonised HIGH UALITY 2050 energy system can remove most emissions

Chemical recycling results in some CO2 emissions, CHEMICAL RECYCLING 10 but eliminates embedded emissions from new fossil feedstock

EHIBIT 35

SOURCE: (PLASTICS EUROPE 2018A; DELOITTE AND PLASTICS RECYCLERS EUROPE 2015; ZHU ET AL. 2018); MATERIAL ECONOMICS ANALYSIS

81

PLASTIC VOLUMES IN EUROPE, 2015 Mt PER YEAR EHIBIT 36 Export in products Stock build-up Misclassi ed waste Etc 9

19

58 4 90% 49 10 30 26 7 4 9 5 PLASTICS NET DEMAND USE BALANCE END OF LIFE UNSORTED COLLECTED LANDFILL ENERGY COLLECTED PROCESS RECYCLING PRODUCTION EPORT AND STOCK PLASTICS PLASTICS IN PLASTIC RECOVERY FOR LOSSES IN BUILDUP HOUSHOLD WASTE RECYCLING RECYCLING WASTE

FROM TO EHIBIT 37 Virgin plastics do not carry cost of externalities Virgin plastics carry cost for embodied carbon 1 (other externalities likely via regulation)

Product design does not bear costs for Materials and design choices to make reuse and 2 downstream externalities and costs recycling the intended destination at end of life Ludde gör denna 3 Policy and systems focus on collection Focus on enabling raw materials flows for secondary direkt i InDesign? volumes – similar to other ‘waste’ flows materials production

End-of-life treatment and dismantling without Products designed for disassembly and dismantled 4 focus on retaining material value to retain secondary material value

Low-quality inputs and investment uncertainty Large-scale industry with high-quality outputs with high 5 results in low yields and small-scale, fragmented retained value and the ability to replace primary materials industry one-to-one Incentives focused on supply into recycling Large-scale and regional raw materials industry, with 6 process harmonized systems, specialisation, and product standards

7 Virgin plastics do not carry cost of externalities Products designed and dismantled to retain secondary material value

Reliable products and demand-side incentives create market certainty and stimulate investment in capacity

PLASTIC PRODUCTION EMISSIONS Mt CO2, EUROPE, 2050

EHIBIT 38 233

116

Rdditional recycling Substitution with other materials Renewable energy in production Biobased or CO2 feedstock 117 Process innovation

2050 WITH 100% CIRCULAR ABATEMENT REMAINING RENEWABLE RENEWABLE ENERGY RECOVERY POTENTIAL 2050 EMISSIONS ENERGY REDUCTION 2050 EMISSIONS

TOTAL

28% WHAT TAKES TO GET THERE NOT COLLECTED STOCK 47% 85% of 5 most common plastics collected for 1% recycling with signicant yield increases (90% yield) Shift from landll to energy recovery for non-recycled 17% Reduced stock build-up and increased collection for EHIBIT 39 recycling Reuse of: 12% 8% of packaging, especially industrial 20% LANDFILL 3% of B&C plastics, esp. PVC carpets, pipes etc. 4% of large automotive parts

15% ENERGY RECOVERY 37%

YIELD LOSSES 8% RECYCLED 10% REUSE 0% 4% 2017 2050

PACKAGING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION AUTOMOTIVE

5% 11% NOT COLLECTED 21% 2% STOCK 18% 16% 2% 2% 47% 15% 17% 32% LANDFILL 25% 76% 12%

ENERGY RECOVERY 22% 18% 53% 30% 47% YIELD LOSSES 13% 8% 5% 32% 9% RECYCLED 19% 11% 3% REUSE 0% 10% 0% 5% 4% 0% 6% 4% 2017 2050 2017 2050 2017 2050

REDUCED RECYCLING COSTS HIGHER REVENUES EUR / TON TREATED PLASTICS EUR / TON TREATED PLASTICS EHIBIT 310 924 926 16% COLLECTION 186 774 Cleaner ows from materials 71% Increased yields give larger 119 choices and product design revenues per tonne treated optimised for recycling plastic (better technology, SORTING 191 Increased scale reduces unit cleaner inows) 147 cost Higher quality enables pricing Specialisation 540 LOGISTICS 15 and regional closer to virgin materials 10 integration of markets (additional sorting, improved Technological improvement technology, cleaner ows and boosts eciency but requires optimised products) higher investment Raised cost of virgin materials Reduced risk from regulations improves willingness to pay for RECYCLING 337 439 and market uncertainty secondary products Better functioning markets reduce current commercial risk to buyers

162 93 REVENUES INVESTMENT 2017 2050 2017 2050

DEEP TRANSFORMATION THAT REUIRES COORDINATED AND SUSTAINED ACTION ACROSS VALUE CHAIN

ABATEMENT COST PACKAGING EAMPLE EHIBIT 311 EUR PER TON ABATED CO2

257 USED IN COST CURVE

43

68 101

2017 COST INCREASED ABATEMENT PER REDUCED COST OF RECYCLING, INCREASED REVENUES FROM TONNE OF PLASTIC RECYCLED ESPECIALLY THROUGH HIGHERUALITY SECONDARY INCREASED YIELDS MATERIALS

EHIBIT 312 EMISSIONS SAVINGS Mt CO2 / YEAR

80

EEE Low quality increased recycling 303 Automotive Low quality increased recycling 144 Agriculture Low quality increased recycling 97 70

Packaging Low quality increased recycling 40

60

Other plastics Low quality increased recycling 21

50

B&C Low quality increased recycling 66

40

Packaging High quality increased recycling 96

Agriculture High quality increased recycling 115 30 EEE High quality increased recycling 138

B&C High quality increased recycling 138

20 Automotive High quality increased recycling 149

Other plastics High quality increased recycling 170

10

Packaging Reuse 179

EEE Reuse 192 B&C Reuse 202 Automotive Reuse 203 200 150 100 50 0 50 100 150 200 250 300

ABATEMENT COST EUR/t CO2

REMAINING EMISSIONS 2050

EHIBIT 313 Mt CO2

REBOUND 117 Recycled plastics of lower quality do not replace the same volume of virgin plastics and may lead PRODUCTION FOR STOCK BUILD to an increased demand of total plastics 11 Around 10% of demand results in net stock build-up, requiring additional primary production 22 REUSE AND RECYCLING EMISSIONS 80% from yield losses in chemical recycling, the YIELD LOSSES remainder from mechanical recycling Yield losses in pre-treatment, recycling and 14 reuse process sent to energy recovery Process improvements as well as product design and choice of material important to maximize yields

42 AGED, DEGRADED, CONTAMINATED AND NOT COLLECTED COMMON PLASTICS Relatively small given option of chemical recycling THERMOSETS AND SMALL VOLUME Remaining share is aged, contaminated, or not captured by collection systems SPECIALTY PLASTICS 16 Challenging to achieve scale in small specialty plastics streams 12

EHIBIT 314

FEES Correct for externalities for primary production of plastics CURRENT POLICY FOCUS RAW MATERIAL NO LITTLE POLICY FOCUS TODAY PRODUCT DESIGN Regulation and fees to correct PARTIAL POLICY COVER TODAY PRODUCER RESPONSIBILITY for externalities on secondary Di erentiation to reect downstream materials impacts on recyclability PRODUCT COLLECTION TARGETS Are the main denominator of LANDFILL ENERGY current policies RECOVERY TA FEE To boost value of recycling COLLECTION PRODUCT DISPOSAL Reward practices conducive to high value recycling SECONDARY MATERIAL STANDARDISATION PUBLIC PROCUREMENT PRODUCTION Quality standards for recyclates and To create demand pull in nascent guarantees for recycled content markets

REGULATION OF ADDITIVES MARKET FOR DEMAND PULL Limiting toxic substances (current) and use RECYCLED Quotas to create demand of additives inimical to recycling (future) MATERIAL pull for nascent markets

EHIBIT 315 VALUE EUR/ton

1700 EUR ORIGINAL MATERIAL VALUE, 50B EUR

1000 EUR

VOLUME tonnes TODAY 55% COLLECTION CIRCULAR SYSTEM 90% value loss >80% of value still lost, 50% of value retained “30% collection” Large process losses in recycling Higher recycling yields increase but just 16% Uphill struggle to increase of volume recycling volume further – at a net cost High value retention provides Rebound e ects as downgraded revenue for investment in self- plastics cannot replace virgin sustaining systems and scaling plastics in many uses Recycling can replace virgin production EMISSIONS FROM PLASTICS WITHIN THE EU Mt CO2 PER YEAR

24

90

76% EHIBIT 33 34

233

132

2017 DEMAND GROWTH INCREASED EMISSIONS IMPROVED PRODUCTION 2050 AT END OF LIFE

WITH CURRENT DEVELOPMENT, CO2 EMISSIONS FROM RECYCLING OFFERS ONE OF THE FEW WAYS TO EHIBIT 32 PLASTICS WOULD BE 40% OF 2050 TARGET REDUCE EMISSIONS

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM PLASTIC, 2017 AND 2050, AS CO2 INTENSITY OF VIRGIN AND RECYCLED MATERIAL TONNE or ton SHARE OF EMISSION TARGET TONNE CO2 PER TONNE PLASTIC Mt CO2 PER YEAR

2017 2050 BORTTAGEN4 000 51 ENERGY RECOVERY 27 500

98% 92% 60%

200 25 PRODUCTION 77 04

CURRENT EMISSIONS EMISSION EMISSIONS PRODUCTION RECYCLING TOTAL FROM TARGET FROM OF NEW PLASTIC EMISSIONS PLASTICS PLASTICS ENERGY RECOVERY

CUMULATIVE EMISSIONS TO 2100 EHIBIT 33 Gt CO2, GLOBAL, 2015-2100

PROECTED CO2 EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS CARBON BUDGET TO 2100

914 ALUMINIUM 66 800 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE BORTTAGENCEMENT 254

REALISINGSTEEL 307 THE POTENTIAL FOR CIRCULARITY IN THE PLASTICS SECTOR 300

The good news is that there is significant untapped (40%), buildings and construction (20%), automobiles

potentialPLASTICS to recirculate288 plastics. More than 30 types of (9%) and electronics (6%). In addition, five big plastics ty- plastics are in common use, with different properties and pes account for more than 70% of use, and all can be re- applications in numerous sectors. However, much of the cycled mechanically. That means that although the plas- volume of plastics can be addressed by focussing on tics industry is very complex, a circularity strategy that the largest flowsBAT ASSUMING (Exhibit CURRENT 3.5). Four main value chains started2 with CARBON just BUDGET those FOR four value chainsCARBON and BUDGET five plastics EU LEVEL CONSUMPTION INDUSTRY AND ENERGY AVAILABLE FOR account for three-quartersGLOBALLY of EU plastics use: packaging types could address 60% of total plasticsMATERIALS volumes.

Exhibit 3.5 Share of European plastics demand (49Mt) EHIBIT 35 %,Five 2015 plastic types in four value chains represent 60% of demand

60% OF PLASTICS DEMAND

PACKAGING BUILDING AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS OTHERS CONSTRUCTION

PE POLYETHEN

PP POLYPROPHEN

PS POLYSTYRENE INCL EPS FOAM

PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE

PET POLYETHYLENE TEREPHTHALATE

OTHER PLASTICS

40% 20% 9% 6% 26%

NOTES: POLYETHENE (PE), POLYPROPYLENE (PP), POLYSTYRENE (PS), EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE (EPS), POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) AND POLYETHYLENE TEREPHTHALATE (PET) SOURCE: (PLASTICS EUROPE 2018B) PLASTIC VOLUMES IN EUROPE, 2015 Mt PER YEAR EHIBIT 36 82 Export in products Stock build-up Misclassi ed waste Etc 9

19

58 4 90% 49 10 30 26 7 4 9 5 FRGPALETT PLASTICS NET DEMAND USE BALANCE END OF LIFE UNSORTED COLLECTED LANDFILL ENERGY COLLECTED PROCESS RECYCLING PRODUCTION EPORT AND STOCK PLASTICS PLASTICS IN PLASTIC RECOVERY FOR LOSSES IN BUILDUP HOUSHOLD WASTE RECYCLING RECYCLING WASTE

FROM TO EHIBIT 37

VIRGIN PLASTICS carry cost for 1 VIRGIN PLASTICS do not carry embodied carbon (other RAW MATERIAL cost of externalities externalities likely via regulation)

Ludde gör denna direkt i InDesign? MATERIALS AND DESIGN choices to 2 PRODUCT DESIGN does not bear costs for downstream make reuse and recycling the PRODUCT externalities and costs intended destination at end of life

POLICY AND SYSTEMS focus on FOCUS ON ENABLING raw 3 collection volumes – similar materials flows for secondary COLLECTION to other ‘waste’ flows materials production

ENDOFLIFE TREATMENT and PRODUCTS DESIGNED for disassembly 4 dismantling without focus on and dismantled to retain secondary ENDOFLIFE retaining material value material value

LOWUALITY inputs and i LARGESCALE INDUSTRY with high- 5 nvestment uncertainty results quality outputs with high retained SECONDARY in low yields and small-scale, value and the ability to replace MATERIAL fragmented industry primary materials one-to-one PRODUCTION

6 RELIABLE PRODUCTS and demand-side INCENTIVES focused on supply MARKET FOR incentives create market certainty into recycling process RECYCLED and stimulate investment in capacity EHIBIT 38 MATERIAL

PLASTICS PRODUCTION EMISSIONS Mt CO2, EUROPE, 2050

116

Additional recycling 233 Substitution with other materials Renewable energy in production Biobased or CO2 feedstock 117 Process innovation

2050 WITH 100% CIRCULAR ABATEMENT REMAINING ADDITIONAL RENEWABLE ENERGY RECOVERY POTENTIAL 2050 EMISSIONS POTENTIAL ABATEMENT 2050 EMISSIONS

TREATMENT OF END OF USE PLASTICS, 2017 AND 2050 MILLION TONNES; % OF PLASTIC DEMAND TOTAL

490 616

11% 2% WHAT TAKES TO GET THERE NOT COLLECTED STOCK 47% 21% 85% of 5 most common plastics collected for recycling with signicant yield increases (90% yield) Shift from landll to energy recovery for non-recycled 15% Reduced stock build-up and increased collection for EHIBIT 39 recycling Reuse of: 8% of packaging, especially industrial 20% LANDFILL 3% of B&C plastics, esp. PVC carpets, pipes etc. 4% of large automotive parts 46% ENERGY RECOVERY 15%

YIELD LOSSES 8% RECYCLED 10% REUSE 0% 5% 2017 2050

PACKAGING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION AUTOMOTIVE

195 245 98 123 45 57 5% 11% NOT COLLECTED 21% 2% STOCK 18% 16% 2% 2% 47% 15% 17% 32% LANDFILL 25% 76% 12%

ENERGY RECOVERY 22% 18% 53% 30% 47% YIELD LOSSES 13% 8% 5% 32% 9% RECYCLED 19% 11% 3% REUSE 0% 10% 0% 5% 4% 0% 6% 4% 2017 2050 2017 2050 2017 2050

REDUCED RECYCLING COSTS HIGHER REVENUES PACKAGING EXAMPLE EUR / TONNE TREATED PLASTICS EUR / TONNE TREATED PLASTICS EHIBIT 310 924 926 16% COLLECTION 186 774 Cleaner ows from materials 71% Increased yields give larger 119 choices and product design revenues per tonne treated optimised for recycling plastic (better technology, SORTING 191 Increased scale reduces unit cleaner inows) 147 cost Higher quality enables pricing Specialisation 540 LOGISTICS 15 and regional closer to virgin materials 10 integration of markets (additional sorting, improved Technological improvement technology, cleaner ows and boosts eciency but requires optimised products) higher investment Raised cost of virgin materials Reduced risk from regulations improves willingness to pay for RECYCLING 337 439 and market uncertainty secondary products Better functioning markets reduce current commercial risk to buyers

162 93 REVENUES INVESTMENT 2017 2050 2017 2050

DEEP TRANSFORMATION THAT REUIRES COORDINATED AND SUSTAINED ACTION ACROSS VALUE CHAIN

ABATEMENT COST PACKAGING EAMPLE EHIBIT 311 EUR PER TON ABATED CO2

257

43

68 101

2017 COST INCREASED ABATEMENT PER REDUCED COST OF RECYCLING, INCREASED REVENUES FROM TONNE OF PLASTIC RECYCLED ESPECIALLY THROUGH HIGHERUALITY SECONDARY INCREASED YIELDS MATERIALS

EHIBIT 312 EMISSIONS SAVINGS Mt CO2 / YEAR

80

EEE Low quality increased recycling 303 Automotive Low quality increased recycling 144 Agriculture Low quality increased recycling 97 70

Packaging Low quality increased recycling 40

60

Other plastics Low quality increased recycling 21

50

B&C Low quality increased recycling 66

40

Packaging High quality increased recycling 96

Agriculture High quality increased recycling 115 30 EEE High quality increased recycling 138

B&C High quality increased recycling 138

20 Automotive High quality increased recycling 149

Other plastics High quality increased recycling 170

10

Packaging Reuse 179

EEE Reuse 192 B&C Reuse 202 Automotive Reuse 203 200 150 100 50 0 50 100 150 200 250 300

ABATEMENT COST EUR/t CO2

REMAINING EMISSIONS 2050

EHIBIT 313 Mt CO2

REBOUND 117 Recycled plastics of lower quality do not replace the same volume of virgin plastics and may lead PRODUCTION FOR STOCK BUILD to an increased demand of total plastics 11 Around 10% of demand results in net stock build-up, requiring additional primary production 22 REUSE AND RECYCLING EMISSIONS 80% from yield losses in chemical recycling, the YIELD LOSSES remainder from mechanical recycling Yield losses in pre-treatment, recycling and 14 reuse process sent to energy recovery Process improvements as well as product design and choice of material important to maximize yields

42 AGED, DEGRADED, CONTAMINATED AND NOT COLLECTED COMMON PLASTICS Relatively small given option of chemical recycling THERMOSETS AND SMALL VOLUME Remaining share is aged, contaminated, or not captured by collection systems SPECIALTY PLASTICS 16 Challenging to achieve scale in small specialty plastics streams 12

EHIBIT 314

FEES Correct for externalities for primary production of plastics CURRENT POLICY FOCUS RAW MATERIAL NO LITTLE POLICY FOCUS TODAY PRODUCT DESIGN Regulation and fees to correct PARTIAL POLICY COVER TODAY PRODUCER RESPONSIBILITY for externalities on secondary Di erentiation to reect downstream materials impacts on recyclability PRODUCT COLLECTION TARGETS Are the main denominator of LANDFILL ENERGY current policies RECOVERY TA FEE To boost value of recycling COLLECTION PRODUCT DISPOSAL Reward practices conducive to high value recycling SECONDARY MATERIAL STANDARDISATION PUBLIC PROCUREMENT PRODUCTION Quality standards for recyclates and To create demand pull in nascent guarantees for recycled content markets

REGULATION OF ADDITIVES MARKET FOR DEMAND PULL Limiting toxic substances (current) and use RECYCLED Quotas to create demand of additives inimical to recycling (future) MATERIAL pull for nascent markets

EAMPLES OF POLICIES ALL WOULD NEED CAREFUL EVALUATION

EHIBIT 315 VALUE EUR/ton

1700 EUR ORIGINAL MATERIAL VALUE, 50B EUR

1000 EUR

VOLUME tonnes TODAY 55% COLLECTION CIRCULAR SYSTEM 90% value loss >80% of value still lost, 50% of value retained “30% collection” Large process losses in recycling Higher recycling yields increase but just 16% Uphill struggle to increase of volume recycling volume further – at a net cost High value retention provides Rebound e ects as downgraded revenue for investment in self- plastics cannot replace virgin sustaining systems and scaling plastics in many uses Recycling can replace virgin production EMISSIONS FROM PLASTICS WITHIN THE EU Mt CO2 PER YEAR

24

90

76% EHIBIT 33 34

233

132

2017 DEMAND GROWTH INCREASED EMISSIONS IMPROVED PRODUCTION 2050 AT END OF LIFE

WITH CURRENT DEVELOPMENT, CO2 EMISSIONS FROM RECYCLING OFFERS ONE OF THE FEW WAYS TO EHIBIT 32 PLASTICS WOULD BE 40% OF 2050 TARGET REDUCE EMISSIONS

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM PLASTIC, 2017 AND 2050, AS CO2 INTENSITY OF VIRGIN AND RECYCLED MATERIAL TONNE or ton SHARE OF EMISSION TARGET TONNE CO2 PER TONNE PLASTIC Mt CO2 PER YEAR

2017 2050 BORTTAGEN4 000 51 ENERGY RECOVERY 27 500

98% 92% 60%

200 25 PRODUCTION 77 04

CURRENT EMISSIONS EMISSION EMISSIONS PRODUCTION RECYCLING TOTAL FROM TARGET FROM OF NEW PLASTIC EMISSIONS PLASTICS PLASTICS ENERGY RECOVERY

CUMULATIVE EMISSIONS TO 2100 EHIBIT 33 Gt CO2, GLOBAL, 2015-2100

PROECTED CO2 EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS CARBON BUDGET TO 2100

914 ALUMINIUM 66 800 BORTTAGENCEMENT 254

STEEL 307 300

PLASTICS 288

BAT ASSUMING CURRENT 2 CARBON BUDGET FOR CARBON BUDGET EU LEVEL CONSUMPTION INDUSTRY AND ENERGY AVAILABLE FOR GLOBALLY MATERIALS

Share of European plastics demand (49Mt) EHIBIT 35 %, 2015

60% OF PLASTICS DEMAND

PACKAGING BUILDING AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS OTHERS CONSTRUCTION

PE POLYETHEN

PP POLYPROPHEN

PS POLYSTYRENE INCL EPS FOAM

PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE PET POLYETHYLENE TEREPHTHALATE

OTHER Exhibit 3.6 PLASTICS Current recycled volumes are ~10% of demand – far lower than40% the ~30% cited20% in official9% statistics6% 26%

PLASTIC VOLUMES IN EUROPE, 2015 Mt PER YEAR EHIBIT 36 Export in products Stock build-up Misclassi ed waste Etc 9

19

58 4 90% 49 10 30 26 7 4 9 5 FRGPALETT PLASTICS NET DEMAND USE BALANCE END OF LIFE UNSORTED COLLECTED LANDFILL ENERGY COLLECTED PROCESS RECYCLING PRODUCTION EPORT AND STOCK PLASTICS PLASTICS IN PLASTIC RECOVERY FOR LOSSES IN BUILDUP HOUSHOLD WASTE RECYCLING RECYCLING WASTE

SOURCE: (PLASTICS EUROPE 2018B; DELOITTE AND PLASTICS RECYCLERS EUROPE 2015)

Even though most plastics thus are recyclable, actual From a technical standpoint, three main factors inhibit the effective plastics recycling rates in the EU are very low. It production of high-quality secondary plastics: is often said that more than 30% of plastics are recycled • Mixed and contaminated flows. High-quality re- in Europe , but that is anFR incompleteOM figure (Exhibit 3.6). cyclingTO requires that plastics are separated into streams EHIBIT 37 It refers to volumes collected for recycling, rather than of single plastics types, separated from other matter. This actual recycled volumes, and collected volumes as a is hindered by today’s product design and collection sys- VIRGIN PLASTICS carry cost for 1 share of identifiedVIRGIN plastics PLASTICS dowaste not rathercarry than total plastics embodiedtems, carbon which (other mix or fuse different types of plastics, add RAW MATERIALconsumed. Totalcost reported of externalities plastics waste in 2015 was 30 externalitiesother likely materials via regulation) such as paper or metal, require costly million tonnes, but as noted above, actual demand was sorting, and may make separation impossible. 49 million tonnes. One reason is misclassification; for Ludde gör denna • Additives. Plastics often contain additives, from co- direkt i InDesign? instance, in Sweden, a study found that only 50% of plas- MATERIALSlourants, AND DESIGN to choices stabilisers, to to flame retardants. These are dif- 2 tics waste, identifiedPRODUCT throughDESIGN does a not detailed mapping, was bear costs for downstream make reuseficult and to recycling trace orthe to remove, and can contaminate plastics PRODUCTreported as waste in official statistics. Another is that some of the plasticsexternalities used and are costs added to the stock (e.g.,intended or destination make them at end unsafe of life or impossible to use in new pro- in buildings or long-lived products). In addition, because ducts. plastics streams for recycling are highly contaminated • Contamination. Plastics may also be contaminated and mixed, onlyPOLICY some AND 60 SYSTEMS percent focus of on the volume sentFOCUS ONby ENABLING the substances raw they held, leading to stains or smells 3 for recycling is actuallycollection reprocessed volumes – similar into new materials.materials that flows lower for secondary quality, or adding harmful chemicals that pre- COLLECTION Actual EU secondaryto other plastics ‘waste’ flows production as a share materialsof vent production recycling entirely. Some contaminants, such as med- demand is therefore closer to 10% than 30%. ical waste, require plastics to be incinerated.

ENDOFLIFE TREATMENT and PRODUCTS DESIGNED for disassembly 4 dismantling without focus on and dismantled to retain secondary ENDOFLIFE retaining material value material83 value

LOWUALITY inputs and i LARGESCALE INDUSTRY with high- 5 nvestment uncertainty results quality outputs with high retained SECONDARY in low yields and small-scale, value and the ability to replace MATERIAL fragmented industry primary materials one-to-one PRODUCTION

6 RELIABLE PRODUCTS and demand-side INCENTIVES focused on supply MARKET FOR incentives create market certainty into recycling process RECYCLED and stimulate investment in capacity EHIBIT 38 MATERIAL

PLASTICS PRODUCTION EMISSIONS Mt CO2, EUROPE, 2050

116

Additional recycling 233 Substitution with other materials Renewable energy in production Biobased or CO2 feedstock 117 Process innovation

2050 WITH 100% CIRCULAR ABATEMENT REMAINING ADDITIONAL RENEWABLE ENERGY RECOVERY POTENTIAL 2050 EMISSIONS POTENTIAL ABATEMENT 2050 EMISSIONS

TREATMENT OF END OF USE PLASTICS, 2017 AND 2050 MILLION TONNES; % OF PLASTIC DEMAND TOTAL

490 616

11% 2% WHAT TAKES TO GET THERE NOT COLLECTED STOCK 47% 21% 85% of 5 most common plastics collected for recycling with signicant yield increases (90% yield) Shift from landll to energy recovery for non-recycled 15% Reduced stock build-up and increased collection for EHIBIT 39 recycling Reuse of: 8% of packaging, especially industrial 20% LANDFILL 3% of B&C plastics, esp. PVC carpets, pipes etc. 4% of large automotive parts 46% ENERGY RECOVERY 15%

YIELD LOSSES 8% RECYCLED 10% REUSE 0% 5% 2017 2050

PACKAGING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION AUTOMOTIVE

195 245 98 123 45 57 5% 11% NOT COLLECTED 21% 2% STOCK 18% 16% 2% 2% 47% 15% 17% 32% LANDFILL 25% 76% 12%

ENERGY RECOVERY 22% 18% 53% 30% 47% YIELD LOSSES 13% 8% 5% 32% 9% RECYCLED 19% 11% 3% REUSE 0% 10% 0% 5% 4% 0% 6% 4% 2017 2050 2017 2050 2017 2050

REDUCED RECYCLING COSTS HIGHER REVENUES PACKAGING EXAMPLE EUR / TONNE TREATED PLASTICS EUR / TONNE TREATED PLASTICS EHIBIT 310 924 926 16% COLLECTION 186 774 Cleaner ows from materials 71% Increased yields give larger 119 choices and product design revenues per tonne treated optimised for recycling plastic (better technology, SORTING 191 Increased scale reduces unit cleaner inows) 147 cost Higher quality enables pricing Specialisation 540 LOGISTICS 15 and regional closer to virgin materials 10 integration of markets (additional sorting, improved Technological improvement technology, cleaner ows and boosts eciency but requires optimised products) higher investment Raised cost of virgin materials Reduced risk from regulations improves willingness to pay for RECYCLING 337 439 and market uncertainty secondary products Better functioning markets reduce current commercial risk to buyers

162 93 REVENUES INVESTMENT 2017 2050 2017 2050

DEEP TRANSFORMATION THAT REUIRES COORDINATED AND SUSTAINED ACTION ACROSS VALUE CHAIN

ABATEMENT COST PACKAGING EAMPLE EHIBIT 311 EUR PER TON ABATED CO2

257

43

68 101

2017 COST INCREASED ABATEMENT PER REDUCED COST OF RECYCLING, INCREASED REVENUES FROM TONNE OF PLASTIC RECYCLED ESPECIALLY THROUGH HIGHERUALITY SECONDARY INCREASED YIELDS MATERIALS

EHIBIT 312 EMISSIONS SAVINGS Mt CO2 / YEAR

80

EEE Low quality increased recycling 303 Automotive Low quality increased recycling 144 Agriculture Low quality increased recycling 97 70

Packaging Low quality increased recycling 40

60

Other plastics Low quality increased recycling 21

50

B&C Low quality increased recycling 66

40

Packaging High quality increased recycling 96

Agriculture High quality increased recycling 115 30 EEE High quality increased recycling 138

B&C High quality increased recycling 138

20 Automotive High quality increased recycling 149

Other plastics High quality increased recycling 170

10

Packaging Reuse 179

EEE Reuse 192 B&C Reuse 202 Automotive Reuse 203 200 150 100 50 0 50 100 150 200 250 300

ABATEMENT COST EUR/t CO2

REMAINING EMISSIONS 2050

EHIBIT 313 Mt CO2

REBOUND 117 Recycled plastics of lower quality do not replace the same volume of virgin plastics and may lead PRODUCTION FOR STOCK BUILD to an increased demand of total plastics 11 Around 10% of demand results in net stock build-up, requiring additional primary production 22 REUSE AND RECYCLING EMISSIONS 80% from yield losses in chemical recycling, the YIELD LOSSES remainder from mechanical recycling Yield losses in pre-treatment, recycling and 14 reuse process sent to energy recovery Process improvements as well as product design and choice of material important to maximize yields

42 AGED, DEGRADED, CONTAMINATED AND NOT COLLECTED COMMON PLASTICS Relatively small given option of chemical recycling THERMOSETS AND SMALL VOLUME Remaining share is aged, contaminated, or not captured by collection systems SPECIALTY PLASTICS 16 Challenging to achieve scale in small specialty plastics streams 12

EHIBIT 314

FEES Correct for externalities for primary production of plastics CURRENT POLICY FOCUS RAW MATERIAL NO LITTLE POLICY FOCUS TODAY PRODUCT DESIGN Regulation and fees to correct PARTIAL POLICY COVER TODAY PRODUCER RESPONSIBILITY for externalities on secondary Di erentiation to reect downstream materials impacts on recyclability PRODUCT COLLECTION TARGETS Are the main denominator of LANDFILL ENERGY current policies RECOVERY TA FEE To boost value of recycling COLLECTION PRODUCT DISPOSAL Reward practices conducive to high value recycling SECONDARY MATERIAL STANDARDISATION PUBLIC PROCUREMENT PRODUCTION Quality standards for recyclates and To create demand pull in nascent guarantees for recycled content markets

REGULATION OF ADDITIVES MARKET FOR DEMAND PULL Limiting toxic substances (current) and use RECYCLED Quotas to create demand of additives inimical to recycling (future) MATERIAL pull for nascent markets

EAMPLES OF POLICIES ALL WOULD NEED CAREFUL EVALUATION

EHIBIT 315 VALUE EUR/ton

1700 EUR ORIGINAL MATERIAL VALUE, 50B EUR

1000 EUR

VOLUME tonnes TODAY 55% COLLECTION CIRCULAR SYSTEM 90% value loss >80% of value still lost, 50% of value retained “30% collection” Large process losses in recycling Higher recycling yields increase but just 16% Uphill struggle to increase of volume recycling volume further – at a net cost High value retention provides Rebound e ects as downgraded revenue for investment in self- plastics cannot replace virgin sustaining systems and scaling plastics in many uses Recycling can replace virgin production REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

The fundamental reasons are not just technical, for secondary materials production. For example, the sh- however, but arise from a combination of policy, market, redding of cars results in plastics that are too mixed and and industry features throughout the whole value chain of contaminated to recycle (and in some cases, even to inci- plastics use (Exhibit 3.7). We start from a position where nerate safely). Similarly, when buildings are demolished, plastics recycling is an extension of end-of-life and waste plastics often are not recycled (with the exception of PVC policy, and need to move towards one where recycling recycling in some EU countries). is the intended destination for plastics used in products. 5. Recycling – create investment certainty and higher 1. Raw materials production – get the prices right. yields: As noted above, more than 40% of the plastics EU CO2 prices for plastics production are significantly collected for recycling in the EU are never actually tur- lower than either estimates of the social cost of carbon, ned into secondary materials. The materials may not be or the implicit CO2 prices in other climate policy (such easily recyclable, or they may be degraded or contami- as subsidies for renewable energy). There are many re- nated, making them unusable – or only usable for very asons for this, including the disadvantages of imposing low-value secondary materials. As important is to enable costs on EU industry without corresponding measures in investment in the capacity for high-quality recycling. This other geographies. The result is that primary plastics are is held back by uncertain ownership of, and access to, cheaper than they would be if the negative environmen- end-of-use plastics in many EU countries. Large scale tal consequences of their use were accounted for. For is crucial to cost efficiency in recycling. Recycling pro- illustration, with a CO2 price of 50 EUR per ton CO2, the cesses are often locally managed or inconsistent across full CO2 cost (included embedded emissions) would be different localities, making it difficult to achieve sufficient 20% of the price of primary plastics, a price increase that scale. Waste regulations sometimes inhibit trade in used would significantly improve the economics of recycling. plastics across borders, preventing the emergence of a regionally integrated market. 2. Product design – address externalities for recycling: Many plastic items are designed in ways that make re- 6. Secondary materials market – create demand pull cycling difficult or impossible. Different plastics may be and high quality: Due to the problems noted above, as used and fused together; plastics may be dyed (black well as a lack of quality standards for secondary plas- plastics are difficult to recycle, and colours reduce the -qu tics, most secondary plastics are perceived to be of low ality and commercial value of recycled plastics); there may quality, with limited uses. They therefore often trade at a also be additives that cannot be easily removed, as well discount, with average prices as low as 50% of corres- as adhesives. All these factors reduce the value that can ponding primary plastics in some categories – a major be recovered, but producers do not bear any of the cost. source of value destruction. Recycled plastics thus end This is a major, unrecognised market failure, as there is up in lower-value applications such as flower pots, traffic no realistic mechanism for a secondary materials industry cones or garbage bags. The combination of high cost to coordinate with those upstream in the value chain to and low quality also has resulted in limited demand for induce the changes that would retain more material value. secondary plastics. There is a chicken-and-egg dynamic at work, where a fragmented and small-scale recycling 3. Collection – target the right quantities. Plastics mana- industry cannot produce the consistent quality and vo- gement policies today target collection rates, not actual lumes required for large-scale use, even as lack of de- production of high-quality secondary materials. The resul- mand holds back the investment that would enable such ting collection systems are far from optimised for the re- production in the first place. cycling process. The result is additional costs of recycling, with low outputs and low revenues for the recycling industry. The key lesson from this diagnosis is that barriers are Future targets should instead focus on maximising the out- found throughout the entire value chain. The remedy the- put of value retention – which requires a combination of refore must also address all of these, not just focus on high collection rates, minimal loss of materials, and high-qu- more ambitious targets for collection. Plastics recycling ality outputs that are real substitutes for primary plastics. needs to become a major secondary materials industry, rather than an extension of waste handling systems. This 4. End-of-life treatment – prevent downgrading and also suggests the agenda for improvement: consciously loss of materials. The dismantling of products at their designing products for recycling and thus enabling a lar- end of life often takes little account of the implications ge-scale secondary materials industry.

84 EMISSIONS FROM PLASTICS WITHIN THE EU Mt CO2 PER YEAR

24

90

76% EHIBIT 33 34

233

132

2017 DEMAND GROWTH INCREASED EMISSIONS IMPROVED PRODUCTION 2050 AT END OF LIFE

WITH CURRENT DEVELOPMENT, CO2 EMISSIONS FROM RECYCLING OFFERS ONE OF THE FEW WAYS TO EHIBIT 32 PLASTICS WOULD BE 40% OF 2050 TARGET REDUCE EMISSIONS

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM PLASTIC, 2017 AND 2050, AS CO2 INTENSITY OF VIRGIN AND RECYCLED MATERIAL TONNE or ton SHARE OF EMISSION TARGET TONNE CO2 PER TONNE PLASTIC Mt CO2 PER YEAR

2017 2050 BORTTAGEN4 000 51 ENERGY RECOVERY 27 500

98% 92% 60%

200 25 PRODUCTION 77 04

CURRENT EMISSIONS EMISSION EMISSIONS PRODUCTION RECYCLING TOTAL FROM TARGET FROM OF NEW PLASTIC EMISSIONS PLASTICS PLASTICS ENERGY RECOVERY

CUMULATIVE EMISSIONS TO 2100 EHIBIT 33 Gt CO2, GLOBAL, 2015-2100

PROECTED CO2 EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS CARBON BUDGET TO 2100

914 ALUMINIUM 66 800 BORTTAGENCEMENT 254

STEEL 307 300

PLASTICS 288

BAT ASSUMING CURRENT 2 CARBON BUDGET FOR CARBON BUDGET EU LEVEL CONSUMPTION INDUSTRY AND ENERGY AVAILABLE FOR GLOBALLY MATERIALS

Share of European plastics demand (49Mt) EHIBIT 35 %, 2015

60% OF PLASTICS DEMAND

PACKAGING BUILDING AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS OTHERS CONSTRUCTION

PE POLYETHEN

PP POLYPROPHEN

PS POLYSTYRENE INCL EPS FOAM

PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE

PET POLYETHYLENE TEREPHTHALATE

OTHER PLASTICS

40% 20% 9% 6% 26%

PLASTIC VOLUMES IN EUROPE, 2015 Mt PER YEAR EHIBIT 36 Export in products Stock build-up Misclassi ed waste Etc 9

19 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE 58 4 90% 49 10 30 26 7 4 9 5 FRGPALETT PLASTICS NET DEMAND USE BALANCE END OF LIFE UNSORTED COLLECTED LANDFILL ENERGY COLLECTED PROCESS RECYCLING PRODUCTION EPORT AND STOCK PLASTICS PLASTICS IN PLASTIC RECOVERY FOR LOSSES IN ExhibitBUILDUP 3.7 HOUSHOLD WASTE RECYCLING RECYCLING WASTE Improving plastics recycling will require transformation across the entire value chain

FROM TO EHIBIT 37

VIRGIN PLASTICS carry cost for 1 VIRGIN PLASTICS do not carry embodied carbon (other RAW MATERIAL cost of externalities externalities likely via regulation)

Ludde gör denna direkt i InDesign? MATERIALS AND DESIGN choices to 2 PRODUCT DESIGN does not bear costs for downstream make reuse and recycling the PRODUCT externalities and costs intended destination at end of life

POLICY AND SYSTEMS focus on FOCUS ON ENABLING raw 3 collection volumes – similar materials flows for secondary COLLECTION to other ‘waste’ flows materials production

ENDOFLIFE TREATMENT and PRODUCTS DESIGNED for disassembly 4 dismantling without focus on and dismantled to retain secondary ENDOFLIFE retaining material value material value

LOWUALITY inputs and i LARGESCALE INDUSTRY with high- 5 nvestment uncertainty results quality outputs with high retained SECONDARY in low yields and small-scale, value and the ability to replace MATERIAL fragmented industry primary materials one-to-one PRODUCTION

6 RELIABLE PRODUCTS and demand-side INCENTIVES focused on supply MARKET FOR incentives create market certainty into recycling process RECYCLED and stimulate investment in capacity EHIBIT 38 MATERIAL

PLASTICS PRODUCTION EMISSIONS Mt CO2, EUROPE, 2050

SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS ANALYSIS

116 85

Additional recycling 233 Substitution with other materials Renewable energy in production Biobased or CO2 feedstock 117 Process innovation

2050 WITH 100% CIRCULAR ABATEMENT REMAINING ADDITIONAL RENEWABLE ENERGY RECOVERY POTENTIAL 2050 EMISSIONS POTENTIAL ABATEMENT 2050 EMISSIONS

TREATMENT OF END OF USE PLASTICS, 2017 AND 2050 MILLION TONNES; % OF PLASTIC DEMAND TOTAL

490 616

11% 2% WHAT TAKES TO GET THERE NOT COLLECTED STOCK 47% 21% 85% of 5 most common plastics collected for recycling with signicant yield increases (90% yield) Shift from landll to energy recovery for non-recycled 15% Reduced stock build-up and increased collection for EHIBIT 39 recycling Reuse of: 8% of packaging, especially industrial 20% LANDFILL 3% of B&C plastics, esp. PVC carpets, pipes etc. 4% of large automotive parts 46% ENERGY RECOVERY 15%

YIELD LOSSES 8% RECYCLED 10% REUSE 0% 5% 2017 2050

PACKAGING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION AUTOMOTIVE

195 245 98 123 45 57 5% 11% NOT COLLECTED 21% 2% STOCK 18% 16% 2% 2% 47% 15% 17% 32% LANDFILL 25% 76% 12%

ENERGY RECOVERY 22% 18% 53% 30% 47% YIELD LOSSES 13% 8% 5% 32% 9% RECYCLED 19% 11% 3% REUSE 0% 10% 0% 5% 4% 0% 6% 4% 2017 2050 2017 2050 2017 2050

REDUCED RECYCLING COSTS HIGHER REVENUES PACKAGING EXAMPLE EUR / TONNE TREATED PLASTICS EUR / TONNE TREATED PLASTICS EHIBIT 310 924 926 16% COLLECTION 186 774 Cleaner ows from materials 71% Increased yields give larger 119 choices and product design revenues per tonne treated optimised for recycling plastic (better technology, SORTING 191 Increased scale reduces unit cleaner inows) 147 cost Higher quality enables pricing Specialisation 540 LOGISTICS 15 and regional closer to virgin materials 10 integration of markets (additional sorting, improved Technological improvement technology, cleaner ows and boosts eciency but requires optimised products) higher investment Raised cost of virgin materials Reduced risk from regulations improves willingness to pay for RECYCLING 337 439 and market uncertainty secondary products Better functioning markets reduce current commercial risk to buyers

162 93 REVENUES INVESTMENT 2017 2050 2017 2050

DEEP TRANSFORMATION THAT REUIRES COORDINATED AND SUSTAINED ACTION ACROSS VALUE CHAIN

ABATEMENT COST PACKAGING EAMPLE EHIBIT 311 EUR PER TON ABATED CO2

257

43

68 101

2017 COST INCREASED ABATEMENT PER REDUCED COST OF RECYCLING, INCREASED REVENUES FROM TONNE OF PLASTIC RECYCLED ESPECIALLY THROUGH HIGHERUALITY SECONDARY INCREASED YIELDS MATERIALS

EHIBIT 312 EMISSIONS SAVINGS Mt CO2 / YEAR

80

EEE Low quality increased recycling 303 Automotive Low quality increased recycling 144 Agriculture Low quality increased recycling 97 70

Packaging Low quality increased recycling 40

60

Other plastics Low quality increased recycling 21

50

B&C Low quality increased recycling 66

40

Packaging High quality increased recycling 96

Agriculture High quality increased recycling 115 30 EEE High quality increased recycling 138

B&C High quality increased recycling 138

20 Automotive High quality increased recycling 149

Other plastics High quality increased recycling 170

10

Packaging Reuse 179

EEE Reuse 192 B&C Reuse 202 Automotive Reuse 203 200 150 100 50 0 50 100 150 200 250 300

ABATEMENT COST EUR/t CO2

REMAINING EMISSIONS 2050

EHIBIT 313 Mt CO2

REBOUND 117 Recycled plastics of lower quality do not replace the same volume of virgin plastics and may lead PRODUCTION FOR STOCK BUILD to an increased demand of total plastics 11 Around 10% of demand results in net stock build-up, requiring additional primary production 22 REUSE AND RECYCLING EMISSIONS 80% from yield losses in chemical recycling, the YIELD LOSSES remainder from mechanical recycling Yield losses in pre-treatment, recycling and 14 reuse process sent to energy recovery Process improvements as well as product design and choice of material important to maximize yields

42 AGED, DEGRADED, CONTAMINATED AND NOT COLLECTED COMMON PLASTICS Relatively small given option of chemical recycling THERMOSETS AND SMALL VOLUME Remaining share is aged, contaminated, or not captured by collection systems SPECIALTY PLASTICS 16 Challenging to achieve scale in small specialty plastics streams 12

EHIBIT 314

FEES Correct for externalities for primary production of plastics CURRENT POLICY FOCUS RAW MATERIAL NO LITTLE POLICY FOCUS TODAY PRODUCT DESIGN Regulation and fees to correct PARTIAL POLICY COVER TODAY PRODUCER RESPONSIBILITY for externalities on secondary Di erentiation to reect downstream materials impacts on recyclability PRODUCT COLLECTION TARGETS Are the main denominator of LANDFILL ENERGY current policies RECOVERY TA FEE To boost value of recycling COLLECTION PRODUCT DISPOSAL Reward practices conducive to high value recycling SECONDARY MATERIAL STANDARDISATION PUBLIC PROCUREMENT PRODUCTION Quality standards for recyclates and To create demand pull in nascent guarantees for recycled content markets

REGULATION OF ADDITIVES MARKET FOR DEMAND PULL Limiting toxic substances (current) and use RECYCLED Quotas to create demand of additives inimical to recycling (future) MATERIAL pull for nascent markets

EAMPLES OF POLICIES ALL WOULD NEED CAREFUL EVALUATION

EHIBIT 315 VALUE EUR/ton

1700 EUR ORIGINAL MATERIAL VALUE, 50B EUR

1000 EUR

VOLUME tonnes TODAY 55% COLLECTION CIRCULAR SYSTEM 90% value loss >80% of value still lost, 50% of value retained “30% collection” Large process losses in recycling Higher recycling yields increase but just 16% Uphill struggle to increase of volume recycling volume further – at a net cost High value retention provides Rebound e ects as downgraded revenue for investment in self- plastics cannot replace virgin sustaining systems and scaling plastics in many uses Recycling can replace virgin production EMISSIONS FROM PLASTICS WITHIN THE EU Mt CO2 PER YEAR

24

90

76% EHIBIT 33 34

233

132

2017 DEMAND GROWTH INCREASED EMISSIONS IMPROVED PRODUCTION 2050 AT END OF LIFE

WITH CURRENT DEVELOPMENT, CO2 EMISSIONS FROM RECYCLING OFFERS ONE OF THE FEW WAYS TO EHIBIT 32 PLASTICS WOULD BE 40% OF 2050 TARGET REDUCE EMISSIONS

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM PLASTIC, 2017 AND 2050, AS CO2 INTENSITY OF VIRGIN AND RECYCLED MATERIAL TONNE or ton SHARE OF EMISSION TARGET TONNE CO2 PER TONNE PLASTIC Mt CO2 PER YEAR

2017 2050 BORTTAGEN4 000 51 ENERGY RECOVERY 27 500

98% 92% 60%

200 25 PRODUCTION 77 04

CURRENT EMISSIONS EMISSION EMISSIONS PRODUCTION RECYCLING TOTAL FROM TARGET FROM OF NEW PLASTIC EMISSIONS PLASTICS PLASTICS ENERGY RECOVERY

CUMULATIVE EMISSIONS TO 2100 EHIBIT 33 Gt CO2, GLOBAL, 2015-2100

PROECTED CO2 EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS CARBON BUDGET TO 2100

914 ALUMINIUM 66 800 BORTTAGENCEMENT 254

STEEL 307 300

PLASTICS 288

BAT ASSUMING CURRENT 2 CARBON BUDGET FOR CARBON BUDGET EU LEVEL CONSUMPTION INDUSTRY AND ENERGY AVAILABLE FOR GLOBALLY MATERIALS

Share of European plastics demand (49Mt) EHIBIT 35 %, 2015

60% OF PLASTICS DEMAND

PACKAGING BUILDING AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS OTHERS CONSTRUCTION

PE POLYETHEN

PP POLYPROPHEN

PS POLYSTYRENE INCL EPS FOAM

PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE

PET POLYETHYLENE TEREPHTHALATE

OTHER PLASTICS

40% 20% 9% 6% 26%

PLASTIC VOLUMES IN EUROPE, 2015 Mt PER YEAR EHIBIT 36 Export in products Stock build-up Misclassi ed waste Etc 9

19

58 4 90% 49 10 30 26 7 4 9 5 FRGPALETT PLASTICS NET DEMAND USE BALANCE END OF LIFE UNSORTED COLLECTED LANDFILL ENERGY COLLECTED PROCESS RECYCLING PRODUCTION EPORT AND STOCK PLASTICS PLASTICS IN PLASTIC RECOVERY FOR LOSSES IN BUILDUP HOUSHOLD WASTE RECYCLING RECYCLING WASTE

FROM TO EHIBIT 37

REVIEWVIRGIN DRAFT PLASTICS – carryDO NOT cost forDISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE 1 VIRGIN PLASTICS do not carry embodied carbon (other RAW MATERIAL cost of externalities externalities likely via regulation)

Ludde gör denna A CIRCULAR SCENARIO FOR EU PLASTICS USE IN 2050 direkt i InDesign? To estimate the CO2 emission reduction potentialMATERIALS fromAND DESIGN • choices Increase to the collection rate for mechanical recycling 2 PRODUCT DESIGN does not a morebear circularcosts for plastics downstream system, we constructedmake a scenario reuse and recyclingto 73%. the The rate varies by value chain and plastics type, PRODUCT for 2050externalities that capturesand costs the potential for plasticsintended recycling destination but at endis underpinned of life by collection up to 85% of the five lar- much more fully. As noted above, in the baseline scenario, gest plastic types. Collection rate remains as low as 30% production of plastics for EU use and associated end-of-life for other, smaller-scale plastics, which although often very treatment would produce 233 Mt of CO2 emissions in 2050. valuable, often also entails small volumes that make the POLICY AND SYSTEMS focus on FOCUS ON ENABLING raw 3 This includes emissions from production and disposal, and economics of recycling difficult. The non-collected portion collection volumes – similar materials flows for secondary COLLECTION assumes all plastics are incinerated, with no carbon capture of 27% also includes a large share of thermosets, which to other ‘waste’ flows materials production and storage (Exhibit 3.8). In a circular scenario, emissions are can be chemically but not mechanically recycled. reduced by nearly 50% by making reuse and recycling the • Significant yield improvements in sorting and re- standard for end-of-life plastics. To reach climate objectives, cycling to 76%: The share of plastics that are collected theseENDOFLIFE emissions TREATMENT would needand to be reduced further,PRODUCTS through DESIGNED for disassembly 4 for recycling but not turned into secondary materials falls additionaldismantling recycling, without substitution focus on with other materials,and dismantleduse of re- to retain secondary ENDOFLIFE from more than 40% today to 24%. Combined with a 73% newableretaining energy material in production, value replacement of fossilmaterial feedstock value collection rate, this means that the output from re-use with bio-based alternatives or chemicals synthesised from recycling is 56% of total end-of-life plastics volumes. (non-fossil) CO2, and other production process innovation. • Chemical recycling of 25% of remaining flows. This LOWUALITY inputs and i LARGESCALE INDUSTRY with high- 5 focuses on the remaining 44% of plastics that are difficult Exhibitnvestment 3.9 shows uncertainty the different results componentsquality of a circularoutputs with high retained SECONDARY to handle through mechanical recycling. Thus, 11% of scenarioin low for yields EU plastics,and small-scale, all of them contributingvalue to significant and the ability to replace MATERIAL total end-of-life plastics are chemically recycled. reusefragmented of end-of-life industry plastics and substitution of primaryprimary plastics materials one-to-one PRODUCTION with secondary materials. Key features of this scenario include:

6 RELIABLE PRODUCTS and demand-side INCENTIVES focused on supply MARKET FOR incentives create market certainty into recycling process RECYCLED and stimulateExhibit investment 3.8 in capacity EHIBIT 38 MATERIAL Implementing a circular plastics scenario can reduce 2050 emissions by 50%

PLASTICS PRODUCTION EMISSIONS Mt CO2, EUROPE, 2050

116

Additional recycling 233 Substitution with other materials Renewable energy in production Biobased or CO2 feedstock 117 Process innovation

2050 WITH 100% CIRCULAR ABATEMENT REMAINING ADDITIONAL RENEWABLE ENERGY RECOVERY POTENTIAL 2050 EMISSIONS POTENTIAL ABATEMENT 2050 EMISSIONS

SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS ANALYSIS

TREATMENT OF END OF USE PLASTICS, 2017 AND 2050 86 MILLION TONNES; % OF PLASTIC DEMAND TOTAL

490 616

11% 2% WHAT TAKES TO GET THERE NOT COLLECTED STOCK 47% 21% 85% of 5 most common plastics collected for recycling with signicant yield increases (90% yield) Shift from landll to energy recovery for non-recycled 15% Reduced stock build-up and increased collection for EHIBIT 39 recycling Reuse of: 8% of packaging, especially industrial 20% LANDFILL 3% of B&C plastics, esp. PVC carpets, pipes etc. 4% of large automotive parts 46% ENERGY RECOVERY 15%

YIELD LOSSES 8% RECYCLED 10% REUSE 0% 5% 2017 2050

PACKAGING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION AUTOMOTIVE

195 245 98 123 45 57 5% 11% NOT COLLECTED 21% 2% STOCK 18% 16% 2% 2% 47% 15% 17% 32% LANDFILL 25% 76% 12%

ENERGY RECOVERY 22% 18% 53% 30% 47% YIELD LOSSES 13% 8% 5% 32% 9% RECYCLED 19% 11% 3% REUSE 0% 10% 0% 5% 4% 0% 6% 4% 2017 2050 2017 2050 2017 2050

REDUCED RECYCLING COSTS HIGHER REVENUES PACKAGING EXAMPLE EUR / TONNE TREATED PLASTICS EUR / TONNE TREATED PLASTICS EHIBIT 310 924 926 16% COLLECTION 186 774 Cleaner ows from materials 71% Increased yields give larger 119 choices and product design revenues per tonne treated optimised for recycling plastic (better technology, SORTING 191 Increased scale reduces unit cleaner inows) 147 cost Higher quality enables pricing Specialisation 540 LOGISTICS 15 and regional closer to virgin materials 10 integration of markets (additional sorting, improved Technological improvement technology, cleaner ows and boosts eciency but requires optimised products) higher investment Raised cost of virgin materials Reduced risk from regulations improves willingness to pay for RECYCLING 337 439 and market uncertainty secondary products Better functioning markets reduce current commercial risk to buyers

162 93 REVENUES INVESTMENT 2017 2050 2017 2050

DEEP TRANSFORMATION THAT REUIRES COORDINATED AND SUSTAINED ACTION ACROSS VALUE CHAIN

ABATEMENT COST PACKAGING EAMPLE EHIBIT 311 EUR PER TON ABATED CO2

257

43

68 101

2017 COST INCREASED ABATEMENT PER REDUCED COST OF RECYCLING, INCREASED REVENUES FROM TONNE OF PLASTIC RECYCLED ESPECIALLY THROUGH HIGHERUALITY SECONDARY INCREASED YIELDS MATERIALS

EHIBIT 312 EMISSIONS SAVINGS Mt CO2 / YEAR

80

EEE Low quality increased recycling 303 Automotive Low quality increased recycling 144 Agriculture Low quality increased recycling 97 70

Packaging Low quality increased recycling 40

60

Other plastics Low quality increased recycling 21

50

B&C Low quality increased recycling 66

40

Packaging High quality increased recycling 96

Agriculture High quality increased recycling 115 30 EEE High quality increased recycling 138

B&C High quality increased recycling 138

20 Automotive High quality increased recycling 149

Other plastics High quality increased recycling 170

10

Packaging Reuse 179

EEE Reuse 192 B&C Reuse 202 Automotive Reuse 203 200 150 100 50 0 50 100 150 200 250 300

ABATEMENT COST EUR/t CO2

REMAINING EMISSIONS 2050

EHIBIT 313 Mt CO2

REBOUND 117 Recycled plastics of lower quality do not replace the same volume of virgin plastics and may lead PRODUCTION FOR STOCK BUILD to an increased demand of total plastics 11 Around 10% of demand results in net stock build-up, requiring additional primary production 22 REUSE AND RECYCLING EMISSIONS 80% from yield losses in chemical recycling, the YIELD LOSSES remainder from mechanical recycling Yield losses in pre-treatment, recycling and 14 reuse process sent to energy recovery Process improvements as well as product design and choice of material important to maximize yields

42 AGED, DEGRADED, CONTAMINATED AND NOT COLLECTED COMMON PLASTICS Relatively small given option of chemical recycling THERMOSETS AND SMALL VOLUME Remaining share is aged, contaminated, or not captured by collection systems SPECIALTY PLASTICS 16 Challenging to achieve scale in small specialty plastics streams 12

EHIBIT 314

FEES Correct for externalities for primary production of plastics CURRENT POLICY FOCUS RAW MATERIAL NO LITTLE POLICY FOCUS TODAY PRODUCT DESIGN Regulation and fees to correct PARTIAL POLICY COVER TODAY PRODUCER RESPONSIBILITY for externalities on secondary Di erentiation to reect downstream materials impacts on recyclability PRODUCT COLLECTION TARGETS Are the main denominator of LANDFILL ENERGY current policies RECOVERY TA FEE To boost value of recycling COLLECTION PRODUCT DISPOSAL Reward practices conducive to high value recycling SECONDARY MATERIAL STANDARDISATION PUBLIC PROCUREMENT PRODUCTION Quality standards for recyclates and To create demand pull in nascent guarantees for recycled content markets

REGULATION OF ADDITIVES MARKET FOR DEMAND PULL Limiting toxic substances (current) and use RECYCLED Quotas to create demand of additives inimical to recycling (future) MATERIAL pull for nascent markets

EAMPLES OF POLICIES ALL WOULD NEED CAREFUL EVALUATION

EHIBIT 315 VALUE EUR/ton

1700 EUR ORIGINAL MATERIAL VALUE, 50B EUR

1000 EUR

VOLUME tonnes TODAY 55% COLLECTION CIRCULAR SYSTEM 90% value loss >80% of value still lost, 50% of value retained “30% collection” Large process losses in recycling Higher recycling yields increase but just 16% Uphill struggle to increase of volume recycling volume further – at a net cost High value retention provides Rebound e ects as downgraded revenue for investment in self- plastics cannot replace virgin sustaining systems and scaling plastics in many uses Recycling can replace virgin production EMISSIONS FROM PLASTICS WITHIN THE EU Mt CO2 PER YEAR

24

90

76% EHIBIT 33 34

233

132

2017 DEMAND GROWTH INCREASED EMISSIONS IMPROVED PRODUCTION 2050 AT END OF LIFE

WITH CURRENT DEVELOPMENT, CO2 EMISSIONS FROM RECYCLING OFFERS ONE OF THE FEW WAYS TO EHIBIT 32 PLASTICS WOULD BE 40% OF 2050 TARGET REDUCE EMISSIONS

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM PLASTIC, 2017 AND 2050, AS CO2 INTENSITY OF VIRGIN AND RECYCLED MATERIAL TONNE or ton SHARE OF EMISSION TARGET TONNE CO2 PER TONNE PLASTIC Mt CO2 PER YEAR

2017 2050 BORTTAGEN4 000 51 ENERGY RECOVERY 27 500

98% 92% 60%

200 25 PRODUCTION 77 04

CURRENT EMISSIONS EMISSION EMISSIONS PRODUCTION RECYCLING TOTAL FROM TARGET FROM OF NEW PLASTIC EMISSIONS PLASTICS PLASTICS ENERGY RECOVERY

CUMULATIVE EMISSIONS TO 2100 EHIBIT 33 Gt CO2, GLOBAL, 2015-2100

PROECTED CO2 EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS CARBON BUDGET TO 2100

914 ALUMINIUM 66 800 BORTTAGENCEMENT 254

STEEL 307 300

PLASTICS 288

BAT ASSUMING CURRENT 2 CARBON BUDGET FOR CARBON BUDGET EU LEVEL CONSUMPTION INDUSTRY AND ENERGY AVAILABLE FOR GLOBALLY MATERIALS

Share of European plastics demand (49Mt) EHIBIT 35 %, 2015

60% OF PLASTICS DEMAND

PACKAGING BUILDING AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS OTHERS CONSTRUCTION

PE POLYETHEN

PP POLYPROPHEN

PS POLYSTYRENE INCL EPS FOAM

PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE

PET POLYETHYLENE TEREPHTHALATE

OTHER PLASTICS

40% 20% 9% 6% 26%

PLASTIC VOLUMES IN EUROPE, 2015 Mt PER YEAR EHIBIT 36 Export in products Stock build-up Misclassi ed waste Etc 9

19

58 4 90% 49 10 30 26 7 4 9 5 FRGPALETT PLASTICS NET DEMAND USE BALANCE END OF LIFE UNSORTED COLLECTED LANDFILL ENERGY COLLECTED PROCESS RECYCLING PRODUCTION EPORT AND STOCK PLASTICS PLASTICS IN PLASTIC RECOVERY FOR LOSSES IN BUILDUP HOUSHOLD WASTE RECYCLING RECYCLING WASTE

FROM TO EHIBIT 37

VIRGIN PLASTICS carry cost for 1 VIRGIN PLASTICS do not carry embodied carbon (other RAW MATERIAL cost of externalities externalities likely via regulation)

Ludde gör denna direkt i InDesign? MATERIALS AND DESIGN choices to 2 PRODUCT DESIGN does not bear costs for downstream make reuse and recycling the PRODUCT externalities and costs intended destination at end of life

POLICY AND SYSTEMS focus on FOCUS ON ENABLING raw 3 collection volumes – similar materials flows for secondary COLLECTION to other ‘waste’ flows materials production

ENDOFLIFE TREATMENT and PRODUCTS DESIGNED for disassembly 4 dismantling without focus on and dismantled to retain secondary ENDOFLIFE retaining material value material value

LOWUALITY inputs and i LARGESCALE INDUSTRY with high- 5 nvestment uncertainty results quality outputs with high retained SECONDARY in low yields and small-scale, value and the ability to replace MATERIAL fragmented industry primary materials one-to-one PRODUCTION

6 RELIABLE PRODUCTS and demand-side INCENTIVES focused on supply MARKET FOR incentives create market certainty into recycling process RECYCLED and stimulate investment in capacity EHIBIT 38 MATERIAL

PLASTICS PRODUCTION EMISSIONS Mt CO2, EUROPE, 2050

116

Additional recycling 233 Substitution with other materials Renewable energy in production Biobased or CO2 feedstock REVIEW DRAFT – DO 117NOT DISTRIBUTE Process innovation

2050 WITH 100% CIRCULAR ABATEMENT ExhibitREMAINING 3.9 ADDITIONAL RENEWABLE ENERGY RECOVERY POTENTIAL 2050 EMISSIONS POTENTIAL ABATEMENT 2050 EMISSIONS 85% of “big 5” plastics collected in an ambitious 2050 circular scenario

TREATMENT OF END OF USE PLASTICS, 2017 AND 2050 MILLION TONNES; % OF PLASTIC DEMAND TOTAL

490 616

11% 2% WHAT TAKES TO GET THERE NOT COLLECTED STOCK 47% 21% 85% of 5 most common plastics collected for recycling with signicant yield increases (90% yield) Shift from landll to energy recovery for non-recycled 15% Reduced stock build-up and increased collection for EHIBIT 39 recycling Reuse of: 8% of packaging, especially industrial 20% LANDFILL 3% of B&C plastics, esp. PVC carpets, pipes etc. 4% of large automotive parts 46% ENERGY RECOVERY 15%

YIELD LOSSES 8% RECYCLED 10% REUSE 0% 5% 2017 2050

PACKAGING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION AUTOMOTIVE

195 245 98 123 45 57 5% 11% NOT COLLECTED 21% 2% STOCK 18% 16% 2% 2% 47% 15% 17% 32% LANDFILL 25% 76% 12%

ENERGY RECOVERY 22% 18% 53% 30% 47% YIELD LOSSES 13% 8% 5% 32% 9% RECYCLED 19% 11% 3% REUSE 0% 10% 0% 5% 4% 0% 6% 4% 2017 2050 2017 2050 2017 2050

SOURCE: (DELOITTE AND PLASTICS RECYCLERS EUROPE 2015; PLASTICS EUROPE 2018B); MATERIAL ECONOMICS ANALYSIS

REDUCED RECYCLING COSTS HIGHER REVENUES PACKAGING EXAMPLE EUR / TONNE TREATED PLASTICS EUR / TONNE TREATED PLASTICS 87 EHIBIT 310 924 926 16% COLLECTION 186 774 Cleaner ows from materials 71% Increased yields give larger 119 choices and product design revenues per tonne treated optimised for recycling plastic (better technology, SORTING 191 Increased scale reduces unit cleaner inows) 147 cost Higher quality enables pricing Specialisation 540 LOGISTICS 15 and regional closer to virgin materials 10 integration of markets (additional sorting, improved Technological improvement technology, cleaner ows and boosts eciency but requires optimised products) higher investment Raised cost of virgin materials Reduced risk from regulations improves willingness to pay for RECYCLING 337 439 and market uncertainty secondary products Better functioning markets reduce current commercial risk to buyers

162 93 REVENUES INVESTMENT 2017 2050 2017 2050

DEEP TRANSFORMATION THAT REUIRES COORDINATED AND SUSTAINED ACTION ACROSS VALUE CHAIN

ABATEMENT COST PACKAGING EAMPLE EHIBIT 311 EUR PER TON ABATED CO2

257

43

68 101

2017 COST INCREASED ABATEMENT PER REDUCED COST OF RECYCLING, INCREASED REVENUES FROM TONNE OF PLASTIC RECYCLED ESPECIALLY THROUGH HIGHERUALITY SECONDARY INCREASED YIELDS MATERIALS

EHIBIT 312 EMISSIONS SAVINGS Mt CO2 / YEAR

80

EEE Low quality increased recycling 303 Automotive Low quality increased recycling 144 Agriculture Low quality increased recycling 97 70

Packaging Low quality increased recycling 40

60

Other plastics Low quality increased recycling 21

50

B&C Low quality increased recycling 66

40

Packaging High quality increased recycling 96

Agriculture High quality increased recycling 115 30 EEE High quality increased recycling 138

B&C High quality increased recycling 138

20 Automotive High quality increased recycling 149

Other plastics High quality increased recycling 170

10

Packaging Reuse 179

EEE Reuse 192 B&C Reuse 202 Automotive Reuse 203 200 150 100 50 0 50 100 150 200 250 300

ABATEMENT COST EUR/t CO2

REMAINING EMISSIONS 2050

EHIBIT 313 Mt CO2

REBOUND 117 Recycled plastics of lower quality do not replace the same volume of virgin plastics and may lead PRODUCTION FOR STOCK BUILD to an increased demand of total plastics 11 Around 10% of demand results in net stock build-up, requiring additional primary production 22 REUSE AND RECYCLING EMISSIONS 80% from yield losses in chemical recycling, the YIELD LOSSES remainder from mechanical recycling Yield losses in pre-treatment, recycling and 14 reuse process sent to energy recovery Process improvements as well as product design and choice of material important to maximize yields

42 AGED, DEGRADED, CONTAMINATED AND NOT COLLECTED COMMON PLASTICS Relatively small given option of chemical recycling THERMOSETS AND SMALL VOLUME Remaining share is aged, contaminated, or not captured by collection systems SPECIALTY PLASTICS 16 Challenging to achieve scale in small specialty plastics streams 12

EHIBIT 314

FEES Correct for externalities for primary production of plastics CURRENT POLICY FOCUS RAW MATERIAL NO LITTLE POLICY FOCUS TODAY PRODUCT DESIGN Regulation and fees to correct PARTIAL POLICY COVER TODAY PRODUCER RESPONSIBILITY for externalities on secondary Di erentiation to reect downstream materials impacts on recyclability PRODUCT COLLECTION TARGETS Are the main denominator of LANDFILL ENERGY current policies RECOVERY TA FEE To boost value of recycling COLLECTION PRODUCT DISPOSAL Reward practices conducive to high value recycling SECONDARY MATERIAL STANDARDISATION PUBLIC PROCUREMENT PRODUCTION Quality standards for recyclates and To create demand pull in nascent guarantees for recycled content markets

REGULATION OF ADDITIVES MARKET FOR DEMAND PULL Limiting toxic substances (current) and use RECYCLED Quotas to create demand of additives inimical to recycling (future) MATERIAL pull for nascent markets

EAMPLES OF POLICIES ALL WOULD NEED CAREFUL EVALUATION

EHIBIT 315 VALUE EUR/ton

1700 EUR ORIGINAL MATERIAL VALUE, 50B EUR

1000 EUR

VOLUME tonnes TODAY 55% COLLECTION CIRCULAR SYSTEM 90% value loss >80% of value still lost, 50% of value retained “30% collection” Large process losses in recycling Higher recycling yields increase but just 16% Uphill struggle to increase of volume recycling volume further – at a net cost High value retention provides Rebound e ects as downgraded revenue for investment in self- plastics cannot replace virgin sustaining systems and scaling plastics in many uses Recycling can replace virgin production EMISSIONS FROM PLASTICS WITHIN THE EU Mt CO2 PER YEAR 24

90

76% EHIBIT 33 34

233

132

2017 DEMAND GROWTH INCREASED EMISSIONS IMPROVED PRODUCTION 2050 AT END OF LIFE

WITH CURRENT DEVELOPMENT, CO2 EMISSIONS FROM RECYCLING OFFERS ONE OF THE FEW WAYS TO EHIBIT 32 PLASTICS WOULD BE 40% OF 2050 TARGET REDUCE EMISSIONS

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM PLASTIC, 2017 AND 2050, AS CO2 INTENSITY OF VIRGIN AND RECYCLED MATERIAL TONNE or ton SHARE OF EMISSION TARGET TONNE CO2 PER TONNE PLASTIC Mt CO2 PER YEAR

2017 2050 BORTTAGEN4 000 51 ENERGY RECOVERY 27 500

98% 92% 60%

200 25 PRODUCTION 77 04

CURRENT EMISSIONS EMISSION EMISSIONS PRODUCTION RECYCLING TOTAL FROM TARGET FROM OF NEW PLASTIC EMISSIONS PLASTICS PLASTICS ENERGY RECOVERY

CUMULATIVE EMISSIONS TO 2100 EHIBIT 33 Gt CO2, GLOBAL, 2015-2100

PROECTED CO2 EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS CARBON BUDGET TO 2100

914 ALUMINIUM 66 800 BORTTAGENCEMENT 254

STEEL 307 300

PLASTICS 288

BAT ASSUMING CURRENT 2 CARBON BUDGET FOR CARBON BUDGET EU LEVEL CONSUMPTION INDUSTRY AND ENERGY AVAILABLE FOR GLOBALLY MATERIALS

Share of European plastics demand (49Mt) EHIBIT 35 %, 2015

60% OF PLASTICS DEMAND

PACKAGING BUILDING AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS OTHERS CONSTRUCTION

PE POLYETHEN

PP POLYPROPHEN

PS POLYSTYRENE INCL EPS FOAM

PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE

PET POLYETHYLENE TEREPHTHALATE

OTHER PLASTICS

40% 20% 9% 6% 26%

PLASTIC VOLUMES IN EUROPE, 2015 Mt PER YEAR EHIBIT 36 Export in products Stock build-up Misclassi ed waste Etc 9

19

58 4 90% 49 10 30 26 7 4 9 5 PLASTICS NET DEMAND USE BALANCE END OF LIFE UNSORTED COLLECTED LANDFILL ENERGY COLLECTED PROCESS RECYCLING PRODUCTION EPORT AND STOCK PLASTICS PLASTICS IN PLASTIC RECOVERY FOR LOSSES IN BUILDUP HOUSHOLD WASTE RECYCLING RECYCLING WASTE

FROM TO EHIBIT 37 Policy-driven system based on waste Self-sustaining system, driven by value of secondary 1 management; revenues do not cover costs materials (with regulation of externalities)

Focus on increasing collection volumes – Focus on secondary material production and ability to 2 similar to other ‘waste’ flows replace virgin material one-to-one Ludde gör denna 3 Onus on recycling industries to handle deeply Transformation through policy-driven coordination to enable direkt i InDesign? suboptimal flows in largely unchanged system simultaneous change across value chain 4 Product design does not bear costs for Materials and design choices account for recyclability, downstream externalities and costs recycled content and disassembly 5 Incentives focused on supply into recycling Demand-side incentives create market certainty and process stimulate investment in capacity 6 Recycling rooted in local, small-scale waste Large-scale and regional raw materials industry, with handling, with patchy coverage harmonized systems, specialisation, and product standards

7 Design and end-of-life treatment without focus Products designed and dismantled to retain secondary on retaining material value material value

Virgin plastics carry cost for embodied carbon (other Virgin plastics do not carry cost of externalities 8 externalities likely via regulation)

PLASTIC PRODUCTION EMISSIONS Mt CO2, EUROPE, 2050 EHIBIT 38 233

116

Rdditional recycling Substitution with other materials Renewable energy in production Biobased or CO2 feedstock 117 Process innovation

2050 WITH 100% CIRCULAR ABATEMENT REMAINING RENEWABLE RENEWABLE ENERGY RECOVERY POTENTIAL 2050 EMISSIONS ENERGY REDUCTION 2050 EMISSIONS

TOTAL

28% WHAT TAKES TO GET THERE NOT COLLECTED STOCK 47% 85% of 5 most common plastics collected for 1% recycling with signi cant yield increases (90% yield) Shift from land ll to energy recovery for non-recycled 17% Reduced stock build-up and increased collection for EHIBIT 39 recycling Reuse of: 12% 8% of packaging, especially industrial 20% Ludde xar LANDFILL 3% of B&C plastics, esp. PVC carpets, pipes etc. Minimum text 7 pt. 4% of large automotive parts

15% ENERGY RECOVERY 37%

YIELD LOSSES 8% RECYCLED 10% REUSE 0% 4% 2017 2050

PACKAGING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION AUTOMOTIVE

5% 11% NOT COLLECTED 21% 2% STOCK 18% 16% 2% 2% 47% 15% 17% 32% LANDFILL 25% 76% 12%

ENERGY RECOVERY 22% 18% 53% 30% 47% YIELD LOSSES 13% 8% 5% 32% 9% RECYCLED 19% 11% 3% REUSE 0% 10% 0% 5% 4% 0% 6% 4% 2017 2050 2017 2050 2017 2050

REMAINING EMISSIONS 2050 Mt CO EHIBIT 313 2

REBOUND 117 Recycled plastics of lower quality do not replace the same volume of virgin plastics and may lead PRODUCTION FOR STOCK BUILD to an increased demand of total plastics 11 Around 10% of demand results in net stock build-up, requiring additional primary production 22 REUSE AND RECYCLING EMISSIONS 80% from yield losses in chemical recycling, the YIELD LOSSES remainder from mechanical recycling Yield losses in pre-treatment, recycling and 14 reuse process sent to energy recovery Process improvements as well as product design and choice of material important to maximize yields

42 AGED, DEGRADED, CONTAMINATED AND NOT COLLECTED COMMON PLASTICS Relatively small given option of chemical recycling THERMOSETS AND SMALL VOLUME Remaining share is aged, contaminated, or not captured by collection systems SPECIALTY PLASTICS 16 Challenging to achieve scale in small specialty plastics streams 12

VALUE EUR/ton

EHIBIT 310 1700 EUR ORIGINAL MATERIAL VALUE, 50B EUR

ton, ore TONNE 1000 EUR

REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Overall, this is a highly ambitious scenario. Realising the A deepdive into the economics of recycling gives an circular scenario described above will require transforming the indication of how costs and revenues would have to shift. system to address barriers across the value chain. This may Today, costs often exceed the available revenuesVOLUME from seem daunting, but the prize would be worth it: in the circular often low-quality secondary plastics output. Exhibittonnes 3.10 scenario, the reuseTODAY and recycling 55%of secondary COLLECTION plastics cre- showsCIRCULAR a caseSYSTEM study example for plastic packaging. Our ates revenues of 27 billion EUR per year. Plastics could then analysis suggests that costs can be reduced by 16% by 90% value loss >80% of value still lost, 50% of value retained move a good way“30% towards collection” where Largesteel process or aluminium losses in recycling are to- creatingHigher recycling cleaner yields increaseflows from materials choices and pro- day, with recyclingbut drivenjust 16% by the valueUphill of strugglesecondary to increase materials. of ductvolume design optimised for recycling; increasing the scale recycling volume further – at a net cost High value retention provides Rebound eects as downgraded revenue for investment in self- plastics cannot replace virgin sustaining systems and scaling plastics in many uses Recycling can replace virgin Exhibit production3.10 Recycling is financially challenging today but can be made economically attractive EHIBIT 310

REDUCED RECYCLING COSTS HIGHER REVENUES EUR / TON TREATED PLASTICS EUR / TON TREATED PLASTICS

924 926

16% COLLECTION 186 774 71% 119 SORTING 191 147 PACKAGING EXAMPLE 540 LOGISTICS 15 10

337 RECYCLING 439

162 INVESTMENT 93 REVENUES

2017 2050 2017 2050

A CIRCULARCleaner SCENARIO ows from materials choices FOR and Increased yields give larger revenues per tonne product design optimised for recycling treated plastic (better technology, cleaner inows) EU PLASTICSIncreased USE scale reducesIN unit2050 cost Higher quality enables pricing closer to virgin To estimate the CO2Specialisation emission and regionalreduction integration potential of markets materials (additional sorting, improved technology, from a more circular plasticsTechnological system, improvement we constructed boosts eciency a but cleaner ows and optimised products) scenario for 2050 thatrequires captures higher the investment potential for plastics Raised cost of virgin materials improves recycling much more Reducedfully. As risk noted from regulations above, and in market the ba- willingness to pay for secondary products Better functioning markets reduce current seline scenario, productionuncertainty of plastics for EU use and commercial risk to buyers associated end-of-life treatment would produce 233 Mt of CO2 emissionsDEEP in TRANSFORMATION 2050. This includes THAT emissions REUIRES COORDINATEDfrom AND SUSTAINED ACTION ACROSS VALUE CHAIN production and disposal, and assumes all plastics are

incinerated, with no carbon capture and storageSOURCE: (Exhibit MATERIAL ECONOMICS ANALYSIS

88

EMISSIONS SAVINGS Mt CO2 / YEAR

EHIBIT 312 80

EEE Low quality increased recycling 303 Automotive Low quality increased recycling 144 Agriculture Low quality increased recycling 97 70

NEED UPDATE Packaging Low quality increased recycling 40

60 Har lite svårt att förstå den här grafen. Handlar det om att tydliggöra inom vilka Other plastics Low quality increased recycling 21 områden man kan minska CO2 utsläppen med minsta 50 kostnaden. dvs dom 4 områden som ligger mellan B&C Low quality increased recycling 66 ~29 - 72 Mt CO2 ? Hur kan Abatement (reducerings- ?) cost vara negativ. vad innebär det. 40 Packaging High quality increased recycling 96

Agriculture High quality increased recycling 115 30 EEE High quality increased recycling 138

B&C High quality increased recycling 138

20 Automotive High quality increased recycling 149

Other plastics High quality increased recycling 170

10

Packaging Reuse 179

EEE Reuse 192 B&C Reuse 202 Automotive Reuse 203 200 150 100 50 0 50 100 150 200 250 300

ABATEMENT COST EUR/t CO2

EHIBIT 311

ABATEMENT COST PACKAGING EAMPLE EUR PER TON ABATED CO2

257

43 68 101

2017 COST INCREASED ABATEMENT PER REDUCED COST OF RECYCLING, INCREASED REVENUES FROM TONNE OF PLASTIC RECYCLED ESPECIALLY THROUGH HIGHERUALITY SECONDARY INCREASED YIELDS MATERIALS

EHIBIT 314 CURRENT POLICIES COVER ONLY PARTS OF THE RANGE OF BARRIERS TO HIGH-VALUE PLASTICS RECYCLING

CURRENT POLICY FOCUS NO LITTLE POLICY FOCUS TODAY PARTIAL POLICY COVER TODAY

FEES Correct for externalities for primary production of plastics RAW MATERIAL PRODUCT DESIGN Regulation and fees to correct PRODUCER RESPONSIBILITY for externalities on secondary Dierentiation to reect downstream materials FRGPALETT impacts on recyclability PRODUCT COLLECTION TARGETS Are the main denominator of LANDFILL ENERGY current policies RECOVERY TA FEE To boost value of recycling COLLECTION

PRODUCT DISPOSAL Reward practices conducive to ENDOFLIFE high value recycling TREATMENT

STANDARDISATION Quality standards for recyclates and guarantees for recycled content SECONDARY MATERIAL PUBLIC PROCUREMENT PRODUCTION To create demand pull in nascent markets

REGULATION OF ADDITIVES MARKET FOR DEMAND PULL Limiting toxic substances (current) and use RECYCLED Quotas to create demand of additives inimical to recycling (future) MATERIAL pull for nascent markets

EAMPLES OF POLICIES ALL WOULD NEED CAREFUL EVALUATION

REMAINING EMISSIONS 2050 Mt CO 2 REBOUND 117 Recycled plastics of lower quality do not replace the same volume of virgin plastics and may lead to an increased demand of total plastics 11 PRODUCTION FOR STOCK BUILD Around 10% of demand results in net stock EHIBIT 313 build-up, requiring additional primary production 22 REUSE AND RECYCLING EMISSIONS 117 80% from yield losses in chemical recycling, the remainder from mechanical recycling 14

YIELD LOSSES Yield losses in pre-treatment, recycling and reuse process sent to energy recovery Process improvements as well as product design and choice of material important to maximize yields 42 AGED, DEGRADED, CONTAMINATED AND NOT COLLECTED COMMON PLASTICS Relatively small given option of chemical recycling Remaining share is aged, contaminated, or not captured by collection systems THERMOSETS AND SMALL VOLUME SPECIALTY PLASTICS 16 Challenging to achieve scale in small specialty plastics streams 12 EMISSIONS FROM PLASTICS WITHIN THE EU Mt CO2 PER YEAR 24

90

76% EHIBIT 33 34

233

132

2017 DEMAND GROWTH INCREASED EMISSIONS IMPROVED PRODUCTION 2050 AT END OF LIFE

WITH CURRENT DEVELOPMENT, CO2 EMISSIONS FROM RECYCLING OFFERS ONE OF THE FEW WAYS TO EHIBIT 32 PLASTICS WOULD BE 40% OF 2050 TARGET REDUCE EMISSIONS

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM PLASTIC, 2017 AND 2050, AS CO2 INTENSITY OF VIRGIN AND RECYCLED MATERIAL TONNE or ton SHARE OF EMISSION TARGET TONNE CO2 PER TONNE PLASTIC Mt CO2 PER YEAR

2017 2050 BORTTAGEN4 000 51 ENERGY RECOVERY 27 500

98% 92% 60%

200 25 PRODUCTION 77 04

CURRENT EMISSIONS EMISSION EMISSIONS PRODUCTION RECYCLING TOTAL FROM TARGET FROM OF NEW PLASTIC EMISSIONS PLASTICS PLASTICS ENERGY RECOVERY

CUMULATIVE EMISSIONS TO 2100 EHIBIT 33 Gt CO2, GLOBAL, 2015-2100

PROECTED CO2 EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS CARBON BUDGET TO 2100

914 ALUMINIUM 66 800 BORTTAGENCEMENT 254

STEEL 307 300

PLASTICS 288

BAT ASSUMING CURRENT 2 CARBON BUDGET FOR CARBON BUDGET EU LEVEL CONSUMPTION INDUSTRY AND ENERGY AVAILABLE FOR GLOBALLY MATERIALS

Share of European plastics demand (49Mt) EHIBIT 35 %, 2015

60% OF PLASTICS DEMAND

PACKAGING BUILDING AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS OTHERS CONSTRUCTION

PE POLYETHEN

PP POLYPROPHEN

PS POLYSTYRENE INCL EPS FOAM

PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE

PET POLYETHYLENE TEREPHTHALATE

OTHER PLASTICS

40% 20% 9% 6% 26%

PLASTIC VOLUMES IN EUROPE, 2015 Mt PER YEAR EHIBIT 36 Export in products Stock build-up Misclassi ed waste Etc 9

19

58 4 90% 49 10 30 26 7 4 9 5 PLASTICS NET DEMAND USE BALANCE END OF LIFE UNSORTED COLLECTED LANDFILL ENERGY COLLECTED PROCESS RECYCLING PRODUCTION EPORT AND STOCK PLASTICS PLASTICS IN PLASTIC RECOVERY FOR LOSSES IN BUILDUP HOUSHOLD WASTE RECYCLING RECYCLING WASTE

FROM TO EHIBIT 37 Policy-driven system based on waste Self-sustaining system, driven by value of secondary 1 management; revenues do not cover costs materials (with regulation of externalities)

Focus on increasing collection volumes – Focus on secondary material production and ability to 2 similar to other ‘waste’ flows replace virgin material one-to-one Ludde gör denna 3 Onus on recycling industries to handle deeply Transformation through policy-driven coordination to enable direkt i InDesign? suboptimal flows in largely unchanged system simultaneous change across value chain 4 Product design does not bear costs for Materials and design choices account for recyclability, downstream externalities and costs recycled content and disassembly 5 Incentives focused on supply into recycling Demand-side incentives create market certainty and process stimulate investment in capacity 6 Recycling rooted in local, small-scale waste Large-scale and regional raw materials industry, with handling, with patchy coverage harmonized systems, specialisation, and product standards

7 Design and end-of-life treatment without focus Products designed and dismantled to retain secondary on retaining material value material value

Virgin plastics carry cost for embodied carbon (other Virgin plastics do not carry cost of externalities 8 externalities likely via regulation)

PLASTIC PRODUCTION EMISSIONS Mt CO2, EUROPE, 2050 EHIBIT 38 233

116

Rdditional recycling Substitution with other materials Renewable energy in production Biobased or CO2 feedstock 117 Process innovation

2050 WITH 100% CIRCULAR ABATEMENT REMAINING RENEWABLE RENEWABLE ENERGY RECOVERY POTENTIAL 2050 EMISSIONS ENERGY REDUCTION 2050 EMISSIONS

TOTAL

28% WHAT TAKES TO GET THERE NOT COLLECTED STOCK 47% 85% of 5 most common plastics collected for 1% recycling with signi cant yield increases (90% yield) Shift from land ll to energy recovery for non-recycled 17% Reduced stock build-up and increased collection for EHIBIT 39 recycling Reuse of: 12% 8% of packaging, especially industrial 20% Ludde xar LANDFILL 3% of B&C plastics, esp. PVC carpets, pipes etc. Minimum text 7 pt. 4% of large automotive parts

15% ENERGY RECOVERY 37%

YIELD LOSSES 8% RECYCLED 10% REUSE 0% 4% 2017 2050

PACKAGING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION AUTOMOTIVE

5% 11% NOT COLLECTED 21% 2% STOCK 18% 16% 2% 2% 47% 15% 17% 32% LANDFILL 25% 76% 12%

ENERGY RECOVERY 22% 18% 53% 30% 47% YIELD LOSSES 13% 8% 5% 32% 9% RECYCLED 19% 11% 3% REUSE 0% 10% 0% 5% 4% 0% 6% 4% 2017 2050 2017 2050 2017 2050

REMAINING EMISSIONS 2050 Mt CO EHIBIT 313 2

REBOUND 117 Recycled plastics of lower quality do not replace the same volume of virgin plastics and may lead PRODUCTION FOR STOCK BUILD to an increased demand of total plastics 11 Around 10% of demand results in net stock build-up, requiring additional primary production 22 REUSE AND RECYCLING EMISSIONS 80% from yield losses in chemical recycling, the YIELD LOSSES remainder from mechanical recycling Yield losses in pre-treatment, recycling and 14 reuse process sent to energy recovery Process improvements as well as product design and choice of material important to maximize yields

42 AGED, DEGRADED, CONTAMINATED AND NOT COLLECTED COMMON PLASTICS Relatively small given option of chemical recycling THERMOSETS AND SMALL VOLUME Remaining share is aged, contaminated, or not captured by collection systems SPECIALTY PLASTICS 16 Challenging to achieve scale in small specialty plastics streams 12

VALUE EUR/ton

EHIBIT 310 1700 EUR ORIGINAL MATERIAL VALUE, 50B EUR

ton, ore TONNE 1000 EUR

VOLUME tonnes TODAY 55% COLLECTION CIRCULAR SYSTEM 90% value loss >80% of value still lost, 50% of value retained “30% collection” Large process losses in recycling Higher recycling yields increase but just 16% Uphill struggle to increase of volume recycling volume further – at a net cost High value retention provides Rebound eects as downgraded revenue for investment in self- plastics cannot replace virgin sustaining systems and scaling plastics in many uses Recycling can replace virgin production

EHIBIT 310

REDUCED RECYCLING COSTS HIGHER REVENUES EUR / TON TREATED PLASTICS EUR / TON TREATED PLASTICS

924 926

16% COLLECTION 186 774 71% 119 SORTING 191 147 PACKAGING EXAMPLE 540 LOGISTICS 15 10

337 RECYCLING 439

162 INVESTMENT 93 REVENUES

2017 2050 2017 2050

Cleaner ows from materials choices and Increased yields give larger revenues per tonne product design optimised for recycling treated plastic (better technology, cleaner inows) Increased scale reduces unit cost Higher quality enables pricing closer to virgin Specialisation and regional integration of markets materials (additional sorting, improved technology, Technological improvement boosts eciency but cleaner ows and optimised products) requires higher investment Raised cost of virgin materials improves Reduced risk from regulations and market willingness to pay for secondary products uncertainty Better functioning markets reduce current commercial risk to buyers

DEEP TRANSFORMATION THAT REUIRES COORDINATED AND SUSTAINED ACTION ACROSS VALUE CHAIN

EMISSIONS SAVINGS Mt CO2 / YEAR

EHIBIT 312 80

EEE Low quality increased recycling 303 Automotive Low quality increased recycling 144 Agriculture Low quality increased recycling 97 70

NEED UPDATE Packaging Low quality increased recycling 40

60 Har lite svårt att förstå den här grafen. Handlar det om att tydliggöra inom vilka Other plastics Low quality increased recycling 21 områden man kan minska REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE CO2 utsläppen med minsta 50 kostnaden. dvs dom 4 områden som ligger mellan B&C Low quality increased recycling 66 ~29 - 72 Mt CO2 ? Hur kan Abatement of recycling; creating more specialised but also regional- Achieving this transformation holds the promise of an (reducerings- ?) cost vara ly integrated recycling; adopting new technologies; and industry driven by the intrinsic value of plastics. From a 40 negativ. vad innebär det. reducing risks due to regulations and market uncertainty. climate perspective, adopting those measures could also At thePackaging same Hightime, quality revenues increased recycling can be 96 increased by as much make the difference between plastics recycling being a as 71%, through increased yields, which give higher re- costly abatement option, or an economically attractive venues per tonne of treated plastic (better technology, one. Today, recycling is expensive seen from a pure CO2 cleanerAgriculture inflows); High quality increased higher recycling quality, 115 which enables pricing30 perspective (although it can have other benefits). With the closerEEE High to qualityvirgin increased materials recycling (an138 average of 70% of virgin transformation described above, this changes by 2050. prices in our scenario); higher costs for virgin materials, Exhibit 3.11 shows a particularly striking example, with whichB&C Highimprove quality increased buyers’ recycling willingness 138 to pay for recycled ma- today’s high abatement cost for packaging. By 2050, the terials; and better-functioning markets that reduce current net CO2 abatement per tonne of recycled plastic goes up 20 Automotivecommercial High quality increasedrisk to recyclingbuyers, 149 thus incentivising the use of (for the reasons described in section 3.2), while the net secondary plastics and investments in recycling capacity cost of recycling pivots to a net benefit. The abatement and innovation. cost is therefore negative, meaning that the transformed Other plastics High quality increased recycling 170 recycling system can not only cut CO2, but also create a Alongside all of these, strong technology development10 net financial gain. provides aPackaging significant Reuse 179boost. Recycling is strongly synergis- tic with digitalisation, which is rapidly reducing the cost of These cost estimates need careful interpretation. First, EEE Reuse 192 marking ofB&C different Reuse 202 materials and products, use of sensor the negative cost does not mean that large profits will accrue technology,Automotive and Reuse automation 203 of dismantling and sorting – to recycling industries. Rather, the benefit will be distributed all of which will be fundamental200 150 to 100achieve50 more cost-ef0 50- across100 the150 value200 chain,250 including300 through changed prices fective plastics recycling. This requires increased capex, for end-of-life plastics and for secondary plastics. Second, but this is more than offset by the higher revenuesABATEMENT availa COST- achieving this cost depends on the full transformation descri- ble from higher-quality outputs. EUR/t CO2 bed above. It is not something one actor can create on its own.

Exhibit 3.11 EHIBIT 311 Reducing abatement cost requires higher net abatement, improved yields and higher quality

ABATEMENT COST PACKAGING EAMPLE EUR PER TON ABATED CO2

257

43 68 101

2017 COST INCREASED ABATEMENT PER REDUCED COST OF RECYCLING, INCREASED REVENUES FROM TONNE OF PLASTIC RECYCLED ESPECIALLY THROUGH HIGHERUALITY SECONDARY INCREASED YIELDS MATERIALS

SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS ANALYSIS AS DESCRIBED IN TEXT

89

EHIBIT 314 CURRENT POLICIES COVER ONLY PARTS OF THE RANGE OF BARRIERS TO HIGH-VALUE PLASTICS RECYCLING

CURRENT POLICY FOCUS NO LITTLE POLICY FOCUS TODAY PARTIAL POLICY COVER TODAY

FEES Correct for externalities for primary production of plastics RAW MATERIAL PRODUCT DESIGN Regulation and fees to correct PRODUCER RESPONSIBILITY for externalities on secondary Dierentiation to reect downstream materials FRGPALETT impacts on recyclability PRODUCT COLLECTION TARGETS Are the main denominator of LANDFILL ENERGY current policies RECOVERY TA FEE To boost value of recycling COLLECTION

PRODUCT DISPOSAL Reward practices conducive to ENDOFLIFE high value recycling TREATMENT

STANDARDISATION Quality standards for recyclates and guarantees for recycled content SECONDARY MATERIAL PUBLIC PROCUREMENT PRODUCTION To create demand pull in nascent markets

REGULATION OF ADDITIVES MARKET FOR DEMAND PULL Limiting toxic substances (current) and use RECYCLED Quotas to create demand of additives inimical to recycling (future) MATERIAL pull for nascent markets

EAMPLES OF POLICIES ALL WOULD NEED CAREFUL EVALUATION

REMAINING EMISSIONS 2050 Mt CO 2 REBOUND 117 Recycled plastics of lower quality do not replace the same volume of virgin plastics and may lead to an increased demand of total plastics 11 PRODUCTION FOR STOCK BUILD Around 10% of demand results in net stock EHIBIT 313 build-up, requiring additional primary production 22 REUSE AND RECYCLING EMISSIONS 117 80% from yield losses in chemical recycling, the remainder from mechanical recycling 14

YIELD LOSSES Yield losses in pre-treatment, recycling and reuse process sent to energy recovery Process improvements as well as product design and choice of material important to maximize yields 42 AGED, DEGRADED, CONTAMINATED AND NOT COLLECTED COMMON PLASTICS Relatively small given option of chemical recycling Remaining share is aged, contaminated, or not captured by collection systems THERMOSETS AND SMALL VOLUME SPECIALTY PLASTICS 16 Challenging to achieve scale in small specialty plastics streams 12 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Performing the above analysis for all segments and for different qualities of plastics flows, it is possible to cre- ate a cost curve for CO2 reductions through plastics re- cycling (Exhibit 3.12). The horizontal axis shows the total abatement potential, which sums to the 116 Mt CO2 per year, described above. The costs are estimated similarly to that described for the packaging example described above. There are of course many uncertainties in project technology developments, the feasible quality of secon- dary plastics, and other factors leading to 2050. Also, although we have attempted to account for the increased cost of adapting products for recycling, the actual cost will not be known until incentives to do so are created. As with other areas where incentives have been lacking to date, there is likely to be significant low-hanging fru- it, but there will also be instances where adapting for recyclability would create significant compromises with function, or impose costs. For all these reasons, these costs are exploratory and indicative. Nonetheless, the analysis shows that plastics recycling can not only be a substantial abatement opportunity in terms of volume, but also has the potential to be economically attractive compared to much else that needs to happen to put the EU on a low-carbon pathway.

90 ABATEMENT POTENTIAL AND COST FOR CIRCULAR ECONOMY LEVERS, 2050 Mt CO2 PER YEAR; EUR PER TONNE CO2 ABATED

ABATEMENT COST EXHIBIT 1.13 EUR / t CO2

Cars - Sharing Cars - Prolong lifetime Cars - Remanufacturing Buildings - Floor space sharing Other - Sharing and lifetime 100 Plastics - Higher quality recycling New cost curve Buildings - Reduced waste in construction 2018-05-29 Plastics - Reuse Steel - Reduce copper 50 Aluminium - increase collection

50 100 0 EMISSIONS REVIEW DRAFT150 – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE200 250 300 SAVINGS Mt CO2 / YEAR

Cars - Lightweighting -50 Buildings - Materials efficiency Cement - Cement recycling Exhibit 3.12 Steel - Reduce fabrication losses -100 Plastics - Chemical recycling With changes throughout the value chain, recyclingBuildings - Reuse could be Other - Materials efficiency a highly cost-effective form of PlasticsCO2 - Increased abatement recycling at current quality by 2050 Aluminium - avoid downgrading Steel - Increase collection

PLASTIC COST CURVE 2050 POTENTIAL EUR PER ABATED TONNE CO2, EUROPE, 2050

EXHIBIT 3.12 ABATEMENT COST EUR / t CO2

Agriculture Reuse B&C Reuse Other plastics High quality increased recycling B&C High quality increased recycling B&C Low quality increased recycling New cost curve Automotive High quality increased recycling 2018-05-29 EEE High quality increased recycling Other plastics Reuse 100 100 Agriculture High quality increased recycling Packaging High quality increased recycling Automotive Reuse 55 57 50 43 35 23

10 20 30 40 0 50 EMISSIONS -3 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 SAVINGS Mt CO2 / YEAR -26 EEE Low quality -50 increased recycling -53 -49 -59 Automotive Low -62 -70 quality increased recycling -100 -93 -100 -100 Agriculture Low quality increased recycling Packaging Resuse Chemical recycling Packaging Low quality increased recycling EEE Reuse Other plastics Low quality increased recycling

SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS ANALYSIS

91 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Complementing strategies to further reduce emissions

Even ambitious recycling as described above would leave To further reduce emissions, a combination of additio- half of emissions in place. These arise from a variety of sour- nal strategies will be necessary: ces, which also suggest ways to reduce them (Exhibit 3.13). • Substitution with other materials. The scenario here is based on continued growth in plastics use. However, Even with ambitious mechanical and chemical re- there are other options, including substituting to other cycling, a small share of plastics will be difficult to collect materials that either can be more easily recycled, or ones and treat. There are also substantial yield losses from that are based on bio-feedstock. plastics that are collected for recycling, but which do not become secondary materials. In both cases, primary • Use of renewable energy in production. As noted plastics must be produced to replace the material lost. above, adding external renewable energy to the plastics In addition, the recycling processes also result in some production process can reduce emissions to some de- CO2. Both losses and direct CO2 emissions are parti- gree. With further process innovation, it is possible that cularly large for chemical recycling, and an innovation even more of the production emissions could be abated. priority therefore must be to find more effective proces- As noted, however, this does not address the fossil car- ses with a higher yield, including by introducing external, bon in the feedstock. renewable energy to generate the heat necessary. • Non-fossil feedstock. Replacing fossil fuels with other feedstocks could address a large share of There are also emissions from the production of pri- both production and embedded emissions. Bio-ba- mary plastics required to add to the total stock of plas- sed feedstocks have been mooted as one alternative, tics in the economy. How much will be required is very although the volumes of biomass required would be uncertain – it is possible that the total stock will saturate, large. Another option would be to use either CO2 or removing much of these emissions. Finally, we have al- carbon-monoxide as feedstock. However, these would lowed for some rebound effects: an increase in plastics have to come from non-fossil sources if total emissions consumption due to the increased supply of some relative- are to be brought to net-zero. Using such routes also ly lower-quality recycled materials. This can be reduced by would have large resource requirements, especially for improving quality further, or if the amount of lower-quality renewable electricity. plastics could be absorbed by existing demand pools.

92 EMISSIONS FROM PLASTICS WITHIN THE EU Mt CO2 PER YEAR 24

90

76% EHIBIT 33 34

233

132

2017 DEMAND GROWTH INCREASED EMISSIONS IMPROVED PRODUCTION 2050 AT END OF LIFE

WITH CURRENT DEVELOPMENT, CO2 EMISSIONS FROM RECYCLING OFFERS ONE OF THE FEW WAYS TO EHIBIT 32 PLASTICS WOULD BE 40% OF 2050 TARGET REDUCE EMISSIONS

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM PLASTIC, 2017 AND 2050, AS CO2 INTENSITY OF VIRGIN AND RECYCLED MATERIAL TONNE or ton SHARE OF EMISSION TARGET TONNE CO2 PER TONNE PLASTIC Mt CO2 PER YEAR

2017 2050 BORTTAGEN4 000 51 ENERGY RECOVERY 27 500

98% 92% 60%

200 25 PRODUCTION 77 04

CURRENT EMISSIONS EMISSION EMISSIONS PRODUCTION RECYCLING TOTAL FROM TARGET FROM OF NEW PLASTIC EMISSIONS PLASTICS PLASTICS ENERGY RECOVERY

CUMULATIVE EMISSIONS TO 2100 EHIBIT 33 Gt CO2, GLOBAL, 2015-2100

PROECTED CO2 EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS CARBON BUDGET TO 2100

914 ALUMINIUM 66 800 BORTTAGENCEMENT 254

STEEL 307 300

PLASTICS 288

BAT ASSUMING CURRENT 2 CARBON BUDGET FOR CARBON BUDGET EU LEVEL CONSUMPTION INDUSTRY AND ENERGY AVAILABLE FOR GLOBALLY MATERIALS

Share of European plastics demand (49Mt) EHIBIT 35 %, 2015

60% OF PLASTICS DEMAND

PACKAGING BUILDING AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS OTHERS CONSTRUCTION

PE POLYETHEN

PP POLYPROPHEN

PS POLYSTYRENE INCL EPS FOAM

PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE

PET POLYETHYLENE TEREPHTHALATE

OTHER PLASTICS

40% 20% 9% 6% 26%

PLASTIC VOLUMES IN EUROPE, 2015 Mt PER YEAR EHIBIT 36 Export in products Stock build-up Misclassi ed waste Etc 9

19

58 4 90% 49 10 30 26 7 4 9 5 PLASTICS NET DEMAND USE BALANCE END OF LIFE UNSORTED COLLECTED LANDFILL ENERGY COLLECTED PROCESS RECYCLING PRODUCTION EPORT AND STOCK PLASTICS PLASTICS IN PLASTIC RECOVERY FOR LOSSES IN BUILDUP HOUSHOLD WASTE RECYCLING RECYCLING WASTE

FROM TO EHIBIT 37 Policy-driven system based on waste Self-sustaining system, driven by value of secondary 1 management; revenues do not cover costs materials (with regulation of externalities)

Focus on increasing collection volumes – Focus on secondary material production and ability to 2 similar to other ‘waste’ flows replace virgin material one-to-one Ludde gör denna 3 Onus on recycling industries to handle deeply Transformation through policy-driven coordination to enable direkt i InDesign? suboptimal flows in largely unchanged system simultaneous change across value chain 4 Product design does not bear costs for Materials and design choices account for recyclability, downstream externalities and costs recycled content and disassembly 5 Incentives focused on supply into recycling Demand-side incentives create market certainty and process stimulate investment in capacity 6 Recycling rooted in local, small-scale waste Large-scale and regional raw materials industry, with handling, with patchy coverage harmonized systems, specialisation, and product standards

7 Design and end-of-life treatment without focus Products designed and dismantled to retain secondary on retaining material value material value

Virgin plastics carry cost for embodied carbon (other Virgin plastics do not carry cost of externalities 8 externalities likely via regulation)

PLASTIC PRODUCTION EMISSIONS Mt CO2, EUROPE, 2050 EHIBIT 38 233

116

Rdditional recycling Substitution with other materials Renewable energy in production Biobased or CO2 feedstock 117 Process innovation

2050 WITH 100% CIRCULAR ABATEMENT REMAINING RENEWABLE RENEWABLE ENERGY RECOVERY POTENTIAL 2050 EMISSIONS ENERGY REDUCTION 2050 EMISSIONS

TOTAL

28% WHAT TAKES TO GET THERE NOT COLLECTED STOCK 47% 85% of 5 most common plastics collected for 1% recycling with signi cant yield increases (90% yield) Shift from land ll to energy recovery for non-recycled 17% Reduced stock build-up and increased collection for EHIBIT 39 recycling Reuse of: 12% 8% of packaging, especially industrial 20% Ludde xar LANDFILL 3% of B&C plastics, esp. PVC carpets, pipes etc. Minimum text 7 pt. 4% of large automotive parts

15% ENERGY RECOVERY 37%

YIELD LOSSES 8% RECYCLED 10% REUSE 0% 4% 2017 2050

PACKAGING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION AUTOMOTIVE

5% 11% NOT COLLECTED 21% 2% STOCK 18% 16% 2% 2% 47% 15% 17% 32% LANDFILL 25% 76% 12%

ENERGY RECOVERY 22% 18% 53% 30% 47% YIELD LOSSES 13% 8% 5% 32% 9% RECYCLED 19% 11% 3% REUSE 0% 10% 0% 5% 4% 0% 6% 4% 2017 2050 2017 2050 2017 2050

REMAINING EMISSIONS 2050 Mt CO EHIBIT 313 2

REBOUND 117 Recycled plastics of lower quality do not replace the same volume of virgin plastics and may lead PRODUCTION FOR STOCK BUILD to an increased demand of total plastics 11 Around 10% of demand results in net stock build-up, requiring additional primary production 22 REUSE AND RECYCLING EMISSIONS 80% from yield losses in chemical recycling, the YIELD LOSSES remainder from mechanical recycling Yield losses in pre-treatment, recycling and 14 reuse process sent to energy recovery Process improvements as well as product design and choice of material important to maximize yields

42 AGED, DEGRADED, CONTAMINATED AND NOT COLLECTED COMMON PLASTICS Relatively small given option of chemical recycling THERMOSETS AND SMALL VOLUME Remaining share is aged, contaminated, or not captured by collection systems SPECIALTY PLASTICS 16 Challenging to achieve scale in small specialty plastics streams 12

VALUE EUR/ton

EHIBIT 310 1700 EUR ORIGINAL MATERIAL VALUE, 50B EUR

ton, ore TONNE 1000 EUR

VOLUME tonnes TODAY 55% COLLECTION CIRCULAR SYSTEM 90% value loss >80% of value still lost, 50% of value retained “30% collection” Large process losses in recycling Higher recycling yields increase but just 16% Uphill struggle to increase of volume recycling volume further – at a net cost High value retention provides Rebound eects as downgraded revenue for investment in self- plastics cannot replace virgin sustaining systems and scaling plastics in many uses Recycling can replace virgin production

EHIBIT 310

REDUCED RECYCLING COSTS HIGHER REVENUES EUR / TON TREATED PLASTICS EUR / TON TREATED PLASTICS

924 926

16% COLLECTION 186 774 71% 119 SORTING 191 147 PACKAGING EXAMPLE 540 LOGISTICS 15 10

337 RECYCLING 439

162 INVESTMENT 93 REVENUES

2017 2050 2017 2050

Cleaner ows from materials choices and Increased yields give larger revenues per tonne product design optimised for recycling treated plastic (better technology, cleaner inows) Increased scale reduces unit cost Higher quality enables pricing closer to virgin Specialisation and regional integration of markets materials (additional sorting, improved technology, Technological improvement boosts eciency but cleaner ows and optimised products) requires higher investment Raised cost of virgin materials improves Reduced risk from regulations and market willingness to pay for secondary products uncertainty Better functioning markets reduce current commercial risk to buyers

DEEP TRANSFORMATION THAT REUIRES COORDINATED AND SUSTAINED ACTION ACROSS VALUE CHAIN

EMISSIONS SAVINGS Mt CO2 / YEAR

EHIBIT 312 80

EEE Low quality increased recycling 303 Automotive Low quality increased recycling 144 Agriculture Low quality increased recycling 97 70

NEED UPDATE Packaging Low quality increased recycling 40

60 Har lite svårt att förstå den här grafen. Handlar det om att tydliggöra inom vilka Other plastics Low quality increased recycling 21 områden man kan minska CO2 utsläppen med minsta 50 kostnaden. dvs dom 4 områden som ligger mellan B&C Low quality increased recycling 66 ~29 - 72 Mt CO2 ? Hur kan Abatement (reducerings- ?) cost vara negativ. vad innebär det. 40 Packaging High quality increased recycling 96

Agriculture High quality increased recycling 115 30 EEE High quality increased recycling 138

B&C High quality increased recycling 138

20 Automotive High quality increased recycling 149

Other plastics High quality increased recycling 170

10

Packaging Reuse 179

EEE Reuse 192 B&C Reuse 202 Automotive Reuse 203 200 150 100 50 0 50 100 150 200 250 300

ABATEMENT COST EUR/t CO2

EHIBIT 311

ABATEMENT COST PACKAGING EAMPLE EUR PER TON ABATED CO2

257

43 68 101

2017 COST INCREASED ABATEMENT PER REDUCED COST OF RECYCLING, INCREASED REVENUES FROM TONNE OF PLASTIC RECYCLED ESPECIALLY THROUGH HIGHERUALITY SECONDARY INCREASED YIELDS MATERIALS

EHIBIT 314 CURRENT POLICIES COVER ONLY PARTS OF THE RANGE OF BARRIERS TO HIGH-VALUE PLASTICS RECYCLING

CURRENT POLICY FOCUS NO LITTLE POLICY FOCUS TODAY PARTIAL POLICY COVER TODAY

FEES Correct for externalities for primary production of plastics RAW MATERIAL PRODUCT DESIGN Regulation and fees to correct PRODUCER RESPONSIBILITY for externalities on secondary Dierentiation to reect downstream materials FRGPALETT impacts on recyclability PRODUCT COLLECTION TARGETS Are the main denominator of LANDFILL ENERGY current policies RECOVERY TA FEE To boost value of recycling COLLECTION

PRODUCT DISPOSAL REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTEReward practices conducive to ENDOFLIFE high value recycling TREATMENT

STANDARDISATION Quality standards for recyclates and guarantees for recycled content SECONDARY MATERIAL PUBLIC PROCUREMENT ExhibitPRODUCTION 3.13 To create demand pull in nascent markets Deeper transformation and innovation is required REGULATION OF ADDITIVES MARKET FOR DEMAND PULL Limitingto toxicreduce substances (current) the and remaining use RECYCLED 65% of emissionsQuotas to create demand of additives inimical to recycling (future) MATERIAL pull for nascent markets

EAMPLES OF POLICIES ALL WOULD NEED CAREFUL EVALUATION

REMAINING EMISSIONS 2050 Mt CO 2 REBOUND 117 Recycled plastics of lower quality do not replace the same volume of virgin plastics and may lead to an increased demand of total plastics 11 PRODUCTION FOR STOCK BUILD Around 10% of demand results in net stock EHIBIT 313 build-up, requiring additional primary production 22 REUSE AND RECYCLING EMISSIONS 117 80% from yield losses in chemical recycling, the remainder from mechanical recycling 14

YIELD LOSSES Yield losses in pre-treatment, recycling and reuse process sent to energy recovery Process improvements as well as product design and choice of material important to maximize yields 42 AGED, DEGRADED, CONTAMINATED AND NOT COLLECTED COMMON PLASTICS Relatively small given option of chemical recycling Remaining share is aged, contaminated, or not captured by collection systems THERMOSETS AND SMALL VOLUME SPECIALTY PLASTICS 16 Challenging to achieve scale in small specialty plastics streams 12

SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS MODELLING

93 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

HOW TO GET THERE – MEASURES TO PROMOTE PLASTICS RECYCLING

As noted above, current policies are focused mainly there is significant latent demand from companies that on waste management, with increasing pressure on re- increasingly seek to use secondary materials, but with cyclers to maximise collection volumes. The recent EU undeveloped markets, this cannot support the necessa- Plastics Strategy sought to complement this, including ry investment in recycling infrastructure. The ‘pledging’ to introduce measures in other parts in the value chain. mechanism in the Plastics Strategy sought to address this. If policy-makers discover that more far-reaching in- We propose that the bedrock of a future sustainable tervention is warranted, options to evaluate could include plastics system – and secondary plastics industry – must quotas for recycled plastics in selected product categories, be to enable high value of secondary plastics. Exhibit financial instruments linked to the use of secondary ma- 3.14 illustrates examples of policy areas that could sup- terials, and market creation through public procurement. port or accelerate a transition. The full change described above will take time – possibly measured in decades – so Fourth, systems and practices for hand- it is important to start on this path as soon as possible. ling end-of-life products need to be revisited to account for their impact on high-value recycling. Today’s collec- This report has not evaluated individual policy propo- tion systems are fragmented, with patchy coverage of sals, and is in no position to make specific proposals for plastics streams and end-use segments. Much of infra- policies. However, a number of high-level principles can structure is optimised to meet policy targets that are not guide policy-makers as they approach this area. necessarily conducive to actual production of high-qua- lity secondary materials. Another area to investigate are First, changes must occur simultaneously across the the practices for dismantling end-of-life products, notably entire value chain: primary production, product design, the demolition of buildings and shredding and mixing of recycling infrastructure and business models, the market materials from end-of-life vehicles. for secondary plastic, and legacy waste handling regu- lations and systems. One route to this could be further Fifth, waste regulations may also need updating. Lar- industry integration, perhaps of primary and secondary ge-scale use of secondary plastics requires that markets materials production. However, it is also possible that a operate at a scale and to the standards of global value range of barriers – rooted in the economics of incom- chains for raw materials. By contrast, current regulations plete contracts and transaction costs – will continue to often treat recycling as an off-shoot of local, small-scale prevent market actors from achieving this outcome. If so, waste handling. Key issues to consider include restric- policy will have an important coordinating role. tions on trade across borders, lack of clarity about ow- nership and access to plastics flows, and the resulting Second, a starting point for policy must be to analyse investment uncertainty. As with other policy areas, chang- and correct for current externalities. One of these is the es would need to be evaluated for their impact on other lack of a price on emitting CO2, to reflect either the so- objectives, notably that of ensuring safe waste handling. cial cost of carbon, or the prices that will eventually be required across the economy to reach climate targets. Finally, governments need to kick-start innovation. Re- More broadly, low taxes on resources and pollution relati- cycling is undergoing a quiet technology revolution. Tech- ve to those on the inputs to recycling (notably, labour and nology is already improving fast, with recent plants sig- transport fuels) reduce incentives for recycling. A second nificantly more capable than ones available only a few is to recognise and address the heavy externalities that years ago. Digitisation is a major force to harness, with product design choices impose on recycling. This is a applications across marking, remote sensors, real-term new agenda, and there is an urgent need to evaluate tracking, and automation. In parallel, there is a need for the costs and benefits of different options to address it materials development, notably to find long-term solu- – whether the gradual introduction of product regulation, tions for plastics that are hard to recycle, such as engine- voluntary agreements, standards, industry design proto- ering plastics and thermosets. Policy can support these cols, financial incentives, or in other ways. agendas both through fundamental research, develop- ment, and demonstration, and by supporting new tech- Third, policy-makers need to consider the nature of bar- nology deployment – analogous to the approach taken riers to demand for secondary plastics. Engagements to renewable energy technologies or other long-term key with a range of companies for this study suggest that solutions to climate mitigation.

94 EMISSIONS FROM PLASTICS WITHIN THE EU Mt CO2 PER YEAR 24

90

76% EHIBIT 33 34

233

132

2017 DEMAND GROWTH INCREASED EMISSIONS IMPROVED PRODUCTION 2050 AT END OF LIFE

WITH CURRENT DEVELOPMENT, CO2 EMISSIONS FROM RECYCLING OFFERS ONE OF THE FEW WAYS TO EHIBIT 32 PLASTICS WOULD BE 40% OF 2050 TARGET REDUCE EMISSIONS

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM PLASTIC, 2017 AND 2050, AS CO2 INTENSITY OF VIRGIN AND RECYCLED MATERIAL TONNE or ton SHARE OF EMISSION TARGET TONNE CO2 PER TONNE PLASTIC Mt CO2 PER YEAR

2017 2050 BORTTAGEN4 000 51 ENERGY RECOVERY 27 500

98% 92% 60%

200 25 PRODUCTION 77 04

CURRENT EMISSIONS EMISSION EMISSIONS PRODUCTION RECYCLING TOTAL FROM TARGET FROM OF NEW PLASTIC EMISSIONS PLASTICS PLASTICS ENERGY RECOVERY

CUMULATIVE EMISSIONS TO 2100 EHIBIT 33 Gt CO2, GLOBAL, 2015-2100

PROECTED CO2 EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS CARBON BUDGET TO 2100

914 ALUMINIUM 66 800 BORTTAGENCEMENT 254

STEEL 307 300

PLASTICS 288

BAT ASSUMING CURRENT 2 CARBON BUDGET FOR CARBON BUDGET EU LEVEL CONSUMPTION INDUSTRY AND ENERGY AVAILABLE FOR GLOBALLY MATERIALS

Share of European plastics demand (49Mt) EHIBIT 35 %, 2015

60% OF PLASTICS DEMAND

PACKAGING BUILDING AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS OTHERS CONSTRUCTION

PE POLYETHEN

PP POLYPROPHEN

PS POLYSTYRENE INCL EPS FOAM

PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE

PET POLYETHYLENE TEREPHTHALATE

OTHER PLASTICS

40% 20% 9% 6% 26%

PLASTIC VOLUMES IN EUROPE, 2015 Mt PER YEAR EHIBIT 36 Export in products Stock build-up Misclassi ed waste Etc 9

19

58 4 90% 49 10 30 26 7 4 9 5 PLASTICS NET DEMAND USE BALANCE END OF LIFE UNSORTED COLLECTED LANDFILL ENERGY COLLECTED PROCESS RECYCLING PRODUCTION EPORT AND STOCK PLASTICS PLASTICS IN PLASTIC RECOVERY FOR LOSSES IN BUILDUP HOUSHOLD WASTE RECYCLING RECYCLING WASTE

FROM TO EHIBIT 37 Policy-driven system based on waste Self-sustaining system, driven by value of secondary 1 management; revenues do not cover costs materials (with regulation of externalities)

Focus on increasing collection volumes – Focus on secondary material production and ability to 2 similar to other ‘waste’ flows replace virgin material one-to-one Ludde gör denna 3 Onus on recycling industries to handle deeply Transformation through policy-driven coordination to enable direkt i InDesign? suboptimal flows in largely unchanged system simultaneous change across value chain 4 Product design does not bear costs for Materials and design choices account for recyclability, downstream externalities and costs recycled content and disassembly 5 Incentives focused on supply into recycling Demand-side incentives create market certainty and process stimulate investment in capacity 6 Recycling rooted in local, small-scale waste Large-scale and regional raw materials industry, with handling, with patchy coverage harmonized systems, specialisation, and product standards

7 Design and end-of-life treatment without focus Products designed and dismantled to retain secondary on retaining material value material value

Virgin plastics carry cost for embodied carbon (other Virgin plastics do not carry cost of externalities 8 externalities likely via regulation)

PLASTIC PRODUCTION EMISSIONS Mt CO2, EUROPE, 2050 EHIBIT 38 233

116

Rdditional recycling Substitution with other materials Renewable energy in production Biobased or CO2 feedstock 117 Process innovation

2050 WITH 100% CIRCULAR ABATEMENT REMAINING RENEWABLE RENEWABLE ENERGY RECOVERY POTENTIAL 2050 EMISSIONS ENERGY REDUCTION 2050 EMISSIONS

TOTAL

28% WHAT TAKES TO GET THERE NOT COLLECTED STOCK 47% 85% of 5 most common plastics collected for 1% recycling with signi cant yield increases (90% yield) Shift from land ll to energy recovery for non-recycled 17% Reduced stock build-up and increased collection for EHIBIT 39 recycling Reuse of: 12% 8% of packaging, especially industrial 20% Ludde xar LANDFILL 3% of B&C plastics, esp. PVC carpets, pipes etc. Minimum text 7 pt. 4% of large automotive parts

15% ENERGY RECOVERY 37%

YIELD LOSSES 8% RECYCLED 10% REUSE 0% 4% 2017 2050

PACKAGING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION AUTOMOTIVE

5% 11% NOT COLLECTED 21% 2% STOCK 18% 16% 2% 2% 47% 15% 17% 32% LANDFILL 25% 76% 12%

ENERGY RECOVERY 22% 18% 53% 30% 47% YIELD LOSSES 13% 8% 5% 32% 9% RECYCLED 19% 11% 3% REUSE 0% 10% 0% 5% 4% 0% 6% 4% 2017 2050 2017 2050 2017 2050

REMAINING EMISSIONS 2050 Mt CO EHIBIT 313 2

REBOUND 117 Recycled plastics of lower quality do not replace the same volume of virgin plastics and may lead PRODUCTION FOR STOCK BUILD to an increased demand of total plastics 11 Around 10% of demand results in net stock build-up, requiring additional primary production 22 REUSE AND RECYCLING EMISSIONS 80% from yield losses in chemical recycling, the YIELD LOSSES remainder from mechanical recycling Yield losses in pre-treatment, recycling and 14 reuse process sent to energy recovery Process improvements as well as product design and choice of material important to maximize yields

42 AGED, DEGRADED, CONTAMINATED AND NOT COLLECTED COMMON PLASTICS Relatively small given option of chemical recycling THERMOSETS AND SMALL VOLUME Remaining share is aged, contaminated, or not captured by collection systems SPECIALTY PLASTICS 16 Challenging to achieve scale in small specialty plastics streams 12

VALUE EUR/ton

EHIBIT 310 1700 EUR ORIGINAL MATERIAL VALUE, 50B EUR

ton, ore TONNE 1000 EUR

VOLUME tonnes TODAY 55% COLLECTION CIRCULAR SYSTEM 90% value loss >80% of value still lost, 50% of value retained “30% collection” Large process losses in recycling Higher recycling yields increase but just 16% Uphill struggle to increase of volume recycling volume further – at a net cost High value retention provides Rebound eects as downgraded revenue for investment in self- plastics cannot replace virgin sustaining systems and scaling plastics in many uses Recycling can replace virgin production

EHIBIT 310

REDUCED RECYCLING COSTS HIGHER REVENUES EUR / TON TREATED PLASTICS EUR / TON TREATED PLASTICS

924 926

16% COLLECTION 186 774 71% 119 SORTING 191 147 PACKAGING EXAMPLE 540 LOGISTICS 15 10

337 RECYCLING 439

162 INVESTMENT 93 REVENUES

2017 2050 2017 2050

Cleaner ows from materials choices and Increased yields give larger revenues per tonne product design optimised for recycling treated plastic (better technology, cleaner inows) Increased scale reduces unit cost Higher quality enables pricing closer to virgin Specialisation and regional integration of markets materials (additional sorting, improved technology, Technological improvement boosts eciency but cleaner ows and optimised products) requires higher investment Raised cost of virgin materials improves Reduced risk from regulations and market willingness to pay for secondary products uncertainty Better functioning markets reduce current commercial risk to buyers

DEEP TRANSFORMATION THAT REUIRES COORDINATED AND SUSTAINED ACTION ACROSS VALUE CHAIN

EMISSIONS SAVINGS Mt CO2 / YEAR

EHIBIT 312 80

EEE Low quality increased recycling 303 Automotive Low quality increased recycling 144 Agriculture Low quality increased recycling 97 70

NEED UPDATE Packaging Low quality increased recycling 40

60 Har lite svårt att förstå den här grafen. Handlar det om att tydliggöra inom vilka Other plastics Low quality increased recycling 21 områden man kan minska CO2 utsläppen med minsta 50 kostnaden. dvs dom 4 områden som ligger mellan B&C Low quality increased recycling 66 ~29 - 72 Mt CO2 ? Hur kan Abatement (reducerings- ?) cost vara negativ. vad innebär det. 40 Packaging High quality increased recycling 96

Agriculture High quality increased recycling 115 30 EEE High quality increased recycling 138

B&C High quality increased recycling 138

20 Automotive High quality increased recycling 149

Other plastics High quality increased recycling 170

10

Packaging Reuse 179

EEE Reuse 192 B&C Reuse 202 Automotive Reuse 203 200 150 100 50 0 50 100 150 200 250 300

ABATEMENT COST EUR/t CO2

EHIBIT 311

ABATEMENT COST PACKAGING EAMPLE EUR PER TON ABATED CO2

257

43 68 101

2017 COST INCREASED ABATEMENT PER REDUCED COST OF RECYCLING, INCREASED REVENUES FROM TONNE OF PLASTIC RECYCLED ESPECIALLY THROUGH HIGHERUALITY SECONDARY INCREASED YIELDS MATERIALS REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Exhibit 3.14 Current policies cover only parts of the range of barriers to high-value plastics recycling

EHIBIT 314 CURRENT POLICIES COVER ONLY PARTS OF THE RANGE OF BARRIERS TO HIGH-VALUE PLASTICS RECYCLING

CURRENT POLICY FOCUS NO LITTLE POLICY FOCUS TODAY PARTIAL POLICY COVER TODAY

FEES Correct for externalities for primary production of plastics RAW MATERIAL PRODUCT DESIGN Regulation and fees to correct PRODUCER RESPONSIBILITY for externalities on secondary Dierentiation to reect downstream materials FRGPALETT impacts on recyclability PRODUCT COLLECTION TARGETS Are the main denominator of LANDFILL ENERGY current policies RECOVERY TA FEE To boost value of recycling COLLECTION

PRODUCT DISPOSAL Reward practices conducive to ENDOFLIFE high value recycling TREATMENT

STANDARDISATION Quality standards for recyclates and guarantees for recycled content SECONDARY MATERIAL PUBLIC PROCUREMENT PRODUCTION To create demand pull in nascent markets

REGULATION OF ADDITIVES MARKET FOR DEMAND PULL Limiting toxic substances (current) and use RECYCLED Quotas to create demand of additives inimical to recycling (future) MATERIAL pull for nascent markets

EAMPLES OF POLICIES ALL WOULD NEED CAREFUL EVALUATION

REMAINING EMISSIONS 2050 Mt CO SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS ANALYSIS 2 REBOUND 117 Recycled plastics of lower quality do not replace the same volume of virgin plastics and may lead 95 to an increased demand of total plastics 11 PRODUCTION FOR STOCK BUILD Around 10% of demand results in net stock EHIBIT 313 build-up, requiring additional primary production 22 REUSE AND RECYCLING EMISSIONS 117 80% from yield losses in chemical recycling, the remainder from mechanical recycling 14

YIELD LOSSES Yield losses in pre-treatment, recycling and reuse process sent to energy recovery Process improvements as well as product design and choice of material important to maximize yields 42 AGED, DEGRADED, CONTAMINATED AND NOT COLLECTED COMMON PLASTICS Relatively small given option of chemical recycling Remaining share is aged, contaminated, or not captured by collection systems THERMOSETS AND SMALL VOLUME SPECIALTY PLASTICS 16 Challenging to achieve scale in small specialty plastics streams 12 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

4. ALUMINIUM realising the potential for recycling

Aluminium is a heavily used material for share of aluminium demand. If this were to which the potential for circularity is growing continue, there would eventually be ‘excess fast. Even with rapid demand growth, the scrap’, even as demand for new aluminium potential for aluminium recycling is increa- kept growing. A shift to electric vehicles will sing: By 2050, the share of reused mate- exacerbate this problem by further redu- rial could, in principle, double – even as cing demand for the cast aluminium com- total aluminium use grows strongly. In the ponents that absorb most of the recycled EU, there will be enough end-of-life alumi- aluminium today. nium to serve more than half of demand by mid-century. Moreover, the resource gains A more circular scenario for aluminium from circularity are particularly large with requires reducing losses when products aluminium, as remelting existing metal re- are first manufactured, and better separa- quires just 5% of the energy of new produc- ting and sorting end-of-life aluminium. This tion, sharply reducing CO2 emissions. would have significant climate benefits. Glo- bally, CO2 emissions could be reduced by Capturing this opportunity, however, re- 300 Mt per year in 2050, and in Europe, by quires significant changes. A first step is close to 30 Mt. The latter represents 36% to reduce losses of aluminium in each use of emissions from meeting EU aluminium cycle, which now amount to 25–30%. This demand in a baseline scenario. requires better end-of-life treatment and col- lection for a range of products, as well as Overall, aluminium therefore is yet product designs that facilitate the recovery another example of large CO2 benefits of aluminium. End-of-life aluminium will also from enabling a more circular system. This need to be handled differently. Today much also opens up new opportunities for value of it is ‘downcycled’ into a mix of different creation, in preserving and monetising the alloys that can only be used for a small inherent value in secondary materials.

96 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

300 Mt CO2 could be reduced globally per year in 2050.

97 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

UNDERSTANDING FUTURE ALUMINIUM NEEDS

Aluminium is a relatively young, but versatile materi- is a global commodity. Raw materials, aluminium and al with multiple and ever-increasing uses in packaging, buil- scrap metal are all traded internationally, and the EU im- dings, automotive and other sectors. No other metal except ports a significant share of the aluminium it uses. Thus, for steel is more widely used around the world. Produc- any effort to develop a more circular aluminium economy tion of aluminium from ore (‘primary aluminium’) now needs to take global trade into account. stands at just under 60 million tonnes per year, and it continues to grow. Like other metals use, the benefits from aluminium de- pend on the available stock: the total amount of metal In recent years, growth in aluminium production and embodied in structures and products such as cars, buil- use has been dominated by developing countries. China dings or machinery. Demand for aluminium derives from in particular has been a major driver of aluminium de- the need to build up and maintain this stock – which is still mand, accounting for more than 70% of the increase in growing in all world regions. To meet future needs, the production in the past decade. As a result, 55% of prima- global stock per capita would need to increase by 350% ry aluminium production is now in China. (see Exhibit 1 for an explanation of our methodology). To keep up, aluminium production would have to increase The analysis we present in this chapter focuses on the rapidly. By 2050, our scenario shows global aluminium EU, but the global context is crucial because aluminium production would more than double from current levels.

Exhibit 1 EHIBIT 41 Global demand for aluminium projected if by 2100, aluminium stocks worldwide matched those in OECD countries today

GLOBAL ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION Mt ALUMINIUM PER YEAR, 2016 – 2100

300

200

100

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS MODELLING AS DESCRIBED IN TEXT

98

EHIBIT 42

ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION REUIRED TO MEET EU DEMAND Mt ALUMINIUM PER YEAR, 2016 – 2050

15

10

5

0 2020 2030 2040 2050

EHIBIT 43

CO2 INTENSITY OF PRIMARY ALUMINIUM

TONNES CO2 PER TONNE ALUMINIUM

17

12

10

3 3

03

COALBASED WORLD AVERAGE GASBASED PRODUCTION BASED RECYCLED PRODUCTION PRODUCTION ON CO2 FREE POWER ALUMINIUM

EHIBIT 44 ANNUAL EMISSIONS FROM GLOBAL ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE EMISSIONS FROM GLOBAL Mt CO PER YEAR, 2015 – 2100 2 ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION, Gt CO2, 2015 – 2100

113 1600 100

1400 80 1200 79 1000 60 800

40 600 14 %

400 20 200

0 0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 BASELINE REFERENCE SCENARIO SCENARIO BASED ON SLOWER ENERGY TRANSITION BASELINE SCENARIO REFERENCE SCENARIO BASED ON SLOWER ENERGY TRANSITION REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

The modelling of future demand follows the methodology described in Liu, Bangs, and Müller (2013). Demand is modelled for six end-use sectors (consumer durables, construction, electrical equipment, machinery, transport and other) and five world regions (Europe, North America, Japan, China and Rest of World). Demand in each sector and region is modelled with a stock-based approach, with population forecasts based on UN Population Prospects 2017. Per-capita saturation at around 425-475 kg per person, depending on the region, follows projected GDP develoments and is completed in all regions by 2100. In addition, the scenario includes a bottom-up model of the evolution of vehicle production, including the shares of electrical and internal combustion engine vehicles, and the assumed aluminium content in these categories. Historical aluminium stocks are based on the data described in Bertram et al. (2017), while the split of stocks between end-use sectors is based on Liu and Müller (2013). Future stock turnover is modelled with different lifetimes of products in each end-use sector following a normal distribution. The steps of the aluminium supply chain and use cycle are directly modelled, including losses in production, new scrap formation, and collection of post-consumer scrap. Losses and other parameters are calibrated so production and shares of products match those in data published by World Aluminium, and also based on various estimates in the literature. The model also tracks separate flows of casting alloys vs. wrought alumini- um. It further represents degrees of international trade in scrap, and the dilution of casting aluminium with other scrap or with primary metal. CO2 emissions estimates include emissions from alumina refining, aluminium , and casting, but do not include other sources sometimes included in full life-cycle assessments (such as the emissions from the production of anodes, the transportation or raw materials or products, or the mining of bauxite). Both direct emissions from fuel use and indirect emissions from electricity production are included. In keeping with the approach used elsewhere in this study, the baseline scenario includes the gradual decarbonisation of the energy system, as described elsewhere in the text, and by 2100, both alumina refining and electricity production are therefore assumed to be fully CO2-free. The resulting global production of aluminium is shown on the previous page, with further results elaborated throughout the chapter.

SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS ANALYSIS

99 EHIBIT 41

GLOBAL ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION Mt ALUMINIUM PER YEAR, 2016 – 2100

300

200

100

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Exhibit 2 EU aluminium demand grows only slowly to 2050

EHIBIT 42

ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION REUIRED TO MEET EU DEMAND Mt ALUMINIUM PER YEAR, 2016 – 2050

15

10

5

0 2020 2030 2040 2050

NOTE: THE FIGURE DEPICTS THE PRODUCTION OF ALUMINIUM REQUIRED TO SERVE EU DEMAND, NOT PRODUCTION IN THE EU SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS MODELLING AS DESCRIBED IN TEXT

EHIBIT 43

100

CO2 INTENSITY OF PRIMARY ALUMINIUM

TONNES CO2 PER TONNE ALUMINIUM

17

12

10

3 3

03

COALBASED WORLD AVERAGE GASBASED PRODUCTION BASED RECYCLED PRODUCTION PRODUCTION ON CO2 FREE POWER ALUMINIUM

EHIBIT 44 ANNUAL EMISSIONS FROM GLOBAL ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE EMISSIONS FROM GLOBAL Mt CO PER YEAR, 2015 – 2100 2 ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION, Gt CO2, 2015 – 2100

113 1600 100

1400 80 1200 79 1000 60 800

40 600 14 %

400 20 200

0 0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 BASELINE REFERENCE SCENARIO SCENARIO BASED ON SLOWER ENERGY TRANSITION BASELINE SCENARIO REFERENCE SCENARIO BASED ON SLOWER ENERGY TRANSITION REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Within the EU, future demand growth will depend Second, the level of demand depends on when the strongly on when saturation is reached, and at what level. stock will saturate. As noted, the above profile achieves Although aluminium stocks vary significantly by country, an 80% increase in the stock by 2050. With still higher the current average is 250 kg per person. Our scenario levels, demand would have to be higher. However, there assumes that aluminium stocks continue to grow until also are strong reasons why continued growth in the alu- they reach 450 kg per person by mid-century, an 80% minium stock beyond these levels might not be neces- increase. Thereafter, demand would be driven not by a sary. As the analysis in Chapter 5 sets out, demand for further increase in the total stock of aluminium, but by the materials from the automotive sector could be as much need to replace products at end of their life. as 75% lower in a future shared mobility system than in today’s system of individually owned cars. Chapter 6 However, this does not mean that production would need shows that materials use in buildings also could be re- to grow much. Today, the production required to serve EU duced significantly. These two sectors account for half of demand amounts to just over 13 million tonnes per year of aluminium demand. Moreover, as we discuss in Section combined primary and secondary (i.e. recycled) aluminium, 4.4, this does not in fact significantly affect our findings; but this already includes continued additions to the stock. achieving a more circular use of aluminium remains im- Achieving the 80% increase in stock by 2050 would require portant even with higher growth. only a slight increase, to 14 million tonnes per year (Exhibit 2). Finally, it is important to distinguish where alumi- Several things are notable about this projection. First, nium is used from where it is produced. The alumini- in keeping with our focus on the demand side, it covers um used for manufacturing in the EU has a variety of only the aluminium production required to meet demand sources; a third is imported. In that regard, aluminium for aluminium within the EU. Europe also manufactures differs from the other materials investigated in this re- and exports a wide range of products containing alu- port, which the EU produces more or less in the same minium – for example, it exports cars containing some amounts as it uses domestically. In addition, the EU 800,000 tonnes of aluminium each year. In principle, Eu- imports half of the alumina used (alumina is the in- ropean aluminium production could therefore grow faster termedia product in producing aluminium metal from than demand for aluminium in the EU, driven by exports bauxite ore). of either aluminium or aluminium-containing products.

101 EHIBIT 41

GLOBAL ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION Mt ALUMINIUM PER YEAR, 2016 – 2100

300

200

100

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EHIBIT 42

ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION REUIRED TO MEET EU DEMAND Mt ALUMINIUM PER YEAR, 2016 – 2050

15

10 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE CO2 EMISSIONS FROM ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION AND USE

Primary production5 of aluminium requires very large Unlike with steel production, however, emissions from amounts of energy. The smelting of aluminium uses 13– aluminium production can be reduced dramatically by using 15 MWh per tonne of metal produced. Multiply that by low-carbon power. With a decarbonised electricity supply, the almost 60 million tonnes of aluminium now produced emissions from primary aluminium production are reduced around the world, and the electricity usage amounts to to just over 3 tonnes CO2 per tonne. Indeed, a majority of as much as 5% of global electricity production – roughly the aluminium produced in Europe is relatively low-carbon, what is used for household0 lighting around world. When because it is made with hydro- and nuclear power. using fossil fuels for electricity 2020production, large amounts2030 2040 2050

of CO2 emissions result. In addition, greenhouse gas Yet as dramatically as low-carbon electricity can lower emissions arise from the production of alumina, and the- emissions from aluminium production, recycling aluminium re are further emissions associated with the smelting pro- still has even lower emissions, because remelting requires cess and with casting the metal into ingots. just 5% of the energy of primary production. This results in emissions savings of up to 98% (Exhibit 3). Adding these up, emissions from aluminium production can vary significantly. The key determinant is whether the electrici- Accounting for both direct emissions and indirect emis- ty is low-carbon. Globally, 60% of aluminium today is produ- sions, aluminium production emits some 800 Mt CO2 per ced using coal-fired electricity, which results in emissions per hear (Exhibit 4). If global electricity production was de- tonne of aluminium produced of as much as 18 tonnes CO2. carbonised to meet climate targets, CO2 emissions from For comparison, this is more than 7 times the emissions as- aluminium production would increase far less dramatically sociated with producing one tonne of primary steel. than demand for the metal, and starting in mid-century,

EHIBIT 43 Exhibit 3 Recycled aluminium has far lower emissions than new primary production

CO2 INTENSITY OF PRIMARY ALUMINIUM

TONNES CO2 PER TONNE ALUMINIUM

17

12

10

3 3

03

COALBASED WORLD AVERAGE GASBASED PRODUCTION BASED RECYCLED PRODUCTION PRODUCTION ON CO2 FREE POWER ALUMINIUM

SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS CALCULATIONS BASED ON MULTIPLE SOURCES

102

EHIBIT 44 ANNUAL EMISSIONS FROM GLOBAL ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE EMISSIONS FROM GLOBAL Mt CO PER YEAR, 2015 – 2100 2 ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION, Gt CO2, 2015 – 2100

113 1600 100

1400 80 1200 79 1000 60 800

40 600 14 %

400 20 200

0 0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 BASELINE REFERENCE SCENARIO SCENARIO BASED ON SLOWER ENERGY TRANSITION BASELINE SCENARIO REFERENCE SCENARIO BASED ON SLOWER ENERGY TRANSITION EHIBIT 41

GLOBAL ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION Mt ALUMINIUM PER YEAR, 2016 – 2100

300

200

100

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EHIBIT 42

ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION REUIRED TO MEET EU DEMAND Mt ALUMINIUM PER YEAR, 2016 – 2050

15

10

5

0 2020 2030 2040 2050

EHIBIT 43

CO2 INTENSITY OF PRIMARY ALUMINIUM

TONNES CO2 PER TONNE ALUMINIUM

17

12

10

3 3

03

COALBASED WORLD AVERAGE GASBASED PRODUCTION BASED RECYCLED PRODUCTION PRODUCTION ON CO2 FREE POWER ALUMINIUM REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Exhibit 4 Low-carbon electricity can dramatically cut emissions from aluminium but cumulative emissions to 2100 nonetheless are large EHIBIT 44 ANNUAL EMISSIONS FROM GLOBAL ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE EMISSIONS FROM GLOBAL Mt CO PER YEAR, 2015 – 2100 2 ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION, Gt CO2, 2015 – 2100

113 1600 100

1400 80 1200 79 1000 60 800

40 600 14 %

400 20 200

0 0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 BASELINE REFERENCE SCENARIO SCENARIO BASED ON SLOWER ENERGY TRANSITION BASELINE SCENARIO REFERENCE SCENARIO BASED ON SLOWER ENERGY TRANSITION

NOTES: THE BASELINE SCENARIO SEES A GRADUAL DECARBONISATION OF ALL ENERGY USE IN ALUMINA REFINING AND ALUMINIUM SMELTING, COMPLETE BY 2100. THE ‘REFERENCE’ SCENARIO INSTEAD FOLLOWS THE DECARBONISATION IN THE INTERNATIONAL ENERGY AGENCY’S ‘REFERENCE TECHNOLOGY SCENARIO’. NOTE THAT THE ‘REFERENCE’ SCENARIO IS ONLY SHOWN TO ILLUSTRATE THE IMPACT OF A SLOW ENERGY TRANSITION ON EMISSIONS; IT IS NOT USED FOR ANY EVALUATION OF THE BENEFITS OF GREATER CIRCULARITY DESCRIBED IN THIS REPORT. SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS MODELLING AS DESCRIBED IN TEXT.

they would actually decline. In a more typical ‘reference’ ry aluminium required to meet economic needs. To put scenario, however, where electricity production is decarbo- this in perspective, if primary aluminium production grows nised much more slowly than the goals of the Paris Agre- as rapidly as our analysis suggests, fully decarbonising ement would imply, emissions from aluminium production aluminium smelting through low-carbon power would re- would gradually rise to 1.5 billion tonnes of CO2 per year. quire an additional 1,335 TWh per year of zero-carbon Cumulative emissions (which are what matters most for electricity in 2050 – almost as much electricity as India the climate) would be about 80–110 Gt CO2, or 27–37% uses today. Demand-side measures are therefore crucial of the 300 Gt carbon budget available for all of industry in to reduce the claim that aluminium makes on clean ener- a low-carbon scenario. Note that the ‘reference’ scenario gy, and thus reduce the cost and increase the feasibility is shown for illustration of the impact of a slow energy tran- of decarbonising the industry. sition on emissions only; it is not used for any evaluation of the benefits of greater circularity described in this report. The good news is that there is significant potential to improve on current practices, to enable a larger share of As this shows, even if emissions from aluminium were production through recycling and thus reduce the need sharply reduced by changing production technologies, for future primary aluminium production even in a world there is much value in also reducing the amount of prima- with strongly growing demand.

103 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

REALISING THE POTENTIAL FOR CIRCULARITY IN THE ALUMINIUM SECTOR

The core of the circular economy opportunity for alumini- REDUCING LOSSES OF ALUMINIUM um is to make the best use possible of metal that has already been produced. This requires minimising the losses of alumi- For many consumers, aluminium is a prime example nium, and ensuring that secondary production (i.e., recycling) of effective recycling. For decades now, many countries can meet as much of aluminium needs as possible. have run successful aluminium recycling programmes, and even if many other items are discarded, beverage cans are The potential for more circular aluminium will grow in carefully collected and reused. This system for recycling the future (Exhibit 5). Today, aluminium recycled from end- beverage cans is particularly effective, and in general, alu- of-life products covers just 20% of total global demand. minium scrap collection rates are relatively high. Globally, By 2050, however, this share will almost double, even as 77% of aluminium from end-of-life products is collected for overall demand for aluminium more than doubles. Half the recycling, though the rate varies significantly across regions growth in demand could thus be met by recycling. In Eu- and product groups. Still, this means 23% of end-of-life rope, secondary production could be still more important, aluminium goes to waste. as the total metal available for recycling would grow from 27% today, to 55% in 2050. In addition, large amounts of scrap aluminium are created during the casting, fabrication or manufacturing processes Both globally and in Europe, then, recycling could be – around 35% of the material ends up not in products, but a major part of supplying future aluminium needs – with as ‘new scrap’. While almost all this new scrap is collected, major savings of energy and CO2 emissions. However, some 2% is not returned for remelting or refining. In addi- there is a long way from available scrap to production tion, for the 98% that is reused, some 2–3% is lost during of high-quality, secondary aluminium that can be used processing, remelting and refining. All of this contributes to across applications. There are two key issues: higher overall losses of aluminium. • Reducing the losses of aluminium throughout the Altogether, in each use cycle, 25–30% of aluminium is use cycle; and lost. To counter this, the single most important measure is to • Preventing downcycling and enabling the produc- increase collection rates of post-consumer scrap, although tion of high-quality secondary aluminium. reducing the amount of new scrap created is also helpful.

104 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Exhibit 5 Post-consumer scrap could meet a large share of future growth in global aluminium demand

AVAILABLE ALUMINIUM POSTCONSUMER SCRAP COMPARED TO TOTAL PRODUCTION

GLOBAL EU Mt ALUMINIUM PER YEAR, 2016 – 2100 Mt ALUMINIUM PER YEAR, 2016 – 2050

300 14

250 12 EHIBIT 45

200 10

8 150

6

100

4

50 2

0 0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 2020 2030 2040 2050

TOTAL PRODUCTION POSTCONSUMER SCRAP

NOTES: ‘AVAILABLE SCRAP’ REFERS TO THE AMOUNT OF POST-CONSUMER SCRAP THAT WOULD BE COLLECTED WITH CURRENT PRACTICES. SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS ANALYSIS AS DESCRIBED IN TEXT

105

EMISSIONS INTENSITY

T CO2/ T MATERIAL EHIBIT 46

EHIBIT 47 THE CURRENT ALUMINIUM CYCLE DEPENDS ON DOWNCYCLING TO CAST ALUMINIUM USED IN THE AUTOMOTIVE SECTOR

CAST ALUMINIUM COMPRISES THE LARGEST VOLUME OF ALUMINIUM CONTAINED IN TODAYS PASSENGER CARS BREAKDOWN BASED ON CONTAINED ALUMINIUM EHIBIT 48

CAST ALUMINIUM

LOW ALLOY

34% 14 %

66 %

ELECTRIC VEHICLES CHALLENGE THE USEFULNESS OF CAST ALUMINIUM SHARE (%) CAST ALUMINIUM OF TOTAL CONTAINED ALUMINIUM

DRIVE TRAIN 12 % OTHER ENGINE PARTS 10 % Half of the total amount of cast aluminium is in HEAT ECHANGER 9 % components that are not used in an electric vehicle HEAD 8 % 14 % ENGINE BLOCK 7 %

PISTON 04 % FRAME PARTS 6 %

BREAKS 3 %

STEERING LINKAGE 3 % SUSPENSION ARM 2 % OTHER PARTS 6 %

Source: Excess capacity in the global steel industry: the current situation and ways forward, OECD (2015) REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

DOWNCYCLING OF ALUMINIUM TO CAST PRODUCTS Although aluminium can be remelted indefinitely, there • There are many dozens of different alloys in major use, but a are three factors that greatly complicate secondary alu- key divide is that wrought alloys contain much smaller quantities minium production: of alloying elements than do casting alloys. Wrought alloys with • Aluminium is rarely used in its pure form, but typi- lower alloying content can generally be recycled into casting cally alloyed with a range of other elements to attain alloys, but this is a one-way street, and wrought products cannot the desired properties. Those properties often depend be created from aluminium that has once been a casting alloy. on keeping alloying composition within a tight range, so • Finally, a major difference from steel is that most al- even small deviations can undermine the quality for a loying elements cannot realistically be removed once they specific purpose (Exhibit 6). have been added.

Exhibit 6 Aluminium needs to be combined with alloying elements to precise specifications

PURE ALUMINIUM BEVERAGE CAN AIRPLANE ENGINE BLOCK

• LOW DENSITY LID: 2 % CU 17 % SI • HIGH CONDUCTIVITY 2,6 % MG 3 % MG 5 % CU • CORROSION RESISTANT 0,25 % CR 6 % ZN 0,5 % MG • SOFT 1 % ZN CONTAINER: 1,2 % MN 1 % MG

ALUMINIUM FOIL WINDOW FRAME BICYCLE FRAME CAR WHEEL

> 99 % ALUMINUM 0,4 % SI 0,6 % SI 7 % SI 0,05 % CU 0,25 % CU 0,4 % MG 0,8 % MG 1,2 % MG 0,2 % CR

SOURCE: ADAPTED FROM DANIEL B. MÜLLER (2017)

106 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Today, remelters and refiners handle these challeng- from a range of sectors into cast aluminium auto parts. es by downcycling from wrought aluminium to less-pu- The main exception is used beverage cans, which are re casting alloys. Only around 20% of end-of-life scrap recycled in a ‘closed loop’, where the same metal is is turned into wrought aluminium, even though wrought used repeatedly for the same purpose. (Exhibit X). In products account for two-thirds of all aluminium in use. addition to downcycling, both refining and remelting The main uses for casting alloys, in turn, are in the involve diluting (‘sweetening’) more highly alloyed alu- automotive sector. Overall, a large share of aluminium minium with up to 25% of either primary aluminium, or recycling today involves turning end-of-life aluminium low-alloyed scrap.

Exhibit 7 DRIVE TRAIN The current aluminium cycle depends on downcycling to cast aluminium used in the automotive sector

LOW ALLOY PACKAGING

LOW ALLOY TECHNOLOGYOTHER

LOW ALLOY BUILDINGS

CAST ALUMINIUM

LOW ALLOY TRANSPORT

SOURCE: ADAPTED FROM MODARESI AND MÜLLER (2012)

107 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Downcycling to cast aluminium will no longer be a viable strategy as the automotive industry shifts production to electric vehicles

Up until now, downcycling makes economic sen- demand for casting alloys, even with extensive trade se. Continuous growth in the demand for casting al- across regions. Unless post-consumer scrap can be loys of aluminium has been able to absorb available used for wrought products, more primary aluminium post-consumer scrap. Europe and North America have will be required. Much of the potential for circularity already reached the point where there is ‘excess scrap’ would then be wasted. – i.e., scrap that exceeds domestic requirements for cast aluminium, but which is too mixed or highly alloy- One other factor makes this issue even more pressing. ed to be used for other categories. However, this has Today, around two-thirds of the aluminium content of been handled by exporting the scrap to other regions. vehicles is cast aluminium. However, a large share of Downcycling has thus helped fulfil demand for cast that material is used in drive trains, motor blocks, heat aluminium while minimising the cost of separation of exchangers, and other components linked to the use products and sorting of scrap by alloy category. The of internal combustion engines. Yet it is increasingly main loss is one of value, as less-pure secondary alu- clear that electric vehicles will make up a fast-growing minium trades at a discount to purer forms. It is not share of the market in the coming decades. As the au- likely that it has resulted in any additional production tomotive industry shifts production to electric vehicles, of primary aluminium. the cast aluminium content per car could fall by half. Demand for cast aluminium therefore looks set to slow, However, this is not sustainable in the long term. even as post-consumer scrap of aluminium grows. In As noted above, the amount of post-consumer scrap that context, downcycling will no longer be a viable is growing globally. At some point, it will exceed the strategy. New approaches are needed.

108 AVAILABLE ALUMINIUM POSTCONSUMER SCRAP COMPARED TO TOTAL PRODUCTION

GLOBAL EU Mt ALUMINIUM PER YEAR, 2016 – 2100 Mt ALUMINIUM PER YEAR, 2016 – 2050

300 14

250 12 EHIBIT 45

200 10

8 150

6

100

4

50 2

0 0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 2020 2030 2040 2050

TOTAL PRODUCTION POSTCONSUMER SCRAP

EMISSIONS INTENSITY

T CO2/ T MATERIAL EHIBIT 46

EHIBIT 47 THE CURRENT ALUMINIUM CYCLE DEPENDS ON DOWNCYCLING TO CAST ALUMINIUM USED IN THE AUTOMOTIVE SECTOR

REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Exhibit 8 A higher share of electric vehicles could significantly reduce the demand for cast aluminium alloys

CAST ALUMINIUM COMPRISES THE LARGEST VOLUME OF ALUMINIUM CONTAINED IN TODAYS PASSENGER CARS BREAKDOWN BASED ON CONTAINED ALUMINIUM EHIBIT 48

CAST ALUMINIUM

LOW ALLOY

34% 14 %

66 %

ELECTRIC VEHICLES CHALLENGE THE USEFULNESS OF CAST ALUMINIUM SHARE (%) CAST ALUMINIUM OF TOTAL CONTAINED ALUMINIUM

DRIVE TRAIN 12 % OTHER ENGINE PARTS 10 % Half of the total amount of cast aluminium is in HEAT ECHANGER 9 % components that are not used in an electric vehicle HEAD 8 % 14 % ENGINE BLOCK 7 %

PISTON 04 % FRAME PARTS 6 %

BREAKS 3 %

STEERING LINKAGE 3 % SUSPENSION ARM 2 % OTHER PARTS 6 %

SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMCIS ANALYSIS OF MULTIPLE SOURCES.

Source: Excess capacity in the global steel industry: the current109 situation and ways forward, OECD (2015) REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

A CIRCULAR SCENARIO FOR ALUMINIUM Reducing losses and avoiding the need for downcycling keep stressing that significant changes on current practice could make a major difference to the sustainability of aluminium. are needed to achieve this. Exhibit 9 contrasts the effect of a baseline scenario, with only marginal improvement on current practice, with a circular scena- The CO2 implications are similarly stark (Exhibit 10). In rio with much higher degree of separation and sorting of scrap. a baseline scenario, emissions increase to 1,300 Mt CO2 per year, but in a circular scenario are kept to 1000 Mt CO2, The results are striking: the circular scenario requires or 24% lower. The baseline scenario includes the switch far less primary aluminium to serve the same demand. By to low-carbon energy described above. However, this tran- 2050, the difference is 30 Mt per year, half of current prima- sition takes time. Increased circularity reduces the need ry production volume. Later in the century, the gains are still for primary metals production while it is still highly emis- greater: instead of rising to 174 Mt per year, primary pro- sions-intensive. To give a sense of the scale of resource duction can peak at 116 Mt per year, and then decline even savings: if the circular opportunity were not captured, but as total aluminium demand continues to grow. This shows same CO2 savings had to be achieved by decarbonising the great potential of aluminium as a circular material, and the energy supply, the aluminium sector would require as the gains of ensuring that the aluminium stock is kept as much low-carbon electricity as was produced by all wind pure as possible. By reducing losses and enabling high-qu- and solar power in the EU in 2016. It is clear that recycling ality recycling, secondary production could then replace can be a major contributor to aligning aluminium use with more than half of primary production. However, we must climate objectives.

Exhibit 9 A circular scenario can reduce the need for primary aluminium production by 30 Mt by 2050

EU ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION BY ROUTE Mt ALUMINIUM PER YEAR, 2016 – 2100 PRIMARY PRODUCTION BASELINE SCENARIO SECONDARY PRODUCTION CIRCULAR SCENARIO

300 PRIMARY PRODUCTION CIRCULAR SCENARIO

250

EHIBIT 49 200

150

100

50

0

2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS MODELLING AS DESCRIBED IN TEXT.

110

GLOBAL CO2 EMISSIONS FROM ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION BY ROUTE

Mt CO2 PER YEAR, 2016 – 2100 EHIBIT 410

1400

1200 24 %

1000

800

600

400 BASELINE SCENARIO

200 CIRCULAR SCENARIO

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

EHIBIT 411 GLOBAL ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION BY ROUTE Mt ALUMINIUM PER YEAR, 2016 – 2100

14

12

10

8

6 38 %

4

2

0

2020 2030 2040 2050

PRIMARY PRODUCTION BASELINE SCENARIO

SECONDARY PRODUCTION CIRCULAR SCENARIO

PRIMARY PRODUCTION CIRCULAR SCENARIO EU ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION BY ROUTE Mt ALUMINIUM PER YEAR, 2016 – 2100 PRIMARY PRODUCTION BASELINE SCENARIO SECONDARY PRODUCTION CIRCULAR SCENARIO

300 PRIMARY PRODUCTION CIRCULAR SCENARIO

250

EHIBIT 49 200

150

100

50

0

2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Exhibit 10 CO2 emissions are 300 Mt lower globally in a circular scenario

GLOBAL CO2 EMISSIONS FROM ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION BY ROUTE

Mt CO2 PER YEAR, 2016 – 2100 EHIBIT 410

1400

1200 24 %

1000

800

600

400 BASELINE SCENARIO

200 CIRCULAR SCENARIO

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

NOTES: SCENARIOS ASSUME DIFFERENT DEGREES OF LOSSES OF ALUMINIUM AND SORTING OF POST-CONSUMER SCRAP TO AVOID DOWNCYCLING. THE BASELINE SCENARIO KEEPS CURRENT PRACTICE, WHEREAS THE CIRCULAR SCENARIO SEES A SIGNFICANT INCREASE IN THE FEASIBILITY OF USING POST-CONSUMER SCRAP FOR WROUGHT ALUMINIUM BY 2050. IN BOTH SCENARIOS, THE CO2-INTENSITY OF ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION FALLS OVER TIME, AS DESCRIBED ABOVE SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS MODELLING AS DESCRIBED IN TEXT.

111

EHIBIT 411 GLOBAL ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION BY ROUTE Mt ALUMINIUM PER YEAR, 2016 – 2100

14

12

10

8

6 38 %

4

2

0

2020 2030 2040 2050

PRIMARY PRODUCTION BASELINE SCENARIO

SECONDARY PRODUCTION CIRCULAR SCENARIO

PRIMARY PRODUCTION CIRCULAR SCENARIO REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

EU CO EMISSIONS AND PRODUCTION for example, Norsk Hydro now markets certified primary alu- 2 minium with life-cycle emissions of no more than 4 tonnes Turning to the EU, the gains from greater circularity are CO2 per tonne of metal. even more pronounced (Exhibit 11). As discussed in Se- ction 4.1, the availability of post-consumer scrap is set to The gradual decarbonisation of the aluminium supply increase significantly in the EU, creating the potential for a in the EU can go hand in hand with efforts to improve the much more circular system. With current practice, however, circularity of European aluminium use. By both decarbonising this potential would not be captured. More scrap would supply, and reducing the need for (imported) primary metal become available, but the EU would need to use primary to serve demand, the EU can act on two complementary aluminium instead – the same amount in 2050 as today. fronts to bring aluminium in line with low-carbon objectives. Exporting excess cast aluminium scrap would not solve the problem, as other regions also would have an excess. In contrast, by improving circularity, and making sure that SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS – THE FINDINGS ARE more wrought aluminium demand can be met from availa- ROBUST TO A RANGE OF ASSUMPTIONS ble post-consumer scrap, the need for primary aluminium could be cut by 38%. Casting alloys of aluminium, and automotive aluminium in particular, are the main potential future bottleneck to a Given the much higher energy-intensity of primary pro- more circular aluminium system, and therefore the focus of duction, it is clear that reducing the need for primary alu- this analysis. Wrought aluminium is treated as one category, minium also makes a big contribution to reducing the CO2 which is a simplification, as there are limitations on which emissions arising from European aluminium use. After the wrought alloys can be turned into other wrought alloys. closure of several smelters, Europe now imports half of its primary aluminium. Any reduction in demand for primary On the other hand, the circular scenario is not a theore- aluminium in the EU thus avoids whatever CO2 emissions tical ‘100% circular’ benchmark, but is intended as an am- are associated with production of those imports. In our sce- bitious, yet realistic, representation. Instead of assuming full nario, this corresponds to almost 10 tonnes CO2 per tonne circularity for aluminium, it involves some continued dilution of primary aluminium, even in 2050. A circular scenario for and downcycling. Of course, if these limitations could be aluminium in the EU alone would thus reduce global emis- overcome, the CO2 reductions from a more circular alumi- sions by 29 million tonnes of CO2. nium system would be even bigger than indicated above.

This raises an important difference between aluminium The analysis underlying the results depends on many and other materials investigated in this study: most emis- factors that are uncertain in a 2050 perspective (let alone in sions savings from circularity are likely to occur not within scenarios to 2100). However, the overall findings are robust the EU, but in the countries from which aluminium is im- to variation in many key assumptions. In particular, they do ported. Nonetheless, they are real, net savings to global not rely on a relatively flat demand profile. If the EU stock emissions: a more circular system in Europe reduces the were to grow much more to 2050 (as suggested in some global need for primary aluminium, after accounting for all industry forecasts), production might need to reach 20 Mt of the possibilities of trade and adaptation of use of alumi- aluminium per year, and primary metal would have a much nium in other markets. It therefore constitutes an unusual greater share. However, despite the fast-growing stock, the opportunity for Europe to adjust not just its own territori- gains from circularity would in fact be still greater, with aba- al emissions, but also the emissions associated with its tement potential increasing from 29 Mt CO2 per year in consumption. 2050, to 44 Mt CO2 per year. Likewise, assuming a less aggressive adoption of electric vehicles, or a larger pool There is an additional opportunity for European industry of future cast aluminium demand more generally, reduces to produce and market CO2-free aluminium. As noted ear- the abatement potential by only around 15%. Overall, the lier, overall, European production uses mainly low-carbon findings therefore seem robust to a range of assumptions. energy. Life-cycle emissions from EU aluminium are about 7 tonnes CO2 per tonne of aluminium, versus a global av- The main question instead is what actions need to be erage of 18 tonnes CO2, and 20 tonnes in China. Some taken to achieve greater circularity, and whether policy sup- companies are already seizing this business opportunity; port is needed to get there – the topic of the next section.

112 EU ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION BY ROUTE Mt ALUMINIUM PER YEAR, 2016 – 2100 PRIMARY PRODUCTION BASELINE SCENARIO SECONDARY PRODUCTION CIRCULAR SCENARIO

300 PRIMARY PRODUCTION CIRCULAR SCENARIO

250

EHIBIT 49 200

150

100

50

0

2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

GLOBAL CO2 EMISSIONS FROM ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION BY ROUTE

Mt CO2 PER YEAR, 2016 – 2100 EHIBIT 410

1400

1200 24 %

1000

800

600

400 BASELINE SCENARIO

200 CIRCULAR SCENARIO REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE 0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100

Exhibit 11 Primary aluminium production to serve EU demand is 38% lower in a circular scenario by 2050

EHIBIT 411 GLOBAL ALUMINIUM PRODUCTION BY ROUTE Mt ALUMINIUM PER YEAR, 2016 – 2100

14

12

10

8

6 38 %

4

2

0

2020 2030 2040 2050

PRIMARY PRODUCTION BASELINE SCENARIO

SECONDARY PRODUCTION CIRCULAR SCENARIO

PRIMARY PRODUCTION CIRCULAR SCENARIO

SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS MODELLING AS DESCRIBED IN TEXT

113 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

HOW TO GET THERE – MEASURES TO PROMOTE THE CIRCULARITY OF ALUMINIUM

What would it take to transition from today’s practices to MEASURES TO PHASE OUT DOWNCYCLING a more circular scenario? The key topics are the reduction of losses, and addressing downcycling. The key issue for downcycling is to improve the hand- ling of post-consumer scrap. If, as in the circular scenario MEASURES TO REDUCE LOSSES described above, two-thirds of end-of-life aluminium is to be reusable as wrought aluminium, significant changes will be Most of the losses of aluminium occur as products required on current practice. reach their end of life, so this is where to focus attention. Collection systems is one aspect: while collection from buil- The good news is that there will be strong market in- dings and cars is already very high, the rates are much centives for this, especially as the amount of excess scrap lower for consumer products that are often handled through grows. Note that ‘excess’ secondary metal does not mean public waste management systems. One option could be to that aluminium would be discarded, but that its price would introduce additional deposit systems, similar to those used fall. Today’s price difference between secondary and prima- for beverage cans today. Where waste is publicly handled, ry aluminium is relatively small (on the order of 10-15%, de- it would help to separate metals ahead of other treatment. pending on circumstances), but this could grow significantly More generally, attention throughout the chain would help if the supply-demand balance shifted. There would then be a reduce losses. For example, a greater share could be re- strong underlying financial gain from taking action to avoid it, covered if initial product design ensured easy separation of and today’s remelters would have strong incentives to deve- aluminium components upon dismantling. lop and invest in additional separation and sorting.

Reducing process scrap would also reduce losses of Although much could be achieved by greater sorting of aluminium. Collection rates are already high, so the main existing scrap flows, this does not mean that the aluminium promise is likely in reducing formation of new scrap in the industry should be the only one to act. The cost of achieving first place. There are large differences today: some car -ma purer scrap flows could be much smaller if not achieved just nufacturers, for example, generate more than 40% scrap, post-hoc, but instead simultaneously addressed by actors even as best practice is closer to 25%. New production throughout the value chain: manufacturers using aluminium, techniques, such as additive manufacturing, could also lead public deposit systems, collection systems of end-of-life me- to lower scrap volumes. tal, practices for dismantling products, scrap markets, and users of recycled metal. The more integrated the aluminium industry, the easier it will be to get there, but in any scenario it will also be necessary to engage manufacturing companies and others.

114 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

This is an area that needs much more investigation, but • New processes for dismantling of products: To- the broad areas of action are as follows: day’s dismantling is often rudimentary, whether it involves demolition of buildings or shredding of vehicles. The result • Improved product design: As noted throughout this is that different categories of aluminium are mixed, and report, there are currently few incentives for product design other metals enter aluminium flows. Given the importance to account for the impact on recycling. With aluminium this of the automotive sector for aluminium use, a long-term pri- already has some negative effects (chiefly in the form of los- ority should be to create effective automated disassembly ses), but with the need for much more detailed separation systems to separate auto parts before shredding. Even with and sorting of scrap, it becomes more urgent. Among op- today’s technology, however, it is possible to carry out more tions to discuss, the EU framework for producer responsibility component separation of cars and thereby reduce the mix- could address the feasibility of achieving pure scrap flows. ing of different aluminium categories. • Materials specification:Aluminium continues to de- • Increased separation and sorting: A large share velop, with new alloys invented to serve new uses, and to of the effort towards purer scrap flows must be with the improve on previous versions. This has many benefits, and process of sorting scrap flows. The aluminium industry is doubtless will continue, making it possible to use aluminium already investing significantly in this, and new possibilities in new applications. At the same time, the proliferation of dif- arise with cheaper sensor and automation technologies. ferent alloys also makes it much more difficult to use recyc- Further reducing the cost of sorting must be a priority, and led content. Thus, there needs to be a countervailing move- could be a significant competitive advantage in a future in- ment to avoid needless over-specification. One step would dustry with a much greater share of post-consumer scrap. be for the industry to shift away from the current practice of • A more sophisticated market for scrap: In parallel, specifying the precise composition of alloys, to specifying there will be a need for a more developed market for scrap, and buying aluminium based on function instead – leaving with additional specification of categories. One possibility it up to the supplier to meet this in the best way possible. is to move towards much more real-time information about Recycled aluminium could then meet more of the demand. different scrap flows available in a geography, perhaps It also is worth considering whether regulations and particu- tracked through distributed ledgers or similar information lar practices prevent such developments. Examples include technology. the intellectual property invested in some alloys, or industry standards. • Production process development: Finally, it is pos- sible that methods could be developed to improve the • Reuse: Downcycling can be avoided entirely by reusing commercial viability of removing impurities from aluminium. components rather than remelting metal, a topic returned to Many methods for refining aluminium are already in use and later in this report. could be developed further, including electrolysis, electro- • Closed-loop recycling systems: Reusing metal for slag refining, fractional solidification, fluxing refining, etc. a very similar purpose is the shortest route to handling the issue of secondary aluminium alloys. Today the only major Taken together, the above is an ambitious list for indu- flow of this kind is used beverage cans, but it would be pos- strial development. Vertical integration, coordination across sible to do it for additional product categories as well. For the supply chain, and new technology are among the key consumer products, publicly run systems are the most likely themes. Policy may well have a role to play as well, not least to succeed. Deposit schemes would be one way to support to coordinate the important action required in the areas of this. However, much more analysis is required to identify the product design, public collection systems, and end-of-life pros and cons of such initiatives. dismantling. All are areas that needs further investigation.

115 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

5. mobility the promise of a shared car system

Personal mobility offers a major opportu- hand, would enable much more intensive nity for a more circular economy. Transpor- use of each vehicle. Once the use of these tation is of undoubted economic and social fleets achieves sufficient scale, there will be importance, accounting for 15% of house- enormous incentives for changes to the de- hold disposable income. It is a major fea- sign of vehicles and for innovation. Higher ture of everyday life and shapes the cities utilisation justifies much more investment and communities we live in. In this chapter, in upfront costs, from the higher cost of we show how circular economy principles electric-vehicle drivetrains, to more advan- could enable the same travel to occur with ced automation technology, or higher-per- much lower materials requirements – and formance materials. at a lower cost. Professionally managed fleets also en- We focus on passenger cars, which pro- able much greater control over vehicle ma- vide 83% of travel today. In a scenario whe- intenance, parts inventory, reuse of com- re professionally managed, shared vehicle ponents, and remanufacture. In addition, the fleets account for two thirds of travel, mate- cars used can be matched much more close- rials requirements could fall by as much as ly to the needs of individual trips, thus redu- 75%, reducing annual CO2 emissions from cing the average size of vehicles substantially. materials production by 43 Mt by 2050. The average car would be smaller, requi- The reason why the potential savings are ring far less material, and be far more dura- so large is that our use of cars today is ex- ble and better maintained. The initial design tremely inefficient. The vast majority of cars and materials choices would be optimised are owned and operated by a single hou- for much more intensive use, and the ef- sehold, and this results is overcapacity: fi- fective lifetime could more than double. ve-seat cars used mostly for one-passenger Lightweighting techniques that use advan- trips, and vehicles that are stationary 92% ced materials would be far more economic of the time. Vehicle design is also optimised than when applied to a personal car. The for this structure of use and ownership. same is true of using automation to redu- ce accidents, and applying more advanced A system built around professionally ma- manufacturing methods to reduce materials naged fleets of shared cars, on the other losses at the production stage.

116 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

A shared car system reduces material requirements for passenger cars by 75%

117 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Exhibit 5.1 A shared mobility scenario is a highly attractive vision for passenger cars

CO2 IMPACT OF MATERIALS TOTAL COST OF OWNERSHIP ETERNALITIES AND COST TO SOCIETY Mt CO2 PER YEAR, EUROPE EUR PER 1000 PKM EUR PER 1000 PKM 60 155 264 EHIBIT 51

STEEL 70% 77% 74%

ALUMINIUM 18 68 35 PLASTICS

OTHER

BASELINE CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050

PKM = Passenger-kilometre

LIFECYCLE CO2 EMISSIONS FROM INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE VEHICLES ICEV VS ELECTRIC VEHICLES EV NOTE: PKM DENOTES PASSENGER-KILOMETRES EHIBIT 52 g CO2 PER CAR-KM SOURCE: MATERIALS ECONOMICS ANALYSIS

216 167 37

Although the focus of this report is on materials use from factors such as traffic9% congestion, air pollution and and associated CO2 emissions, the main motivation for collisions. Although the pace of change will depend such a system is the much wider productivity opportunity on many factors, not least travellers’ expectations and Källa till diagrammet that it represents. We calculate that the cost per pas58%- norms about car ownership, it is clear that the benefits nns i PowerPoint senger-kilometre could be as much as 77% lower than of achieving a mobility system based on shared cars that of individuallyUSE PHASE owned cars.77% Major externalities could would be very large – contributing to economic produc- be reduced by three-quarters, including major costs tivity as well as climate goals. 91%

42% PRODUCTION 23% AND MATERIALS 118 ICEV EV, CURRENT ENERGY EV, RENEWABLE MI EUROPE ENERGY

Note: Emissions calculated per car kilometre for the large vehicle segment with an average weight of 1528 kg over a lifetime of 180,000 km.

PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS MATERIALS INTENSITY OF TRANSPORT TONNES MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS REQUIRED TONNES MATERIALS TO ENABLE TRAVEL

1 REDUCE WEIGHT PER VEHICLE 3 SHARING MATERIALS INPUTS REUIRED EHIBIT 53 Lower average vehicle size in a shared Large increase in utilisation in a TO SUPPORT MOBILITY car system, better matching vehicles to shared-car system Large reduction in total amount of materials actual trip needs Higher occupancy per vehicle with that must be produced for useful travel Advanced design and materials choices mobility as a service (materials per passenger kilometres)

2 REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING 4 LONGER LIFESPANS Reduced waste in vehicles production X More intensive use increases incentives = Modular design and replacement of for durable design components with limited lifetime Electric drivetrains with intrinsically Increased re-use of durable components better durability at end-of-life Proactive maintenance of eet-managed Controls over inventory and ows in a vehicles eet-managed system of shared cars Modular design to enable replacement of components with shorter lifespans

1 3 5 TRAVEL DEMAND CAR OWNERSHIP CAR WEIGHT TRILLION PASSENGER-KM BY CAR PER YEAR CARS PER CAPITA, EU28 TONNES PER CAR EHIBIT 54

47 057 139 45 053 134

2005 2015 2005 2015 2005 2015 2 4 6 OCCUPANCY PER CAR CAR LIFETIME SCRAP IN CAR MANUFACTURING CAR OCCUPANCY (PASSENGER PER CAR), UK CAR KM PER CAR DURING LIFETIME % SCRAPPED MATERIALS

157 156 170 140 40%

2005 2015 2006 2013

DOWNGRADING AND COPPER MIING OF STEEL PREVENTION OF PLASTICS RECYCLING

EHIBIT 55 ONLY 8% OF STEEL RECYCLED FROM VEHICLES HIGHVALUE RECYCLING IS NOT FEASIBLE FOR CAN BE USED AS MATERIALS FOR NEW CARS A LARGE SHARE OF VEHICLE PLASTIC VOLUMES Shredding of vehicles mixes copper with steel which is Current practices leaves plastics in a mixed fraction a serious long term contaminant of the steel stock that often is land lled / incinerated Alloys are not separated, leading to lost values of alloy Material substitution for lightweighting leads to bre metals, waste of critical materials, and downcycling of reinforced plastics that contaminates other plastics ows steel and that is dicult to recycle

Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint DOWNGRADING OF ALUMINIUM LIMITED RECYCLING OF RARE CRITICAL METALS

MIING OF ALUMINIUM ALLOYS RESULTS IN ENDOFLIFE VEHICLES LEADS TO LARGE LOSSES DOWNGRADING OF WROUGHT ALUMINIUM OF CRITICAL METALS AUTO PARTS Rare critical metals can make up 1% of total vehicle materials Cars make up >40% of cast aluminium demand, a key Only eight out of 25 scarce metals are recycled, with ‘sink’ for aluminium recycling the remainder lost to carrier metals, construction and Aluminium used in cars is downgraded when mixed back lling materials and land lls with cast aluminium, precluding other uses

EHIBIT 56 FROM: AN OWNED CAR ECONOMY TO: A SHARED CAR ECONOMY

A FUNDAMENTAL SHIFT IN E ective utilisation of a typical European Cars shared and operated in eets increase OWNERSHIP AND OPERATING car is 2%, reecting the needs of individual both utilisation and occupancy per car MODEL car owners High utilisation dramatically changes Slow adoption of capital intensive incentives for durability, maintenance, technologies (such as autonomous drive and re-use, as well as a range of more electric drivetrains) due to high investment capital-intensive solutions cost and low utilisation

CARS DESIGNED AND LIFETIME OF 12 YEARS OR 230,000 KM, LIFETIME INCREASED TO 700,000 KM, MATCHING MANAGED FOR RUNTIME MATCHING THE NEEDS OF INDIVIDUAL OWNERS THE NEEDS OF INTENSIVELY USED VEHICLES Low utilisation places limits on up-front Electric drivetrains with intrinsically investment and on bene ts of longer lifetime longer lifetime Investments in more durable materials Limited maintenance, and disconnect (more attractive for highly utilised cars) between end-of-life vehicles and rst owners Proactive maintenance and modular design enable re-manufacturing

MATERIALS IMPACT LOW UTILISATION, HIGH WEIGHT, AND LIMITED RANGE OF SIZES, ADVANCED MATERIALS, AND MINIMISED LIFETIME RESULTS IN HIGH MATERIALS INTENSITY AUTONOMOUS DRIVING REDUCE FOOTPRINT Cars weigh 1.4 tonnes, as each vehicle Smaller average size adapted to needs of needs carry ve seats and have high each trip safety standard Fleet management and more expensive materials incentivise re-use of parts and EOL recovery

EHIBIT 57 MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS MATERIALS INTENSITY OF TRANSPORT TONNES NEW MATERIALS CARS PER MILLION PKM TONNES MATERIALS PER MILLION PKM

12 26 32

88% X = 06

06

04

OWNED CAR SHARED CAR OWNED CAR SHARED CAR OWNED CAR SHARED CAR

2050 FLEET AVERAGE IN A BASELINE VS CIRCULAR SCENARIO

EHIBIT 58 PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS TONNES MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS

REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING LIGHTWEIGHTING PROLONGED LIFETIME SHARING % OF INPUT MATERIALS TONNES PER CAR, FLEET AVERAGE 1000 CAR KM PER CAR PASSENGERS PER CAR

13 450 193 5% 11% 163 09 re-manufacturing 280 eller remanufacturing?

BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO

REMANUFACTURED COMPONENTS NEW MATERIALS

CARBON DIOIDE EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS USED IN EU PASSENGER CARS, 2050 Mt CO2, PER YEAR

EHIBIT 59 11 60 4 9 million tonnes 49 eller 21 Mt?

70%

9

18

CURRENT VOLUME BASELINE REUSE AND LIGHT LONGER SHARING CIRCULAR INCREASE SCENARIO 2050 REMANUFACTURING WEIGHTING LIFETIME SCENARIO 2050

COST REDUCTION POTENTIAL EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES EHIBIT 510 155

MATERIAL INPUT KEY DRIVERS OF LOWER COST OF OWNERSHIP

SHARING Higher utilisation per car together with reduced cost through autonomous car eets lower costs per kilometre PARTS CAR MANUFACTURING PROLONGED LIFETIME Reduced total cost per kilometre despite increased cost for input materials 77% DISTRIBUTION AND MS LIGHTWEIGHTING Smaller average cars in shared eets reduce materials input and total cost, despite increased cost for lightweight materials FUELENERGY REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING Larger share reduces input materials and average cost of materials, modular design makes maintenance cheaper

MAINTENANCE

35

CAPITAL COST, INSURANCE, PARKING

CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO 2050

ETERNALITIES AND PUBLIC COSTS OF CAR TRANSPORTATION EHIBIT 511 EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES

264

REDUCED ETERNALITIES AND PUBLIC COST

REDUCED NUMBER OF CARS Due to higher occupancy and increased utilisation result in improved air quality, reduced noise level, less WAITING TIME congestion and less need for inner-city parking AUTONOMOUS AND CONNECTED CARS Are safer, reduce need for signs, lanes and other 74% infrastructure and can optimise trac ows, which reduces congestion and land use for roads

ELECTRIC VEHICLES ACCIDENTS Reduce noise level and have positive impact on air quality, especially when shifting towards renewable AIR POLLUTION energy sources NOISE

INFRASTRUCTURE 68

PARKING COSTS

LAND

CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO 2050

MAOR SHIFT OF INNOVATION FOCUS EHIBIT 512 FROM MAXIMIZING UPFRONT SALES VOLUME AND PRICE, TO MAKING THE CAR A WELL-FUNCTIONING EFFECTIVE PART OF URBAN MOBILITY

Rubriken utgår ifrån att Sharing har positiva INNOVATION SHARING OTHER EFFECTS CIRCULARITY STRATEGIES eekter/för nya innovationer

Jag förstår det som att “Fleet management..” motsvarar Sharing i diagrammet? Och är därför central, dom NEW BUSINESS MODELS esta pilarna (7) utgår ifrån “Fleet management” och ger To suit new customer groups: eekter på de andra områderna cars better integrated with public transport system, pricing to adapt to demand and local geography CAR SHARING Becomes more attractive with autonomous and electric vehicles CAR SIZES - Är det så?? AUTONOMOUS CARS En del av “Higher utilisation Variation in car sizes (not all cars Becomes cost worthy per car” i diagrammet. need to be designed for 5 passengers) - Svår att få in LIGHTEWIGHTING

FLEET LUDDE DEN HR BEHVER HIGHER MANAGEMENT OCKS LITE KRLEK UTILISATION NEW VEHICLE DESIGN PER CAR Professional car FRENKLA GRNA S More durable materials CAR SHARING owners MYCKET SOM MLIGT, + modular design for quick HR AV DIG OM DU BEHVER Becomes more attractive repair and upgradeability FRKLARING with autonomous and electric vehicles PROLONGED LIFETIME

ongoing... ELECTRIC VEHICLES PROACTIVE Are more pro table with Maintenance more miles

REMANUFACTURING OF PARTS AND RECYCLING (new vehicle design makes MORE PREDICTIVE EoL value higher) EoL ows

EHIBIT 512 CIRCULARITY STRATEGIES OTHER EFFECTS

version 1 - FEL NEW BUSINESS MODELS To suit new customer groups: cars better integrated with public transport system, pricing to adapt to demand and local geography

CAR SIZES AUTONOMOUS CARS Variation in car sizes (not all cars Becomes cost worthy need to be designed for 5 passengers) LIGHTEWIGHTING

HIGHER NEW VEHICLE DESIGN UTILISATION PER CAR More durable materials + modular design for quick repair and upgradeability FLEET MANAGEMENT Professional car owners PROLONGED LIFETIME

ELECTRIC VEHICLES PROACTIVE Are more pro table with Maintenance more miles

REMANUFACTURING OF PARTS AND RECYCLING (new vehicle design makes MORE PREDICTIVE EoL value higher) EoL ows REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

UNDERSTANDING FUTURE MOBILITY NEEDS

In its 2011 White Paper on transportation, the Europe- In addition, today’s transport system has large impacts an Commission wrote: “Transport is fundamental to our on public health, well-being, and the environment. Road economy and society. Mobility is vital for the internal mar- traffic leads to local air pollution, traffic congestion, noise ket and for the quality of life of citizens as they enjoy their and accidents, and transport fuels are a major source of freedom to travel.” CO2 emissions. Car travel also depend on large public expenditure on infrastructure, and it claims valuable land For personal travel, mobility is overwhelmingly a story area. As we discuss below, these costs can in fact ex- of passenger cars. Despite the undoubted importance of ceed even the substantial direct costs of transport by public transport, cars account for 83% of land transporta- passenger car. tion in the EU. Passenger transport grew by 5% between 2004 and 2014, and the number of cars is growing faster These issues set the frame for the main focus of this stu- than the population. dy, which is the materials use associated with car trans- port. The average car contains 1.4 tonnes of materials, Cars are also major capital assets, both for households dominated by steel, aluminium and plastics. Still more and in the wider economy. The price of a new car is on materials are used in manufacturing, as it is not uncom- the same level as average annual household disposable mon that 40% of metals used are lost as scrap on the income. There are more than 250 million passenger cars factory floor. As a result, the automotive sector uses 25% in the EU with a replacement value of more than 5,700 of aluminium, 12% of steel, and 9% of plastics consumed billion EUR – twice as much as total investment in the en- in the EU. Car manufacturing has also been a major force tire EU28 economy in a year. Adding the running costs of behind materials development, from new applications of fuel, maintenance, insurance and more, total expenditure aluminium, to high-strength steel, to reinforced plastics on driving takes up some 13% of household disposable and carbon fibre. At end of life, vehicles are also a major income in the EU. factor in materials recycling.

119 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

The circular economyopportunity for transportation is enabling the same distance and convenience of transport, but requiring much less input of materials.

120 CO2 IMPACT OF MATERIALS TOTAL COST OF OWNERSHIP ETERNALITIES AND COST TO SOCIETY Mt CO2 PER YEAR, EUROPE EUR PER 1000 PKM EUR PER 1000 PKM 60 155 264 EHIBIT 51

STEEL 70% 77% 74%

ALUMINIUM 18 68 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE35 PLASTICS

OTHER

BASELINE CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050 Exhibit 5.2SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050

Emissions from materials and production will bePKM = Passenger-kilometre

the main source of CO2 from future cars

LIFECYCLE CO2 EMISSIONS FROM INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE VEHICLES ICEV VS ELECTRIC VEHICLES EV EHIBIT 52 g CO2 PER CAR-KM

216 167 37 9%

Källa till diagrammet 58% nns i PowerPoint USE PHASE 77%

91%

42% PRODUCTION 23% AND MATERIALS

ICEV EV, CURRENT ENERGY EV, RENEWABLE MI EUROPE ENERGY

Note: Emissions calculated per car kilometre for the large vehicle segment with an average weight of 1528 kg over a lifetime of 180,000 km.

NOTES: THE DATA SHOW LIFECYCLE GREENHOUSE GAS EMISSIONS FROM PRODUCTION AND THE USE PHASE FOR A LARGE PASSENGER CAR WITH A LIFETIME DRIVING PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY SOURCE:CIRCULAR ELLINGSEN BUSINESS ET AL, MODELS 2016 MATERIALS INTENSITY OF TRANSPORT TONNES MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS REQUIRED TONNES MATERIALS TO ENABLE TRAVEL

As detailed1 REDUCE WEIGHTin the PERpreceding VEHICLE chapters of this3 SHARING report, Given the economic importanceMATERIALS of cars, INPUTS and REUIRED their lar- EHIBIT 53 the productionLower average of vehicle these size materialsin a shared leads to large CO2Large emis increase- in utilisationge share in a of materials use, TOit mattersSUPPORT greatlyMOBILITY how cars sions. carTo system, date, better analyses matching vehiclesof CO2 to emissions fromshared-car vehicles system are used. As discussed below,Large our reduction current in total model amount ofof materials car have focusedactual trip needson the use phase rather than on emissionsHigher occupancy perownership vehicle with and use is highlythat materials must be produced intensive: for useful travel large from materialsAdvanced design production and materials and choices manufacturing. Thismobility is unas a- servicevolumes of steel, aluminium,(materials plastics per passengerand other kilometres) materi- derstandable, as emissions from fuels account for 70% of als are required to achieve relatively little transportation total2 lifecycle REUSE AND emissions REMANUFACTURING of a typical car today (Exhibit4 LONGER 5.2). LIFESPANS benefit. The circular economy opportunity for transporta- However,Reduced as waste fuel in vehiclesemissions production are reducedX and eventuallyMore intensive use increasestion is incentives to improve =this, enabling the same distance and reach Modularzero, the design emissions and replacement from of materials becomefor durablethe re design- convenience of transport, but requiring much less input components with limited lifetime Electric drivetrains with intrinsically mainingIncreased obstacle re-use ofto durable CO2-free components transportation. In anbetter electric durability of materials. vehicleat usingend-of-life zero-carbon energy, almost all the remainingProactive maintenance of eet-managed emissionsControls come over inventory from vehicle and ows productionin a and materialsvehicles use. eet-managed system of shared cars Modular design to enable replacement of components with shorter lifespans

121

1 3 5 TRAVEL DEMAND CAR OWNERSHIP CAR WEIGHT TRILLION PASSENGER-KM BY CAR PER YEAR CARS PER CAPITA, EU28 TONNES PER CAR EHIBIT 54

47 057 139 45 053 134

2005 2015 2005 2015 2005 2015 2 4 6 OCCUPANCY PER CAR CAR LIFETIME SCRAP IN CAR MANUFACTURING CAR OCCUPANCY (PASSENGER PER CAR), UK CAR KM PER CAR DURING LIFETIME % SCRAPPED MATERIALS

157 156 170 140 40%

2005 2015 2006 2013

DOWNGRADING AND COPPER MIING OF STEEL PREVENTION OF PLASTICS RECYCLING

EHIBIT 55 ONLY 8% OF STEEL RECYCLED FROM VEHICLES HIGHVALUE RECYCLING IS NOT FEASIBLE FOR CAN BE USED AS MATERIALS FOR NEW CARS A LARGE SHARE OF VEHICLE PLASTIC VOLUMES Shredding of vehicles mixes copper with steel which is Current practices leaves plastics in a mixed fraction a serious long term contaminant of the steel stock that often is land lled / incinerated Alloys are not separated, leading to lost values of alloy Material substitution for lightweighting leads to bre metals, waste of critical materials, and downcycling of reinforced plastics that contaminates other plastics ows steel and that is dicult to recycle

Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint DOWNGRADING OF ALUMINIUM LIMITED RECYCLING OF RARE CRITICAL METALS

MIING OF ALUMINIUM ALLOYS RESULTS IN ENDOFLIFE VEHICLES LEADS TO LARGE LOSSES DOWNGRADING OF WROUGHT ALUMINIUM OF CRITICAL METALS AUTO PARTS Rare critical metals can make up 1% of total vehicle materials Cars make up >40% of cast aluminium demand, a key Only eight out of 25 scarce metals are recycled, with ‘sink’ for aluminium recycling the remainder lost to carrier metals, construction and Aluminium used in cars is downgraded when mixed back lling materials and land lls with cast aluminium, precluding other uses

EHIBIT 56 FROM: AN OWNED CAR ECONOMY TO: A SHARED CAR ECONOMY

A FUNDAMENTAL SHIFT IN E ective utilisation of a typical European Cars shared and operated in eets increase OWNERSHIP AND OPERATING car is 2%, reecting the needs of individual both utilisation and occupancy per car MODEL car owners High utilisation dramatically changes Slow adoption of capital intensive incentives for durability, maintenance, technologies (such as autonomous drive and re-use, as well as a range of more electric drivetrains) due to high investment capital-intensive solutions cost and low utilisation

CARS DESIGNED AND LIFETIME OF 12 YEARS OR 230,000 KM, LIFETIME INCREASED TO 700,000 KM, MATCHING MANAGED FOR RUNTIME MATCHING THE NEEDS OF INDIVIDUAL OWNERS THE NEEDS OF INTENSIVELY USED VEHICLES Low utilisation places limits on up-front Electric drivetrains with intrinsically investment and on bene ts of longer lifetime longer lifetime Investments in more durable materials Limited maintenance, and disconnect (more attractive for highly utilised cars) between end-of-life vehicles and rst owners Proactive maintenance and modular design enable re-manufacturing

MATERIALS IMPACT LOW UTILISATION, HIGH WEIGHT, AND LIMITED RANGE OF SIZES, ADVANCED MATERIALS, AND MINIMISED LIFETIME RESULTS IN HIGH MATERIALS INTENSITY AUTONOMOUS DRIVING REDUCE FOOTPRINT Cars weigh 1.4 tonnes, as each vehicle Smaller average size adapted to needs of needs carry ve seats and have high each trip safety standard Fleet management and more expensive materials incentivise re-use of parts and EOL recovery

EHIBIT 57 MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS MATERIALS INTENSITY OF TRANSPORT TONNES NEW MATERIALS CARS PER MILLION PKM TONNES MATERIALS PER MILLION PKM

12 26 32

88% X = 06

06

04

OWNED CAR SHARED CAR OWNED CAR SHARED CAR OWNED CAR SHARED CAR

2050 FLEET AVERAGE IN A BASELINE VS CIRCULAR SCENARIO

EHIBIT 58 PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS TONNES MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS

REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING LIGHTWEIGHTING PROLONGED LIFETIME SHARING % OF INPUT MATERIALS TONNES PER CAR, FLEET AVERAGE 1000 CAR KM PER CAR PASSENGERS PER CAR

13 450 193 5% 11% 163 09 re-manufacturing 280 eller remanufacturing?

BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO

REMANUFACTURED COMPONENTS NEW MATERIALS

CARBON DIOIDE EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS USED IN EU PASSENGER CARS, 2050 Mt CO2, PER YEAR

EHIBIT 59 11 60 4 9 million tonnes 49 eller 21 Mt?

70%

9

18

CURRENT VOLUME BASELINE REUSE AND LIGHT LONGER SHARING CIRCULAR INCREASE SCENARIO 2050 REMANUFACTURING WEIGHTING LIFETIME SCENARIO 2050

COST REDUCTION POTENTIAL EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES EHIBIT 510 155

MATERIAL INPUT KEY DRIVERS OF LOWER COST OF OWNERSHIP

SHARING Higher utilisation per car together with reduced cost through autonomous car eets lower costs per kilometre PARTS CAR MANUFACTURING PROLONGED LIFETIME Reduced total cost per kilometre despite increased cost for input materials 77% DISTRIBUTION AND MS LIGHTWEIGHTING Smaller average cars in shared eets reduce materials input and total cost, despite increased cost for lightweight materials FUELENERGY REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING Larger share reduces input materials and average cost of materials, modular design makes maintenance cheaper

MAINTENANCE

35

CAPITAL COST, INSURANCE, PARKING

CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO 2050

ETERNALITIES AND PUBLIC COSTS OF CAR TRANSPORTATION EHIBIT 511 EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES

264

REDUCED ETERNALITIES AND PUBLIC COST

REDUCED NUMBER OF CARS Due to higher occupancy and increased utilisation result in improved air quality, reduced noise level, less WAITING TIME congestion and less need for inner-city parking AUTONOMOUS AND CONNECTED CARS Are safer, reduce need for signs, lanes and other 74% infrastructure and can optimise trac ows, which reduces congestion and land use for roads

ELECTRIC VEHICLES ACCIDENTS Reduce noise level and have positive impact on air quality, especially when shifting towards renewable AIR POLLUTION energy sources NOISE

INFRASTRUCTURE 68

PARKING COSTS

LAND

CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO 2050

MAOR SHIFT OF INNOVATION FOCUS EHIBIT 512 FROM MAXIMIZING UPFRONT SALES VOLUME AND PRICE, TO MAKING THE CAR A WELL-FUNCTIONING EFFECTIVE PART OF URBAN MOBILITY

Rubriken utgår ifrån att Sharing har positiva INNOVATION SHARING OTHER EFFECTS CIRCULARITY STRATEGIES eekter/för nya innovationer

Jag förstår det som att “Fleet management..” motsvarar Sharing i diagrammet? Och är därför central, dom NEW BUSINESS MODELS esta pilarna (7) utgår ifrån “Fleet management” och ger To suit new customer groups: eekter på de andra områderna cars better integrated with public transport system, pricing to adapt to demand and local geography CAR SHARING Becomes more attractive with autonomous and electric vehicles CAR SIZES - Är det så?? AUTONOMOUS CARS En del av “Higher utilisation Variation in car sizes (not all cars Becomes cost worthy per car” i diagrammet. need to be designed for 5 passengers) - Svår att få in LIGHTEWIGHTING

FLEET LUDDE DEN HR BEHVER HIGHER MANAGEMENT OCKS LITE KRLEK UTILISATION NEW VEHICLE DESIGN PER CAR Professional car FRENKLA GRNA S More durable materials CAR SHARING owners MYCKET SOM MLIGT, + modular design for quick HR AV DIG OM DU BEHVER Becomes more attractive repair and upgradeability FRKLARING with autonomous and electric vehicles PROLONGED LIFETIME

ongoing... ELECTRIC VEHICLES PROACTIVE Are more pro table with Maintenance more miles

REMANUFACTURING OF PARTS AND RECYCLING (new vehicle design makes MORE PREDICTIVE EoL value higher) EoL ows

EHIBIT 512 CIRCULARITY STRATEGIES OTHER EFFECTS

version 1 - FEL NEW BUSINESS MODELS To suit new customer groups: cars better integrated with public transport system, pricing to adapt to demand and local geography

CAR SIZES AUTONOMOUS CARS Variation in car sizes (not all cars Becomes cost worthy need to be designed for 5 passengers) LIGHTEWIGHTING

HIGHER NEW VEHICLE DESIGN UTILISATION PER CAR More durable materials + modular design for quick repair and upgradeability FLEET MANAGEMENT Professional car owners PROLONGED LIFETIME

ELECTRIC VEHICLES PROACTIVE Are more pro table with Maintenance more miles

REMANUFACTURING OF PARTS AND RECYCLING (new vehicle design makes MORE PREDICTIVE EoL value higher) EoL ows CO2 IMPACT OF MATERIALS TOTAL COST OF OWNERSHIP ETERNALITIES AND COST TO SOCIETY Mt CO2 PER YEAR, EUROPE EUR PER 1000 PKM EUR PER 1000 PKM 60 155 264 EHIBIT 51

STEEL 70% 77% 74%

ALUMINIUM 18 68 35 PLASTICS

OTHER

BASELINE CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050

PKM = Passenger-kilometre

REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

LIFECYCLE CO2 EMISSIONS FROM INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE VEHICLES ICEV VS ELECTRIC VEHICLES EV EHIBIT 52 THE gCIRCULAR CO2 PER CAR-KM ECONOMY OPPORTUNITY IN MOBILITY In previous chapters, the focus was on the potential In the case of passenger cars, the relevant ‘service’ is 216 167 37 of materials recycling to replace new production of ma- mobility, best measured in ‘passenger-kilometres’ (Exhibit terials such as steel, plastics and aluminium. However, 5.3). Materials efficiency9% for cars centres primarily on two the opportunities for a circular economy also encom- opportunities: reducing the average weight of each car, and pass many strategies that focus on the products them- reducing the input of materials by reducing scrap in manu- selves. By reducing the amount of material required for facturing and increasing reuse and remanufacturing. Two Källa till diagrammet 58% nns i PowerPoint each product, materials efficiency can increase. Then, additional opportunities are central to providing more use- by ensuringUSE that PHASE each product77% provides more useful ful travel with each vehicle: increased sharing to increase services, the resource claims can be reduced even the utilisation and occupancy of each vehicle, and longer further. lifespans to make it possible91% for each car to serve a greater number of passenger-kilometres once produced.

42% PRODUCTION 23% AND MATERIALS

ICEV EVE,xhibit CURRENT ENERGY5.3 EV, RENEWABLE MI EUROPE ENERGY Four circular economy strategies can sharply reduce Note: Emissions calculated per car kilometre for the large vehicle segment the materials requirementswith an average weight of of mobility 1528 kg over a lifetime of 180,000 km.

PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS MATERIALS INTENSITY OF TRANSPORT TONNES MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS REQUIRED TONNES MATERIALS TO ENABLE TRAVEL

1 REDUCE WEIGHT PER VEHICLE 3 SHARING MATERIALS INPUTS REUIRED EHIBIT 53 Lower average vehicle size in a shared Large increase in utilisation in a TO SUPPORT MOBILITY car system, better matching vehicles to shared-car system Large reduction in total amount of materials actual trip needs Higher occupancy per vehicle with that must be produced for useful travel Advanced design and materials choices mobility as a service (materials per passenger kilometres)

2 REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING 4 LONGER LIFESPANS Reduced waste in vehicles production X More intensive use increases incentives = Modular design and replacement of for durable design components with limited lifetime Electric drivetrains with intrinsically Increased re-use of durable components better durability at end-of-life Proactive maintenance of eet-managed Controls over inventory and ows in a vehicles eet-managed system of shared cars Modular design to enable replacement of components with shorter lifespans

1 3 5 TRAVEL DEMAND CAR OWNERSHIP CAR WEIGHT TRILLION PASSENGER-KM BY CAR PER YEAR CARS PER CAPITA, EU28 TONNES PER CAR EHIBIT 54

47 122 057 139 45 053 134

2005 2015 2005 2015 2005 2015 2 4 6 OCCUPANCY PER CAR CAR LIFETIME SCRAP IN CAR MANUFACTURING CAR OCCUPANCY (PASSENGER PER CAR), UK CAR KM PER CAR DURING LIFETIME % SCRAPPED MATERIALS

157 156 170 140 40%

2005 2015 2006 2013

DOWNGRADING AND COPPER MIING OF STEEL PREVENTION OF PLASTICS RECYCLING

EHIBIT 55 ONLY 8% OF STEEL RECYCLED FROM VEHICLES HIGHVALUE RECYCLING IS NOT FEASIBLE FOR CAN BE USED AS MATERIALS FOR NEW CARS A LARGE SHARE OF VEHICLE PLASTIC VOLUMES Shredding of vehicles mixes copper with steel which is Current practices leaves plastics in a mixed fraction a serious long term contaminant of the steel stock that often is land lled / incinerated Alloys are not separated, leading to lost values of alloy Material substitution for lightweighting leads to bre metals, waste of critical materials, and downcycling of reinforced plastics that contaminates other plastics ows steel and that is dicult to recycle

Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint DOWNGRADING OF ALUMINIUM LIMITED RECYCLING OF RARE CRITICAL METALS

MIING OF ALUMINIUM ALLOYS RESULTS IN ENDOFLIFE VEHICLES LEADS TO LARGE LOSSES DOWNGRADING OF WROUGHT ALUMINIUM OF CRITICAL METALS AUTO PARTS Rare critical metals can make up 1% of total vehicle materials Cars make up >40% of cast aluminium demand, a key Only eight out of 25 scarce metals are recycled, with ‘sink’ for aluminium recycling the remainder lost to carrier metals, construction and Aluminium used in cars is downgraded when mixed back lling materials and land lls with cast aluminium, precluding other uses

EHIBIT 56 FROM: AN OWNED CAR ECONOMY TO: A SHARED CAR ECONOMY

A FUNDAMENTAL SHIFT IN E ective utilisation of a typical European Cars shared and operated in eets increase OWNERSHIP AND OPERATING car is 2%, reecting the needs of individual both utilisation and occupancy per car MODEL car owners High utilisation dramatically changes Slow adoption of capital intensive incentives for durability, maintenance, technologies (such as autonomous drive and re-use, as well as a range of more electric drivetrains) due to high investment capital-intensive solutions cost and low utilisation

CARS DESIGNED AND LIFETIME OF 12 YEARS OR 230,000 KM, LIFETIME INCREASED TO 700,000 KM, MATCHING MANAGED FOR RUNTIME MATCHING THE NEEDS OF INDIVIDUAL OWNERS THE NEEDS OF INTENSIVELY USED VEHICLES Low utilisation places limits on up-front Electric drivetrains with intrinsically investment and on bene ts of longer lifetime longer lifetime Investments in more durable materials Limited maintenance, and disconnect (more attractive for highly utilised cars) between end-of-life vehicles and rst owners Proactive maintenance and modular design enable re-manufacturing

MATERIALS IMPACT LOW UTILISATION, HIGH WEIGHT, AND LIMITED RANGE OF SIZES, ADVANCED MATERIALS, AND MINIMISED LIFETIME RESULTS IN HIGH MATERIALS INTENSITY AUTONOMOUS DRIVING REDUCE FOOTPRINT Cars weigh 1.4 tonnes, as each vehicle Smaller average size adapted to needs of needs carry ve seats and have high each trip safety standard Fleet management and more expensive materials incentivise re-use of parts and EOL recovery

EHIBIT 57 MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS MATERIALS INTENSITY OF TRANSPORT TONNES NEW MATERIALS CARS PER MILLION PKM TONNES MATERIALS PER MILLION PKM

12 26 32

88% X = 06

06

04

OWNED CAR SHARED CAR OWNED CAR SHARED CAR OWNED CAR SHARED CAR

2050 FLEET AVERAGE IN A BASELINE VS CIRCULAR SCENARIO

EHIBIT 58 PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS TONNES MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS

REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING LIGHTWEIGHTING PROLONGED LIFETIME SHARING % OF INPUT MATERIALS TONNES PER CAR, FLEET AVERAGE 1000 CAR KM PER CAR PASSENGERS PER CAR

13 450 193 5% 11% 163 09 re-manufacturing 280 eller remanufacturing?

BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO

REMANUFACTURED COMPONENTS NEW MATERIALS

CARBON DIOIDE EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS USED IN EU PASSENGER CARS, 2050 Mt CO2, PER YEAR

EHIBIT 59 11 60 4 9 million tonnes 49 eller 21 Mt?

70%

9

18

CURRENT VOLUME BASELINE REUSE AND LIGHT LONGER SHARING CIRCULAR INCREASE SCENARIO 2050 REMANUFACTURING WEIGHTING LIFETIME SCENARIO 2050

COST REDUCTION POTENTIAL EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES EHIBIT 510 155

MATERIAL INPUT KEY DRIVERS OF LOWER COST OF OWNERSHIP

SHARING Higher utilisation per car together with reduced cost through autonomous car eets lower costs per kilometre PARTS CAR MANUFACTURING PROLONGED LIFETIME Reduced total cost per kilometre despite increased cost for input materials 77% DISTRIBUTION AND MS LIGHTWEIGHTING Smaller average cars in shared eets reduce materials input and total cost, despite increased cost for lightweight materials FUELENERGY REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING Larger share reduces input materials and average cost of materials, modular design makes maintenance cheaper

MAINTENANCE

35

CAPITAL COST, INSURANCE, PARKING

CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO 2050

ETERNALITIES AND PUBLIC COSTS OF CAR TRANSPORTATION EHIBIT 511 EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES

264

REDUCED ETERNALITIES AND PUBLIC COST

REDUCED NUMBER OF CARS Due to higher occupancy and increased utilisation result in improved air quality, reduced noise level, less WAITING TIME congestion and less need for inner-city parking AUTONOMOUS AND CONNECTED CARS Are safer, reduce need for signs, lanes and other 74% infrastructure and can optimise trac ows, which reduces congestion and land use for roads

ELECTRIC VEHICLES ACCIDENTS Reduce noise level and have positive impact on air quality, especially when shifting towards renewable AIR POLLUTION energy sources NOISE

INFRASTRUCTURE 68

PARKING COSTS

LAND

CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO 2050

MAOR SHIFT OF INNOVATION FOCUS EHIBIT 512 FROM MAXIMIZING UPFRONT SALES VOLUME AND PRICE, TO MAKING THE CAR A WELL-FUNCTIONING EFFECTIVE PART OF URBAN MOBILITY

Rubriken utgår ifrån att Sharing har positiva INNOVATION SHARING OTHER EFFECTS CIRCULARITY STRATEGIES eekter/för nya innovationer

Jag förstår det som att “Fleet management..” motsvarar Sharing i diagrammet? Och är därför central, dom NEW BUSINESS MODELS esta pilarna (7) utgår ifrån “Fleet management” och ger To suit new customer groups: eekter på de andra områderna cars better integrated with public transport system, pricing to adapt to demand and local geography CAR SHARING Becomes more attractive with autonomous and electric vehicles CAR SIZES - Är det så?? AUTONOMOUS CARS En del av “Higher utilisation Variation in car sizes (not all cars Becomes cost worthy per car” i diagrammet. need to be designed for 5 passengers) - Svår att få in LIGHTEWIGHTING

FLEET LUDDE DEN HR BEHVER HIGHER MANAGEMENT OCKS LITE KRLEK UTILISATION NEW VEHICLE DESIGN PER CAR Professional car FRENKLA GRNA S More durable materials CAR SHARING owners MYCKET SOM MLIGT, + modular design for quick HR AV DIG OM DU BEHVER Becomes more attractive repair and upgradeability FRKLARING with autonomous and electric vehicles PROLONGED LIFETIME

ongoing... ELECTRIC VEHICLES PROACTIVE Are more pro table with Maintenance more miles

REMANUFACTURING OF PARTS AND RECYCLING (new vehicle design makes MORE PREDICTIVE EoL value higher) EoL ows

EHIBIT 512 CIRCULARITY STRATEGIES OTHER EFFECTS

version 1 - FEL NEW BUSINESS MODELS To suit new customer groups: cars better integrated with public transport system, pricing to adapt to demand and local geography

CAR SIZES AUTONOMOUS CARS Variation in car sizes (not all cars Becomes cost worthy need to be designed for 5 passengers) LIGHTEWIGHTING

HIGHER NEW VEHICLE DESIGN UTILISATION PER CAR More durable materials + modular design for quick repair and upgradeability FLEET MANAGEMENT Professional car owners PROLONGED LIFETIME

ELECTRIC VEHICLES PROACTIVE Are more pro table with Maintenance more miles

REMANUFACTURING OF PARTS AND RECYCLING (new vehicle design makes MORE PREDICTIVE EoL value higher) EoL ows REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

By ensuring that each product provides more useful services, the resource claims can be reduced even further.

123 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

THE CURRENT STATE OF CIRCULARITY IN MOBILITY: POTENTIAL WAITING TO BE UNLEASHED

Our current use of cars is highly wasteful. For all the Why is the picture so bleak? Unsurprisingly, there are economic importance of passenger cars, they are used powerful reasons for the current situation, rooted in the very little. Cars are parked for 92% of daylight hours, model of individual car ownership. Individually owned cars and when in use, only 1.5 of the typical five seats are must be able to serve each household’s peak travel needs. occupied . The overall utilisation rate thus is 2% – an ex- They serve relatively low annual travel needs, are maintai- tremely low number compared to other assets of similar ned in households’ leisure time, and are used only when economic importance. Utilisation matters: the current si- individuals in each household need to travel. tuation amounts to locking in a large store of value and embodied CO2 but getting only a low level of benefit in The case of vehicle lifetimes provides perhaps the clea- return. rest example of why this model of ownership and operation limits circularity. Cars are driven some 200,000 km before Summarising the current trends, there is at best slow being scrapped, but as each car is driven a relatively short movement towards reducing cars’ claims on resources distance, it takes many years to get to that point. The aver- (Exhibit 5.4). As noted above, total travel demand is age lifetime of all cars in use is more than 10 years, and increasing in the EU, and the number of cars is growing vehicles are on average 14 years old when scrapped. Any faster than the population, leading to lower rather than improvement to lifetime is therefore felt only long after pur- higher utilisation for each vehicle. Although there have chase, too far off to justify a higher price, and also of limited been major efforts to reduce vehicle weight to lower fuel benefit to users (as cars 15–20 years old would be out of consumption and to comply with emissions regulations, date, lagging behind in technology, safety and design). Even the total weight of vehicles is rising rather than falling. incremental change is difficult, mainly a by-product of impro- As noted, manufacturing remains wasteful, with 40% or ving reliability. A step-change in lifetime, on the other hand, more of metals lost as manufacturing scrap. There is is all but precluded by the current ownership model: cars de- also no discernible increase in the average occupancy signed and maintained to last for, say, 500,000 km would be of individual vehicles. Car lifetime is the main area whe- 35 years old when finally scrapped. There would be little or re there is some improvement, as cars last for around no consumer demand for such vehicles. The main lesson is 20% more kilometres of travel today than they did 10 that today’s more limited car lifetime is no absolute, technical years ago. limitation, but follows from the low rate of utilisation.

124 CO2 IMPACT OF MATERIALS TOTAL COST OF OWNERSHIP ETERNALITIES AND COST TO SOCIETY Mt CO2 PER YEAR, EUROPE EUR PER 1000 PKM EUR PER 1000 PKM 60 155 264 EHIBIT 51

STEEL 70% 77% 74%

ALUMINIUM 18 68 35 PLASTICS

OTHER

BASELINE CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050

PKM = Passenger-kilometre

LIFECYCLE CO2 EMISSIONS FROM INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE VEHICLES ICEV VS ELECTRIC VEHICLES EV EHIBIT 52 g CO2 PER CAR-KM

216 167 37 9%

Källa till diagrammet 58% nns i PowerPoint USE PHASE 77%

91%

42% PRODUCTION 23% AND MATERIALS

ICEV EV, CURRENT ENERGY EV, RENEWABLE MI EUROPE ENERGY

Note: Emissions calculated per car kilometre for the large vehicle segment with an average weight of 1528 kg over a lifetime of 180,000 km.

PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS MATERIALS INTENSITY OF TRANSPORT TONNES MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS REQUIRED TONNES MATERIALS TO ENABLE TRAVEL

1 REDUCE WEIGHT PER VEHICLE 3 SHARING MATERIALS INPUTS REUIRED EHIBIT 53 Lower average vehicle size in a shared Large increase in utilisation in a TO SUPPORT MOBILITY car system, better matching vehicles to REVIEWshared-car DRAFT system – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE Large reduction in total amount of materials actual trip needs Higher occupancy per vehicle with that must be produced for useful travel Advanced design and materials choices mobility as a service (materials per passenger kilometres)

2 REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING 4 LONGER LIFESPANS Reduced waste in vehicles production X More intensive use increases incentives = Modular design and replacement of for durable design components with limited lifetime Electric drivetrains with intrinsically Increased re-use of durable components better durabilityExhibit 5.4 at end-of-life Proactive maintenance of eet-managed Controls over inventory and ows in a vehicles eet-managed system of shared cars Modular design to enable replacement Current trendsof components see with little shorter lifespans improvement in the materials intensity of EU mobility

1 3 5 TRAVEL DEMAND CAR OWNERSHIP CAR WEIGHT TRILLION PASSENGER-KM BY CAR PER YEAR CARS PER CAPITA, EU28 TONNES PER CAR EHIBIT 54

47 057 139 45 053 134

2005 2015 2005 2015 2005 2015 2 4 6 OCCUPANCY PER CAR CAR LIFETIME SCRAP IN CAR MANUFACTURING CAR OCCUPANCY (PASSENGER PER CAR), UK CAR KM PER CAR DURING LIFETIME % SCRAPPED MATERIALS

157 156 170 140 40%

2005 2015 2006 2013

DOWNGRADING AND COPPER MIING OF STEEL PREVENTION OF PLASTICS RECYCLING

EHIBIT 55 SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS ANALYSIS OF A RANGE OF SOURCES ONLY 8% OF STEEL RECYCLED FROM VEHICLES HIGHVALUE RECYCLING IS NOT FEASIBLE FOR CAN BE USED AS MATERIALS FOR NEW CARS A LARGE SHARE OF VEHICLE PLASTIC VOLUMES Shredding of vehicles mixes copper with steel which is 125 Current practices leaves plastics in a mixed fraction a serious long term contaminant of the steel stock that often is land lled / incinerated Alloys are not separated, leading to lost values of alloy Material substitution for lightweighting leads to bre metals, waste of critical materials, and downcycling of reinforced plastics that contaminates other plastics ows steel and that is dicult to recycle

Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint DOWNGRADING OF ALUMINIUM LIMITED RECYCLING OF RARE CRITICAL METALS

MIING OF ALUMINIUM ALLOYS RESULTS IN ENDOFLIFE VEHICLES LEADS TO LARGE LOSSES DOWNGRADING OF WROUGHT ALUMINIUM OF CRITICAL METALS AUTO PARTS Rare critical metals can make up 1% of total vehicle materials Cars make up >40% of cast aluminium demand, a key Only eight out of 25 scarce metals are recycled, with ‘sink’ for aluminium recycling the remainder lost to carrier metals, construction and Aluminium used in cars is downgraded when mixed back lling materials and land lls with cast aluminium, precluding other uses

EHIBIT 56 FROM: AN OWNED CAR ECONOMY TO: A SHARED CAR ECONOMY

A FUNDAMENTAL SHIFT IN E ective utilisation of a typical European Cars shared and operated in eets increase OWNERSHIP AND OPERATING car is 2%, reecting the needs of individual both utilisation and occupancy per car MODEL car owners High utilisation dramatically changes Slow adoption of capital intensive incentives for durability, maintenance, technologies (such as autonomous drive and re-use, as well as a range of more electric drivetrains) due to high investment capital-intensive solutions cost and low utilisation

CARS DESIGNED AND LIFETIME OF 12 YEARS OR 230,000 KM, LIFETIME INCREASED TO 700,000 KM, MATCHING MANAGED FOR RUNTIME MATCHING THE NEEDS OF INDIVIDUAL OWNERS THE NEEDS OF INTENSIVELY USED VEHICLES Low utilisation places limits on up-front Electric drivetrains with intrinsically investment and on bene ts of longer lifetime longer lifetime Investments in more durable materials Limited maintenance, and disconnect (more attractive for highly utilised cars) between end-of-life vehicles and rst owners Proactive maintenance and modular design enable re-manufacturing

MATERIALS IMPACT LOW UTILISATION, HIGH WEIGHT, AND LIMITED RANGE OF SIZES, ADVANCED MATERIALS, AND MINIMISED LIFETIME RESULTS IN HIGH MATERIALS INTENSITY AUTONOMOUS DRIVING REDUCE FOOTPRINT Cars weigh 1.4 tonnes, as each vehicle Smaller average size adapted to needs of needs carry ve seats and have high each trip safety standard Fleet management and more expensive materials incentivise re-use of parts and EOL recovery

EHIBIT 57 MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS MATERIALS INTENSITY OF TRANSPORT TONNES NEW MATERIALS CARS PER MILLION PKM TONNES MATERIALS PER MILLION PKM

12 26 32

88% X = 06

06

04

OWNED CAR SHARED CAR OWNED CAR SHARED CAR OWNED CAR SHARED CAR

2050 FLEET AVERAGE IN A BASELINE VS CIRCULAR SCENARIO

EHIBIT 58 PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS TONNES MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS

REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING LIGHTWEIGHTING PROLONGED LIFETIME SHARING % OF INPUT MATERIALS TONNES PER CAR, FLEET AVERAGE 1000 CAR KM PER CAR PASSENGERS PER CAR

13 450 193 5% 11% 163 09 re-manufacturing 280 eller remanufacturing?

BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO

REMANUFACTURED COMPONENTS NEW MATERIALS

CARBON DIOIDE EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS USED IN EU PASSENGER CARS, 2050 Mt CO2, PER YEAR

EHIBIT 59 11 60 4 9 million tonnes 49 eller 21 Mt?

70%

9

18

CURRENT VOLUME BASELINE REUSE AND LIGHT LONGER SHARING CIRCULAR INCREASE SCENARIO 2050 REMANUFACTURING WEIGHTING LIFETIME SCENARIO 2050

COST REDUCTION POTENTIAL EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES EHIBIT 510 155

MATERIAL INPUT KEY DRIVERS OF LOWER COST OF OWNERSHIP

SHARING Higher utilisation per car together with reduced cost through autonomous car eets lower costs per kilometre PARTS CAR MANUFACTURING PROLONGED LIFETIME Reduced total cost per kilometre despite increased cost for input materials 77% DISTRIBUTION AND MS LIGHTWEIGHTING Smaller average cars in shared eets reduce materials input and total cost, despite increased cost for lightweight materials FUELENERGY REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING Larger share reduces input materials and average cost of materials, modular design makes maintenance cheaper

MAINTENANCE

35

CAPITAL COST, INSURANCE, PARKING

CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO 2050

ETERNALITIES AND PUBLIC COSTS OF CAR TRANSPORTATION EHIBIT 511 EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES

264

REDUCED ETERNALITIES AND PUBLIC COST

REDUCED NUMBER OF CARS Due to higher occupancy and increased utilisation result in improved air quality, reduced noise level, less WAITING TIME congestion and less need for inner-city parking AUTONOMOUS AND CONNECTED CARS Are safer, reduce need for signs, lanes and other 74% infrastructure and can optimise trac ows, which reduces congestion and land use for roads

ELECTRIC VEHICLES ACCIDENTS Reduce noise level and have positive impact on air quality, especially when shifting towards renewable AIR POLLUTION energy sources NOISE

INFRASTRUCTURE 68

PARKING COSTS

LAND

CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO 2050

MAOR SHIFT OF INNOVATION FOCUS EHIBIT 512 FROM MAXIMIZING UPFRONT SALES VOLUME AND PRICE, TO MAKING THE CAR A WELL-FUNCTIONING EFFECTIVE PART OF URBAN MOBILITY

Rubriken utgår ifrån att Sharing har positiva INNOVATION SHARING OTHER EFFECTS CIRCULARITY STRATEGIES eekter/för nya innovationer

Jag förstår det som att “Fleet management..” motsvarar Sharing i diagrammet? Och är därför central, dom NEW BUSINESS MODELS esta pilarna (7) utgår ifrån “Fleet management” och ger To suit new customer groups: eekter på de andra områderna cars better integrated with public transport system, pricing to adapt to demand and local geography CAR SHARING Becomes more attractive with autonomous and electric vehicles CAR SIZES - Är det så?? AUTONOMOUS CARS En del av “Higher utilisation Variation in car sizes (not all cars Becomes cost worthy per car” i diagrammet. need to be designed for 5 passengers) - Svår att få in LIGHTEWIGHTING

FLEET LUDDE DEN HR BEHVER HIGHER MANAGEMENT OCKS LITE KRLEK UTILISATION NEW VEHICLE DESIGN PER CAR Professional car FRENKLA GRNA S More durable materials CAR SHARING owners MYCKET SOM MLIGT, + modular design for quick HR AV DIG OM DU BEHVER Becomes more attractive repair and upgradeability FRKLARING with autonomous and electric vehicles PROLONGED LIFETIME

ongoing... ELECTRIC VEHICLES PROACTIVE Are more pro table with Maintenance more miles

REMANUFACTURING OF PARTS AND RECYCLING (new vehicle design makes MORE PREDICTIVE EoL value higher) EoL ows

EHIBIT 512 CIRCULARITY STRATEGIES OTHER EFFECTS

version 1 - FEL NEW BUSINESS MODELS To suit new customer groups: cars better integrated with public transport system, pricing to adapt to demand and local geography

CAR SIZES AUTONOMOUS CARS Variation in car sizes (not all cars Becomes cost worthy need to be designed for 5 passengers) LIGHTEWIGHTING

HIGHER NEW VEHICLE DESIGN UTILISATION PER CAR More durable materials + modular design for quick repair and upgradeability FLEET MANAGEMENT Professional car owners PROLONGED LIFETIME

ELECTRIC VEHICLES PROACTIVE Are more pro table with Maintenance more miles

REMANUFACTURING OF PARTS AND RECYCLING (new vehicle design makes MORE PREDICTIVE EoL value higher) EoL ows CO2 IMPACT OF MATERIALS TOTAL COST OF OWNERSHIP ETERNALITIES AND COST TO SOCIETY Mt CO2 PER YEAR, EUROPE EUR PER 1000 PKM EUR PER 1000 PKM 60 155 264 EHIBIT 51

STEEL 70% 77% 74%

ALUMINIUM 18 68 35 PLASTICS

OTHER

BASELINE CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050

PKM = Passenger-kilometre

LIFECYCLE CO2 EMISSIONS FROM INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE VEHICLES ICEV VS ELECTRIC VEHICLES EV EHIBIT 52 g CO2 PER CAR-KM

216 167 37 9%

Källa till diagrammet 58% nns i PowerPoint USE PHASE 77%

91%

42% PRODUCTION 23% AND MATERIALS

ICEV EV, CURRENT ENERGY EV, RENEWABLE MI EUROPE ENERGY

Note: Emissions calculated per car kilometre for the large vehicle segment with an average weight of 1528 kg over a lifetime of 180,000 km.

PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS MATERIALS INTENSITY OF TRANSPORT TONNES MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS REQUIRED TONNES MATERIALS TO ENABLE TRAVEL

1 REDUCE WEIGHT PER VEHICLE 3 SHARING MATERIALS INPUTS REUIRED EHIBIT 53 Lower average vehicle size in a shared Large increase in utilisation in a TO SUPPORT MOBILITY car system, better matching vehicles to shared-car system Large reduction in total amount of materials actual trip needs Higher occupancy per vehicle with that must be produced for useful travel Advanced design and materials choices mobility as a service (materials per passenger kilometres)

2 REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING 4 LONGER LIFESPANS Reduced waste in vehicles production X More intensive use increases incentives = Modular design and replacement of for durable design components with limited lifetime Electric drivetrains with intrinsically Increased re-use of durable components better durability at end-of-life Proactive maintenance of eet-managed Controls over inventory and ows in a vehicles eet-managed system of shared cars Modular design to enable replacement of components with shorter lifespans

1 3 5 TRAVEL DEMAND CAR OWNERSHIP CAR WEIGHT TRILLION PASSENGER-KM BY CAR PER YEAR CARS PER CAPITA, EU28 TONNES PER CAR EHIBIT 54

47 057 139 45 053 134

REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

The current ownership model also creates a disconnect ed wrought aluminium products are mixed with highly alloy- between car manufacturing and the subsequent treatment of ed cast aluminium components when cars are dismantled, 2005 2015 2005 2015 2005 2015 cars at end of life. Recycling of end-of-life vehicles focuses and other, undesired metals are introduced to the aluminium primarily on avoiding the release of hazardous substances scrap. In the case of plastics, recycling tends to be limited to and2 recovering spare parts. Materials recovery is4 far less of a few, large pieces, but overall6 recovery rates are low. a concern. Although regulation now requires that most mate- rialsOCCUPANCY be recycled, PER theCAR process results in significantCAR LIFETIMEdegrada- For these reasons, theSCRAP scrapping IN CAR value MANUFACTURING of a car is close to tionCAR of OCCUPANCYquality and (PASSENGERloss of materials PER CAR), value UK (ExhibitCAR 5.5). KM PERThe CAR DURINGzero, even LIFETIME though just the% SCRAPPEDmajor raw MATERIALSmaterials that go into a steel in vehicles is often highly specialised, including highly car have a value of some 2,000–3,000 EUR. In many countri- alloyed varieties,157 but shredding156 results in scrap that is often es, cars are returned for recycling only after a delay, and many so contaminated and mixed that it is usable only for basic vehicles170 are not fully accounted for. Just as with extending lifeti- construction steels. By one estimate, only 8% of the steel140 re- me, however, there is little incentive for the manufacturer to en- cycled from vehicles is of a quality that it could be used again able higher-quality recycling of materials as long as that value for its original purpose. In the case of aluminium, low-alloy- accrues only 15 years in the future, 40%and then to another party. Exhibit 5.5 2005 2015 2006 2013 Cars are at the centre of key challenges to a more circular materials system

DOWNGRADING AND COPPER MIING OF STEEL PREVENTION OF PLASTICS RECYCLING

EHIBIT 55 ONLY 8% OF STEEL RECYCLED FROM VEHICLES HIGHVALUE RECYCLING IS NOT FEASIBLE FOR CAN BE USED AS MATERIALS FOR NEW CARS A LARGE SHARE OF VEHICLE PLASTIC VOLUMES Shredding of vehicles mixes copper with steel which is Current practices leaves plastics in a mixed fraction a serious long term contaminant of the steel stock that often is land lled / incinerated Alloys are not separated, leading to lost values of alloy Material substitution for lightweighting leads to bre metals, waste of critical materials, and downcycling of reinforced plastics that contaminates other plastics ows steel and that is dicult to recycle

Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint DOWNGRADING OF ALUMINIUM LIMITED RECYCLING OF RARE CRITICAL METALS

MIING OF ALUMINIUM ALLOYS RESULTS IN ENDOFLIFE VEHICLES LEADS TO LARGE LOSSES DOWNGRADING OF WROUGHT ALUMINIUM OF CRITICAL METALS AUTO PARTS Rare critical metals can make up 1% of total vehicle materials Cars make up >40% of cast aluminium demand, a key Only eight out of 25 scarce metals are recycled, with ‘sink’ for aluminium recycling the remainder lost to carrier metals, construction and Aluminium used in cars is downgraded when mixed back lling materials and land lls with cast aluminium, precluding other uses

SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS ANALYSIS BASED ON MULTIPLE SOURCES

126 EHIBIT 56 FROM: AN OWNED CAR ECONOMY TO: A SHARED CAR ECONOMY

A FUNDAMENTAL SHIFT IN E ective utilisation of a typical European Cars shared and operated in eets increase OWNERSHIP AND OPERATING car is 2%, reecting the needs of individual both utilisation and occupancy per car MODEL car owners High utilisation dramatically changes Slow adoption of capital intensive incentives for durability, maintenance, technologies (such as autonomous drive and re-use, as well as a range of more electric drivetrains) due to high investment capital-intensive solutions cost and low utilisation

CARS DESIGNED AND LIFETIME OF 12 YEARS OR 230,000 KM, LIFETIME INCREASED TO 700,000 KM, MATCHING MANAGED FOR RUNTIME MATCHING THE NEEDS OF INDIVIDUAL OWNERS THE NEEDS OF INTENSIVELY USED VEHICLES Low utilisation places limits on up-front Electric drivetrains with intrinsically investment and on bene ts of longer lifetime longer lifetime Investments in more durable materials Limited maintenance, and disconnect (more attractive for highly utilised cars) between end-of-life vehicles and rst owners Proactive maintenance and modular design enable re-manufacturing

MATERIALS IMPACT LOW UTILISATION, HIGH WEIGHT, AND LIMITED RANGE OF SIZES, ADVANCED MATERIALS, AND MINIMISED LIFETIME RESULTS IN HIGH MATERIALS INTENSITY AUTONOMOUS DRIVING REDUCE FOOTPRINT Cars weigh 1.4 tonnes, as each vehicle Smaller average size adapted to needs of needs carry ve seats and have high each trip safety standard Fleet management and more expensive materials incentivise re-use of parts and EOL recovery

EHIBIT 57 MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS MATERIALS INTENSITY OF TRANSPORT TONNES NEW MATERIALS CARS PER MILLION PKM TONNES MATERIALS PER MILLION PKM

12 26 32

88% X = 06

06

04

OWNED CAR SHARED CAR OWNED CAR SHARED CAR OWNED CAR SHARED CAR

2050 FLEET AVERAGE IN A BASELINE VS CIRCULAR SCENARIO

EHIBIT 58 PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS TONNES MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS

REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING LIGHTWEIGHTING PROLONGED LIFETIME SHARING % OF INPUT MATERIALS TONNES PER CAR, FLEET AVERAGE 1000 CAR KM PER CAR PASSENGERS PER CAR

13 450 193 5% 11% 163 09 re-manufacturing 280 eller remanufacturing?

BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO

REMANUFACTURED COMPONENTS NEW MATERIALS

CARBON DIOIDE EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS USED IN EU PASSENGER CARS, 2050 Mt CO2, PER YEAR

EHIBIT 59 11 60 4 9 million tonnes 49 eller 21 Mt?

70%

9

18

CURRENT VOLUME BASELINE REUSE AND LIGHT LONGER SHARING CIRCULAR INCREASE SCENARIO 2050 REMANUFACTURING WEIGHTING LIFETIME SCENARIO 2050

COST REDUCTION POTENTIAL EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES EHIBIT 510 155

MATERIAL INPUT KEY DRIVERS OF LOWER COST OF OWNERSHIP

SHARING Higher utilisation per car together with reduced cost through autonomous car eets lower costs per kilometre PARTS CAR MANUFACTURING PROLONGED LIFETIME Reduced total cost per kilometre despite increased cost for input materials 77% DISTRIBUTION AND MS LIGHTWEIGHTING Smaller average cars in shared eets reduce materials input and total cost, despite increased cost for lightweight materials FUELENERGY REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING Larger share reduces input materials and average cost of materials, modular design makes maintenance cheaper

MAINTENANCE

35

CAPITAL COST, INSURANCE, PARKING

CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO 2050

ETERNALITIES AND PUBLIC COSTS OF CAR TRANSPORTATION EHIBIT 511 EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES

264

REDUCED ETERNALITIES AND PUBLIC COST

REDUCED NUMBER OF CARS Due to higher occupancy and increased utilisation result in improved air quality, reduced noise level, less WAITING TIME congestion and less need for inner-city parking AUTONOMOUS AND CONNECTED CARS Are safer, reduce need for signs, lanes and other 74% infrastructure and can optimise trac ows, which reduces congestion and land use for roads

ELECTRIC VEHICLES ACCIDENTS Reduce noise level and have positive impact on air quality, especially when shifting towards renewable AIR POLLUTION energy sources NOISE

INFRASTRUCTURE 68

PARKING COSTS

LAND

CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO 2050

MAOR SHIFT OF INNOVATION FOCUS EHIBIT 512 FROM MAXIMIZING UPFRONT SALES VOLUME AND PRICE, TO MAKING THE CAR A WELL-FUNCTIONING EFFECTIVE PART OF URBAN MOBILITY

Rubriken utgår ifrån att Sharing har positiva INNOVATION SHARING OTHER EFFECTS CIRCULARITY STRATEGIES eekter/för nya innovationer

Jag förstår det som att “Fleet management..” motsvarar Sharing i diagrammet? Och är därför central, dom NEW BUSINESS MODELS esta pilarna (7) utgår ifrån “Fleet management” och ger To suit new customer groups: eekter på de andra områderna cars better integrated with public transport system, pricing to adapt to demand and local geography CAR SHARING Becomes more attractive with autonomous and electric vehicles CAR SIZES - Är det så?? AUTONOMOUS CARS En del av “Higher utilisation Variation in car sizes (not all cars Becomes cost worthy per car” i diagrammet. need to be designed for 5 passengers) - Svår att få in LIGHTEWIGHTING

FLEET LUDDE DEN HR BEHVER HIGHER MANAGEMENT OCKS LITE KRLEK UTILISATION NEW VEHICLE DESIGN PER CAR Professional car FRENKLA GRNA S More durable materials CAR SHARING owners MYCKET SOM MLIGT, + modular design for quick HR AV DIG OM DU BEHVER Becomes more attractive repair and upgradeability FRKLARING with autonomous and electric vehicles PROLONGED LIFETIME

ongoing... ELECTRIC VEHICLES PROACTIVE Are more pro table with Maintenance more miles

REMANUFACTURING OF PARTS AND RECYCLING (new vehicle design makes MORE PREDICTIVE EoL value higher) EoL ows

EHIBIT 512 CIRCULARITY STRATEGIES OTHER EFFECTS

version 1 - FEL NEW BUSINESS MODELS To suit new customer groups: cars better integrated with public transport system, pricing to adapt to demand and local geography

CAR SIZES AUTONOMOUS CARS Variation in car sizes (not all cars Becomes cost worthy need to be designed for 5 passengers) LIGHTEWIGHTING

HIGHER NEW VEHICLE DESIGN UTILISATION PER CAR More durable materials + modular design for quick repair and upgradeability FLEET MANAGEMENT Professional car owners PROLONGED LIFETIME

ELECTRIC VEHICLES PROACTIVE Are more pro table with Maintenance more miles

REMANUFACTURING OF PARTS AND RECYCLING (new vehicle design makes MORE PREDICTIVE EoL value higher) EoL ows REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

The scrapping valueof a car is close to zero, even though just the major raw materials that go into a car have a value of some 2,000–3,000 EUR. CO2 IMPACT OF MATERIALS TOTAL COST OF OWNERSHIP ETERNALITIES AND COST TO SOCIETY Mt CO2 PER YEAR, EUROPE EUR PER 1000 PKM EUR PER 1000 PKM 60 155 264 EHIBIT 51

STEEL 70% 77% 74%

ALUMINIUM 18 68 35 PLASTICS

OTHER

BASELINE CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050

PKM = Passenger-kilometre

LIFECYCLE CO2 EMISSIONS FROM INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE VEHICLES ICEV VS ELECTRIC VEHICLES EV EHIBIT 52 g CO2 PER CAR-KM

216 167 37 9%

Källa till diagrammet 58% nns i PowerPoint USE PHASE 77%

91%

42% PRODUCTION 23% AND MATERIALS

ICEV EV, CURRENT ENERGY EV, RENEWABLE MI EUROPE ENERGY

Note: Emissions calculated per car kilometre for the large vehicle segment with an average weight of 1528 kg over a lifetime of 180,000 km.

PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS MATERIALS INTENSITY OF TRANSPORT TONNES MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS REQUIRED TONNES MATERIALS TO ENABLE TRAVEL

1 REDUCE WEIGHT PER VEHICLE 3 SHARING MATERIALS INPUTS REUIRED EHIBIT 53 Lower average vehicle size in a shared Large increase in utilisation in a TO SUPPORT MOBILITY car system, better matching vehicles to shared-car system Large reduction in total amount of materials actual trip needs Higher occupancy per vehicle with that must be produced for useful travel Advanced design and materials choices mobility as a service (materials per passenger kilometres)

2 REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING 4 LONGER LIFESPANS Reduced waste in vehicles production X More intensive use increases incentives = Modular design and replacement of for durable design components with limited lifetime Electric drivetrains with intrinsically Increased re-use of durable components better durability at end-of-life Proactive maintenance of eet-managed Controls over inventory and ows in a vehicles eet-managed system of shared cars Modular design to enable replacement of components with shorter lifespans

1 3 5 TRAVEL DEMAND CAR OWNERSHIP CAR WEIGHT TRILLION PASSENGER-KM BY CAR PER YEAR CARS PER CAPITA, EU28 TONNES PER CAR EHIBIT 54

47 057 139 45 053 134

2005 2015 2005 2015 2005 2015 2 4 6 OCCUPANCY PER CAR CAR LIFETIME SCRAP IN CAR MANUFACTURING CAR OCCUPANCY (PASSENGER PER CAR), UK CAR KM PER CAR DURING LIFETIME % SCRAPPED MATERIALS

157 156 170 140 40%

2005 2015 2006 2013

DOWNGRADING AND COPPER MIING OF STEEL PREVENTION OF PLASTICS RECYCLING

EHIBIT 55 ONLY 8% OF STEEL RECYCLED FROM VEHICLES HIGHVALUE RECYCLING IS NOT FEASIBLE FOR CAN BE USED AS MATERIALS FOR NEW CARS A LARGE SHARE OF VEHICLE PLASTIC VOLUMES Shredding of vehicles mixes copper with steel which is Current practices leaves plastics in a mixed fraction a serious long term contaminant of the steel stock that often is land lled / incinerated Alloys are not separated, leading to lost values of alloy Material substitution for lightweighting leads to bre metals, waste of critical materials, and downcycling of reinforced plastics that contaminates other plastics ows steel and that is dicult to recycle

Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint DOWNGRADING OF ALUMINIUM REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTELIMITED RECYCLING OF RARE CRITICAL METALS

MIING OF ALUMINIUM ALLOYS RESULTS IN ENDOFLIFE VEHICLES LEADS TO LARGE LOSSES DOWNGRADING OF WROUGHT ALUMINIUM OF CRITICAL METALS AUTO PARTS Rare critical metals can make up 1% of total vehicle E materials Cars make up >40% of cast aluminium demand, a key xhibit 5.6 Only eight out of 25 scarce metals are recycled, with ‘sink’ for aluminium recycling the remainder lost to carrier metals, construction and Aluminium used in cars is downgraded when mixed Major changes are required in terms of carback lling ownership, materials and land lls design with cast aluminium, precluding other uses and materials usage to achieve a circular scenario

EHIBIT 56 FROM: AN OWNED CAR ECONOMY TO: A SHARED CAR ECONOMY

A FUNDAMENTAL SHIFT IN E ective utilisation of a typical European Cars shared and operated in eets increase OWNERSHIP AND OPERATING car is 2%, reecting the needs of individual both utilisation and occupancy per car MODEL car owners High utilisation dramatically changes Slow adoption of capital intensive incentives for durability, maintenance, technologies (such as autonomous drive and re-use, as well as a range of more electric drivetrains) due to high investment capital-intensive solutions cost and low utilisation

CARS DESIGNED AND LIFETIME OF 12 YEARS OR 230,000 KM, LIFETIME INCREASED TO 700,000 KM, MATCHING MANAGED FOR RUNTIME MATCHING THE NEEDS OF INDIVIDUAL OWNERS THE NEEDS OF INTENSIVELY USED VEHICLES Low utilisation places limits on up-front Electric drivetrains with intrinsically investment and on bene ts of longer lifetime longer lifetime Investments in more durable materials Limited maintenance, and disconnect (more attractive for highly utilised cars) between end-of-life vehicles and rst owners Proactive maintenance and modular design enable re-manufacturing

MATERIALS IMPACT LOW UTILISATION, HIGH WEIGHT, AND LIMITED RANGE OF SIZES, ADVANCED MATERIALS, AND MINIMISED LIFETIME RESULTS IN HIGH MATERIALS INTENSITY AUTONOMOUS DRIVING REDUCE FOOTPRINT Cars weigh 1.4 tonnes, as each vehicle Smaller average size adapted to needs of needs carry ve seats and have high each trip safety standard Fleet management and more expensive materials incentivise re-use of parts and EOL recovery

EHIBIT 57 MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS MATERIALS INTENSITY OF TRANSPORT TONNES NEW MATERIALS CARS PER MILLION PKM TONNES MATERIALS PER MILLION PKM

128 12 26 32

88% X = 06

06

04

OWNED CAR SHARED CAR OWNED CAR SHARED CAR OWNED CAR SHARED CAR

2050 FLEET AVERAGE IN A BASELINE VS CIRCULAR SCENARIO

EHIBIT 58 PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS TONNES MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS

REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING LIGHTWEIGHTING PROLONGED LIFETIME SHARING % OF INPUT MATERIALS TONNES PER CAR, FLEET AVERAGE 1000 CAR KM PER CAR PASSENGERS PER CAR

13 450 193 5% 11% 163 09 re-manufacturing 280 eller remanufacturing?

BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO

REMANUFACTURED COMPONENTS NEW MATERIALS

CARBON DIOIDE EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS USED IN EU PASSENGER CARS, 2050 Mt CO2, PER YEAR

EHIBIT 59 11 60 4 9 million tonnes 49 eller 21 Mt?

70%

9

18

CURRENT VOLUME BASELINE REUSE AND LIGHT LONGER SHARING CIRCULAR INCREASE SCENARIO 2050 REMANUFACTURING WEIGHTING LIFETIME SCENARIO 2050

COST REDUCTION POTENTIAL EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES EHIBIT 510 155

MATERIAL INPUT KEY DRIVERS OF LOWER COST OF OWNERSHIP

SHARING Higher utilisation per car together with reduced cost through autonomous car eets lower costs per kilometre PARTS CAR MANUFACTURING PROLONGED LIFETIME Reduced total cost per kilometre despite increased cost for input materials 77% DISTRIBUTION AND MS LIGHTWEIGHTING Smaller average cars in shared eets reduce materials input and total cost, despite increased cost for lightweight materials FUELENERGY REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING Larger share reduces input materials and average cost of materials, modular design makes maintenance cheaper

MAINTENANCE

35

CAPITAL COST, INSURANCE, PARKING

CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO 2050

ETERNALITIES AND PUBLIC COSTS OF CAR TRANSPORTATION EHIBIT 511 EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES

264

REDUCED ETERNALITIES AND PUBLIC COST

REDUCED NUMBER OF CARS Due to higher occupancy and increased utilisation result in improved air quality, reduced noise level, less WAITING TIME congestion and less need for inner-city parking AUTONOMOUS AND CONNECTED CARS Are safer, reduce need for signs, lanes and other 74% infrastructure and can optimise trac ows, which reduces congestion and land use for roads

ELECTRIC VEHICLES ACCIDENTS Reduce noise level and have positive impact on air quality, especially when shifting towards renewable AIR POLLUTION energy sources NOISE

INFRASTRUCTURE 68

PARKING COSTS

LAND

CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO 2050

MAOR SHIFT OF INNOVATION FOCUS EHIBIT 512 FROM MAXIMIZING UPFRONT SALES VOLUME AND PRICE, TO MAKING THE CAR A WELL-FUNCTIONING EFFECTIVE PART OF URBAN MOBILITY

Rubriken utgår ifrån att Sharing har positiva INNOVATION SHARING OTHER EFFECTS CIRCULARITY STRATEGIES eekter/för nya innovationer

Jag förstår det som att “Fleet management..” motsvarar Sharing i diagrammet? Och är därför central, dom NEW BUSINESS MODELS esta pilarna (7) utgår ifrån “Fleet management” och ger To suit new customer groups: eekter på de andra områderna cars better integrated with public transport system, pricing to adapt to demand and local geography CAR SHARING Becomes more attractive with autonomous and electric vehicles CAR SIZES - Är det så?? AUTONOMOUS CARS En del av “Higher utilisation Variation in car sizes (not all cars Becomes cost worthy per car” i diagrammet. need to be designed for 5 passengers) - Svår att få in LIGHTEWIGHTING

FLEET LUDDE DEN HR BEHVER HIGHER MANAGEMENT OCKS LITE KRLEK UTILISATION NEW VEHICLE DESIGN PER CAR Professional car FRENKLA GRNA S More durable materials CAR SHARING owners MYCKET SOM MLIGT, + modular design for quick HR AV DIG OM DU BEHVER Becomes more attractive repair and upgradeability FRKLARING with autonomous and electric vehicles PROLONGED LIFETIME

ongoing... ELECTRIC VEHICLES PROACTIVE Are more pro table with Maintenance more miles

REMANUFACTURING OF PARTS AND RECYCLING (new vehicle design makes MORE PREDICTIVE EoL value higher) EoL ows

EHIBIT 512 CIRCULARITY STRATEGIES OTHER EFFECTS

version 1 - FEL NEW BUSINESS MODELS To suit new customer groups: cars better integrated with public transport system, pricing to adapt to demand and local geography

CAR SIZES AUTONOMOUS CARS Variation in car sizes (not all cars Becomes cost worthy need to be designed for 5 passengers) LIGHTEWIGHTING

HIGHER NEW VEHICLE DESIGN UTILISATION PER CAR More durable materials + modular design for quick repair and upgradeability FLEET MANAGEMENT Professional car owners PROLONGED LIFETIME

ELECTRIC VEHICLES PROACTIVE Are more pro table with Maintenance more miles

REMANUFACTURING OF PARTS AND RECYCLING (new vehicle design makes MORE PREDICTIVE EoL value higher) EoL ows CO2 IMPACT OF MATERIALS TOTAL COST OF OWNERSHIP ETERNALITIES AND COST TO SOCIETY Mt CO2 PER YEAR, EUROPE EUR PER 1000 PKM EUR PER 1000 PKM 60 155 264 EHIBIT 51

STEEL 70% 77% 74%

ALUMINIUM 18 68 35 PLASTICS

OTHER

BASELINE CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050

PKM = Passenger-kilometre

LIFECYCLE CO2 EMISSIONS FROM INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE VEHICLES ICEV VS ELECTRIC VEHICLES EV EHIBIT 52 g CO2 PER CAR-KM

216 167 37 9%

Källa till diagrammet 58% nns i PowerPoint USE PHASE 77%

91%

42% PRODUCTION 23% AND MATERIALS

ICEV EV, CURRENT ENERGY EV, RENEWABLE MI EUROPE ENERGY

Note: Emissions calculated per car kilometre for the large vehicle segment with an average weight of 1528 kg over a lifetime of 180,000 km.

PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS MATERIALS INTENSITY OF TRANSPORT TONNES MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS REQUIRED TONNES MATERIALS TO ENABLE TRAVEL

1 REDUCE WEIGHT PER VEHICLE 3 SHARING MATERIALS INPUTS REUIRED EHIBIT 53 Lower average vehicle size in a shared Large increase in utilisation in a TO SUPPORT MOBILITY car system, better matching vehicles to shared-car system Large reduction in total amount of materials actual trip needs Higher occupancy per vehicle with that must be produced for useful travel Advanced design and materials choices mobility as a service (materials per passenger kilometres)

2 REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING 4 LONGER LIFESPANS Reduced waste in vehicles production X More intensive use increases incentives = Modular design and replacement of for durable design components with limited lifetime Electric drivetrains with intrinsically Increased re-use of durable components better durability at end-of-life Proactive maintenance of eet-managed Controls over inventory and ows in a vehicles eet-managed system of shared cars Modular design to enable replacement of components with shorter lifespans

1 3 5 TRAVEL DEMAND CAR OWNERSHIP CAR WEIGHT TRILLION PASSENGER-KM BY CAR PER YEAR CARS PER CAPITA, EU28 TONNES PER CAR EHIBIT 54

47 057 139 45 053 134

2005 2015 2005 2015 2005 2015 2 4 6 OCCUPANCY PER CAR CAR LIFETIME SCRAP IN CAR MANUFACTURING CAR OCCUPANCY (PASSENGER PER CAR), UK CAR KM PER CAR DURING LIFETIME % SCRAPPED MATERIALS

157 156 170 140 40%

2005 2015 2006 2013

DOWNGRADING AND COPPER MIING OF STEEL PREVENTION OF PLASTICS RECYCLING

EHIBIT 55 ONLY 8% OF STEEL RECYCLED FROM VEHICLES HIGHVALUE RECYCLING IS NOT FEASIBLE FOR CAN BE USED AS MATERIALS FOR NEW CARS A LARGE SHARE OF VEHICLE PLASTIC VOLUMES Shredding of vehicles mixes copper with steel which is Current practices leaves plastics in a mixed fraction a serious long term contaminant of the steel stock that often is land lled / incinerated Alloys are not separated, leading to lost values of alloy Material substitution for lightweighting leads to bre metals, waste of critical materials, and downcycling of reinforced plastics that contaminates other plastics ows steel and that is dicult to recycle

Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint DOWNGRADING OF ALUMINIUM LIMITED RECYCLING OF RARE CRITICAL METALS REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

MIING OF ALUMINIUM ALLOYS RESULTS IN ENDOFLIFE VEHICLES LEADS TO LARGE LOSSES DOWNGRADING OF WROUGHT ALUMINIUM OF CRITICAL METALS AUTO PARTS Rare critical metals can make up 1% of total vehicle materials Cars make up >40% of cast aluminium demand, a key Only eight out of 25 scarce metals are recycled, with ‘sink’ for aluminium recycling A CIRCULAR SCENARIO FOR MOBILITY the remainder lost to carrier metals, construction and Aluminium used in cars is downgraded when mixed back lling materials and land lls with cast aluminium, precluding other uses CAN CUT CO2 EMISSIONS BY 70%

The above diagnostic may sound like a litany, but in than offset by benefits over just a few years of intensive fact it points the way to a major productivity opportunity. use (instead of paying off over more than 14 years, as In a 2050 perspective, not just an incremental shift is is the case today). The switch to electric vehicles is an possible, but there is an opportunity to reorganise mobili- integral part of longer technical lifespans, as the 20-or-so ty from an owned car economy to one dominated by sha- moving components of an electric motor are intrinsically red cars (Exhibit 5.6). This comes with major advantages much longer-lasting than the 2,000 moving parts of an not just in terms of CO2 emissions and materials use, internal combustion engine. Improved maintenance also but in drastic cost reductions, and it helps address major helps; in a fleet-managed system this could resemble negative effects on public health and the environment. that of aircraft today, with detailed and predictive mainte- EHIBIT 56 The core of this scenario is a major shift in how ve- nance schedules for each component. FROM: AN OWNED CAR ECONOMY TO: A SHARED CAR ECONOMY hicles are owned and operated. Instead of individually • Increased reuse and remanufacturing: The trans- owned vehicles that are mostly stationary, 64% of cars action costs and inventory problems that limit reuse and would be operated as shared vehicles, with much higher remanufacturing would also be much easier to overco- utilisation (the total time the vehicle is in use), and higher me in a fleet-managed system. Longer lifetime need not A FUNDAMENTAL SHIFT IN E ective utilisation of a typical European Cars shared and operated in eets increase OWNERSHIP AND OPERATING car is 2%, reecting the needs of individual both utilisation and occupancy per car average occupancy (the number of passengers per trip). depend on all parts of a car living longer, but can be Shared vehicles would operate as a service to end-users, enabled by a modular design that allows for components MODEL car owners High utilisation dramatically changes Slow adoption of capital intensive incentives for durability, maintenance, who would be able to call on a car when needed without with shorter lifespans (whether for technical, aesthetic technologies (such as autonomous drive and re-use, as well as a range of more having to own individual vehicles. Ownership and ma- or other reasons) to be easily replaced, and intrinsically electric drivetrains) due to high investment capital-intensive solutions nagement instead would lie with service providers, who long-lived components to be reused even when vehicles cost and low utilisation would own and operate fleets of cars. Self-driving vehic- are scrapped. les would be integral to this business model, making it • Smaller and lighter vehicles: It would also be pos- possible to call on vehicles when needed without large sible to vary car size so it matches the needs of each trip. costs. This in turn can unlock a number of step-change Instead of each vehicle dimensioned for its maximum ca- CARS DESIGNED AND LIFETIME OF 12 YEARS OR 230,000 KM, LIFETIME INCREASED TO 700,000 KM, MATCHING improvements in the productivity of transportation: MANAGED FOR RUNTIME MATCHING THE NEEDS OF INDIVIDUAL OWNERS THE NEEDS OF INTENSIVELY USED VEHICLES pacity (typically, five passengers), cars could range in • Faster adoption of electric and automated vehicles: size from single- to multi-person vehicles, matched to the Low utilisation places limits on up-front Electric drivetrains with intrinsically Higher utilisation would fundamentally shift the incentives needs of each trip. The cost of more advanced materials investment and on bene ts of longer lifetime longer lifetime Investments in more durable materials for how vehicles are designed and operated. The same required for lighter weight, such as high-strength steel, Limited maintenance, and disconnect (more attractive for highly utilised cars) upfront investment would be paid back earlier, over a advanced plastics, carbon fibre or aluminium, would also between end-of-life vehicles and rst owners Proactive maintenance and modular much larger number of kilometres driven. This makes be much easier to motivate with higher rates of utilisation. design enable re-manufacturing electric vehicles more economic, as the higher upfront • Better end-of-life management: Finally, with more cost can be rapidly recovered. It also enables more ra- expensive materials, more scope for remanufacturing, pid adoption of connected and self-driving vehicles, both and more predictable end-of-life flows, it would be much MATERIALS IMPACT LOW UTILISATION, HIGH WEIGHT, AND LIMITED RANGE OF SIZES, ADVANCED MATERIALS, AND because the upfront cost is easier to bear with higher more profitable to design vehicles for full recovery of ma- MINIMISED LIFETIME RESULTS IN HIGH MATERIALS INTENSITY AUTONOMOUS DRIVING REDUCE FOOTPRINT utilisation, and because its value is much higher in a sha- terials at end of life. Manufacturers and operators of sha- Cars weigh 1.4 tonnes, as each vehicle Smaller average size adapted to needs of red-car business model. red-car fleets could directly link up (or vertically integrate) each trip needs carry ve seats and have high • Increased lifespan: A shared model also creates in- to monetise the benefits. Vehicles could be designed for safety standard Fleet management and more expensive centives for cars with much longer lifetimes. Cars might much more automated disassembly, which also is inte- materials incentivise re-use of parts and not be older, counted in years, but would cover the same grated with the increased reuse and remanufacturing EOL recovery distance in a much shorter period of time. The additional described above. cost of achieving a longer lifetime would thus be more

EHIBIT 57 MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS MATERIALS INTENSITY OF TRANSPORT TONNES NEW MATERIALS CARS PER MILLION PKM TONNES MATERIALS PER MILLION PKM

129 12 26 32

88% X = 06

06

04

OWNED CAR SHARED CAR OWNED CAR SHARED CAR OWNED CAR SHARED CAR

2050 FLEET AVERAGE IN A BASELINE VS CIRCULAR SCENARIO

EHIBIT 58 PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS TONNES MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS

REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING LIGHTWEIGHTING PROLONGED LIFETIME SHARING % OF INPUT MATERIALS TONNES PER CAR, FLEET AVERAGE 1000 CAR KM PER CAR PASSENGERS PER CAR

13 450 193 5% 11% 163 09 re-manufacturing 280 eller remanufacturing?

BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO

REMANUFACTURED COMPONENTS NEW MATERIALS

CARBON DIOIDE EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS USED IN EU PASSENGER CARS, 2050 Mt CO2, PER YEAR

EHIBIT 59 11 60 4 9 million tonnes 49 eller 21 Mt?

70%

9

18

CURRENT VOLUME BASELINE REUSE AND LIGHT LONGER SHARING CIRCULAR INCREASE SCENARIO 2050 REMANUFACTURING WEIGHTING LIFETIME SCENARIO 2050

COST REDUCTION POTENTIAL EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES EHIBIT 510 155

MATERIAL INPUT KEY DRIVERS OF LOWER COST OF OWNERSHIP

SHARING Higher utilisation per car together with reduced cost through autonomous car eets lower costs per kilometre PARTS CAR MANUFACTURING PROLONGED LIFETIME Reduced total cost per kilometre despite increased cost for input materials 77% DISTRIBUTION AND MS LIGHTWEIGHTING Smaller average cars in shared eets reduce materials input and total cost, despite increased cost for lightweight materials FUELENERGY REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING Larger share reduces input materials and average cost of materials, modular design makes maintenance cheaper

MAINTENANCE

35

CAPITAL COST, INSURANCE, PARKING

CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO 2050

ETERNALITIES AND PUBLIC COSTS OF CAR TRANSPORTATION EHIBIT 511 EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES

264

REDUCED ETERNALITIES AND PUBLIC COST

REDUCED NUMBER OF CARS Due to higher occupancy and increased utilisation result in improved air quality, reduced noise level, less WAITING TIME congestion and less need for inner-city parking AUTONOMOUS AND CONNECTED CARS Are safer, reduce need for signs, lanes and other 74% infrastructure and can optimise trac ows, which reduces congestion and land use for roads

ELECTRIC VEHICLES ACCIDENTS Reduce noise level and have positive impact on air quality, especially when shifting towards renewable AIR POLLUTION energy sources NOISE

INFRASTRUCTURE 68

PARKING COSTS

LAND

CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO 2050

MAOR SHIFT OF INNOVATION FOCUS EHIBIT 512 FROM MAXIMIZING UPFRONT SALES VOLUME AND PRICE, TO MAKING THE CAR A WELL-FUNCTIONING EFFECTIVE PART OF URBAN MOBILITY

Rubriken utgår ifrån att Sharing har positiva INNOVATION SHARING OTHER EFFECTS CIRCULARITY STRATEGIES eekter/för nya innovationer

Jag förstår det som att “Fleet management..” motsvarar Sharing i diagrammet? Och är därför central, dom NEW BUSINESS MODELS esta pilarna (7) utgår ifrån “Fleet management” och ger To suit new customer groups: eekter på de andra områderna cars better integrated with public transport system, pricing to adapt to demand and local geography CAR SHARING Becomes more attractive with autonomous and electric vehicles CAR SIZES - Är det så?? AUTONOMOUS CARS En del av “Higher utilisation Variation in car sizes (not all cars Becomes cost worthy per car” i diagrammet. need to be designed for 5 passengers) - Svår att få in LIGHTEWIGHTING

FLEET LUDDE DEN HR BEHVER HIGHER MANAGEMENT OCKS LITE KRLEK UTILISATION NEW VEHICLE DESIGN PER CAR Professional car FRENKLA GRNA S More durable materials CAR SHARING owners MYCKET SOM MLIGT, + modular design for quick HR AV DIG OM DU BEHVER Becomes more attractive repair and upgradeability FRKLARING with autonomous and electric vehicles PROLONGED LIFETIME

ongoing... ELECTRIC VEHICLES PROACTIVE Are more pro table with Maintenance more miles

REMANUFACTURING OF PARTS AND RECYCLING (new vehicle design makes MORE PREDICTIVE EoL value higher) EoL ows

EHIBIT 512 CIRCULARITY STRATEGIES OTHER EFFECTS

version 1 - FEL NEW BUSINESS MODELS To suit new customer groups: cars better integrated with public transport system, pricing to adapt to demand and local geography

CAR SIZES AUTONOMOUS CARS Variation in car sizes (not all cars Becomes cost worthy need to be designed for 5 passengers) LIGHTEWIGHTING

HIGHER NEW VEHICLE DESIGN UTILISATION PER CAR More durable materials + modular design for quick repair and upgradeability FLEET MANAGEMENT Professional car owners PROLONGED LIFETIME

ELECTRIC VEHICLES PROACTIVE Are more pro table with Maintenance more miles

REMANUFACTURING OF PARTS AND RECYCLING (new vehicle design makes MORE PREDICTIVE EoL value higher) EoL ows CO2 IMPACT OF MATERIALS TOTAL COST OF OWNERSHIP ETERNALITIES AND COST TO SOCIETY Mt CO2 PER YEAR, EUROPE EUR PER 1000 PKM EUR PER 1000 PKM 60 155 264 EHIBIT 51

STEEL 70% 77% 74%

ALUMINIUM 18 68 35 PLASTICS

OTHER

BASELINE CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050

PKM = Passenger-kilometre

LIFECYCLE CO2 EMISSIONS FROM INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE VEHICLES ICEV VS ELECTRIC VEHICLES EV EHIBIT 52 g CO2 PER CAR-KM

216 167 37 9%

Källa till diagrammet 58% nns i PowerPoint USE PHASE 77%

91%

42% PRODUCTION 23% AND MATERIALS

ICEV EV, CURRENT ENERGY EV, RENEWABLE MI EUROPE ENERGY

Note: Emissions calculated per car kilometre for the large vehicle segment with an average weight of 1528 kg over a lifetime of 180,000 km.

PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS MATERIALS INTENSITY OF TRANSPORT TONNES MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS REQUIRED TONNES MATERIALS TO ENABLE TRAVEL

1 REDUCE WEIGHT PER VEHICLE 3 SHARING MATERIALS INPUTS REUIRED EHIBIT 53 Lower average vehicle size in a shared Large increase in utilisation in a TO SUPPORT MOBILITY car system, better matching vehicles to shared-car system Large reduction in total amount of materials actual trip needs Higher occupancy per vehicle with that must be produced for useful travel Advanced design and materials choices mobility as a service (materials per passenger kilometres)

2 REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING 4 LONGER LIFESPANS Reduced waste in vehicles production X More intensive use increases incentives = Modular design and replacement of for durable design components with limited lifetime Electric drivetrains with intrinsically Increased re-use of durable components better durability at end-of-life Proactive maintenance of eet-managed Controls over inventory and ows in a vehicles eet-managed system of shared cars Modular design to enable replacement of components with shorter lifespans

1 3 5 TRAVEL DEMAND CAR OWNERSHIP CAR WEIGHT TRILLION PASSENGER-KM BY CAR PER YEAR CARS PER CAPITA, EU28 TONNES PER CAR EHIBIT 54

47 057 139 45 053 134

2005 2015 2005 2015 2005 2015 2 4 6 OCCUPANCY PER CAR CAR LIFETIME SCRAP IN CAR MANUFACTURING CAR OCCUPANCY (PASSENGER PER CAR), UK CAR KM PER CAR DURING LIFETIME % SCRAPPED MATERIALS

157 156 170 140 40%

2005 2015 2006 2013

DOWNGRADING AND COPPER MIING OF STEEL PREVENTION OF PLASTICS RECYCLING

EHIBIT 55 ONLY 8% OF STEEL RECYCLED FROM VEHICLES HIGHVALUE RECYCLING IS NOT FEASIBLE FOR CAN BE USED AS MATERIALS FOR NEW CARS A LARGE SHARE OF VEHICLE PLASTIC VOLUMES Shredding of vehicles mixes copper with steel which is Current practices leaves plastics in a mixed fraction a serious long term contaminant of the steel stock that often is land lled / incinerated Alloys are not separated, leading to lost values of alloy Material substitution for lightweighting leads to bre metals, waste of critical materials, and downcycling of reinforced plastics that contaminates other plastics ows steel and that is dicult to recycle

Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint DOWNGRADING OF ALUMINIUM LIMITED RECYCLING OF RARE CRITICAL METALS

MIING OF ALUMINIUM ALLOYS RESULTS IN ENDOFLIFE VEHICLES LEADS TO LARGE LOSSES DOWNGRADING OF WROUGHT ALUMINIUM OF CRITICAL METALS AUTO PARTS Rare critical metals can make up 1% of total vehicle materials Cars make up >40% of cast aluminium demand, a key Only eight out of 25 scarce metals are recycled, with ‘sink’ for aluminium recycling the remainder lost to carrier metals, construction and Aluminium used in cars is downgraded when mixed back lling materials and land lls with cast aluminium, precluding other uses

REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

ANATOMY OF A SHARED, FLEET-MANAGED CAR IN 2050

EHIBIT 56 To see the extent of improvement possible, it is useful This is an astounding productivity improvement – but is it to consider the ‘materials intensity’ of currentFROM: AN car OWNED travel. CAR ECONOMYrealistic? We would argueTO: that A SHARED it is. Already CAR ECONOMY today, the early in- Today, to achieve one million passenger-kilometres of tra- dications are that shared cars can replace 4–10 private cars vel, some 3,200 kg of materials must be supplied. This in Europe and 9–13 private cars in North America. In terms may notA FUNDAMENTAL sound like much, SHIFT INbut given theE ective 4.7 trillion utilisation pas of- a typicalof lifetime, European London ‘blackCars cabs’ shared already and operated have ain lifetime eets increase of up senger-kilometresOWNERSHIP AND served OPERATING by cars in thecar EU is 2%, each reecting year, the it needsto of 1,600,000individual kilometres,both about utilisation 9 times and occupancy greater per than car that of adds upMODEL to more than 20 million tonnescar per owners year of steel, ordinary passenger cars.High The utilisation key is a dramatically custom-made changes vehicle, aluminium, plastics and other materialsSlow annually, adoption just of capital to intensivedesigned for durability incentivesand easy for maintenance durability, maintenance, during intensi - keep the car fleet going. technologies (such as autonomousve use. drive Withand improved technologyre-use, as well asand a range greater of more use of electric electric drivetrains) due to high investment capital-intensive solutions cost and low utilisation drivetrains by 2050, the 700,000 kilometres assumed here These changed incentives of a shared-car system does not seem far-fetched. In terms of weight reduction, the could transform the key parameters in this equation. The 600 kg average size need not mean that all vehicles need to average materials requirements per car could be cut in be small, let alone unsafe. Rather, it reflects a smaller aver- half, fromCARS 1,200 DESIGNED kg toAND 600 kg per vehicle.LIFETIME Still OF 12more YEARS im OR- 230,000age KM, size required whenLIFETIME vehicles INCREASED are matched TO 700,000 KM, to MATCHINGthe typical MATCHING THE NEEDS OF INDIVIDUAL OWNERS THE NEEDS OF INTENSIVELY USED VEHICLES portant,MANAGED each vehicle FOR RUNTIME could service much more travel. two-person trip rather than to the maximum five-person trip. Electric drivetrains Today, serving one million passenger-kilometresLow utilisation requi places- limitsThe on up-front average would include vehicles that arewith both intrinsically smaller and investment and on bene ts of longer lifetime longer lifetime res the equivalent of 2.6 cars. With lifetime increased to larger. The lower accidentInvestments rates with in autonomousmore durable materials driving also Limited maintenance, 450,000 kilometres, occupancy increased to 1.93, and andenable disconnect lighter vehicles,(more as does attractive the forgreater highly utilisedviability cars) of more between end-of-life vehicles and rst owners 11% of components remanufactured, this falls to just 0.6. expensive and advancedProactive materials maintenance for a vehicle and modular with higher design enable re-manufacturing Putting these effects together, materials requirements fall utilisation. Likewise, the higher average occupancy would in- to just one eighth: from 3,200 kg to just 400 kg of mate- clude solitary trips, but some share of travel would take place rials per million passenger-kilometres provided. in vehicles with more passengers than today. MATERIALS IMPACT LOW UTILISATION, HIGH WEIGHT, AND LIMITED RANGE OF SIZES, ADVANCED MATERIALS, AND MINIMISED LIFETIME RESULTS IN HIGH MATERIALS INTENSITY AUTONOMOUS DRIVING REDUCE FOOTPRINT Cars weigh 1.4 tonnes, as each vehicle Smaller average size adapted to needs of needs carry ve Eseatsxhibit and have high5.7 each trip safety standard Fleet management and more expensive materials incentivise re-use of parts and Circular strategies jointly reduce theEOL materials recovery intensity of transport by 88%

EHIBIT 57 MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS MATERIALS INTENSITY OF TRANSPORT TONNES NEW MATERIALS CARS PER MILLION PKM TONNES MATERIALS PER MILLION PKM

12 26 32

88% X = 06

06

04

OWNED CAR SHARED CAR OWNED CAR SHARED CAR OWNED CAR SHARED CAR

NOTES: PKM DENOTES PASSENGER-KILOMETRES SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS ANALYSIS AS DESCRIBED IN TEXT

2050 FLEET AVERAGE IN A BASELINE VS CIRCULAR SCENARIO 130 EHIBIT 58 PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS TONNES MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS

REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING LIGHTWEIGHTING PROLONGED LIFETIME SHARING % OF INPUT MATERIALS TONNES PER CAR, FLEET AVERAGE 1000 CAR KM PER CAR PASSENGERS PER CAR

13 450 193 5% 11% 163 09 re-manufacturing 280 eller remanufacturing?

BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO

REMANUFACTURED COMPONENTS NEW MATERIALS

CARBON DIOIDE EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS USED IN EU PASSENGER CARS, 2050 Mt CO2, PER YEAR

EHIBIT 59 11 60 4 9 million tonnes 49 eller 21 Mt?

70%

9

18

CURRENT VOLUME BASELINE REUSE AND LIGHT LONGER SHARING CIRCULAR INCREASE SCENARIO 2050 REMANUFACTURING WEIGHTING LIFETIME SCENARIO 2050

COST REDUCTION POTENTIAL EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES EHIBIT 510 155

MATERIAL INPUT KEY DRIVERS OF LOWER COST OF OWNERSHIP

SHARING Higher utilisation per car together with reduced cost through autonomous car eets lower costs per kilometre PARTS CAR MANUFACTURING PROLONGED LIFETIME Reduced total cost per kilometre despite increased cost for input materials 77% DISTRIBUTION AND MS LIGHTWEIGHTING Smaller average cars in shared eets reduce materials input and total cost, despite increased cost for lightweight materials FUELENERGY REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING Larger share reduces input materials and average cost of materials, modular design makes maintenance cheaper

MAINTENANCE

35

CAPITAL COST, INSURANCE, PARKING

CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO 2050

ETERNALITIES AND PUBLIC COSTS OF CAR TRANSPORTATION EHIBIT 511 EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES

264

REDUCED ETERNALITIES AND PUBLIC COST

REDUCED NUMBER OF CARS Due to higher occupancy and increased utilisation result in improved air quality, reduced noise level, less WAITING TIME congestion and less need for inner-city parking AUTONOMOUS AND CONNECTED CARS Are safer, reduce need for signs, lanes and other 74% infrastructure and can optimise trac ows, which reduces congestion and land use for roads

ELECTRIC VEHICLES ACCIDENTS Reduce noise level and have positive impact on air quality, especially when shifting towards renewable AIR POLLUTION energy sources NOISE

INFRASTRUCTURE 68

PARKING COSTS

LAND

CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO 2050

MAOR SHIFT OF INNOVATION FOCUS EHIBIT 512 FROM MAXIMIZING UPFRONT SALES VOLUME AND PRICE, TO MAKING THE CAR A WELL-FUNCTIONING EFFECTIVE PART OF URBAN MOBILITY

Rubriken utgår ifrån att Sharing har positiva INNOVATION SHARING OTHER EFFECTS CIRCULARITY STRATEGIES eekter/för nya innovationer

Jag förstår det som att “Fleet management..” motsvarar Sharing i diagrammet? Och är därför central, dom NEW BUSINESS MODELS esta pilarna (7) utgår ifrån “Fleet management” och ger To suit new customer groups: eekter på de andra områderna cars better integrated with public transport system, pricing to adapt to demand and local geography CAR SHARING Becomes more attractive with autonomous and electric vehicles CAR SIZES - Är det så?? AUTONOMOUS CARS En del av “Higher utilisation Variation in car sizes (not all cars Becomes cost worthy per car” i diagrammet. need to be designed for 5 passengers) - Svår att få in LIGHTEWIGHTING

FLEET LUDDE DEN HR BEHVER HIGHER MANAGEMENT OCKS LITE KRLEK UTILISATION NEW VEHICLE DESIGN PER CAR Professional car FRENKLA GRNA S More durable materials CAR SHARING owners MYCKET SOM MLIGT, + modular design for quick HR AV DIG OM DU BEHVER Becomes more attractive repair and upgradeability FRKLARING with autonomous and electric vehicles PROLONGED LIFETIME

ongoing... ELECTRIC VEHICLES PROACTIVE Are more pro table with Maintenance more miles

REMANUFACTURING OF PARTS AND RECYCLING (new vehicle design makes MORE PREDICTIVE EoL value higher) EoL ows

EHIBIT 512 CIRCULARITY STRATEGIES OTHER EFFECTS

version 1 - FEL NEW BUSINESS MODELS To suit new customer groups: cars better integrated with public transport system, pricing to adapt to demand and local geography

CAR SIZES AUTONOMOUS CARS Variation in car sizes (not all cars Becomes cost worthy need to be designed for 5 passengers) LIGHTEWIGHTING

HIGHER NEW VEHICLE DESIGN UTILISATION PER CAR More durable materials + modular design for quick repair and upgradeability FLEET MANAGEMENT Professional car owners PROLONGED LIFETIME

ELECTRIC VEHICLES PROACTIVE Are more pro table with Maintenance more miles

REMANUFACTURING OF PARTS AND RECYCLING (new vehicle design makes MORE PREDICTIVE EoL value higher) EoL ows REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

The key is a custom-made vehicle, designed for durability and easy maintenance during intensive use. CO2 IMPACT OF MATERIALS TOTAL COST OF OWNERSHIP ETERNALITIES AND COST TO SOCIETY Mt CO2 PER YEAR, EUROPE EUR PER 1000 PKM EUR PER 1000 PKM 60 155 264 EHIBIT 51

STEEL 70% 77% 74%

ALUMINIUM 18 68 35 PLASTICS

OTHER

BASELINE CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050

PKM = Passenger-kilometre

LIFECYCLE CO2 EMISSIONS FROM INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE VEHICLES ICEV VS ELECTRIC VEHICLES EV EHIBIT 52 g CO2 PER CAR-KM

216 167 37 9%

Källa till diagrammet 58% nns i PowerPoint USE PHASE 77%

91%

42% PRODUCTION 23% AND MATERIALS

ICEV EV, CURRENT ENERGY EV, RENEWABLE MI EUROPE ENERGY

Note: Emissions calculated per car kilometre for the large vehicle segment with an average weight of 1528 kg over a lifetime of 180,000 km.

PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS MATERIALS INTENSITY OF TRANSPORT TONNES MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS REQUIRED TONNES MATERIALS TO ENABLE TRAVEL

1 REDUCE WEIGHT PER VEHICLE 3 SHARING MATERIALS INPUTS REUIRED EHIBIT 53 Lower average vehicle size in a shared Large increase in utilisation in a TO SUPPORT MOBILITY car system, better matching vehicles to shared-car system Large reduction in total amount of materials actual trip needs Higher occupancy per vehicle with that must be produced for useful travel Advanced design and materials choices mobility as a service (materials per passenger kilometres)

2 REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING 4 LONGER LIFESPANS Reduced waste in vehicles production X More intensive use increases incentives = Modular design and replacement of for durable design components with limited lifetime Electric drivetrains with intrinsically Increased re-use of durable components better durability at end-of-life Proactive maintenance of eet-managed Controls over inventory and ows in a vehicles eet-managed system of shared cars Modular design to enable replacement of components with shorter lifespans

1 3 5 TRAVEL DEMAND CAR OWNERSHIP CAR WEIGHT TRILLION PASSENGER-KM BY CAR PER YEAR CARS PER CAPITA, EU28 TONNES PER CAR EHIBIT 54

47 057 139 45 053 134

2005 2015 2005 2015 2005 2015 2 4 6 OCCUPANCY PER CAR CAR LIFETIME SCRAP IN CAR MANUFACTURING CAR OCCUPANCY (PASSENGER PER CAR), UK CAR KM PER CAR DURING LIFETIME % SCRAPPED MATERIALS

157 156 170 140 40%

2005 2015 2006 2013

DOWNGRADING AND COPPER MIING OF STEEL PREVENTION OF PLASTICS RECYCLING

EHIBIT 55 ONLY 8% OF STEEL RECYCLED FROM VEHICLES HIGHVALUE RECYCLING IS NOT FEASIBLE FOR CAN BE USED AS MATERIALS FOR NEW CARS A LARGE SHARE OF VEHICLE PLASTIC VOLUMES Shredding of vehicles mixes copper with steel which is Current practices leaves plastics in a mixed fraction a serious long term contaminant of the steel stock that often is land lled / incinerated Alloys are not separated, leading to lost values of alloy Material substitution for lightweighting leads to bre metals, waste of critical materials, and downcycling of reinforced plastics that contaminates other plastics ows steel and that is dicult to recycle

Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint DOWNGRADING OF ALUMINIUM LIMITED RECYCLING OF RARE CRITICAL METALS

MIING OF ALUMINIUM ALLOYS RESULTS IN ENDOFLIFE VEHICLES LEADS TO LARGE LOSSES DOWNGRADING OF WROUGHT ALUMINIUM OF CRITICAL METALS AUTO PARTS Rare critical metals can make up 1% of total vehicle materials Cars make up >40% of cast aluminium demand, a key Only eight out of 25 scarce metals are recycled, with ‘sink’ for aluminium recycling the remainder lost to carrier metals, construction and Aluminium used in cars is downgraded when mixed back lling materials and land lls with cast aluminium, precluding other uses

EHIBIT 56 FROM: AN OWNED CAR ECONOMY TO: A SHARED CAR ECONOMY

A FUNDAMENTAL SHIFT IN E ective utilisation of a typical European Cars shared and operated in eets increase OWNERSHIP AND OPERATING car is 2%, reecting the needs of individual both utilisation and occupancy per car MODEL car owners High utilisation dramatically changes Slow adoption of capital intensive incentives for durability, maintenance, technologies (such as autonomous drive and re-use, as well as a range of more electric drivetrains) due to high investment capital-intensive solutions cost and low utilisation

CARS DESIGNED AND LIFETIME OF 12 YEARS OR 230,000 KM, LIFETIME INCREASED TO 700,000 KM, MATCHING MANAGED FOR RUNTIME MATCHING THE NEEDS OF INDIVIDUAL OWNERS THE NEEDS OF INTENSIVELY USED VEHICLES Low utilisation places limits on up-front Electric drivetrains with intrinsically investment and on bene ts of longer lifetime longer lifetime Investments in more durable materials Limited maintenance, and disconnect (more attractive for highly utilised cars) between end-of-life vehicles and rst owners Proactive maintenance and modular design enable re-manufacturing

MATERIALS IMPACT LOW UTILISATION, HIGH WEIGHT, AND LIMITED RANGE OF SIZES, ADVANCED MATERIALS, AND MINIMISED LIFETIME RESULTS IN HIGH MATERIALS INTENSITY AUTONOMOUS DRIVING REDUCE FOOTPRINT Cars weigh 1.4 tonnes, as each vehicle Smaller average size adapted to needs of needsREVIEW carry ve seatsDRAFT and have – highDO NOT DISTRIBUTEeach trip REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE safety standard Fleet management and more expensive materials incentivise re-use of parts and EOL recovery

A CIRCULAR SCENARIO CUTS CO2 EMISSIONS BY 70% The above describes the characteristics of an indivi- 900 kg. Average lifetime almost doubles, from 280,000 to EHIBIT 57 dual vehicle. To understand the impact on total materials 450,000 kilometres, while average occupancy goes up by MATERIALSdemand PERand CAR CO2 emissions from materials,NUMBER it OFis necesCARS - 18%, to 1.91 passengersMATERIALS per INTENSITY car. OF TRANSPORT TONNES NEW MATERIALS CARS PER MILLION PKM TONNES MATERIALS PER MILLION PKM sary to construct a scenario for the mobility system as a whole. Combining these, the effect on CO2 from vehicle materials falls by as much as 70%, or almost 40 million tonnes of CO2 We construct12 a circular scenario to 2050 to 26explore this, per year (Exhibit 5.9). Reuse/remanufacturing,32 lightweigh- with two-thirds of travel served by shared and fleet-mana- ting, and sharing all contribute some part of this, but more ged vehicles as described above, and the remainder by than half occurs because of longer lifetimes.88% This is thus a individually owned cars much like those in use today. In prime example of how demand-side strategies can address aggregate terms, the outcome is an average of a shared CO2 emissions, and in an important sector. It is also an im- and an individually owned systemX (Exhibit 5.8). The sha- portant element= of the saturation of metal stocks discussed re of new materials 06per vehicle falls to 89% with remanu- in Chapters 2 and 4. In fact, with a shared mobility system, facturing, while the average weight falls from 1,300 kg to stocks could fall rather than increase or saturate. 06

04 Exhibit 5.8 OWNED CAR SHARED CAR OWNED CAR SHARED CAR OWNED CAR SHARED CAR A circular scenario reduces materials requirements in multiple ways

2050 FLEET AVERAGE IN A BASELINE VS CIRCULAR SCENARIO

EHIBIT 58 PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS TONNES MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS

REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING LIGHTWEIGHTING PROLONGED LIFETIME SHARING % OF INPUT MATERIALS TONNES PER CAR, FLEET AVERAGE 1000 CAR KM PER CAR PASSENGERS PER CAR

13 450 193 5% 11% 163 09 re-manufacturing 280 eller remanufacturing?

BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO

REMANUFACTURED COMPONENTS NEW MATERIALS

SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS ANALYSIS CARBON DIOIDE EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS USED IN EU PASSENGER CARS, 2050 Mt CO2, PER YEAR 132 EHIBIT 59 11 60 4 9 million tonnes 49 eller 21 Mt?

70%

9

18

CURRENT VOLUME BASELINE REUSE AND LIGHT LONGER SHARING CIRCULAR INCREASE SCENARIO 2050 REMANUFACTURING WEIGHTING LIFETIME SCENARIO 2050

COST REDUCTION POTENTIAL EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES EHIBIT 510 155

MATERIAL INPUT KEY DRIVERS OF LOWER COST OF OWNERSHIP

SHARING Higher utilisation per car together with reduced cost through autonomous car eets lower costs per kilometre PARTS CAR MANUFACTURING PROLONGED LIFETIME Reduced total cost per kilometre despite increased cost for input materials 77% DISTRIBUTION AND MS LIGHTWEIGHTING Smaller average cars in shared eets reduce materials input and total cost, despite increased cost for lightweight materials FUELENERGY REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING Larger share reduces input materials and average cost of materials, modular design makes maintenance cheaper

MAINTENANCE

35

CAPITAL COST, INSURANCE, PARKING

CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO 2050

ETERNALITIES AND PUBLIC COSTS OF CAR TRANSPORTATION EHIBIT 511 EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES

264

REDUCED ETERNALITIES AND PUBLIC COST

REDUCED NUMBER OF CARS Due to higher occupancy and increased utilisation result in improved air quality, reduced noise level, less WAITING TIME congestion and less need for inner-city parking AUTONOMOUS AND CONNECTED CARS Are safer, reduce need for signs, lanes and other 74% infrastructure and can optimise trac ows, which reduces congestion and land use for roads

ELECTRIC VEHICLES ACCIDENTS Reduce noise level and have positive impact on air quality, especially when shifting towards renewable AIR POLLUTION energy sources NOISE

INFRASTRUCTURE 68

PARKING COSTS

LAND

CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO 2050

MAOR SHIFT OF INNOVATION FOCUS EHIBIT 512 FROM MAXIMIZING UPFRONT SALES VOLUME AND PRICE, TO MAKING THE CAR A WELL-FUNCTIONING EFFECTIVE PART OF URBAN MOBILITY

Rubriken utgår ifrån att Sharing har positiva INNOVATION SHARING OTHER EFFECTS CIRCULARITY STRATEGIES eekter/för nya innovationer

Jag förstår det som att “Fleet management..” motsvarar Sharing i diagrammet? Och är därför central, dom NEW BUSINESS MODELS esta pilarna (7) utgår ifrån “Fleet management” och ger To suit new customer groups: eekter på de andra områderna cars better integrated with public transport system, pricing to adapt to demand and local geography CAR SHARING Becomes more attractive with autonomous and electric vehicles CAR SIZES - Är det så?? AUTONOMOUS CARS En del av “Higher utilisation Variation in car sizes (not all cars Becomes cost worthy per car” i diagrammet. need to be designed for 5 passengers) - Svår att få in LIGHTEWIGHTING

FLEET LUDDE DEN HR BEHVER HIGHER MANAGEMENT OCKS LITE KRLEK UTILISATION NEW VEHICLE DESIGN PER CAR Professional car FRENKLA GRNA S More durable materials CAR SHARING owners MYCKET SOM MLIGT, + modular design for quick HR AV DIG OM DU BEHVER Becomes more attractive repair and upgradeability FRKLARING with autonomous and electric vehicles PROLONGED LIFETIME

ongoing... ELECTRIC VEHICLES PROACTIVE Are more pro table with Maintenance more miles

REMANUFACTURING OF PARTS AND RECYCLING (new vehicle design makes MORE PREDICTIVE EoL value higher) EoL ows

EHIBIT 512 CIRCULARITY STRATEGIES OTHER EFFECTS

version 1 - FEL NEW BUSINESS MODELS To suit new customer groups: cars better integrated with public transport system, pricing to adapt to demand and local geography

CAR SIZES AUTONOMOUS CARS Variation in car sizes (not all cars Becomes cost worthy need to be designed for 5 passengers) LIGHTEWIGHTING

HIGHER NEW VEHICLE DESIGN UTILISATION PER CAR More durable materials + modular design for quick repair and upgradeability FLEET MANAGEMENT Professional car owners PROLONGED LIFETIME

ELECTRIC VEHICLES PROACTIVE Are more pro table with Maintenance more miles

REMANUFACTURING OF PARTS AND RECYCLING (new vehicle design makes MORE PREDICTIVE EoL value higher) EoL ows CO2 IMPACT OF MATERIALS TOTAL COST OF OWNERSHIP ETERNALITIES AND COST TO SOCIETY Mt CO2 PER YEAR, EUROPE EUR PER 1000 PKM EUR PER 1000 PKM 60 155 264 EHIBIT 51

STEEL 70% 77% 74%

ALUMINIUM 18 68 35 PLASTICS

OTHER

BASELINE CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050

PKM = Passenger-kilometre

LIFECYCLE CO2 EMISSIONS FROM INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE VEHICLES ICEV VS ELECTRIC VEHICLES EV EHIBIT 52 g CO2 PER CAR-KM

216 167 37 9%

Källa till diagrammet 58% nns i PowerPoint USE PHASE 77%

91%

42% PRODUCTION 23% AND MATERIALS

ICEV EV, CURRENT ENERGY EV, RENEWABLE MI EUROPE ENERGY

Note: Emissions calculated per car kilometre for the large vehicle segment with an average weight of 1528 kg over a lifetime of 180,000 km.

PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS MATERIALS INTENSITY OF TRANSPORT TONNES MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS REQUIRED TONNES MATERIALS TO ENABLE TRAVEL

1 REDUCE WEIGHT PER VEHICLE 3 SHARING MATERIALS INPUTS REUIRED EHIBIT 53 Lower average vehicle size in a shared Large increase in utilisation in a TO SUPPORT MOBILITY car system, better matching vehicles to shared-car system Large reduction in total amount of materials actual trip needs Higher occupancy per vehicle with that must be produced for useful travel Advanced design and materials choices mobility as a service (materials per passenger kilometres)

2 REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING 4 LONGER LIFESPANS Reduced waste in vehicles production X More intensive use increases incentives = Modular design and replacement of for durable design components with limited lifetime Electric drivetrains with intrinsically Increased re-use of durable components better durability at end-of-life Proactive maintenance of eet-managed Controls over inventory and ows in a vehicles eet-managed system of shared cars Modular design to enable replacement of components with shorter lifespans

1 3 5 TRAVEL DEMAND CAR OWNERSHIP CAR WEIGHT TRILLION PASSENGER-KM BY CAR PER YEAR CARS PER CAPITA, EU28 TONNES PER CAR EHIBIT 54

47 057 139 45 053 134

2005 2015 2005 2015 2005 2015 2 4 6 OCCUPANCY PER CAR CAR LIFETIME SCRAP IN CAR MANUFACTURING CAR OCCUPANCY (PASSENGER PER CAR), UK CAR KM PER CAR DURING LIFETIME % SCRAPPED MATERIALS

157 156 170 140 40%

2005 2015 2006 2013

DOWNGRADING AND COPPER MIING OF STEEL PREVENTION OF PLASTICS RECYCLING

EHIBIT 55 ONLY 8% OF STEEL RECYCLED FROM VEHICLES HIGHVALUE RECYCLING IS NOT FEASIBLE FOR CAN BE USED AS MATERIALS FOR NEW CARS A LARGE SHARE OF VEHICLE PLASTIC VOLUMES Shredding of vehicles mixes copper with steel which is Current practices leaves plastics in a mixed fraction a serious long term contaminant of the steel stock that often is land lled / incinerated Alloys are not separated, leading to lost values of alloy Material substitution for lightweighting leads to bre metals, waste of critical materials, and downcycling of reinforced plastics that contaminates other plastics ows steel and that is dicult to recycle

Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint DOWNGRADING OF ALUMINIUM LIMITED RECYCLING OF RARE CRITICAL METALS

MIING OF ALUMINIUM ALLOYS RESULTS IN ENDOFLIFE VEHICLES LEADS TO LARGE LOSSES DOWNGRADING OF WROUGHT ALUMINIUM OF CRITICAL METALS AUTO PARTS Rare critical metals can make up 1% of total vehicle materials Cars make up >40% of cast aluminium demand, a key Only eight out of 25 scarce metals are recycled, with ‘sink’ for aluminium recycling the remainder lost to carrier metals, construction and Aluminium used in cars is downgraded when mixed back lling materials and land lls with cast aluminium, precluding other uses

EHIBIT 56 FROM: AN OWNED CAR ECONOMY TO: A SHARED CAR ECONOMY

A FUNDAMENTAL SHIFT IN E ective utilisation of a typical European Cars shared and operated in eets increase OWNERSHIP AND OPERATING car is 2%, reecting the needs of individual both utilisation and occupancy per car MODEL car owners High utilisation dramatically changes Slow adoption of capital intensive incentives for durability, maintenance, technologies (such as autonomous drive and re-use, as well as a range of more electric drivetrains) due to high investment capital-intensive solutions cost and low utilisation

CARS DESIGNED AND LIFETIME OF 12 YEARS OR 230,000 KM, LIFETIME INCREASED TO 700,000 KM, MATCHING MANAGED FOR RUNTIME MATCHING THE NEEDS OF INDIVIDUAL OWNERS THE NEEDS OF INTENSIVELY USED VEHICLES Low utilisation places limits on up-front Electric drivetrains with intrinsically investment and on bene ts of longer lifetime longer lifetime Investments in more durable materials Limited maintenance, and disconnect (more attractive for highly utilised cars) between end-of-life vehicles and rst owners Proactive maintenance and modular design enable re-manufacturing

MATERIALS IMPACT LOW UTILISATION, HIGH WEIGHT, AND LIMITED RANGE OF SIZES, ADVANCED MATERIALS, AND MINIMISED LIFETIME RESULTS IN HIGH MATERIALS INTENSITY AUTONOMOUS DRIVING REDUCE FOOTPRINT Cars weigh 1.4 tonnes, as each vehicle Smaller average size adapted to needs of needs carry ve seats and have high each trip safety standard Fleet management and more expensive materials incentivise re-use of parts and EOL recovery

EHIBIT 57 MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS MATERIALS INTENSITY OF TRANSPORT TONNES NEW MATERIALS CARS PER MILLION PKM TONNES MATERIALS PER MILLION PKM

12 26 32

88% X = 06

06

04

OWNED CAR SHARED CAR OWNED CAR SHARED CAR OWNED CAR SHARED CAR

2050 FLEET AVERAGE IN A BASELINE VS CIRCULAR SCENARIO

EHIBIT 58 PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS TONNES MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS

REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING LIGHTWEIGHTING PROLONGED LIFETIME SHARING % OF INPUT MATERIALS TONNES PER CAR, FLEET AVERAGE 1000 CAR KM PER CAR PASSENGERS PER CAR

13REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE450 193 5% 11% 163 09 re-manufacturing 280 eller remanufacturing?

Exhibit 5.9 2050 CO2 emissions from materials fall BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIOby 70% inSCENARIO a circularSCENARIO scenarioSCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO

REMANUFACTURED COMPONENTS NEW MATERIALS

CARBON DIOIDE EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS USED IN EU PASSENGER CARS, 2050 Mt CO2, PER YEAR

EHIBIT 59 11 60 4 9 million tonnes 49 eller 21 Mt?

70%

9

18

CURRENT VOLUME BASELINE REUSE AND LIGHT LONGER SHARING CIRCULAR INCREASE SCENARIO 2050 REMANUFACTURING WEIGHTING LIFETIME SCENARIO 2050

COST REDUCTION POTENTIAL EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES EHIBIT 510 155

MATERIAL INPUT KEY DRIVERS OF LOWER COST OF OWNERSHIP

SHARING Higher utilisation per car together with reduced cost through autonomous car eets lower costs per kilometre PARTS CAR MANUFACTURING PROLONGED LIFETIME Reduced total cost per kilometre despite increased cost for input materials 77% DISTRIBUTION AND MS LIGHTWEIGHTING 133 Smaller average cars in shared eets reduce materials input and total cost, despite increased cost for lightweight materials FUELENERGY REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING Larger share reduces input materials and average cost of materials, modular design makes maintenance cheaper

MAINTENANCE

35

CAPITAL COST, INSURANCE, PARKING

CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO 2050

ETERNALITIES AND PUBLIC COSTS OF CAR TRANSPORTATION EHIBIT 511 EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES

264

REDUCED ETERNALITIES AND PUBLIC COST

REDUCED NUMBER OF CARS Due to higher occupancy and increased utilisation result in improved air quality, reduced noise level, less WAITING TIME congestion and less need for inner-city parking AUTONOMOUS AND CONNECTED CARS Are safer, reduce need for signs, lanes and other 74% infrastructure and can optimise trac ows, which reduces congestion and land use for roads

ELECTRIC VEHICLES ACCIDENTS Reduce noise level and have positive impact on air quality, especially when shifting towards renewable AIR POLLUTION energy sources NOISE

INFRASTRUCTURE 68

PARKING COSTS

LAND

CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO 2050

MAOR SHIFT OF INNOVATION FOCUS EHIBIT 512 FROM MAXIMIZING UPFRONT SALES VOLUME AND PRICE, TO MAKING THE CAR A WELL-FUNCTIONING EFFECTIVE PART OF URBAN MOBILITY

Rubriken utgår ifrån att Sharing har positiva INNOVATION SHARING OTHER EFFECTS CIRCULARITY STRATEGIES eekter/för nya innovationer

Jag förstår det som att “Fleet management..” motsvarar Sharing i diagrammet? Och är därför central, dom NEW BUSINESS MODELS esta pilarna (7) utgår ifrån “Fleet management” och ger To suit new customer groups: eekter på de andra områderna cars better integrated with public transport system, pricing to adapt to demand and local geography CAR SHARING Becomes more attractive with autonomous and electric vehicles CAR SIZES - Är det så?? AUTONOMOUS CARS En del av “Higher utilisation Variation in car sizes (not all cars Becomes cost worthy per car” i diagrammet. need to be designed for 5 passengers) - Svår att få in LIGHTEWIGHTING

FLEET LUDDE DEN HR BEHVER HIGHER MANAGEMENT OCKS LITE KRLEK UTILISATION NEW VEHICLE DESIGN PER CAR Professional car FRENKLA GRNA S More durable materials CAR SHARING owners MYCKET SOM MLIGT, + modular design for quick HR AV DIG OM DU BEHVER Becomes more attractive repair and upgradeability FRKLARING with autonomous and electric vehicles PROLONGED LIFETIME

ongoing... ELECTRIC VEHICLES PROACTIVE Are more pro table with Maintenance more miles

REMANUFACTURING OF PARTS AND RECYCLING (new vehicle design makes MORE PREDICTIVE EoL value higher) EoL ows

EHIBIT 512 CIRCULARITY STRATEGIES OTHER EFFECTS

version 1 - FEL NEW BUSINESS MODELS To suit new customer groups: cars better integrated with public transport system, pricing to adapt to demand and local geography

CAR SIZES AUTONOMOUS CARS Variation in car sizes (not all cars Becomes cost worthy need to be designed for 5 passengers) LIGHTEWIGHTING

HIGHER NEW VEHICLE DESIGN UTILISATION PER CAR More durable materials + modular design for quick repair and upgradeability FLEET MANAGEMENT Professional car owners PROLONGED LIFETIME

ELECTRIC VEHICLES PROACTIVE Are more pro table with Maintenance more miles

REMANUFACTURING OF PARTS AND RECYCLING (new vehicle design makes MORE PREDICTIVE EoL value higher) EoL ows REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

A SHARED-MOBILITY SYSTEM IS HIGHLY COST-EFFECTIVE

Although the shared-mobility system described abo- If travel becomes both cheaper and more convenient, ve would be much more resource-efficient, the main -mo one likely response is to boost total distance travelled – tivating factor would be its much greater economic pro- a so-called ‘rebound’ effect. The above analysis allows ductivity. By using both inputs and products much more for this, assuming a 20% rebound effect. The rebound intensively, the costs would be lower, and technologies could very well grow larger still if left unmanaged, but that cut running costs (such as electric drivetrains) would policy-makers have a number of options to contain it, be more profitable. whether through charges or regulation. As important as the total volume of travel is the integration of shared and This can be explored by looking at the costs of indivi- self-driving cars with other transport modes, and especi- dual ownership vs. the shared car model (Exhibit 5.10). ally public transport. A major task for future city planners Even when allowing for increased costs associated with will be to ensure integrated transport solutions that serve factors such as more durable design, valuable materials, overall social objectives. higher capital expenditure for electric vehicles, and more advanced automation for self-driving vehicles, costs fall A shift towards a shared mobility system could also substantially. The extra costs are simply overpowered by help mitigate many of the negative effects of today’s the greatly increased utilisation, smaller size of the aver- transport system. These are very significant today. Cong- age vehicle, and productivity gains from reuse and re- estion costs up to 2% of GDP in major EU cities. Every manufacturing. Comparing the circular scenario with one year, 26,000 people die in traffic accidents in the EU, dominated by individually owned vehicles, the net result and another 1.5 million are injured. Road transport also is a reduction in the average cost per passenger-kilome- accounts for 39% of nitrous oxide and 11% of particu- tre of as much as 77%. This may seem like an astounding late matter (PM2.5) air pollution in the EU, which are at claim, but other analyses have reached similar findings. the root of 475,000 premature deaths each year. Noise This gives a clear example of how new circular business pollution is another major factor, with costs only very par- models can combine improvements in economic produc- tially accounted for today. Added to these ‘externalities’, tivity with greater resource efficiency. a number of costs of transport are socialised, such as when public funds pay for infrastructure, valuable land The reduced cost of travel would also come with gre- is given up for roads, and parking is subsidised. Valuing ater convenience, as passengers would not need to own these effects is notoriously tricky, and the exact amounts their own vehicles, including the risk of value depreciation can be controversial. Nonetheless, standard estimates and hassle of repairs and maintenance. Self-driving cars from the literature suggest externalities and other public can also free up driving time for other purposes, reducing costs add up to more even than the total cost paid by the trade-off between travel and either work or leisure. car owners.

134 CO2 IMPACT OF MATERIALS TOTAL COST OF OWNERSHIP ETERNALITIES AND COST TO SOCIETY Mt CO2 PER YEAR, EUROPE EUR PER 1000 PKM EUR PER 1000 PKM 60 155 264 EHIBIT 51

STEEL 70% 77% 74%

ALUMINIUM 18 68 35 PLASTICS

OTHER

BASELINE CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050

PKM = Passenger-kilometre

LIFECYCLE CO2 EMISSIONS FROM INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE VEHICLES ICEV VS ELECTRIC VEHICLES EV EHIBIT 52 g CO2 PER CAR-KM

216 167 37 9%

Källa till diagrammet 58% nns i PowerPoint USE PHASE 77%

91%

42% PRODUCTION 23% AND MATERIALS

ICEV EV, CURRENT ENERGY EV, RENEWABLE MI EUROPE ENERGY

Note: Emissions calculated per car kilometre for the large vehicle segment with an average weight of 1528 kg over a lifetime of 180,000 km.

PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS MATERIALS INTENSITY OF TRANSPORT TONNES MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS REQUIRED TONNES MATERIALS TO ENABLE TRAVEL

1 REDUCE WEIGHT PER VEHICLE 3 SHARING MATERIALS INPUTS REUIRED EHIBIT 53 Lower average vehicle size in a shared Large increase in utilisation in a TO SUPPORT MOBILITY car system, better matching vehicles to shared-car system Large reduction in total amount of materials actual trip needs Higher occupancy per vehicle with that must be produced for useful travel Advanced design and materials choices mobility as a service (materials per passenger kilometres)

2 REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING 4 LONGER LIFESPANS Reduced waste in vehicles production X More intensive use increases incentives = Modular design and replacement of for durable design components with limited lifetime Electric drivetrains with intrinsically Increased re-use of durable components better durability at end-of-life Proactive maintenance of eet-managed Controls over inventory and ows in a vehicles eet-managed system of shared cars Modular design to enable replacement of components with shorter lifespans

1 3 5 TRAVEL DEMAND CAR OWNERSHIP CAR WEIGHT TRILLION PASSENGER-KM BY CAR PER YEAR CARS PER CAPITA, EU28 TONNES PER CAR EHIBIT 54

47 057 139 45 053 134

2005 2015 2005 2015 2005 2015 2 4 6 OCCUPANCY PER CAR CAR LIFETIME SCRAP IN CAR MANUFACTURING CAR OCCUPANCY (PASSENGER PER CAR), UK CAR KM PER CAR DURING LIFETIME % SCRAPPED MATERIALS

157 156 170 140 40%

2005 2015 2006 2013

DOWNGRADING AND COPPER MIING OF STEEL PREVENTION OF PLASTICS RECYCLING

EHIBIT 55 ONLY 8% OF STEEL RECYCLED FROM VEHICLES HIGHVALUE RECYCLING IS NOT FEASIBLE FOR CAN BE USED AS MATERIALS FOR NEW CARS A LARGE SHARE OF VEHICLE PLASTIC VOLUMES Shredding of vehicles mixes copper with steel which is Current practices leaves plastics in a mixed fraction a serious long term contaminant of the steel stock that often is land lled / incinerated Alloys are not separated, leading to lost values of alloy Material substitution for lightweighting leads to bre metals, waste of critical materials, and downcycling of reinforced plastics that contaminates other plastics ows steel and that is dicult to recycle

Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint DOWNGRADING OF ALUMINIUM LIMITED RECYCLING OF RARE CRITICAL METALS

MIING OF ALUMINIUM ALLOYS RESULTS IN ENDOFLIFE VEHICLES LEADS TO LARGE LOSSES DOWNGRADING OF WROUGHT ALUMINIUM OF CRITICAL METALS AUTO PARTS Rare critical metals can make up 1% of total vehicle materials Cars make up >40% of cast aluminium demand, a key Only eight out of 25 scarce metals are recycled, with ‘sink’ for aluminium recycling the remainder lost to carrier metals, construction and Aluminium used in cars is downgraded when mixed back lling materials and land lls with cast aluminium, precluding other uses

EHIBIT 56 FROM: AN OWNED CAR ECONOMY TO: A SHARED CAR ECONOMY

A FUNDAMENTAL SHIFT IN E ective utilisation of a typical European Cars shared and operated in eets increase OWNERSHIP AND OPERATING car is 2%, reecting the needs of individual both utilisation and occupancy per car MODEL car owners High utilisation dramatically changes Slow adoption of capital intensive incentives for durability, maintenance, technologies (such as autonomous drive and re-use, as well as a range of more electric drivetrains) due to high investment capital-intensive solutions cost and low utilisation

CARS DESIGNED AND LIFETIME OF 12 YEARS OR 230,000 KM, LIFETIME INCREASED TO 700,000 KM, MATCHING MANAGED FOR RUNTIME MATCHING THE NEEDS OF INDIVIDUAL OWNERS THE NEEDS OF INTENSIVELY USED VEHICLES Low utilisation places limits on up-front Electric drivetrains with intrinsically investment and on bene ts of longer lifetime longer lifetime Investments in more durable materials Limited maintenance, and disconnect (more attractive for highly utilised cars) between end-of-life vehicles and rst owners Proactive maintenance and modular design enable re-manufacturing

MATERIALS IMPACT LOW UTILISATION, HIGH WEIGHT, AND LIMITED RANGE OF SIZES, ADVANCED MATERIALS, AND MINIMISED LIFETIME RESULTS IN HIGH MATERIALS INTENSITY AUTONOMOUS DRIVING REDUCE FOOTPRINT Cars weigh 1.4 tonnes, as each vehicle Smaller average size adapted to needs of needs carry ve seats and have high each trip safety standard Fleet management and more expensive materials incentivise re-use of parts and EOL recovery

EHIBIT 57 MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS MATERIALS INTENSITY OF TRANSPORT TONNES NEW MATERIALS CARS PER MILLION PKM TONNES MATERIALS PER MILLION PKM

12 26 32

88% X = 06

06

04

OWNED CAR SHARED CAR OWNED CAR SHARED CAR OWNED CAR SHARED CAR

2050 FLEET AVERAGE IN A BASELINE VS CIRCULAR SCENARIO

EHIBIT 58 PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS TONNES MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS

REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING LIGHTWEIGHTING PROLONGED LIFETIME SHARING % OF INPUT MATERIALS TONNES PER CAR, FLEET AVERAGE 1000 CAR KM PER CAR PASSENGERS PER CAR

13 450 193 5% 11% 163 09 re-manufacturing 280 eller remanufacturing?

BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO

REMANUFACTURED COMPONENTS NEW MATERIALS

CARBON DIOIDE EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS USED IN EU PASSENGER CARS, 2050 Mt CO2, PER YEAR

EHIBIT 59 11 60 4 9 million tonnes 49 eller 21 Mt?

REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE 70%

9 Exhibit 5.10 18 A shared car system reduces the cost of transportation by 77%

CURRENT VOLUME BASELINE REUSE AND LIGHT LONGER SHARING CIRCULAR INCREASE SCENARIO 2050 REMANUFACTURING WEIGHTING LIFETIME SCENARIO 2050

COST REDUCTION POTENTIAL EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES EHIBIT 510 155

MATERIAL INPUT KEY DRIVERS OF LOWER COST OF OWNERSHIP

SHARING Higher utilisation per car together with reduced cost through autonomous car eets lower costs per kilometre PARTS CAR MANUFACTURING PROLONGED LIFETIME Reduced total cost per kilometre despite increased cost for input materials 77% DISTRIBUTION AND MS LIGHTWEIGHTING Smaller average cars in shared eets reduce materials input and total cost, despite increased cost for lightweight materials FUELENERGY REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING Larger share reduces input materials and average cost of materials, modular design makes maintenance cheaper

MAINTENANCE

35

CAPITAL COST, INSURANCE, PARKING

CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO 2050

ETERNALITIES AND PUBLIC COSTS OF CAR TRANSPORTATION EHIBIT 511 EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES

264 SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS ANALYSIS REDUCED ETERNALITIES AND PUBLIC COST

REDUCED NUMBER OF CARS 135 Due to higher occupancy and increased utilisation result in improved air quality, reduced noise level, less WAITING TIME congestion and less need for inner-city parking AUTONOMOUS AND CONNECTED CARS Are safer, reduce need for signs, lanes and other 74% infrastructure and can optimise trac ows, which reduces congestion and land use for roads

ELECTRIC VEHICLES ACCIDENTS Reduce noise level and have positive impact on air quality, especially when shifting towards renewable AIR POLLUTION energy sources NOISE

INFRASTRUCTURE 68

PARKING COSTS

LAND

CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO 2050

MAOR SHIFT OF INNOVATION FOCUS EHIBIT 512 FROM MAXIMIZING UPFRONT SALES VOLUME AND PRICE, TO MAKING THE CAR A WELL-FUNCTIONING EFFECTIVE PART OF URBAN MOBILITY

Rubriken utgår ifrån att Sharing har positiva INNOVATION SHARING OTHER EFFECTS CIRCULARITY STRATEGIES eekter/för nya innovationer

Jag förstår det som att “Fleet management..” motsvarar Sharing i diagrammet? Och är därför central, dom NEW BUSINESS MODELS esta pilarna (7) utgår ifrån “Fleet management” och ger To suit new customer groups: eekter på de andra områderna cars better integrated with public transport system, pricing to adapt to demand and local geography CAR SHARING Becomes more attractive with autonomous and electric vehicles CAR SIZES - Är det så?? AUTONOMOUS CARS En del av “Higher utilisation Variation in car sizes (not all cars Becomes cost worthy per car” i diagrammet. need to be designed for 5 passengers) - Svår att få in LIGHTEWIGHTING

FLEET LUDDE DEN HR BEHVER HIGHER MANAGEMENT OCKS LITE KRLEK UTILISATION NEW VEHICLE DESIGN PER CAR Professional car FRENKLA GRNA S More durable materials CAR SHARING owners MYCKET SOM MLIGT, + modular design for quick HR AV DIG OM DU BEHVER Becomes more attractive repair and upgradeability FRKLARING with autonomous and electric vehicles PROLONGED LIFETIME

ongoing... ELECTRIC VEHICLES PROACTIVE Are more pro table with Maintenance more miles

REMANUFACTURING OF PARTS AND RECYCLING (new vehicle design makes MORE PREDICTIVE EoL value higher) EoL ows

EHIBIT 512 CIRCULARITY STRATEGIES OTHER EFFECTS

version 1 - FEL NEW BUSINESS MODELS To suit new customer groups: cars better integrated with public transport system, pricing to adapt to demand and local geography

CAR SIZES AUTONOMOUS CARS Variation in car sizes (not all cars Becomes cost worthy need to be designed for 5 passengers) LIGHTEWIGHTING

HIGHER NEW VEHICLE DESIGN UTILISATION PER CAR More durable materials + modular design for quick repair and upgradeability FLEET MANAGEMENT Professional car owners PROLONGED LIFETIME

ELECTRIC VEHICLES PROACTIVE Are more pro table with Maintenance more miles

REMANUFACTURING OF PARTS AND RECYCLING (new vehicle design makes MORE PREDICTIVE EoL value higher) EoL ows REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Autonomous vehicles offer the prospect of reducing accidents sharply, as more than 90% of accidents are attributable to human error.

A shared mobility system would help reduce many of Like with rebound, this outcome depends on carefully ma- these costs. The total number of cars required to serve naging the transition to a shared system. For example, early a given travel need would be lower, because of higher experiments with car sharing have resulted in more conges- occupancy and sequential sharing over the course of tion rather than less in some cities, by taking passengers out a day. Autonomous vehicles offer the prospect of redu- of public transport systems and into shared cars. Individual cing accidents sharply, as more than 90% of accidents car-sharing services have also been controversial at times, are attributable to human error. Self-driving and con- mostly for reasons unrelated to the potential benefits we des- nected cars can also optimise traffic flows, drive more cribe above (e.g. tax status, employment rights, impact on ex- densely than is possible with human drivers, and do isting taxi services, etc.). However, these are particular to indi- not need parking space in city centres – thus reducing vidual situations and represent at most incremental change; congestion as well as land use requirements for roads there is little reason to think that these are intrinsic to shared and parking. By speeding up the adoption of electric mobility. Nonetheless, they serve as a reminder that large vehicles, a shared car system would also contribute to transitions in fundamental systems such as personal mobility reduced air and noise pollution. A systematic analysis often unfold in bumpy ways. Policy-makers and business le- of different factors suggests as much as 70% of exter- aders alike need to be alert to problems that may arise. For nalities and public costs could be eliminated (Exhibit all that, the intrinsic higher productivity and other benefits of 5.11). such a system are so large that it is well worth aiming for.

136 CO2 IMPACT OF MATERIALS TOTAL COST OF OWNERSHIP ETERNALITIES AND COST TO SOCIETY Mt CO2 PER YEAR, EUROPE EUR PER 1000 PKM EUR PER 1000 PKM 60 155 264 EHIBIT 51

STEEL 70% 77% 74%

ALUMINIUM 18 68 35 PLASTICS

OTHER

BASELINE CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050 SCENARIO, 2050

PKM = Passenger-kilometre

LIFECYCLE CO2 EMISSIONS FROM INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE VEHICLES ICEV VS ELECTRIC VEHICLES EV EHIBIT 52 g CO2 PER CAR-KM

216 167 37 9%

Källa till diagrammet 58% nns i PowerPoint USE PHASE 77%

91%

42% PRODUCTION 23% AND MATERIALS

ICEV EV, CURRENT ENERGY EV, RENEWABLE MI EUROPE ENERGY

Note: Emissions calculated per car kilometre for the large vehicle segment with an average weight of 1528 kg over a lifetime of 180,000 km.

PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS MATERIALS INTENSITY OF TRANSPORT TONNES MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS REQUIRED TONNES MATERIALS TO ENABLE TRAVEL

1 REDUCE WEIGHT PER VEHICLE 3 SHARING MATERIALS INPUTS REUIRED EHIBIT 53 Lower average vehicle size in a shared Large increase in utilisation in a TO SUPPORT MOBILITY car system, better matching vehicles to shared-car system Large reduction in total amount of materials actual trip needs Higher occupancy per vehicle with that must be produced for useful travel Advanced design and materials choices mobility as a service (materials per passenger kilometres)

2 REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING 4 LONGER LIFESPANS Reduced waste in vehicles production X More intensive use increases incentives = Modular design and replacement of for durable design components with limited lifetime Electric drivetrains with intrinsically Increased re-use of durable components better durability at end-of-life Proactive maintenance of eet-managed Controls over inventory and ows in a vehicles eet-managed system of shared cars Modular design to enable replacement of components with shorter lifespans

1 3 5 TRAVEL DEMAND CAR OWNERSHIP CAR WEIGHT TRILLION PASSENGER-KM BY CAR PER YEAR CARS PER CAPITA, EU28 TONNES PER CAR EHIBIT 54

47 057 139 45 053 134

2005 2015 2005 2015 2005 2015 2 4 6 OCCUPANCY PER CAR CAR LIFETIME SCRAP IN CAR MANUFACTURING CAR OCCUPANCY (PASSENGER PER CAR), UK CAR KM PER CAR DURING LIFETIME % SCRAPPED MATERIALS

157 156 170 140 40%

2005 2015 2006 2013

DOWNGRADING AND COPPER MIING OF STEEL PREVENTION OF PLASTICS RECYCLING

EHIBIT 55 ONLY 8% OF STEEL RECYCLED FROM VEHICLES HIGHVALUE RECYCLING IS NOT FEASIBLE FOR CAN BE USED AS MATERIALS FOR NEW CARS A LARGE SHARE OF VEHICLE PLASTIC VOLUMES Shredding of vehicles mixes copper with steel which is Current practices leaves plastics in a mixed fraction a serious long term contaminant of the steel stock that often is land lled / incinerated Alloys are not separated, leading to lost values of alloy Material substitution for lightweighting leads to bre metals, waste of critical materials, and downcycling of reinforced plastics that contaminates other plastics ows steel and that is dicult to recycle

Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint DOWNGRADING OF ALUMINIUM LIMITED RECYCLING OF RARE CRITICAL METALS

MIING OF ALUMINIUM ALLOYS RESULTS IN ENDOFLIFE VEHICLES LEADS TO LARGE LOSSES DOWNGRADING OF WROUGHT ALUMINIUM OF CRITICAL METALS AUTO PARTS Rare critical metals can make up 1% of total vehicle materials Cars make up >40% of cast aluminium demand, a key Only eight out of 25 scarce metals are recycled, with ‘sink’ for aluminium recycling the remainder lost to carrier metals, construction and Aluminium used in cars is downgraded when mixed back lling materials and land lls with cast aluminium, precluding other uses

EHIBIT 56 FROM: AN OWNED CAR ECONOMY TO: A SHARED CAR ECONOMY

A FUNDAMENTAL SHIFT IN E ective utilisation of a typical European Cars shared and operated in eets increase OWNERSHIP AND OPERATING car is 2%, reecting the needs of individual both utilisation and occupancy per car MODEL car owners High utilisation dramatically changes Slow adoption of capital intensive incentives for durability, maintenance, technologies (such as autonomous drive and re-use, as well as a range of more electric drivetrains) due to high investment capital-intensive solutions cost and low utilisation

CARS DESIGNED AND LIFETIME OF 12 YEARS OR 230,000 KM, LIFETIME INCREASED TO 700,000 KM, MATCHING MANAGED FOR RUNTIME MATCHING THE NEEDS OF INDIVIDUAL OWNERS THE NEEDS OF INTENSIVELY USED VEHICLES Low utilisation places limits on up-front Electric drivetrains with intrinsically investment and on bene ts of longer lifetime longer lifetime Investments in more durable materials Limited maintenance, and disconnect (more attractive for highly utilised cars) between end-of-life vehicles and rst owners Proactive maintenance and modular design enable re-manufacturing

MATERIALS IMPACT LOW UTILISATION, HIGH WEIGHT, AND LIMITED RANGE OF SIZES, ADVANCED MATERIALS, AND MINIMISED LIFETIME RESULTS IN HIGH MATERIALS INTENSITY AUTONOMOUS DRIVING REDUCE FOOTPRINT Cars weigh 1.4 tonnes, as each vehicle Smaller average size adapted to needs of needs carry ve seats and have high each trip safety standard Fleet management and more expensive materials incentivise re-use of parts and EOL recovery

EHIBIT 57 MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS MATERIALS INTENSITY OF TRANSPORT TONNES NEW MATERIALS CARS PER MILLION PKM TONNES MATERIALS PER MILLION PKM

12 26 32

88% X = 06

06

04

OWNED CAR SHARED CAR OWNED CAR SHARED CAR OWNED CAR SHARED CAR

2050 FLEET AVERAGE IN A BASELINE VS CIRCULAR SCENARIO

EHIBIT 58 PRODUCT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS TONNES MATERIALS PER CAR NUMBER OF CARS

REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING LIGHTWEIGHTING PROLONGED LIFETIME SHARING % OF INPUT MATERIALS TONNES PER CAR, FLEET AVERAGE 1000 CAR KM PER CAR PASSENGERS PER CAR

13 450 193 5% 11% 163 09 re-manufacturing 280 eller remanufacturing?

BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO

REMANUFACTURED COMPONENTS NEW MATERIALS

CARBON DIOIDE EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS USED IN EU PASSENGER CARS, 2050 Mt CO2, PER YEAR

EHIBIT 59 11 60 4 9 million tonnes 49 eller 21 Mt?

70%

9

18

CURRENT VOLUME BASELINE REUSE AND LIGHT LONGER SHARING CIRCULAR INCREASE SCENARIO 2050 REMANUFACTURING WEIGHTING LIFETIME SCENARIO 2050

COST REDUCTION POTENTIAL EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES EHIBIT 510 155

MATERIAL INPUT KEY DRIVERS OF LOWER COST OF OWNERSHIP

SHARING Higher utilisation per car together with reduced cost through autonomous car eets lower costs per kilometre PARTS CAR MANUFACTURING PROLONGED LIFETIME Reduced total cost per kilometre despite increased cost for input materials 77% DISTRIBUTION AND MS LIGHTWEIGHTING Smaller average cars in shared eets reduce materials input and total cost, despite increased cost for lightweight materials FUELENERGY REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REUSE AND REMANUFACTURING Larger share reduces input materials and average cost of materials, modular design makes maintenance cheaper

MAINTENANCE

Exhibit35 5.11

CAPITALExternalities COST, and cost of society can be significantly INSURANCE, PARKING reduced in a círcular scenario by 2050

CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO 2050

ETERNALITIES AND PUBLIC COSTS OF CAR TRANSPORTATION EHIBIT 511 EUR PER 1000 PASSENGER KILOMETRES

264

REDUCED ETERNALITIES AND PUBLIC COST

REDUCED NUMBER OF CARS Due to higher occupancy and increased utilisation result in improved air quality, reduced noise level, less WAITING TIME congestion and less need for inner-city parking AUTONOMOUS AND CONNECTED CARS Are safer, reduce need for signs, lanes and other 74% infrastructure and can optimise trac ows, which reduces congestion and land use for roads

ELECTRIC VEHICLES ACCIDENTS Reduce noise level and have positive impact on air quality, especially when shifting towards renewable AIR POLLUTION energy sources NOISE

INFRASTRUCTURE 68

PARKING COSTS

LAND

CURRENT CIRCULAR SCENARIO 2050

SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS ANALYSIS

MAOR SHIFT OF INNOVATION FOCUS EHIBIT 512 FROM MAXIMIZING UPFRONT SALES VOLUME AND PRICE, 137 TO MAKING THE CAR A WELL-FUNCTIONING EFFECTIVE PART OF URBAN MOBILITY

Rubriken utgår ifrån att Sharing har positiva INNOVATION SHARING OTHER EFFECTS CIRCULARITY STRATEGIES eekter/för nya innovationer

Jag förstår det som att “Fleet management..” motsvarar Sharing i diagrammet? Och är därför central, dom NEW BUSINESS MODELS esta pilarna (7) utgår ifrån “Fleet management” och ger To suit new customer groups: eekter på de andra områderna cars better integrated with public transport system, pricing to adapt to demand and local geography CAR SHARING Becomes more attractive with autonomous and electric vehicles CAR SIZES - Är det så?? AUTONOMOUS CARS En del av “Higher utilisation Variation in car sizes (not all cars Becomes cost worthy per car” i diagrammet. need to be designed for 5 passengers) - Svår att få in LIGHTEWIGHTING

FLEET LUDDE DEN HR BEHVER HIGHER MANAGEMENT OCKS LITE KRLEK UTILISATION NEW VEHICLE DESIGN PER CAR Professional car FRENKLA GRNA S More durable materials CAR SHARING owners MYCKET SOM MLIGT, + modular design for quick HR AV DIG OM DU BEHVER Becomes more attractive repair and upgradeability FRKLARING with autonomous and electric vehicles PROLONGED LIFETIME

ongoing... ELECTRIC VEHICLES PROACTIVE Are more pro table with Maintenance more miles

REMANUFACTURING OF PARTS AND RECYCLING (new vehicle design makes MORE PREDICTIVE EoL value higher) EoL ows

EHIBIT 512 CIRCULARITY STRATEGIES OTHER EFFECTS

version 1 - FEL NEW BUSINESS MODELS To suit new customer groups: cars better integrated with public transport system, pricing to adapt to demand and local geography

CAR SIZES AUTONOMOUS CARS Variation in car sizes (not all cars Becomes cost worthy need to be designed for 5 passengers) LIGHTEWIGHTING

HIGHER NEW VEHICLE DESIGN UTILISATION PER CAR More durable materials + modular design for quick repair and upgradeability FLEET MANAGEMENT Professional car owners PROLONGED LIFETIME

ELECTRIC VEHICLES PROACTIVE Are more pro table with Maintenance more miles

REMANUFACTURING OF PARTS AND RECYCLING (new vehicle design makes MORE PREDICTIVE EoL value higher) EoL ows REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

HOW TO GET THERE – A POSITIVE INNOVATION SPIRAL

Although car-sharing is growing strongly, it has only Nonetheless, there are some areas for policy-makers to taken the first tentative steps in the EU. Even if it is an pay attention to. First, the more that air pollution, conges- end-state worth aiming for, is there a credible path from tion and other negative effects of today’s mobility system today’s system to the one described above? are discouraged, the more force there will be behind a move to a shared system with lower such impacts. Se- The key to unlocking this is a set of self-reinforcing dy- cond, policy-makers can ensure that various other areas namics – a positive innovation spiral (Exhibit 5.12). The of regulation are adapted so they account for shared mo- shared-car system requires vehicles that are designed bility. One example could be data policy, to safeguard and operated to different specifications, with joint inno- end-user privacy in what will be a highly data-intensive vation in materials, design, manufacturing, and business business model. Another is to promote the emergence models. Once started, these changes become self-re- of effective insurance solutions for shared cars, and yet inforcing in multiple dimensions. Higher utilisation ena- another to clarify and strike the right balance for safety bles earlier adoption of costlier automation technologies. and liability regulation for self-driving vehicles. Third, it is These in turn enable business models based on sha- important not to let the early disappointments and contro- ring, in turn boosting utilisation further. Once a business versies surrounding some of today’s car-sharing muddy model for mobility-as-a-service takes root, it creates the the waters; the potential benefits of shared mobility are precondition for fleet-managed vehicles, enabling better extensive and real, whatever the precise performance of maintenance, component reuse, remanufacturing, and early experiments. more control over end-of-life flows. Longer lifetime in turn becomes an enabler of the intensive use underpinning Finally, city authorities will have an important task to a sharing business model, which reinforces the higher incorporate shared mobility with other important city ini- utilisation that helps motivate the higher upfront costs of tiatives. Given the last shift ahead, they can make clear more durable vehicle design. their support for the transition – such as the city of Hel- sinki’s stated ambition to enable a fully functional sys- In multiple ways, then, the overall shift is away from max- tem of ‘mobility on demand’ to provide a service equi- imising upfront sales volumes and prices, and towards ma- valent to that of private cars, by 2025. As noted, it will king the passenger car a well-functioning and effective part be important to integrate shared mobility solutions with of urban mobility. Technology development and innovations public transport. City planning will also need to adapt as within the shared car segment are likely to have positive patterns of mobility change in response to the different spillovers for other vehicles, leading to even larger producti- circumstances of shared car system. vity gains. The agenda for industry is relatively clear.

The other major shift required is in expectations and * * * attitudes. Today, car ownership is bound up with many things besides travel: cars have symbolic value, signal- In its 2011 transport White Paper, the European Com- ling a range of attributes from status to freedom. Partly mission wrote: “Since the first big oil crisis 40 years ago for that reason, even the circular scenario sees one third – despite technical progress, potential for cost-effective of travel continue in individually owned cars. At the same energy efficiency improvements and policy efforts – the time, norms shift over time, and the greater convenience transport system has not fundamentally changed” – no- and lower cost of shared and autonomous mobility are ting the challenges this creates for greenhouse gas emis- powerful forces in a perspective to 2050. sions, cost, oil import dependence, congestion, pollution and more. The possibility of a shared mobility system The final area of change is policy and regulations. now offers the prospect of such fundamental change – Though much is at stake for public policy objectives, poli- with significant gains for resource efficiency, lower costs, cy may in fact have a relatively limited role to play. Private public health, and the environment. A more circular eco- and public incentives are, on the whole, powerfully aligned. nomy can be a major force for a better transport system.

138 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Exhibit 5.12 Sharing as a catalyst for a positive spiral of new innovation opportunities for passenger cars

HIGHER UTILISATION PER CAR EXHIBIT 5.12v2 SHARING BUSINESS MODELS VEHICLES RE-DESIGNED AND New business models to suit new MANAGED TO MAXIMISE RUN TIME customer groups Integration with public transport system LONGER VEHICLE LIFETIMES MAJOR SHIFT OF INNOVATION FOCUS High returns to durability DIGITISATION AND AUTOMATION Longer-lived electric vehicles pro table Self-driving cars enables new service Professionally maintained eet FROM: TO: models MAXIMIZING UPFRONT MAKING THE CAR A Data-intensive optimisation of trac SALES VOLUME AND WELLFUNCTIONING MODULARITY AND REUSE PRICE EFFECTIVE PART OF URBAN MOBILITY Design for quick repair and upgrade- ability Reuse built into vehicle design

LOWER VEHICLE WEIGHT

More varied car sizes with shared eet Advanced materials more pro table HIGHER PROFITABILITY OF CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS

END-OF-LIFE VALUE

Higher EOL value (modularity, valuable materials etc.) EOL ows more predictable in eet owned system

LOWER COST OF TRANSPORT

New design and high utilisation reduce total cost Competitiveness with other modes of transport increases

FOUR KEY MATERIALS CATEGORIES

EXHIBIT 1.6 139

STEEL PLASTICS ALUMINIUM CEMENT

Used across economy in In advanced economies, Key uses include Used for construction construction, packaging is a major use, buildings, automotive, of buildings and infra- transportation, followed by construction electrical machinery structure industrial machinery, and automotive and packaging Production is primarily and consumer products 100 kg/capita is consum- e EU imports 40% local due to high avail- 75% 40% of demand is ed annually in Europe, of its aluminum, some- ability of raw materials served by secondary of which secondary times from locations and high cost of transport- OF INDUSTRIAL CO2 EMISSIONS production in the EU, plastics only represent with very high CO2 ation but the industry still 10% of demand intensity of production CO2 emissions are more releases some 230 CO2 130 Mt CO2 are re- In total, the CO2 foot- than 110 Mt per year, Mt per year leased annually from print of EU demand is of which 55% are due to European production around 80 Mt annually the process chemistry rather than energy

TWO KEY VALUE CHAINS AND PRODUCT CATEGORIES

CARS/MOBILITY

Automotive sector uses 20% of steel, 10% of plastics and 20% of aluminium CO2 emissions from materials in passenger cars sold in the EU are around 50 Mt per year Embodied emissions in materials are becoming a larger share of total CO2 footprint ~50% PASSENGER CARS AND BUILDINGS JOINTLY ACCOUNT FOR ALMOST HALF OF EMISSIONS FROM STEEL, BUILDINGS/SHELTER PLASTICS, ALUMINIUM AND CEMENT Buildings account for 33% of steel, 20% of plastics, 25% of aluminium and 65% of cement e CO2 footprint of building materials in the EU is 250 Mt per year Embodied carbon is 10-20% of EU buildings’ CO2 footprint today, but already 50% in countries with low-carbon energy REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

6. Buildings and cement more value from less materials

The EU uses as much as 1.6 billion ton- of life; and reuse of intact structural com- nes (Gt) of materials for buildings per year, ponents, on site or within local markets. and that amount is likely to grow as building Improved design of building components, stock continues to slowly expand, and as new construction techniques, and use of large numbers of post-war buildings requi- high-strength steel and concrete could re- re substantial renovation or replacement duce the materials needed for new buil- in the decades ahead. The CO¬¬2 foot- dings. Increased standardization, impro- print of these materials is significant, and ved planning, and appropriate storage and in the EU countries that have gone furthest transportation could reduce waste. New bu- in improving energy efficiency and decar- siness models for buildings in which spa- bonising heat, construction now accounts ces are shared – e.g. co-working spaces for as much as half of the lifetime CO¬¬2 – could reduce the total built area needed. footprint of a building (and the use phase Finally, there is potential to recycle cement for the rest). from demolition, by reprocessing concrete to recover some unreacted clinker. How we use construction materials therefore matters greatly for future clima- Cost-effective strategies may be under- te targets. By 2050, just the cement, steel, used because of diverging interests: the aluminium and plastic used for construction party making decisions is not the one who will result in emissions of 230 Mt CO¬¬2 in a would benefit (similar to how landlords have baseline scenario where they are made with little incentive to invest in energy efficien- today’s production processes. Demand-side cy if their tenants pay the energy bills). measures could reduce this by more than In other cases, the business case is not half, or 123 Mt CO2, by the second half of this strong enough yet, but could improve with century. Of this, 80 Mt CO¬¬2 per year would new technology. Increased digitalisation be available by 2050, making a major contri- of the construction process will be a key bution to EU mid-century climate targets. factor for the adoption of circular opportuni- ties, through the use of building information Key measures that could reduce de- modelling, and the gradual automation of mand for building materials include design more of the construction process. Both of changes to increase buildings’ longevity these can significantly reduce the cost of and adaptability; disassembly at the end techniques to reduce materials use.

140 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Increased digitalisation of the construction process will be a key factor for the adoption of circular opportunities, through the use of building information modelling system and increased automation.

141 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE UNDERSTANDING FUTURE BUILDING NEEDS We spend most of our time in buildings. EU residents gets, the EU will also have to retrofit buildings to improve their use an average of 48 m2 of floor area – for housing, of- energy efficiency at two or three time today’s pace. fices, education, lodgings and other purposes; housing costs alone consume 22% of disposable income. The Even though the turnover rate for buildings is slow, effort that goes into creating and maintaining this building construction is a major user of materials. Buildings ac- stock also is a major economic sector, accounting for count for two thirds of cement use, more than a third of 8.6% of the EU’s GDP and employing 18 million people. steel, a quarter of aluminium, and almost 20% of plastics. Adding aggregates and other materials such as bricks, The building stock changes only slowly, so the decisions gypsum, lime and copper, buildings alone use some 1.6 made today have very long-term consequences. Each year, billion tonnes of materials per year, as noted above. Pro- 1% of EU buildings are renovated, and new buildings are ad- ducing these materials, in turn, results in about 250 mil- ded that make up 1–1.5% of the total stock. The EU’s buil- lion tonnes (Mt) of CO2 emissions annually (Exhibit 6.2). ding stock is aging – 45% of buildings are over half a century Cement, steel, aluminium and plastics account for almost old, and a large share of housing was built just after World 80% of those emissions. Construction and demolition (in- War II – so in the coming years, significant renovations and cluding infrastructure) also generate 25–30% of total was- upgrades will be needed (Exhibit 6.1). To meet climate tar- te volumes, far more than any other sector.

Exhibit 6.1 The building stock evolves slowly, with 1% renovation and 1–1.5% new construction per year

AGE DISTRIBUTION OF BUILDING STOCK, 2013 % OF TOTAL BUILDING STOCK, EUROPE

AFTER 2010 3%

20002010 12% EHIBIT 61 19901999 10%

19801989 13%

New buildings represent approximately 1.0 - 1.5% 19701979 17% of total stock Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint Renovation represent approximately~1% of stock per year 19451969 24%

BEFORE 1945 21%

SOURCES: BPIE (2017), ARTOLA ET AL. (2016), WIEDENHOFER ET AL. (2015), ENERGY EFFICIENCY FINANCIAL INSTITUTION GROUP (2015)

142

MATERIALS COMPOSITION IN BUILDINGS CO2 FOOTPRINT OF 250 M PER YEAR CONSTRUCTION AND 1 % OF MASS, AVERAGE BUILDING MILLION TONNES CO2 PER YEAR; % MILLION TONNES PER YEAR; %

BRICKS 3 250 M 2500 M EHIBIT 62 OTHER 4% ALUMINIUM 05% 7% 3 OTHER 22% PLASTICS STEEL 2% 02%

Fotnot till diagram nns i PowerPoint. OTHER 1600 Vad hänvisar fotnot 2.? CONCRETE 42% 65% CEMENT 30%

ALUMINIUM 12%

PLASTICS 11%

AGGREGATES2 45% 900 CD WASTE 35% STEEL 25%

LIFECYCLE CO2 EMISSIONS FROM BUILDINGS % OF LIFETIME CO2 EMISSIONS DURING LIFETIME

EHIBIT 63

USEPHASE INCLUDING ENERGY 50%

815% MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

WITH CURRENT ENERGY SYSTEM WITH LOWCARBON ENERGY UK AND BELGIUM EAMPLES SWEDEN EAMPLE

GLOBAL CO2 EMISSIONS FROM CEMENT PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE CO2 EMISSIONS, 20152100 Gt CO2 PER YEAR Gt CO2

4 254 EHIBIT 64

3 184 SE OM DU KAN GRA DEN LGRE LINEN LITET SNYGGARE, DEN FALLER LITET VL SNABBT NU 2

Jag minskde och “mjukde ut” fallet på kurvan 1

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE SCENARIO LOW CARBON ENERGY BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE SCENARIO LOW CARBON ENERGY

MATERIALS RECIRCULATION BUILDING MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS 2 2 TONNES CO2 PER TONNE MATERIALS TONNES MATERIALS PER M USEFUL SERVICE FROM EACH M

EHIBIT 65 CEMENT RECYCLING AND VALUE REDUCED WASTE IN CONSTRUCTION PROLONG LIFETIME CAPTURE AT END OF LIFE Reduced loss of materials during Adapt and renovate of buildings to avoid Improved waste management, better construction throuh improved materials demolition and new build separation of materials and increased management Improved maintenance to extend lifespan recycling of key components Less downcycling of concrete through MATERIALS EFFICIENCY OF Design for exible use and to enable deep adoption of new technologies to recover BUILDINGS renovatoin unused cement and aggregates ”Design for disassembly” as a key principle Less material per building through less SHARING TO REDUCE FLOORSPACE over-speci cation, improved design, REUIREMENTS and high-strength materials Reduce total area required through REUSE OF BUILDING COMPONENTS mechanisms such as peer-to-peer sharing, oce sharing, and more communal space Reuse of structural components at end of life and during renovations through new local markets

LABOUR PRODUCTIVITY IN CONSTRUCTION VS EU28 INDEXED: 100 = 2001, EU28

115 EHIBIT 66 OVERALL ECONOMY

110

105

100 CONSTRUCTION

95

90

85 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS USED IN BUILDINGS Mt CO2 PER YEAR STEEL ALUMINIUM PLASTICS CEMENT EHIBIT 67 231 13 10 208 20

24 80 34% 123 53% 13

Fotnot till diagram nns i PowerPoint.

DELA UPP SISTA STAPELN I TV SISTA STAPELN HETER D CIRCULAR SCENARIO BEYOND 2050

CURRENT REFERENCE CEMENT WASTE REUSE OF MATERIALS SHARING CIRCULAR PROLONGED CIRCULAR 1 SCENARIO RECYCLING REDUCTION BUILDING EFFICIENCY SCENARIO LIFETIME SCENARIO 2050 COMPONENTS 2050 BEYOND 2050

EHIBIT 68 RECIRCULATION OF MATERIALS BUILDING MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS t CO2 PER t MATERIALS TONNES MATERIALS PER M2 USEFUL SERVICE FROM EACH M2

CEMENTS RECYCLING REDUCED WASTE, REUSE OF BUILDING COMPONENTS, SHARING PROLOGNED 2 1 T CO2/t CEMENT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY M PER PERSON LIFETIME t NEW MATERIALS PER M2 YEARS

Fotnot till diagram nns 062 245 010 52 91 i PowerPoint. 021 49 022 048 192 65

BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE REDUCED REUSE OF MATERIALS CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO WASTE BUILDING EFFICIENCY SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO COMPONENTS

Design Construction Use Phase EoL Treatment EHIBIT 69

From: conflicting objectives, lack of transparency and accountability

VI FRESLR EN VERTIKAL • Involvement only at early • Incentive to reduce • Frequent shift in ownership • No documentation of VERSION MED PILARNA MED VRDE stage, limited accountability construction costs through with limited transfer of materials content KEDAN I MITTEN NEDT, FRN for outcomes (e.g. EoL) low-cost materials and fast knowledge or value capture • Rapid demolition and TETRUTORNA TILL VNSTER, OCH • Long term assets and construction of investment resulting degrading of TILLTETRUTORNA TILL HGER frequent change of owners • Constructor optimises labour • Ownership model with risk of componets and materials creates risk for higher up-front cost, few incentives to lock-in effects and ineffective investment reduce waste or materials use of space use

Not started To: collaboration between actors, transparency and long term objectives

• BIM enables information • New construction techniques • ’Real estate as a service’ • Design for disassembly transfer and enables return on and digitalisation improve enabled by digitalisation enables value capture at EoL investments in circular productivity and reduce over- • Size adapted to needs • BIM facilitates EoL treatment principles (design for specification • Digitalisation enables and ensure quality and disassembly, durable and • Lower trade-off with labour ongoing optimisation, e.g. of usability of recovered flexible designs) cost results in improved office space materials and components • Buildings designed with view materials usage and quality to future ’material banks’

EHIBIT 610 Builing information management New digital technologies in construction

Not started

Building information Drones and 3D scanners Automation and Robotics in construction 3D printing modelling (BIM) prefabrication

• Platform for integrated • Can be used for • Improves quality • Enables complex tasks • Enables construction of design, modelling, construction site and precision with human monitoring complex shapes planning and inspections • Reduces labour • Improves quality and • Reduces construction collaboration • Reduces labour costs cost, delivery time precision time and cost of • Reduces cost and and time and waste in • Reduces labour cost customised components saves construction time • Improves safety for construction and delivery time and • Reduces waste in • Facilitates re-use and workers improves safety construction due to recycling of EoL better precision materials AGE DISTRIBUTION OF BUILDING STOCK, 2013 % OF TOTAL BUILDING STOCK, EUROPE

AFTER 2010 3%

20002010 12% EHIBIT 61 19901999 10%

19801989 REVIEW13% DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

New buildings represent approximately 1.0 - 1.5% 19701979 17% of total stock Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint Renovation represent approximately~1% of stock per year 19451969 24% Exhibit 6.2 EU building materials have a CO2 footprint BEFORE 1945 of 25021% million tonnes per year

MATERIALS COMPOSITION IN BUILDINGS CO2 FOOTPRINT OF 250 M PER YEAR CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE 1 % OF MASS, AVERAGE BUILDING MILLION TONNES CO2 PER YEAR; % MILLION TONNES PER YEAR; %

BRICKS 3 250 M 2500 M EHIBIT 62 OTHER 4% ALUMINIUM 05% 7% 3 OTHER 22% PLASTICS STEEL 2% 02%

Fotnot till diagram nns i PowerPoint. OTHER 1600 Vad hänvisar fotnot 2.? CONCRETE 42% 65% CEMENT 30%

ALUMINIUM 12%

PLASTICS 11%

AGGREGATES2 45% 900 CD WASTE 35% STEEL 25%

LIFECYCLE CO2 EMISSIONS FROM BUILDINGS % OF LIFETIME CO2 EMISSIONS DURING LIFETIME

NOTES: 1 DATA FOR MATERIALS COMPOSITION OF BUILDINGS INCLUDE RESIDENTIAL, PUBLIC AND COMMERCIAL BUILDINGS, BUT NOT INDUSTRIAL, 2 EXCLUDING AGGREGATES USED IN CONCRETE, 3 INCLUDING WOOD, STONE, GLASS, AND CLAY EHIBIT 63 SOURCES: ECORYS AND COPENHAGEN RESOURCE INSTITUTE (2014), EUROSTAT (2017).

143

USEPHASE INCLUDING ENERGY 50%

815% MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

WITH CURRENT ENERGY SYSTEM WITH LOWCARBON ENERGY UK AND BELGIUM EAMPLES SWEDEN EAMPLE

GLOBAL CO2 EMISSIONS FROM CEMENT PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE CO2 EMISSIONS, 20152100 Gt CO2 PER YEAR Gt CO2

4 254 EHIBIT 64

3 184 SE OM DU KAN GRA DEN LGRE LINEN LITET SNYGGARE, DEN FALLER LITET VL SNABBT NU 2

Jag minskde och “mjukde ut” fallet på kurvan 1

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE SCENARIO LOW CARBON ENERGY BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE SCENARIO LOW CARBON ENERGY

MATERIALS RECIRCULATION BUILDING MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS 2 2 TONNES CO2 PER TONNE MATERIALS TONNES MATERIALS PER M USEFUL SERVICE FROM EACH M

EHIBIT 65 CEMENT RECYCLING AND VALUE REDUCED WASTE IN CONSTRUCTION PROLONG LIFETIME CAPTURE AT END OF LIFE Reduced loss of materials during Adapt and renovate of buildings to avoid Improved waste management, better construction throuh improved materials demolition and new build separation of materials and increased management Improved maintenance to extend lifespan recycling of key components Less downcycling of concrete through MATERIALS EFFICIENCY OF Design for exible use and to enable deep adoption of new technologies to recover BUILDINGS renovatoin unused cement and aggregates ”Design for disassembly” as a key principle Less material per building through less SHARING TO REDUCE FLOORSPACE over-speci cation, improved design, REUIREMENTS and high-strength materials Reduce total area required through REUSE OF BUILDING COMPONENTS mechanisms such as peer-to-peer sharing, oce sharing, and more communal space Reuse of structural components at end of life and during renovations through new local markets

LABOUR PRODUCTIVITY IN CONSTRUCTION VS EU28 INDEXED: 100 = 2001, EU28

115 EHIBIT 66 OVERALL ECONOMY

110

105

100 CONSTRUCTION

95

90

85 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS USED IN BUILDINGS Mt CO2 PER YEAR STEEL ALUMINIUM PLASTICS CEMENT EHIBIT 67 231 13 10 208 20

24 80 34% 123 53% 13

Fotnot till diagram nns i PowerPoint.

DELA UPP SISTA STAPELN I TV SISTA STAPELN HETER D CIRCULAR SCENARIO BEYOND 2050

CURRENT REFERENCE CEMENT WASTE REUSE OF MATERIALS SHARING CIRCULAR PROLONGED CIRCULAR 1 SCENARIO RECYCLING REDUCTION BUILDING EFFICIENCY SCENARIO LIFETIME SCENARIO 2050 COMPONENTS 2050 BEYOND 2050

EHIBIT 68 RECIRCULATION OF MATERIALS BUILDING MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS t CO2 PER t MATERIALS TONNES MATERIALS PER M2 USEFUL SERVICE FROM EACH M2

CEMENTS RECYCLING REDUCED WASTE, REUSE OF BUILDING COMPONENTS, SHARING PROLOGNED 2 1 T CO2/t CEMENT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY M PER PERSON LIFETIME t NEW MATERIALS PER M2 YEARS

Fotnot till diagram nns 062 245 010 52 91 i PowerPoint. 021 49 022 048 192 65

BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE REDUCED REUSE OF MATERIALS CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO WASTE BUILDING EFFICIENCY SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO COMPONENTS

Design Construction Use Phase EoL Treatment EHIBIT 69

From: conflicting objectives, lack of transparency and accountability

VI FRESLR EN VERTIKAL • Involvement only at early • Incentive to reduce • Frequent shift in ownership • No documentation of VERSION MED PILARNA MED VRDE stage, limited accountability construction costs through with limited transfer of materials content KEDAN I MITTEN NEDT, FRN for outcomes (e.g. EoL) low-cost materials and fast knowledge or value capture • Rapid demolition and TETRUTORNA TILL VNSTER, OCH • Long term assets and construction of investment resulting degrading of TILLTETRUTORNA TILL HGER frequent change of owners • Constructor optimises labour • Ownership model with risk of componets and materials creates risk for higher up-front cost, few incentives to lock-in effects and ineffective investment reduce waste or materials use of space use

Not started To: collaboration between actors, transparency and long term objectives

• BIM enables information • New construction techniques • ’Real estate as a service’ • Design for disassembly transfer and enables return on and digitalisation improve enabled by digitalisation enables value capture at EoL investments in circular productivity and reduce over- • Size adapted to needs • BIM facilitates EoL treatment principles (design for specification • Digitalisation enables and ensure quality and disassembly, durable and • Lower trade-off with labour ongoing optimisation, e.g. of usability of recovered flexible designs) cost results in improved office space materials and components • Buildings designed with view materials usage and quality to future ’material banks’

EHIBIT 610 Builing information management New digital technologies in construction

Not started

Building information Drones and 3D scanners Automation and Robotics in construction 3D printing modelling (BIM) prefabrication

• Platform for integrated • Can be used for • Improves quality • Enables complex tasks • Enables construction of design, modelling, construction site and precision with human monitoring complex shapes planning and inspections • Reduces labour • Improves quality and • Reduces construction collaboration • Reduces labour costs cost, delivery time precision time and cost of • Reduces cost and and time and waste in • Reduces labour cost customised components saves construction time • Improves safety for construction and delivery time and • Reduces waste in • Facilitates re-use and workers improves safety construction due to recycling of EoL better precision materials AGE DISTRIBUTION OF BUILDING STOCK, 2013 % OF TOTAL BUILDING STOCK, EUROPE

AFTER 2010 3%

20002010 12% EHIBIT 61 19901999 10%

19801989 13%

New buildings represent approximately 1.0 - 1.5% 19701979 17% of total stock Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint Renovation represent approximately~1% of stock per year 19451969 24%

BEFORE 1945 21%

MATERIALS COMPOSITION IN BUILDINGS CO2 FOOTPRINT OF 250 M PER YEAR CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE 1 % OF MASS, AVERAGE BUILDING MILLION TONNES CO2 PER YEAR; % MILLION TONNES PER YEAR; %

BRICKS 3 250 M 2500 M EHIBIT 62 OTHER 4% ALUMINIUM 05% 7% 3 OTHER 22% PLASTICS STEEL 2% 02%

Fotnot till diagram nns i PowerPoint. OTHER 1600 Vad hänvisar fotnot 2.? CONCRETE 42% 65% CEMENT 30%

REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

ALUMINIUM 12%

PLASTICS 11% Exhibit 6.3 AGGREGATES2 45% 900 CD WASTE Materials will be a major future source35 % STEEL 25% of CO2 emissions from buildings

LIFECYCLE CO2 EMISSIONS FROM BUILDINGS % OF LIFETIME CO2 EMISSIONS DURING LIFETIME

EHIBIT 63

USEPHASE INCLUDING ENERGY 50%

815% MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

WITH CURRENT ENERGY SYSTEM WITH LOWCARBON ENERGY UK AND BELGIUM EAMPLES SWEDEN EAMPLE

GLOBAL CO2 EMISSIONS FROM CEMENT PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE CO2 EMISSIONS, 20152100 Gt CO2 PER YEAR Gt CO2

SOURCE: IVA (2014), ROSSI, MARIQUE AND REITER (2012), CUÉLLAR-FRANCA AND AZAPAGIC (2012)

4 254 EHIBIT 64

To date, most discussions of the CO2 impact of buil- the CO2 ‘embodied’ in materials will become ever more dings have focused on the use phase, especially on important. In countries where electricity and heating sys- energy3 consumption. This is understandable: buildings tems are already low-carbon, building materials184 already SE OM DU KAN GRA DEN LGRE account for 40% of final energy demand in the EU, and account for half of the total CO2 footprint of new buil- LINEN LITET SNYGGARE, DEN 36% of CO2 emissions. Still, around 15% of total lifecycle dings. Other EU countries will follow a similar route as FALLER LITET VL SNABBT NU CO22 emissions from EU buildings today are attributable their energy systems decarbonise. Thus, it is high time to materials and construction (Exhibit 6.3). As energy effi- that discussions about sustainable buildings pay atten- Jag minskde och “mjukde ut” fallet på kurvan ciency and low-carbon energy reduce energy emissions, tion to building materials. 1

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 1442100 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE SCENARIO LOW CARBON ENERGY BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE SCENARIO LOW CARBON ENERGY

MATERIALS RECIRCULATION BUILDING MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS 2 2 TONNES CO2 PER TONNE MATERIALS TONNES MATERIALS PER M USEFUL SERVICE FROM EACH M

EHIBIT 65 CEMENT RECYCLING AND VALUE REDUCED WASTE IN CONSTRUCTION PROLONG LIFETIME CAPTURE AT END OF LIFE Reduced loss of materials during Adapt and renovate of buildings to avoid Improved waste management, better construction throuh improved materials demolition and new build separation of materials and increased management Improved maintenance to extend lifespan recycling of key components Less downcycling of concrete through MATERIALS EFFICIENCY OF Design for exible use and to enable deep adoption of new technologies to recover BUILDINGS renovatoin unused cement and aggregates ”Design for disassembly” as a key principle Less material per building through less SHARING TO REDUCE FLOORSPACE over-speci cation, improved design, REUIREMENTS and high-strength materials Reduce total area required through REUSE OF BUILDING COMPONENTS mechanisms such as peer-to-peer sharing, oce sharing, and more communal space Reuse of structural components at end of life and during renovations through new local markets

LABOUR PRODUCTIVITY IN CONSTRUCTION VS EU28 INDEXED: 100 = 2001, EU28

115 EHIBIT 66 OVERALL ECONOMY

110

105

100 CONSTRUCTION

95

90

85 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS USED IN BUILDINGS Mt CO2 PER YEAR STEEL ALUMINIUM PLASTICS CEMENT EHIBIT 67 231 13 10 208 20

24 80 34% 123 53% 13

Fotnot till diagram nns i PowerPoint.

DELA UPP SISTA STAPELN I TV SISTA STAPELN HETER D CIRCULAR SCENARIO BEYOND 2050

CURRENT REFERENCE CEMENT WASTE REUSE OF MATERIALS SHARING CIRCULAR PROLONGED CIRCULAR 1 SCENARIO RECYCLING REDUCTION BUILDING EFFICIENCY SCENARIO LIFETIME SCENARIO 2050 COMPONENTS 2050 BEYOND 2050

EHIBIT 68 RECIRCULATION OF MATERIALS BUILDING MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS t CO2 PER t MATERIALS TONNES MATERIALS PER M2 USEFUL SERVICE FROM EACH M2

CEMENTS RECYCLING REDUCED WASTE, REUSE OF BUILDING COMPONENTS, SHARING PROLOGNED 2 1 T CO2/t CEMENT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY M PER PERSON LIFETIME t NEW MATERIALS PER M2 YEARS

Fotnot till diagram nns 062 245 010 52 91 i PowerPoint. 021 49 022 048 192 65

BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE REDUCED REUSE OF MATERIALS CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO WASTE BUILDING EFFICIENCY SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO COMPONENTS

Design Construction Use Phase EoL Treatment EHIBIT 69

From: conflicting objectives, lack of transparency and accountability

VI FRESLR EN VERTIKAL • Involvement only at early • Incentive to reduce • Frequent shift in ownership • No documentation of VERSION MED PILARNA MED VRDE stage, limited accountability construction costs through with limited transfer of materials content KEDAN I MITTEN NEDT, FRN for outcomes (e.g. EoL) low-cost materials and fast knowledge or value capture • Rapid demolition and TETRUTORNA TILL VNSTER, OCH • Long term assets and construction of investment resulting degrading of TILLTETRUTORNA TILL HGER frequent change of owners • Constructor optimises labour • Ownership model with risk of componets and materials creates risk for higher up-front cost, few incentives to lock-in effects and ineffective investment reduce waste or materials use of space use

Not started To: collaboration between actors, transparency and long term objectives

• BIM enables information • New construction techniques • ’Real estate as a service’ • Design for disassembly transfer and enables return on and digitalisation improve enabled by digitalisation enables value capture at EoL investments in circular productivity and reduce over- • Size adapted to needs • BIM facilitates EoL treatment principles (design for specification • Digitalisation enables and ensure quality and disassembly, durable and • Lower trade-off with labour ongoing optimisation, e.g. of usability of recovered flexible designs) cost results in improved office space materials and components • Buildings designed with view materials usage and quality to future ’material banks’

EHIBIT 610 Builing information management New digital technologies in construction

Not started

Building information Drones and 3D scanners Automation and Robotics in construction 3D printing modelling (BIM) prefabrication

• Platform for integrated • Can be used for • Improves quality • Enables complex tasks • Enables construction of design, modelling, construction site and precision with human monitoring complex shapes planning and inspections • Reduces labour • Improves quality and • Reduces construction collaboration • Reduces labour costs cost, delivery time precision time and cost of • Reduces cost and and time and waste in • Reduces labour cost customised components saves construction time • Improves safety for construction and delivery time and • Reduces waste in • Facilitates re-use and workers improves safety construction due to recycling of EoL better precision materials REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

It is high time that discussions about sustainable buildings pay attention to building materials.

145 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Emissions from cement production

Cement accounts for a large share of the embodied large chemical process emissions would remain. Even emissions in buildings, and is a major source of global fully decarbonised energy leaves in place 2 Gt per year CO2 emissions. The chemical reaction involved in the of CO2 emissions from cement production, claiming 184 production of clinker (the main ingredient of cement) re- Gt of the global CO2 budget to 2100. sults in some 1.4 billion tonnes of CO2 per year global- ly. Another 1 Gt CO2 results from the large amounts of In the face of such daunting numbers, many low-car- energy required to produce cement. The total of 2.4 Gt bon scenarios assume carbon capture and storage as CO2 corresponds to 7% total global CO2 emissions from the main way to address future cement emissions. Oth- energy and industry. ers see great potential in materials substitution, by using existing alternatives to clinker, or switching to polymer Looking ahead, global cement production is set to grow cements or other innovative options. further. Many developing countries still have stocks of 5 tonnes per person or less, less than a quarter of many Cement production is a significant source of emissions developed countries. To explore the emissions implica- in the EU as well: 114 Mt CO2 per year today. As no- tions of global cement use for CO2 emissions, we model- ted above, construction activity and demand are likely led a scenario in which demand rises to 7 billion tonnes to increase somewhat. Even with incremental process per year by 2100. Even using the best available tech- improvements, emissions in 2050 therefore would be si- niques for production, total emissions would rise to al- milar to today’s, at 113 Mt CO2 per year. Given this chal- most 4 Gt CO2 per year, with the cumulative emissions of lenge, any opportunity to reduce the demand for cement more than 250 Gt by 2100 (Exhibit 6.4). A rapid switch to – without compromising on well-being – could make an low-carbon energy in cement production would help, but important contribution to EU climate targets.

146 AGE DISTRIBUTION OF BUILDING STOCK, 2013 % OF TOTAL BUILDING STOCK, EUROPE

AFTER 2010 3%

20002010 12% EHIBIT 61 19901999 10%

19801989 13%

New buildings represent approximately 1.0 - 1.5% 19701979 17% of total stock Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint Renovation represent approximately~1% of stock per year 19451969 24%

BEFORE 1945 21%

MATERIALS COMPOSITION IN BUILDINGS CO2 FOOTPRINT OF 250 M PER YEAR CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE 1 % OF MASS, AVERAGE BUILDING MILLION TONNES CO2 PER YEAR; % MILLION TONNES PER YEAR; %

BRICKS 3 250 M 2500 M EHIBIT 62 OTHER 4% ALUMINIUM 05% 7% 3 OTHER 22% PLASTICS STEEL 2% 02%

Fotnot till diagram nns i PowerPoint. OTHER 1600 Vad hänvisar fotnot 2.? CONCRETE 42% 65% CEMENT 30%

ALUMINIUM 12%

PLASTICS 11%

AGGREGATES2 45% 900 CD WASTE 35% STEEL 25%

LIFECYCLE CO2 EMISSIONS FROM BUILDINGS % OF LIFETIME CO2 EMISSIONS DURING LIFETIME

EHIBIT 63 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

USEPHASE INCLUDING ENERGY Exhibit 6.4 50% Emissions from global cement production risk claiming most of the carbon budget available for all materials production 815% MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION WITH CURRENT ENERGY SYSTEM WITH LOWCARBON ENERGY UK AND BELGIUM EAMPLES SWEDEN EAMPLE

GLOBAL CO2 EMISSIONS FROM CEMENT PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE CO2 EMISSIONS, 20152100 Gt CO2 PER YEAR Gt CO2

4 254 EHIBIT 64

3 184 SE OM DU KAN GRA DEN LGRE LINEN LITET SNYGGARE, DEN FALLER LITET VL SNABBT NU 2

Jag minskde och “mjukde ut” fallet på kurvan 1

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE SCENARIO LOW CARBON ENERGY BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE SCENARIO LOW CARBON ENERGY

MATERIALS RECIRCULATION BUILDING MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS 2 2 TONNES CO2 PER TONNE MATERIALS TONNES MATERIALS PER M USEFUL SERVICE FROM EACH M

EHIBIT 65 CEMENT RECYCLING AND VALUE REDUCED WASTE IN CONSTRUCTION PROLONG LIFETIME CAPTURE AT END OF LIFE Reduced loss of materials during Adapt and renovate of buildings to avoid Improved waste management, better construction throuh improved materials demolition and new build separation of materials and increased management Improved maintenance to extend lifespan recycling of key components Less downcycling of concrete through SOURCES:MATERIALS MATERIAL EFFICIENCY ECONOMICS OF MODELLING Design for exible use and to enable deep adoption of new technologies to recover BUILDINGS renovatoin unused cement and aggregates Less material per building through less ”Design for disassembly” as a key principle 147 SHARING TO REDUCE FLOORSPACE over-speci cation, improved design, REUIREMENTS and high-strength materials Reduce total area required through REUSE OF BUILDING COMPONENTS mechanisms such as peer-to-peer sharing, oce sharing, and more communal space Reuse of structural components at end of life and during renovations through new local markets

LABOUR PRODUCTIVITY IN CONSTRUCTION VS EU28 INDEXED: 100 = 2001, EU28

115 EHIBIT 66 OVERALL ECONOMY

110

105

100 CONSTRUCTION

95

90

85 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS USED IN BUILDINGS Mt CO2 PER YEAR STEEL ALUMINIUM PLASTICS CEMENT EHIBIT 67 231 13 10 208 20

24 80 34% 123 53% 13

Fotnot till diagram nns i PowerPoint.

DELA UPP SISTA STAPELN I TV SISTA STAPELN HETER D CIRCULAR SCENARIO BEYOND 2050

CURRENT REFERENCE CEMENT WASTE REUSE OF MATERIALS SHARING CIRCULAR PROLONGED CIRCULAR 1 SCENARIO RECYCLING REDUCTION BUILDING EFFICIENCY SCENARIO LIFETIME SCENARIO 2050 COMPONENTS 2050 BEYOND 2050

EHIBIT 68 RECIRCULATION OF MATERIALS BUILDING MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS t CO2 PER t MATERIALS TONNES MATERIALS PER M2 USEFUL SERVICE FROM EACH M2

CEMENTS RECYCLING REDUCED WASTE, REUSE OF BUILDING COMPONENTS, SHARING PROLOGNED 2 1 T CO2/t CEMENT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY M PER PERSON LIFETIME t NEW MATERIALS PER M2 YEARS

Fotnot till diagram nns 062 245 010 52 91 i PowerPoint. 021 49 022 048 192 65

BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE REDUCED REUSE OF MATERIALS CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO WASTE BUILDING EFFICIENCY SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO COMPONENTS

Design Construction Use Phase EoL Treatment EHIBIT 69

From: conflicting objectives, lack of transparency and accountability

VI FRESLR EN VERTIKAL • Involvement only at early • Incentive to reduce • Frequent shift in ownership • No documentation of VERSION MED PILARNA MED VRDE stage, limited accountability construction costs through with limited transfer of materials content KEDAN I MITTEN NEDT, FRN for outcomes (e.g. EoL) low-cost materials and fast knowledge or value capture • Rapid demolition and TETRUTORNA TILL VNSTER, OCH • Long term assets and construction of investment resulting degrading of TILLTETRUTORNA TILL HGER frequent change of owners • Constructor optimises labour • Ownership model with risk of componets and materials creates risk for higher up-front cost, few incentives to lock-in effects and ineffective investment reduce waste or materials use of space use

Not started To: collaboration between actors, transparency and long term objectives

• BIM enables information • New construction techniques • ’Real estate as a service’ • Design for disassembly transfer and enables return on and digitalisation improve enabled by digitalisation enables value capture at EoL investments in circular productivity and reduce over- • Size adapted to needs • BIM facilitates EoL treatment principles (design for specification • Digitalisation enables and ensure quality and disassembly, durable and • Lower trade-off with labour ongoing optimisation, e.g. of usability of recovered flexible designs) cost results in improved office space materials and components • Buildings designed with view materials usage and quality to future ’material banks’

EHIBIT 610 Builing information management New digital technologies in construction

Not started

Building information Drones and 3D scanners Automation and Robotics in construction 3D printing modelling (BIM) prefabrication

• Platform for integrated • Can be used for • Improves quality • Enables complex tasks • Enables construction of design, modelling, construction site and precision with human monitoring complex shapes planning and inspections • Reduces labour • Improves quality and • Reduces construction collaboration • Reduces labour costs cost, delivery time precision time and cost of • Reduces cost and and time and waste in • Reduces labour cost customised components saves construction time • Improves safety for construction and delivery time and • Reduces waste in • Facilitates re-use and workers improves safety construction due to recycling of EoL better precision materials AGE DISTRIBUTION OF BUILDING STOCK, 2013 % OF TOTAL BUILDING STOCK, EUROPE

AFTER 2010 3%

20002010 12% EHIBIT 61 19901999 10%

19801989 13%

New buildings represent approximately 1.0 - 1.5% 19701979 17% of total stock Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint Renovation represent approximately~1% of stock per year 19451969 24%

BEFORE 1945 21%

MATERIALS COMPOSITION IN BUILDINGS CO2 FOOTPRINT OF 250 M PER YEAR CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE 1 % OF MASS, AVERAGE BUILDING MILLION TONNES CO2 PER YEAR; % MILLION TONNES PER YEAR; %

BRICKS 3 250 M 2500 M EHIBIT 62 OTHER 4% ALUMINIUM 05% 7% 3 OTHER 22% PLASTICS STEEL 2% 02%

Fotnot till diagram nns i PowerPoint. OTHER 1600 Vad hänvisar fotnot 2.? CONCRETE 42% 65% CEMENT 30%

ALUMINIUM 12%

PLASTICS 11%

AGGREGATES2 45% 900 CD WASTE 35% STEEL 25%

LIFECYCLE CO2 EMISSIONS FROM BUILDINGS % OF LIFETIME CO2 EMISSIONS DURING LIFETIME

EHIBIT 63

USEPHASE INCLUDING ENERGY 50%

815% MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE WITH CURRENT ENERGY SYSTEM WITH LOWCARBON ENERGY UK AND BELGIUM EAMPLES SWEDEN EAMPLE THE CIRCULAR ECONOMY OPPORTUNITY IN BUILDINGS GLOBAL CO EMISSIONS FROM CEMENT PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE CO EMISSIONS, 20152100 The circular2 economy opportunities in buildings are in materials; and reusing buildings2 and building components. Gt CO2 PER YEAR Gt CO2 three main categories (Exhibit 6.5): • Circular business models: Increasing the useful ser- • Materials recirculation: Recycling materials from vice from materials, by extending the lifetime of buildings, end-of life buildings, and designing and dismantling and/or by increasing the utilisation of floor space through 4buildings so that high-value recycling is possible (the re- sharing and other25 mechanisms.4 EHIBIT 64 circulation of steel, plastics, aluminium was discussed in Together, these opportunities could significantly redu- Chapters 2–4, so we focus on cement below). ce the amount of construction materials needed in the EU. 3• Building materials efficiency: Reducing the amount of Before discussing them in detail, however,184 it is useful to SE OM DU KAN GRA DEN LGRE materials that are required for a given floor area. The main consider some of the reasons why materials use is so inef- LINEN LITET SNYGGARE, DEN opportunities are to reduce waste during the construction ficient today. After all, building materials constitute a major FALLER LITET VL SNABBT NU 2process; reduce the amount of material in each building by part of the total cost of construction, so there should al- avoiding over-specification and using user higher-strength ready be strong economic incentives to optimise their use. Jag minskde och “mjukde ut” fallet på kurvan 1

0 Exhibit 6.5 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE SCENARIO A broad palette of circular economy opportunities LOW CARBON ENERGY BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE SCENARIcanO LOW improve CARBON ENERGY materials use in buildings

MATERIALS RECIRCULATION BUILDING MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS 2 2 TONNES CO2 PER TONNE MATERIALS TONNES MATERIALS PER M USEFUL SERVICE FROM EACH M

EHIBIT 65 CEMENT RECYCLING AND VALUE REDUCED WASTE IN CONSTRUCTION PROLONG LIFETIME CAPTURE AT END OF LIFE Reduced loss of materials during Adapt and renovate of buildings to avoid Improved waste management, better construction throuh improved materials demolition and new build separation of materials and increased management Improved maintenance to extend lifespan recycling of key components Less downcycling of concrete through MATERIALS EFFICIENCY OF Design for exible use and to enable deep adoption of new technologies to recover BUILDINGS renovatoin unused cement and aggregates ”Design for disassembly” as a key principle Less material per building through less SHARING TO REDUCE FLOORSPACE over-speci cation, improved design, REUIREMENTS and high-strength materials Reduce total area required through REUSE OF BUILDING COMPONENTS mechanisms such as peer-to-peer sharing, oce sharing, and more communal space Reuse of structural components at end of life and during renovations through new local markets

LABOUR PRODUCTIVITY IN CONSTRUCTION VS EU28 INDEXED: 100 = 2001, EU28 148

115 EHIBIT 66 OVERALL ECONOMY

110

105

100 CONSTRUCTION

95

90

85 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS USED IN BUILDINGS Mt CO2 PER YEAR STEEL ALUMINIUM PLASTICS CEMENT EHIBIT 67 231 13 10 208 20

24 80 34% 123 53% 13

Fotnot till diagram nns i PowerPoint.

DELA UPP SISTA STAPELN I TV SISTA STAPELN HETER D CIRCULAR SCENARIO BEYOND 2050

CURRENT REFERENCE CEMENT WASTE REUSE OF MATERIALS SHARING CIRCULAR PROLONGED CIRCULAR 1 SCENARIO RECYCLING REDUCTION BUILDING EFFICIENCY SCENARIO LIFETIME SCENARIO 2050 COMPONENTS 2050 BEYOND 2050

EHIBIT 68 RECIRCULATION OF MATERIALS BUILDING MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS t CO2 PER t MATERIALS TONNES MATERIALS PER M2 USEFUL SERVICE FROM EACH M2

CEMENTS RECYCLING REDUCED WASTE, REUSE OF BUILDING COMPONENTS, SHARING PROLOGNED 2 1 T CO2/t CEMENT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY M PER PERSON LIFETIME t NEW MATERIALS PER M2 YEARS

Fotnot till diagram nns 062 245 010 52 91 i PowerPoint. 021 49 022 048 192 65

BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE REDUCED REUSE OF MATERIALS CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO WASTE BUILDING EFFICIENCY SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO COMPONENTS

Design Construction Use Phase EoL Treatment EHIBIT 69

From: conflicting objectives, lack of transparency and accountability

VI FRESLR EN VERTIKAL • Involvement only at early • Incentive to reduce • Frequent shift in ownership • No documentation of VERSION MED PILARNA MED VRDE stage, limited accountability construction costs through with limited transfer of materials content KEDAN I MITTEN NEDT, FRN for outcomes (e.g. EoL) low-cost materials and fast knowledge or value capture • Rapid demolition and TETRUTORNA TILL VNSTER, OCH • Long term assets and construction of investment resulting degrading of TILLTETRUTORNA TILL HGER frequent change of owners • Constructor optimises labour • Ownership model with risk of componets and materials creates risk for higher up-front cost, few incentives to lock-in effects and ineffective investment reduce waste or materials use of space use

Not started To: collaboration between actors, transparency and long term objectives

• BIM enables information • New construction techniques • ’Real estate as a service’ • Design for disassembly transfer and enables return on and digitalisation improve enabled by digitalisation enables value capture at EoL investments in circular productivity and reduce over- • Size adapted to needs • BIM facilitates EoL treatment principles (design for specification • Digitalisation enables and ensure quality and disassembly, durable and • Lower trade-off with labour ongoing optimisation, e.g. of usability of recovered flexible designs) cost results in improved office space materials and components • Buildings designed with view materials usage and quality to future ’material banks’

EHIBIT 610 Builing information management New digital technologies in construction

Not started

Building information Drones and 3D scanners Automation and Robotics in construction 3D printing modelling (BIM) prefabrication

• Platform for integrated • Can be used for • Improves quality • Enables complex tasks • Enables construction of design, modelling, construction site and precision with human monitoring complex shapes planning and inspections • Reduces labour • Improves quality and • Reduces construction collaboration • Reduces labour costs cost, delivery time precision time and cost of • Reduces cost and and time and waste in • Reduces labour cost customised components saves construction time • Improves safety for construction and delivery time and • Reduces waste in • Facilitates re-use and workers improves safety construction due to recycling of EoL better precision materials AGE DISTRIBUTION OF BUILDING STOCK, 2013 % OF TOTAL BUILDING STOCK, EUROPE

AFTER 2010 3%

20002010 12% EHIBIT 61 19901999 10%

19801989 13%

New buildings represent approximately 1.0 - 1.5% 19701979 17% of total stock Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint Renovation represent approximately~1% of stock per year 19451969 24%

BEFORE 1945 21%

MATERIALS COMPOSITION IN BUILDINGS CO2 FOOTPRINT OF 250 M PER YEAR CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE 1 % OF MASS, AVERAGE BUILDING MILLION TONNES CO2 PER YEAR; % MILLION TONNES PER YEAR; %

BRICKS 3 250 M 2500 M EHIBIT 62 OTHER 4% ALUMINIUM 05% 7% 3 OTHER 22% PLASTICS STEEL 2% 02%

Fotnot till diagram nns i PowerPoint. OTHER 1600 Vad hänvisar fotnot 2.? CONCRETE 42% 65% CEMENT 30%

ALUMINIUM 12%

PLASTICS 11%

AGGREGATES2 45% 900 CD WASTE 35% STEEL 25%

LIFECYCLE CO2 EMISSIONS FROM BUILDINGS % OF LIFETIME CO2 EMISSIONS DURING LIFETIME

EHIBIT 63

USEPHASE INCLUDING ENERGY 50%

815% MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

WITH CURRENT ENERGY SYSTEM WITH LOWCARBON ENERGY UK AND BELGIUM EAMPLES SWEDEN EAMPLE

GLOBAL CO2 EMISSIONS FROM CEMENT PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE CO2 EMISSIONS, 20152100 Gt CO2 PER YEAR Gt CO2

4 254 EHIBIT 64

3 184 SE OM DU KAN GRA DEN LGRE LINEN LITET SNYGGARE, DEN FALLER LITET VL SNABBT NU 2

Jag minskde och “mjukde ut” fallet på kurvan 1

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE SCENARIO LOW CARBON ENERGY BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE SCENARIO LOW CARBON ENERGY

MATERIALS RECIRCULATION BUILDING MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS 2 2 TONNES CO2 PER TONNE MATERIALS TONNES MATERIALS PER M USEFUL SERVICE FROM EACH M

EHIBIT 65 CEMENT RECYCLING AND VALUE REDUCED WASTE IN CONSTRUCTION PROLONG LIFETIME CAPTURE AT END OF LIFE Reduced loss of materials during Adapt and renovate of buildings to avoid Improved waste management, better construction throuh improved materials demolition and new build separation of materials and increased management Improved maintenance to extend lifespan recycling of key components Less downcycling of concrete through MATERIALS EFFICIENCY OF Design for exible use and to enable deep adoption of new technologies to recover BUILDINGS renovatoin unused cement and aggregates ”Design for disassembly” as a key principle Less material per building through less SHARING TO REDUCE FLOORSPACE over-speci cation, improved design, REUIREMENTS REVIEW DRAFTand high-strength – DO materialsNOT DISTRIBUTE Reduce total area required through REUSE OF BUILDING COMPONENTS mechanisms such as peer-to-peer sharing, oce sharing, and more communal space Reuse of structural components at end of life and during renovations through new local markets Exhibit 6.6 The construction sector faces a major productivity challenge

LABOUR PRODUCTIVITY IN CONSTRUCTION VS EU28 INDEXED: 100 = 2001, EU28

115 EHIBIT 66 OVERALL ECONOMY

110

105

100 CONSTRUCTION

95

90

85 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013

SOURCE: EUROPEAN COMMISSION (2015)

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS USED IN BUILDINGS Mt CO2 PER YEAR STEEL ALUMINIUM However, the construction industry faces significant For these reasons, and becausePLASTICS of the socialCEMENT and econo- EHIBIT 67 challenges. First231 of all, it is13 fragmented, comprising nu- mic importance of buildings, regulators often intervene heavily merous, often small companies. It is cyclical10 and volatile, in the sector. The long chain of actors and time lag between in- and20 8EU construction companies are still recovering20 from itial construction and eventual occupation (let alone demolition) the sharp downturn that came with the financial crisis. mean that commercial contracts can rarely cover all aspects of 80 34% The workforce is relatively unstable, and profit margins public24 importance. Regulations and building standards cover and capitalisation are lower than in many other sectors. many issues – fire safety, energy performance, aesthetics,123 per -53% The stakeholders and value chain are fragmented, with mitting, construction13 products, structural safety, etc. However, complex contracting across multiple parties that often materials efficiency is not yet included in such regulations. Fotnot till diagram nns results in inefficiencies and poorly aligned incentives. i PowerPoint. Construction has also been slow to adopt new technolo- Another important theme is that many barriers could mi- gies or methods; there has been no analogue of manu- tigated by increased digitalisation. High transaction costs, facturing’s ‘lean’ improvements. For all these reasons, risk, and labour costs are three of the main factors in the unlike in any other sector of comparable economic current industry structure that lead to the inefficient use of importance, productivity improvements in construction materials, and digitalisation-related strategies could help have stalled (Exhibit 6.6). address them, as discussed below.

DELA UPP SISTA STAPELN I TV SISTA STAPELN HETER D CIRCULAR SCENARIO BEYOND 2050 149

CURRENT REFERENCE CEMENT WASTE REUSE OF MATERIALS SHARING CIRCULAR PROLONGED CIRCULAR 1 SCENARIO RECYCLING REDUCTION BUILDING EFFICIENCY SCENARIO LIFETIME SCENARIO 2050 COMPONENTS 2050 BEYOND 2050

EHIBIT 68 RECIRCULATION OF MATERIALS BUILDING MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS t CO2 PER t MATERIALS TONNES MATERIALS PER M2 USEFUL SERVICE FROM EACH M2

CEMENTS RECYCLING REDUCED WASTE, REUSE OF BUILDING COMPONENTS, SHARING PROLOGNED 2 1 T CO2/t CEMENT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY M PER PERSON LIFETIME t NEW MATERIALS PER M2 YEARS

Fotnot till diagram nns 062 245 010 52 91 i PowerPoint. 021 49 022 048 192 65

BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE REDUCED REUSE OF MATERIALS CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO WASTE BUILDING EFFICIENCY SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO COMPONENTS

Design Construction Use Phase EoL Treatment EHIBIT 69

From: conflicting objectives, lack of transparency and accountability

VI FRESLR EN VERTIKAL • Involvement only at early • Incentive to reduce • Frequent shift in ownership • No documentation of VERSION MED PILARNA MED VRDE stage, limited accountability construction costs through with limited transfer of materials content KEDAN I MITTEN NEDT, FRN for outcomes (e.g. EoL) low-cost materials and fast knowledge or value capture • Rapid demolition and TETRUTORNA TILL VNSTER, OCH • Long term assets and construction of investment resulting degrading of TILLTETRUTORNA TILL HGER frequent change of owners • Constructor optimises labour • Ownership model with risk of componets and materials creates risk for higher up-front cost, few incentives to lock-in effects and ineffective investment reduce waste or materials use of space use

Not started To: collaboration between actors, transparency and long term objectives

• BIM enables information • New construction techniques • ’Real estate as a service’ • Design for disassembly transfer and enables return on and digitalisation improve enabled by digitalisation enables value capture at EoL investments in circular productivity and reduce over- • Size adapted to needs • BIM facilitates EoL treatment principles (design for specification • Digitalisation enables and ensure quality and disassembly, durable and • Lower trade-off with labour ongoing optimisation, e.g. of usability of recovered flexible designs) cost results in improved office space materials and components • Buildings designed with view materials usage and quality to future ’material banks’

EHIBIT 610 Builing information management New digital technologies in construction

Not started

Building information Drones and 3D scanners Automation and Robotics in construction 3D printing modelling (BIM) prefabrication

• Platform for integrated • Can be used for • Improves quality • Enables complex tasks • Enables construction of design, modelling, construction site and precision with human monitoring complex shapes planning and inspections • Reduces labour • Improves quality and • Reduces construction collaboration • Reduces labour costs cost, delivery time precision time and cost of • Reduces cost and and time and waste in • Reduces labour cost customised components saves construction time • Improves safety for construction and delivery time and • Reduces waste in • Facilitates re-use and workers improves safety construction due to recycling of EoL better precision materials REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

MATERIALS EFFICIENCY IN THE CONSTRUCTION PROCESS The main reasons for overuse of materials are was- steel can reduce materials needs and CO2 footprint by te during construction, over-specification in the building, 15–20% in some building types. There also are benefits and discarding instead of reusing structural elements be- from ultra-high strength concrete in some applications. fore their end of life. Reuse of components: Many of the components of Waste of materials during construction: Industry in- buildings are still fully functional even when the building siders indicate that as much as 15% of buildings materi- reaches its end of life, creating an opportunity for reuse, als are wasted in the construction process, ranging from especially of concrete and steel components. There are 10% in the best cases to 20% or more in the worst. already some examples of successful reuse. A new resi- dential area of Copenhagen is being built out of structural There are many reasons for this waste. Contracts are elements from abandoned houses, while a German resi- often structured in such a way that those making deci- dential area near Berlin similarly reused precast concrete sions about materials use do not bear the cost of any elements, reducing the cost of construction by 30%. Alt- waste – but they do bear the cost of delays, so they order hough these examples demonstrate the viability of reu- extra materials as a buffer. Due to lack of standardisation se, they are rare exceptions, and the amount of concrete and local markets, however, surpluses often cannot be being reused is still tiny relative to new concrete demand. sold on or returned. Many construction companies do not There also are many examples of successful reuse of ste- even have firm data on the amount of materials they was- el, but overall, only 5% of end-of-life steel from buildings te, showing how little attention the issue has received. is in fact reused, a small share of the total potential.

Over-specification of materials inputs: Up to 85% of A range of barriers stand in the way. The most imme- the materials in a building are in the structural elements, diate obstacles are availability and coordination: even with steel and concrete making up the large majority. when reusable parts are in fact available, there often are There is a widespread tendency for these elements to be no local markets capable of matching connecting those over-specified, using more materials than are needed for dismantling buildings with those who could use the parts, a sound and safe structure. This is particularly true with or of storing the parts until someone can use them. In- steel: detailed case studies show its use could be cut by consistent or unpredictable supplies of materials could half without compromising on design standards. This is result in costs or delays for other parts of a building pro- an astounding number, with immediate significance for ject, and the quality may be difficult to trace or certify. As total steel use; as noted above, construction accounts important, the practice is simply unfamiliar, at odds with for more than half of total steel demand. It also shows established routines. Industry experts also say there is clearly how little attention there is in today’s construction little demand from clients to test them. process to efficient materials use. This also suggests that greater use of digital tools and automated assembly To overcome these barriers, it would be necessary could do much to address this issue. both to ‘design for deconstruction’, and to enable much closer tracking of materials in- and outflows to the buil- High-strength materials offer another route to reduce ding stock. the total use of materials. For example, high-strength

150 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Steel use for buildings could be cut by half without compromising on design standards. s.

151 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

MAKING MORE OF EACH BUILDING: INCREASED LIFETIME AND UTILISATION

Increasing the building lifetime is one of the single most Above all, a longer life for buildings will require a diffe- effective actions that can be taken to reduce the need for rent mindset, where buildings are intended and expected construction materials. As noted above, around 85% of the to last, and to be reconfigured multiple times over long CO2 footprint of materials is associated with structural ele- time periods. This may require public intervention, as the ments. Yet when buildings are demolished, it is typically not societal benefits of ‘build to last’ principles are felt only a because their structures are no longer usable in any technical long time in the future. sense – most are perfectly sound. Instead, old buildings are razed for social or economic reasons: because architectural The need for materials in buildings also can be redu- tastes have changed, new types of housing or commercial ced by making more of the building stock that is already space are needed; the neighbourhood has evolved; or the in place. Sharing offers one option. For example, much cost of renovating the building is higher than demolition and European office space is occupied only for 40% of the new construction. There is also significant variation in how time, and there is a trend both towards more compact long buildings stand: some low-quality developments are torn and shared offices. Services such as Airbnb also offer down only some decades after construction, whereas at the the possibility of using spare or idle residential space other extreme many European cities take pride in high-quality, more effectively. beautiful buildings that may have stood for centuries. Despite what is actually possible, the technical lifetime of new buil- In the residential sector, the opportunity is different. dings is often assumed to be just 50 years. One aspect is a mismatch of space and occupancy. Many European countries have long had a discussion This suggests a major agenda to extend the life of buil- about tax systems discouraging downsizing from large dings. The key is for buildings to be adaptable to the chan- to small houses. Architects also have highlighted the ging requirements of their users: whether they change in opportunity to make better use of communal space function (e.g. from commercial to residential), or in appea- in new residential developments – perhaps chiefly to rance and design. This requires high quality and an emp- create a more socially attractive place to live, but also hasis on design that is modular and enables deep renova- making it possible for each individual dwelling to be tion. In addition, improved maintenance can extend lifetimes smaller without compromising on residents’ require- by preventing the deterioration of facades and other parts, ments. which in turn become the trigger for wholesale demolition.

152 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

IMPROVED END-OF-LIFE DISASSEMBLY FOR HIGH-VALUE REUSE AND RECYCLING

The building stock in Europe consti- tutes an enormous repository of highly specialised materials: a range of diffe- rent metals, specific alloys or composi- tes, plastics with a wide range of diffe- rent properties, insulation materials, and much more. The prospect of ‘buildings as a materials bank’ expresses the no- tion that, properly managed, end-of-life buildings could become a major source of materials for future needs.

The starting point is very different, however. Standard practice when buil- dings reach their end of life is demolition. Although official statistics state that 47% of EU construction and demolition waste is reused or recycled, this stretches any meaningful definition of recycling: most- ly, materials with high embodied energy and CO2 are turned into bulk aggrega- tes or backfill, sometimes at no net CO2 benefit. Concrete may be crushed to recover reinforcing steel, and then either landfilled or used as aggregates. Steel elements are typically remelted as scrap, or lost. As noted in Chapter 3, some plastics from buildings are recycled, but far from the full potential. Except for me- tals and some plastics recycling, current practice is at best very heavy downcy- cling, combined with no small share of landfilling.

To change this, several things must happen. One is to properly track the content of buildings through ‘materials passports’ and logbooks, so that the po- The prospect of ‘buildings as tential for materials recovery is known at end of life, and to track changes during a materials bank’ expresses the a building’s lifetime. Another is to design buildings for deconstruction, as noted abo- notion that, properly managed, ve, and otherwise for separation into clean end-of-life buildings could become streams of high-value materials. The demo- lition process would need to change, as to- a major source of materials for day’s speed-focused methods often dama- ge or mix the materials to the point where future needs. . they can only be recovered as aggregates.

153 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

LOWER CO2 INTENSITY OF BUILDING MATERIALS AND CEMENT RECYCLING The remaining key strategy to reduce CO2 emissions lands has found in pilots that it is possible not only to re- from buildings is to use materials with lower CO2 emis- cover unreacted cement, but also to retrieve aggregates sions per tonne. One demand-side option is to substitute from end-of-life concrete with improved quality relative to from high-carbon to low-carbon materials (see Box 1 for new aggregates. In turn, the recovered aggregates with two prominent examples). The other is to recycle materi- improved strength require up to 15% less cement than als (here we focus on cement, but see Chapters 2–4 for new aggregates. Overall, the recovered cement can re- discussions of recycling steel, plastics and aluminium). place up to 80% of new cement in construction, saving almost half of the CO2. Cement cannot be recycled in the same sense as metals or plastics, as the process of making cement clinker is irrever- These technologies have yet to enter into commerci- sible. Nevertheless, there are opportunities to recover unused al use at scale. In addition to technology development, cement from concrete at end of life. As much as 30–40% of it is necessary to set up the regulatory framework and the clinker often remains unused (or unhydrated) and can adapt standards to accommodate recycled materials. Gi- therefore in principle be used again to replace new cement. ven transport costs, markets for recovered cement would mostly be local, or even integrate the demolition of exis- Technologies to capture these opportunities are under ting structures directly into the production of raw materi- development. For example, SmartCrusher in the Nether- als for replacement buildings.

154 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

MATERIALS SUBSTITUTION IN BUILDINGS

Clinker substitutes in Portland cement clinker-based cements: There is ongoing research to investigate options for reducing the CO2 footprint of cement. One track looks to entirely novel ce- ments, either based on polymers, or in part synthesised from CO2. More near-term efforts focus on substituting clinker with other raw materials, since the process emissions of cement production occur during the limestone-to-clinker-process. The most common clinker alternatives are granula- ted blast-furnace and coal ash. Together, these have an estimated potential to replace up to 15–25% of clinker. However, neither steel blast furnace production nor coal-fired power production are expected to grow much (indeed, phasing out coal power is crucial to climate objectives), whereas global cement production is expected to increase significantly. Another promising option is to use calcinated clays, with the potential advantage of relatively low cost and high availability. This is still under develoipment, but some investigations point to the possibility of replacing as much as 50% of clinker without compromising on cement quality.

Wood-based construction: Wood-based construction components can have markedly lower CO2 intensity than steel and concrete, and even constitute a carbon sink if managed well. Timber can have a strength similar to that of reinforced concrete (hardwood is slightly stronger and softwood is slightly weaker), but it is less stable and less able to handle compression, and it poses higher fire risks. Nonetheless, innovation is extending the range of potential applications for wood in buildings. For instance, studies of the UK construction sector have shown that novel off-site, modular timber frame systems can save up to 50% of embodied carbon and 35% of embodied energy compared with traditional residential building methods and materials. Cross-laminated timber (CLT) is another promising substitute for concrete, particularly suited to multi-storey buildings. CLT advantages of traditional timber include improved load bearing and shear capacity, and greater potential for prefa- brication. A common concern is the shorter lifecycle of timber compared with long-lasting concrete. However, buildings are rarely demolished due to degradation of the main structure. There are also potential treatments to extend service life, such as coating, impregnation, chemical/mechanical mo- dification, and design details that limit the exposure to wetting and direct sunlight. There is a need to analyse the realistic potential to use wood at scale in EU construction – an important gap to fill in considering more sustainable buildings.

NOTES: PKM DENOTES PASSENGER-KILOMETRES SOURCE: MATERIAL ECONOMICS ANALYSIS AS DESCRIBED IN TEXT

155 AGE DISTRIBUTION OF BUILDING STOCK, 2013 % OF TOTAL BUILDING STOCK, EUROPE

AFTER 2010 3%

20002010 12% EHIBIT 61 19901999 10%

19801989 13%

New buildings represent approximately 1.0 - 1.5% 19701979 17% of total stock Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint Renovation represent approximately~1% of stock per year 19451969 24%

BEFORE 1945 21%

MATERIALS COMPOSITION IN BUILDINGS CO2 FOOTPRINT OF 250 M PER YEAR CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE 1 % OF MASS, AVERAGE BUILDING MILLION TONNES CO2 PER YEAR; % MILLION TONNES PER YEAR; %

BRICKS 3 250 M 2500 M EHIBIT 62 OTHER 4% ALUMINIUM 05% 7% 3 OTHER 22% PLASTICS STEEL 2% 02%

Fotnot till diagram nns i PowerPoint. OTHER 1600 Vad hänvisar fotnot 2.? CONCRETE 42% 65% CEMENT 30%

ALUMINIUM 12%

PLASTICS 11%

AGGREGATES2 45% 900 CD WASTE 35% STEEL 25%

LIFECYCLE CO2 EMISSIONS FROM BUILDINGS % OF LIFETIME CO2 EMISSIONS DURING LIFETIME

EHIBIT 63

USEPHASE INCLUDING ENERGY 50%

815% MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

WITH CURRENT ENERGY SYSTEM WITH LOWCARBON ENERGY UK AND BELGIUM EAMPLES SWEDEN EAMPLE

GLOBAL CO2 EMISSIONS FROM CEMENT PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE CO2 EMISSIONS, 20152100 Gt CO2 PER YEAR Gt CO2

4 254 EHIBIT 64

3 184 SE OM DU KAN GRA DEN LGRE LINEN LITET SNYGGARE, DEN FALLER LITET VL SNABBT NU 2

Jag minskde och “mjukde ut” fallet på kurvan 1

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE SCENARIO LOW CARBON ENERGY BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE SCENARIO LOW CARBON ENERGY

MATERIALS RECIRCULATION BUILDING MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS 2 2 TONNES CO2 PER TONNE MATERIALS TONNES MATERIALS PER M USEFUL SERVICE FROM EACH M

EHIBIT 65 CEMENT RECYCLING AND VALUE REDUCED WASTE IN CONSTRUCTION PROLONG LIFETIME CAPTURE AT END OF LIFE Reduced loss of materials during Adapt and renovate of buildings to avoid Improved waste management, better construction throuh improved materials demolition and new build separation of materials and increased management Improved maintenance to extend lifespan recycling of key components Less downcycling of concrete through MATERIALS EFFICIENCY OF Design for exible use and to enable deep adoption of new technologies to recover BUILDINGS renovatoin unused cement and aggregates ”Design for disassembly” as a key principle Less material per building through less SHARING TO REDUCE FLOORSPACE over-speci cation, improved design, REUIREMENTS and high-strength materials Reduce total area required through REUSE OF BUILDING COMPONENTS mechanisms such as peer-to-peer sharing, oce sharing, and more communal space Reuse of structural components at end of life and during renovations through new local markets

REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

ALABOUR CIRCULAR PRODUCTIVITY IN CONSTRUCTIONSCENARIO VS EU28 FOR BUILDINGS CAN CUT CO2 EMISSIONSINDEXED: 100 = 2001, EU28 BY MORE THAN HALF 115 EHIBIT 66 The above discussion lays out a rich set of options kely to grow from 208 Mt CO2 today OVERALLto just overECONOMY 230 to reduce the demand for materials in construction Mt CO2 per year by 2050. The circular opportunities without110 compromising on the benefits derived from buil- jointly could cut emissions by 80 Mt CO2 by 2050, and dings. To explore the impact of those options on CO2 a further 43 Mt CO2 later in the century, as the effect emissions, we built a circular scenario with the gradual of longer building lifetimes takes hold. The largest re- adoption105 of a wide-ranging palette of circular opportuni- ductions are from materials efficiency strategies (less ties in buildings by 2050. The analysis shows that CO2 waste, less over-specification, use of high-strength ma- emissions100 from materials in buildings could be reduced terials) and reuse. The total reduction of 123 Mt CO2 by as much as half (Exhibit 6.7). Without further action, thus cuts emissions by more than half.CONSTRUCTION the total emissions from materials for buildings are li- 95

90 Exhibit 6.7

85 2001 2002 A2003 circular2004 2005 scenario2006 2007 reduces2008 2009 CO22010 emissions2011 2012 2013 from building materials by 53%

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS USED IN BUILDINGS Mt CO2 PER YEAR STEEL ALUMINIUM PLASTICS CEMENT EHIBIT 67 231 13 10 208 20

24 80 34% 123 53% 13

Fotnot till diagram nns i PowerPoint.

DELA UPP SISTA STAPELN I TV SISTA STAPELN HETER D CIRCULAR SCENARIO BEYOND 2050

CURRENT REFERENCE CEMENT WASTE REUSE OF MATERIALS SHARING CIRCULAR PROLONGED CIRCULAR 1 SCENARIO RECYCLING REDUCTION BUILDING EFFICIENCY SCENARIO LIFETIME SCENARIO 2050 COMPONENTS 2050 BEYOND 2050

156

EHIBIT 68 RECIRCULATION OF MATERIALS BUILDING MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS t CO2 PER t MATERIALS TONNES MATERIALS PER M2 USEFUL SERVICE FROM EACH M2

CEMENTS RECYCLING REDUCED WASTE, REUSE OF BUILDING COMPONENTS, SHARING PROLOGNED 2 1 T CO2/t CEMENT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY M PER PERSON LIFETIME t NEW MATERIALS PER M2 YEARS

Fotnot till diagram nns 062 245 010 52 91 i PowerPoint. 021 49 022 048 192 65

BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE REDUCED REUSE OF MATERIALS CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO WASTE BUILDING EFFICIENCY SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO COMPONENTS

Design Construction Use Phase EoL Treatment EHIBIT 69

From: conflicting objectives, lack of transparency and accountability

VI FRESLR EN VERTIKAL • Involvement only at early • Incentive to reduce • Frequent shift in ownership • No documentation of VERSION MED PILARNA MED VRDE stage, limited accountability construction costs through with limited transfer of materials content KEDAN I MITTEN NEDT, FRN for outcomes (e.g. EoL) low-cost materials and fast knowledge or value capture • Rapid demolition and TETRUTORNA TILL VNSTER, OCH • Long term assets and construction of investment resulting degrading of TILLTETRUTORNA TILL HGER frequent change of owners • Constructor optimises labour • Ownership model with risk of componets and materials creates risk for higher up-front cost, few incentives to lock-in effects and ineffective investment reduce waste or materials use of space use

Not started To: collaboration between actors, transparency and long term objectives

• BIM enables information • New construction techniques • ’Real estate as a service’ • Design for disassembly transfer and enables return on and digitalisation improve enabled by digitalisation enables value capture at EoL investments in circular productivity and reduce over- • Size adapted to needs • BIM facilitates EoL treatment principles (design for specification • Digitalisation enables and ensure quality and disassembly, durable and • Lower trade-off with labour ongoing optimisation, e.g. of usability of recovered flexible designs) cost results in improved office space materials and components • Buildings designed with view materials usage and quality to future ’material banks’

EHIBIT 610 Builing information management New digital technologies in construction

Not started

Building information Drones and 3D scanners Automation and Robotics in construction 3D printing modelling (BIM) prefabrication

• Platform for integrated • Can be used for • Improves quality • Enables complex tasks • Enables construction of design, modelling, construction site and precision with human monitoring complex shapes planning and inspections • Reduces labour • Improves quality and • Reduces construction collaboration • Reduces labour costs cost, delivery time precision time and cost of • Reduces cost and and time and waste in • Reduces labour cost customised components saves construction time • Improves safety for construction and delivery time and • Reduces waste in • Facilitates re-use and workers improves safety construction due to recycling of EoL better precision materials AGE DISTRIBUTION OF BUILDING STOCK, 2013 % OF TOTAL BUILDING STOCK, EUROPE

AFTER 2010 3%

20002010 12% EHIBIT 61 19901999 10%

19801989 13%

New buildings represent approximately 1.0 - 1.5% 19701979 17% of total stock Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint Renovation represent approximately~1% of stock per year 19451969 24%

BEFORE 1945 21%

MATERIALS COMPOSITION IN BUILDINGS CO2 FOOTPRINT OF 250 M PER YEAR CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE 1 % OF MASS, AVERAGE BUILDING MILLION TONNES CO2 PER YEAR; % MILLION TONNES PER YEAR; %

BRICKS 3 250 M 2500 M EHIBIT 62 OTHER 4% ALUMINIUM 05% 7% 3 OTHER 22% PLASTICS STEEL 2% 02%

Fotnot till diagram nns i PowerPoint. OTHER 1600 Vad hänvisar fotnot 2.? CONCRETE 42% 65% CEMENT 30%

ALUMINIUM 12%

PLASTICS 11%

AGGREGATES2 45% 900 CD WASTE 35% STEEL 25%

LIFECYCLE CO2 EMISSIONS FROM BUILDINGS % OF LIFETIME CO2 EMISSIONS DURING LIFETIME

EHIBIT 63

USEPHASE INCLUDING ENERGY 50%

815% MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

WITH CURRENT ENERGY SYSTEM WITH LOWCARBON ENERGY UK AND BELGIUM EAMPLES SWEDEN EAMPLE

GLOBAL CO2 EMISSIONS FROM CEMENT PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE CO2 EMISSIONS, 20152100 Gt CO2 PER YEAR Gt CO2

4 254 EHIBIT 64

3 184 SE OM DU KAN GRA DEN LGRE LINEN LITET SNYGGARE, DEN FALLER LITET VL SNABBT NU 2

Jag minskde och “mjukde ut” fallet på kurvan 1

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE SCENARIO LOW CARBON ENERGY BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE SCENARIO LOW CARBON ENERGY

MATERIALS RECIRCULATION BUILDING MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS 2 2 TONNES CO2 PER TONNE MATERIALS TONNES MATERIALS PER M USEFUL SERVICE FROM EACH M

EHIBIT 65 CEMENT RECYCLING AND VALUE REDUCED WASTE IN CONSTRUCTION PROLONG LIFETIME CAPTURE AT END OF LIFE Reduced loss of materials during Adapt and renovate of buildings to avoid Improved waste management, better construction throuh improved materials demolition and new build separation of materials and increased management Improved maintenance to extend lifespan recycling of key components Less downcycling of concrete through MATERIALS EFFICIENCY OF Design for exible use and to enable deep adoption of new technologies to recover BUILDINGS renovatoin unused cement and aggregates ”Design for disassembly” as a key principle Less material per building through less SHARING TO REDUCE FLOORSPACE over-speci cation, improved design, REUIREMENTS and high-strength materials Reduce total area required through REUSE OF BUILDING COMPONENTS mechanisms such as peer-to-peer sharing, oce sharing, and more communal space Reuse of structural components at end of life and during renovations through new local markets

LABOUR PRODUCTIVITY IN CONSTRUCTION VS EU28 INDEXED: 100 = 2001, EU28

115 EHIBIT 66 OVERALL ECONOMY

110

105

100 CONSTRUCTION

95

90

85 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS USED IN BUILDINGS Mt CO2 PER YEAR STEEL ALUMINIUM PLASTICS CEMENT EHIBIT 67 231 13 10 208 20

24 80 34% 123 53% 13

Fotnot till diagram nns i PowerPoint.

DELA UPP SISTA STAPELN I TV SISTA STAPELN HETER D REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE CIRCULAR SCENARIO BEYOND 2050

Exhibit 6.8 CURRENT REFERENCE CEMENT WASTE REUSE OF MATERIALS SHARING CIRCULAR PROLONGED CIRCULAR 1 SCENARIO RECYCLING REDUCTION BUILDING EFFICIENCY SCENARIO LIFETIME SCENARIO 2050 A circular scenarioCOMPONENTS sees improvement2050 across BEYOND 2050 all aspects of building materials use

EHIBIT 68 RECIRCULATION OF MATERIALS BUILDING MATERIALS EFFICIENCY CIRCULAR BUSINESS MODELS t CO2 PER t MATERIALS TONNES MATERIALS PER M2 USEFUL SERVICE FROM EACH M2

CEMENTS RECYCLING REDUCED WASTE, REUSE OF BUILDING COMPONENTS, SHARING PROLOGNED 2 1 T CO2/t CEMENT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY M PER PERSON LIFETIME t NEW MATERIALS PER M2 YEARS

Fotnot till diagram nns 062 245 010 52 91 i PowerPoint. 021 49 022 048 192 65

BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE REDUCED REUSE OF MATERIALS CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO WASTE BUILDING EFFICIENCY SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO COMPONENTS

NOTES: 1 ACROSS ALL BULIDING TYPES EXCEPT INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS

Design Construction Use Phase EoL Treatment To achieve this, a range of changes are necessary EHIBIT 69 • Circular business models enable both higher uti- (Exhibit 6.8.): lisation and longer lifetime. Sharing reduces floor area •F rCementom: confl irecyclingcting object ibecomesves, lack of widespread,transparency acuttingnd acc otheun tabilirequirementsty by 5%, summed across all building cate- gories. The average lifetime of buildings increases by VI FRESLR EN VERTIKAL average• Involve mCO2-intensityent only at early of cement• Inc eproductionntive to redu ceby 23%, • Frequent shift in ownership • No documentation of VERSION MED PILARNA MED VRDE fromsta g0.62e, lim toite d0.48 acco utonnesntability CO2 perco ntonnestructi ocement.n costs th rough 40%,with lithroughmited tran asf ecombinationr of ofm aadaptiveterials con tbuildingsent and KEDAN I MITTEN NEDT, FRN for outcomes (e.g. EoL) low-cost materials and fast thekn o‘buildwledge to or last’value principlescapture and• R aimprovedpid demolit iomaintenancen and • Long term assets and construction of investment resulting degrading of TETRUTORNA TILL VNSTER, OCH • The materials efficiencystrategies reduce the described above. Combining this, the benefit of each TILLTETRUTORNA TILL HGER amountfreque noft c hnewang ebuilding of owner smaterials • C othatnstr uarecto r required,optimises lafrombour • Ownership model with risk of componets and materials creates risk for higher up-front cost, few incentives to tonnelock-i nof ef febuildingcts and in ematerialffective increases: for each year of ani naveragevestment of 2.45 tonnes of materialsreduce was tfore o r eachmater iasquls - serviceuse of s pfromace a building, the materials input is one-third use are metre of building, to 1.92 tonnes. To achieve this, lower in the circular scenario – although as noted, the waste during construction is reduced to 5%, while steel benefit of longer lifetimes take a long time to show up in and cement use falls by 20–30%, as a result of reduced actual materials demand. over-specification and use of higher-quality materials. Not started 15%To: c ofoll astructuralboration b ebuildingtween a ccomponentstors, transpar earency reused. and lon g term objectives • BIM enables information • New construction techniques • ’Real estate as a service’ • Design for disassembly transfer and enables return on and digitalisation improve enabled by digitalisation enables value capture at EoL investments in circular productivity and reduce over- • Size adapted to needs • BIM facilitates EoL treatment principles (design for specification 157• Digitalisation enables and ensure quality and disassembly, durable and • Lower trade-off with labour ongoing optimisation, e.g. of usability of recovered flexible designs) cost results in improved office space materials and components • Buildings designed with view materials usage and quality to future ’material banks’

EHIBIT 610 Builing information management New digital technologies in construction

Not started

Building information Drones and 3D scanners Automation and Robotics in construction 3D printing modelling (BIM) prefabrication

• Platform for integrated • Can be used for • Improves quality • Enables complex tasks • Enables construction of design, modelling, construction site and precision with human monitoring complex shapes planning and inspections • Reduces labour • Improves quality and • Reduces construction collaboration • Reduces labour costs cost, delivery time precision time and cost of • Reduces cost and and time and waste in • Reduces labour cost customised components saves construction time • Improves safety for construction and delivery time and • Reduces waste in • Facilitates re-use and workers improves safety construction due to recycling of EoL better precision materials AGE DISTRIBUTION OF BUILDING STOCK, 2013 % OF TOTAL BUILDING STOCK, EUROPE

AFTER 2010 3% NEW BUILDINGS Represent approximately 20002010 12% 1.0 - 1.5% of total stock

EHIBIT 61 19901999 10%

19801989 13%

19701979 17% Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint

19451969 24% RENOVATION ~1% of stock per year

BEFORE 1945 21%

MATERIALS COMPOSITION IN BUILDINGS CO2 FOOTPRINT OF 250 M PER YEAR CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE 1 % OF MASS, AVERAGE BUILDING MILLION TONNES CO2 PER YEAR; % MILLION TONNES PER YEAR; %

250 MILLION TONNES 250 MILLION TONNES EHIBIT 62 STEEL 2%

3 OTHER 22%

Fotnot till diagram nns CONCRETE 42% i PowerPoint. PLASTICS 11% OTHER 1600 Vad hänvisar fotnot 2.? 65% ALUMINIUM 12%

3 OTHER 4% BRICKS 7% STEEL 25%

AGGREGATES 45% 900 CD WASTE CEMENT 30% 35%

LIFECYCLE CO2 EMISSIONS FROM BUILDINGS % OF LIFETIME CO2 EMISSIONS DURING LIFETIME

EHIBIT 63

USEPHASE INCLUDING ENERGY 50%

815% MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

WITH CURRENT ENERGY SYSTEM WITH LOWCARBON ENERGY UK AND BELGIUM EAMPLES1 SWEDEN EAMPLE

GLOBAL CO2 EMISSIONS FROM CEMENT PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE CO2 EMISSIONS, 20152100 BILLION TONNES CO2 PER YEAR BILLION TONNES CO2

4 254 EHIBIT 64

3 184 SE OM DU KAN GRA DEN LGRE LINEN LITET SNYGGARE, DEN FALLER LITET VL SNABBT NU 2

Jag minskde och “mjukde ut” fallet på kurvan 1

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE SCENARIO LOW CARBON ENERGY BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE SCENARIO LOW CARBON ENERGY

MATERIALS RECIRCULATION BUILDING MATERIALS EFFICIENCY MORE PRODUCTIVE USE 2 2 TONNES CO2 PER TONNE MATERIALS TONNES MATERIALS PER M USEFUL SERVICE FROM EACH M

EHIBIT 65 CEMENT RECYCLING AND VALUE REDUCED WASTE IN CONSTRUCTION PROLONG LIFETIME CAPTURE AT END OF LIFE Reduced loss of materials during Adapt and renovate of buildings to avoid Improved waste management, better construction throuh improved materials demolition and new build separation of materials and increased management Improved maintenance to extend lifespan recycling of key components Less downcycling of concrete through MATERIALS EFFICIENCY OF Design for exible use and to enable deep adoption of new technologies to recover BUILDINGS renovatoin unused cement and aggregates ”Design for disassembly” as a key principle Less material per building through less SHARING TO REDUCE FLOORSPACE over-speci cation, improved design, REUIREMENTS and high-strength materials Reduce total area required through REUSE OF STRUCTURAL mechanisms such as peer-to-peer sharing, COMPONENTS oce sharing, and more communal space Reuse of structural components at end of life and during renovations through new local markets

LABOUR PRODUCTIVITY IN CONSTRUCTION VS EU28 INDEXED: 100 = 2001, EU28

115 EHIBIT 66 OVERALL ECONOMY

110

105

100 CONSTRUCTION

95

90

85 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS USED IN BUILDINGS MILLION TONNES CO2 PER YEAR

STEEL ALUMINIUM PLASTICS CEMENT EHIBIT 67 231 13 10 208 20

24 80 34% 123 53% 13

Fotnot till diagram nns i PowerPoint.

DELA UPP SISTA STAPELN I TV SISTA STAPELN HETER D CIRCULAR SCENARIO BEYOND 2050

CURRENT REFERENCE CEMENT WASTE REUSE OF MATERIALS SHARING CIRCULAR CIRCULAR PROLONGED 1 SCENARIO RECYCLING REDUCTION BUILDING EFFICIENCY SCENARIO SCENARIO LIFETIME 2050 COMPONENTS 2050 BEYOND 2050

EHIBIT 68 RECIRCULATION OF MATERIALS BUILDING MATERIALS EFFICIENCY MORE PRODUCTIVE USE t CO2 PER t MATERIALS TONNES MATERIALS PER M2 USEFUL SERVICE FROM EACH M2

CEMENTS RECYCLING REDUCED WASTE, REUSE OF BUILDING COMPONENTS, SHARING PROLOGNED 2 1 T CO2/t CEMENT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY M PER PERSON LIFETIME t NEW MATERIALS PER M2 YEARS

Fotnot till diagram nns 062 245 010 52 91 i PowerPoint. 021 49 022 048 192 65 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

Exhibit 6.9

BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE REDUCED REUSE OF MATERIALS CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR BASELINE CIRCULAR NewSCENARIO businessSCENARIO modelsSCENARIO andWASTE digitalisationBUILDING EFFICIENCY SCENARIO enableSCENARIO improvementSCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO COMPONENTS across entire building value chain

FROM: TO: CONFLICTING OBJECTIVES, LACK OF TRANSPARENCY COLLABORATION BETWEEN ACTORS, TRANSPARENCY AND ACCOUNTABILITY AND LONG TERM OBJECTIVES EHIBIT 69 Involvement only at early stage, limited accountability BIM enables information transfer and enables return on for outcomes (e.g. EoL) investments in circular principles (design for disassembly, Long term assets and frequent change of owners creates durable and exible designs) LUDDE: VI FRESLR EN VERTIKAL risk for higher up-front investment DESIGN Buildings designed with view to future ’material banks’ VERSION MED PILARNA MED VRDE KEDAN I MITTEN NEDT, FRN TETRUTORNA TILL VNSTER, OCH TILLTETRUTORNA TILL HGER Incentive to reduce construction costs through low-cost New construction techniques and digitalisation improve materials and fast construction productivity and reduce over-speci cation Constructor optimises labour cost, few incentives to Lower trade-o with labour cost results in improved reduce waste or materials use CONSTRUCTION materials usage and quality

Frequent shift in ownership with limited transfer of ’Real estate as a service’ enabled by digitalisation knowledge or value capture of investment Size adapted to needs Ownership model with risk of lock-in eects and Digitalisation enables ongoing optimisation, ineective use of space USE PHASE e.g. of oce space

No documentation of materials content Design for disassembly enables value capture at EoL Rapid demolition and resulting degrading of BIM facilitates EoL treatment and ensure quality and componets and materials EL usability of recovered materials and components TREATMENT

BUILDING INFORMATION MANAGEMENT NEW DIGITAL TECHNOLOGIES IN CONSTRUCTION The circular scenario illustrated here is intended to be alignment of incentives, risk-sharing, and an emphasis ambitious, but still mostly incremental. There are signifi- on ‘real estate as a service’. Some of these may require EHIBIT 610 cant changes in parts of the construction supply chain, much more extensive vertical integration, with construc- but nothing that amounts to a revolution in practices (Ex- tion companies more involved in the use phase of buil- hibit 6.9).BUILDING A common INFORMATION theme is toDRONES better AND align incentivesAUTOMATION dings. ANDNew practicesROBOTICS also INmust be able to 3Dbridge the across MODELLINGdifferent BIMphases of design,3D SCANNERS construction, occuPREFABRICATION- time gap betweenCONSTRUCTION initial decision and specification,PRINTING and pancy and end-of-life treatment of buildings. New busi- the ultimate effect on materials use and recovery. ness modelsPlatform forwill integrated be required inCan some be used forcases, construction with betterImproves quality and Enables complex tasks with Enables construction of design, modelling, plann- site inspections precision human monitoring complex shapes ing and collaboration Reduces labour costs and time Reduces labour cost, Improves quality and Reduces construction time Reduces cost and saves Improves safety for workers delivery time and waste precision and cost of customised construction time in construction Reduces labour cost and components Facilitates re-use and delivery time and improves Reduces waste in construct- recycling of EoL materials safety ion due to better precision

158 AGE DISTRIBUTION OF BUILDING STOCK, 2013 % OF TOTAL BUILDING STOCK, EUROPE

AFTER 2010 3% NEW BUILDINGS Represent approximately 20002010 12% 1.0 - 1.5% of total stock

EHIBIT 61 19901999 10%

19801989 13%

19701979 17% Källa till diagrammet nns i PowerPoint

19451969 24% RENOVATION ~1% of stock per year

BEFORE 1945 21%

MATERIALS COMPOSITION IN BUILDINGS CO2 FOOTPRINT OF 250 M PER YEAR CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE 1 % OF MASS, AVERAGE BUILDING MILLION TONNES CO2 PER YEAR; % MILLION TONNES PER YEAR; %

250 MILLION TONNES 250 MILLION TONNES EHIBIT 62 STEEL 2%

3 OTHER 22%

Fotnot till diagram nns CONCRETE 42% i PowerPoint. PLASTICS 11% OTHER 1600 Vad hänvisar fotnot 2.? 65% ALUMINIUM 12%

3 OTHER 4% BRICKS 7% STEEL 25%

AGGREGATES 45% 900 CD WASTE CEMENT 30% 35%

LIFECYCLE CO2 EMISSIONS FROM BUILDINGS % OF LIFETIME CO2 EMISSIONS DURING LIFETIME

EHIBIT 63

USEPHASE INCLUDING ENERGY 50%

815% MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

WITH CURRENT ENERGY SYSTEM WITH LOWCARBON ENERGY UK AND BELGIUM EAMPLES1 SWEDEN EAMPLE

GLOBAL CO2 EMISSIONS FROM CEMENT PRODUCTION CUMULATIVE CO2 EMISSIONS, 20152100 BILLION TONNES CO2 PER YEAR BILLION TONNES CO2

4 254 EHIBIT 64

3 184 SE OM DU KAN GRA DEN LGRE LINEN LITET SNYGGARE, DEN FALLER LITET VL SNABBT NU 2

Jag minskde och “mjukde ut” fallet på kurvan 1

0 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE SCENARIO LOW CARBON ENERGY BASELINE SCENARIO BASELINE SCENARIO LOW CARBON ENERGY

MATERIALS RECIRCULATION BUILDING MATERIALS EFFICIENCY MORE PRODUCTIVE USE 2 2 TONNES CO2 PER TONNE MATERIALS TONNES MATERIALS PER M USEFUL SERVICE FROM EACH M

EHIBIT 65 CEMENT RECYCLING AND VALUE REDUCED WASTE IN CONSTRUCTION PROLONG LIFETIME CAPTURE AT END OF LIFE Reduced loss of materials during Adapt and renovate of buildings to avoid Improved waste management, better construction throuh improved materials demolition and new build separation of materials and increased management Improved maintenance to extend lifespan recycling of key components Less downcycling of concrete through MATERIALS EFFICIENCY OF Design for exible use and to enable deep adoption of new technologies to recover BUILDINGS renovatoin unused cement and aggregates ”Design for disassembly” as a key principle Less material per building through less SHARING TO REDUCE FLOORSPACE over-speci cation, improved design, REUIREMENTS and high-strength materials Reduce total area required through REUSE OF STRUCTURAL mechanisms such as peer-to-peer sharing, COMPONENTS oce sharing, and more communal space Reuse of structural components at end of life and during renovations through new local markets

LABOUR PRODUCTIVITY IN CONSTRUCTION VS EU28 INDEXED: 100 = 2001, EU28

115 EHIBIT 66 OVERALL ECONOMY

110

105

100 CONSTRUCTION

95

90

85 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013

CO2 EMISSIONS FROM MATERIALS USED IN BUILDINGS MILLION TONNES CO2 PER YEAR

STEEL ALUMINIUM PLASTICS CEMENT EHIBIT 67 231 13 10 208 20

24 80 34% 123 53% 13

Fotnot till diagram nns i PowerPoint.

DELA UPP SISTA STAPELN I TV SISTA STAPELN HETER D CIRCULAR SCENARIO BEYOND 2050

CURRENT REFERENCE CEMENT WASTE REUSE OF MATERIALS SHARING CIRCULAR CIRCULAR PROLONGED 1 SCENARIO RECYCLING REDUCTION BUILDING EFFICIENCY SCENARIO SCENARIO LIFETIME 2050 COMPONENTS 2050 BEYOND 2050

EHIBIT 68 RECIRCULATION OF MATERIALS BUILDING MATERIALS EFFICIENCY MORE PRODUCTIVE USE t CO2 PER t MATERIALS TONNES MATERIALS PER M2 USEFUL SERVICE FROM EACH M2

CEMENTS RECYCLING REDUCED WASTE, REUSE OF BUILDING COMPONENTS, SHARING PROLOGNED 2 1 T CO2/t CEMENT MATERIALS EFFICIENCY M PER PERSON LIFETIME t NEW MATERIALS PER M2 YEARS

Fotnot till diagram nns 062 245 010 52 91 i PowerPoint. 021 49 022 048 192 65

REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

DIGITALISATION OF CONSTRUCTION IS A KEY ENABLER OF CIRCULAR OPPORTUNITIES

ManyBASELINE of theseCIRCULAR changes are BASELINEmade possibleREDUCED by REUSEdigitali OF- MATERIALSbe complementedCIRCULAR by BASELINEdrones andCIRCULAR 3D scannersBASELINE to CIRCULARprovide sation,SCENARIO which SCENARIOcould help overcomeSCENARIO manyWASTE of the barriersBUILDING EFFICIENCYreal-time dataSCENARIO on the SCENARIOconstructionSCENARIO process.SCENARIO SCENARIO to improved materials use in today’s system. AboveCOMPONENTS all, a range of data-driven strategies enable coordination that New digital construction technologies: The other ma- makes economically viable arrangements that otherwi- jor leg of digitalisation is the automation of the construc- se are possible only in coordinated, whole supply chain tion process. Some of this consists of moving construction approaches. Some of the key aspects of this change are off-site, through pre-fabrication – in turn enabled by more setFROM: out in Exhibit 6.10. advancedTO: and customised inventory and manufacturing CONFLICTING OBJECTIVES, LACK OF TRANSPARENCY processes.COLLABORATION As important, BETWEEN the building ACTORS, process TRANSPARENCY itself can Data-drivenAND ACCOUNTABILITY strategies during construction and opera- be automated.AND LONG One TERM major OBJECTIVES construction company summa- tion of buildings: Ubiquitous use of much more advanced rised its vision for 2050 by saying: “The construction site EHIBIT 69 BuildingInvolvement Information only at early stage, Modelling limited accountability (BIM) is a centrepiece of of 2050 willBIM be enableshuman-free. information Robots transfer and will enables work return in onteams to thefor circular outcomes (e.g. scenario. EoL) BIM has the potential not just to build complexinvestments structures in circular using principles dynamic (design for disassembly,new materials. storeLong detailed term assets and 3D frequent object change data, of owners but createsalso to enable advan- Elements ofdurable the build and exible will designs)self-assemble.” Whether or not LUDDE: VI FRESLR EN VERTIKAL risk for higher up-front investment DESIGN Buildings designed with view to future ’material banks’ VERSION MED PILARNA MED VRDE ced control over scheduling, cost, and operations and this vision materialises, the first forays into construction KEDAN I MITTEN NEDT, FRN maintenance during the use phase. This can address the robotics are already proving capable of performing some TETRUTORNA TILL VNSTER, OCH transaction costs and lack of information that hold back tasks faster than unaided human labour, and it is clear that TILLTETRUTORNA TILL HGER Incentive to reduce construction costs through low-cost New construction techniques and digitalisation improve a numbermaterials and of fast circular construction opportunities in buildings: cutting the trade-offproductivity with labour and reduce cost over-speci cation that now underlies much ma- buildingsConstructor materials optimises labour waste cost, few by incentives tightly to managing the flow terials overuse,Lower over-specification,trade-o with labour cost results and in improvedrisk aversion can CONSTRUCTION of reduceconstruction waste or materials materials; use creating shared platforms or be mitigatedmaterials to a usagevery and large quality extent through automation. exchanges for the flow of end-of-life components for reu- Add to this construction techniques such as 3D printing se Frequentand materials shift in ownership for recycling;with limited transfer enabling of more advanced and self-assembling.’Real estate as a3D service’ printing enabled byalready digitalisation is in advanced inventoriesknowledge or valueand capture advanced of investment construction techniques that development,Size with adapted the to Chineseneeds company WinSun 3D using areOwnership required model to with reduce risk of lock-inover-specification; eects and and serving as the technologyDigitalisation at large enables scale. ongoing Finally, optimisation, automation also has USE PHASE theineective repository use of space for information required for buildings as significant e.g.promise of oce spacefor disassembly of buildings in ways materials banks, notably materials passports. BIM can that avoid the destructive practices of today’s demolition. No documentation of materials content Design for disassembly enables value capture at EoL Rapid demolition and resulting degrading of BIM facilitates EoL treatment and ensure quality and componets and materials EL usability of recovered materials and components TREATMENT Exhibit 6.10 Digitalisation is a key enabler of circular opportunities in buildings

BUILDING INFORMATION MANAGEMENT NEW DIGITAL TECHNOLOGIES IN CONSTRUCTION

EHIBIT 610

BUILDING INFORMATION DRONES AND AUTOMATION AND ROBOTICS IN 3D MODELLING BIM 3D SCANNERS PREFABRICATION CONSTRUCTION PRINTING

Platform for integrated Can be used for construction Improves quality and Enables complex tasks with Enables construction of design, modelling, plann- site inspections precision human monitoring complex shapes ing and collaboration Reduces labour costs and time Reduces labour cost, Improves quality and Reduces construction time Reduces cost and saves Improves safety for workers delivery time and waste precision and cost of customised construction time in construction Reduces labour cost and components Facilitates re-use and delivery time and improves Reduces waste in construct- recycling of EoL materials safety ion due to better precision

159 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

HOW TO GET THERE – ACTIONS TO PROMOTE A MORE CIRCULAR BUILDINGS SECTOR

Regulators intervene heavily in the buildings sector, business models. This could include exchange platforms but to date have paid little attention to the efficient use of for building materials, or standards for reused compo- materials. Strategies used to promote energy efficiency nents. may be helpful here. For example, it might be possible to introduce labelling schemes similar to those used for Finally, the public sector has major roles both as a custo- energy performance for aspects related to materials uses mer of building and infrastructure projects, and as a principal – such as the amount of reused content, measures of actor through its influence on city planning. These are key the degree of over-specification, or adherence to design areas to start for the transformation required to give buildings principles conducive to high-value disassembly. longer lifetimes, through greater durability and adaptability. A bold first step would be to articulate a vision and roadmap at Regulations also have a major role in the end-of-life tre- the city level towards much more long-lived structures within atment of buildings. To date the focus has been prima- a continuously developing urban landscape. rily on the safe disposal of construction and demolition waste. To realise the circular opportunities described For industry, many of the practices described in this stu- here, it would be necessary to enable a range of other dy would require changes to business practices – but of- practices. One example is the introduction of materials ten more in the nature of integration and extension of cur- passports, which exist in detail in some EU countries rent practice than any radical new departure. As European but not in others. construction seeks a path towards greater productivity, a step change in digitalisation, and more sustainable construction, A third area where regulation can play a role is in pro- circular economy opportunities are a central component. The moting the emergence of coordination and integration pioneers of these business models and practices could well mechanisms that currently are lacking to enable circular find the innovations a source of competitive advantage.

160 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

As European construction seeks a path towards greater productivity, a step change in digitalisation, and more sustainable construction, circular economy opportunities are a central component. . 161 REVIEW DRAFT – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

The Circular Economy a Powerful Force for Climate Mitigation

Transformative innovation for a prosperous and low-carbon industry

This report explores how a more circular economy can contri-

bute to cutting CO2 emissions. It explores a broad range of oppor- tunities for the four largest materials in terms of emissions (steel, plastics, aluminium, and cement) and two large use segments for these materials (passenger cars and buildings).

The key conclusion is that a more circular economy can make deep cuts to emissions from heavy industry: in an ambitious sce-

nario, as much as 296 million tons CO2 per year in the EU by 2050, out of 530 Mt in total – and some 3.6 billion tonnes per year globally. Making better use of the materials that already exist in the economy thus can take EU industry halfway towards net-zero emissions. Moreover, doing so often is economically attractive. In- itiatives for a more circular economy therefore deserve a central place in EU climate and industrial policy.

Material Economics Sverige AB Grev Turegatan 30, 162114 38 Stockholm, Sweden [email protected]